MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Automotive

L200 (2015) - Automotive MITSUBISHI - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free L200 (2015) MITSUBISHI in PDF.

📄 418 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - page 2
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Pickup Truck (Automobile)
Brand Mitsubishi
Model L200 (2015)
Fuel Tank Capacity 75 liters
Recommended Fuel Diesel (EN590, Cetane Number 51 or higher)
Engine Oil Refer to Maintenance section for specified grade
Tire Inflation Pressure Refer to Maintenance section
Transmission Options Manual (M/T) or Automatic (A/T)
Drive Type 4WD (with transfer shift lever) or 2WD
Seating Capacity Up to 5 (depending on cab type: Single, Club, Double)
Keyless Entry Standard on some trims (remote control switch)
Airbag System SRS airbags for driver and front passenger; side and curtain airbags optional
Child Restraint ISOFIX lower anchorages in rear seat (Double cab)
Steering Wheel Adjustment Height adjustable
Maintenance See owner's manual for scheduled maintenance intervals
Spare Parts Use Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts; available at authorized service points
Safety Features Electronic immobilizer, seat belt pretensioners, force limiters, ABS, ASC

Frequently Asked Questions - L200 (2015) MITSUBISHI

What type of fuel does the Mitsubishi L200 (2015) require?
The L200 requires diesel fuel meeting the EN590 standard with a cetane number of 51 or higher. Use summer diesel above -5°C and winter diesel below -5°C.
What is the fuel tank capacity of the L200?
The fuel tank capacity is 75 liters.
How do I replace the remote control key battery?
Remove the screw, open the case with a flat-blade screwdriver, replace the old battery with a CR1616 coin-type battery (positive side down), then close and test.
What should I do if the electronic immobilizer prevents the engine from starting?
Ensure the key is not in contact with metal objects or other immobilizer keys. Turn the key back to 'LOCK' and try again. If it still fails, contact a Mitsubishi Motors Authorized Service Point.
Where are the ISOFIX child seat anchorages located?
ISOFIX anchorages are available in the rear seat of Double cab models. Refer to the 'Child restraint' section for installation instructions.
How do I operate the rear retractable power window?
Use the rear retractable power window switch. The window stops in three positions: fully closed, ventilation (slightly open), and fully open. Firmly press the switch for fully closed or fully open; lightly press for ventilation.
What is the recommended tire inflation pressure?
Refer to the Maintenance section of the owner's manual for the correct tire inflation pressures. They vary by load and driving conditions.
How do I adjust the seat belt height?
Press the lock knob (A) on the seat belt anchor to move it down. To move it up, simply slide it without pressing the knob. Adjust so the belt rests across your shoulder without touching your neck.
What should I do if the sunroof safety mechanism activates repeatedly?
If the safety mechanism is activated 5+ times consecutively, press the tilt-up switch repeatedly until fully tilted up, then hold for 3 seconds. Then open fully and close again to reset.
Can I use a rearward-facing child seat in the front passenger seat?
No unless the front passenger airbag is deactivated. If necessary, turn OFF the front passenger airbag ON-OFF switch first. A forward-facing child seat in the front seat should have the seat moved to the rearmost position.

User questions about L200 (2015) MITSUBISHI

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Automotive in PDF format for free! Find your manual L200 (2015) - MITSUBISHI and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. L200 (2015) by MITSUBISHI.

USER MANUAL L200 (2015) MITSUBISHI

L20D - ENGLISH - OKTE15E3

L200 - ENGLISH - OKTE15E3

L200 OWNER'S MANUAL MITSUBISHI MOTORS

Foreword

Thank you for seeking a MITSURISHI 1200 as your new vehicle. This owner's manual will add to your understanding and full enjoyment of the many fine features of this vehicle. It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way to operate and maintain your vehicle for the interest in driving pleasure.

MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications under to make additions to or improvements in this product without obligation to install them on products previously manufactured. It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws and regulations concerning vehicles.

This owner's manual has been written in compliance with such laws and regulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory with later amendment of the laws and regulations.

Please leave this owner's manual in this vehicle at time of resale. The next owner will appreciate having access to the information contained in this owner's manual.

Repairs to your vehicle:

Vehicles in the warranty period. All warranty repairs must be carried out by a MITSUDISHI MOTORS Authorical Service Point.

Vehicles outside the warranty period. Where the vehicle is repaired is at the discretion of the owner.

Throughout this owner's manual the words WARNING and CAUTION appear. These serve is reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

WARNING

indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death. If instructions are not followed.

CAUTION

means hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor personal injury or damage to your vehicle. You will see another important symbol.

NOTE: gives helpful information.

Indicates optional equipment. It may differ according to the sales classification, refer to the sales catalogue.

Abbreviations used in this owner's manual: LIID: Left-Hand Drive RHD: Right-Hand Drive M/T: Manual Transmission A/T: Automatic Transmission The symbol used on the vehicles: See owner's manual

Mitsubishi Motors Europe B.V.

© 2014 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

Information for station service
FuelFuel tank capacity 75 litres
Fuel requirementsCattle number (CN500)51 or higherRefer to the "General information" section for the fuel selection
Engine oil Roller to the "Maintenance" section for the selection of engine oil.
Tire inflation pressure Refer to the "Maintenance" section for the tire inflation pressure.

Table of contents

Overview
General information
Locking and unlocking
Seat and seat belts
Instruments and controls
Starting and driving
For pleasant driving
For emergencies
Vehicle care
Maintenance
Specifications
Alphabetical index
Declaration of Conformity

Instruments and Controls (Driver's area)

10010010833

LHD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AA5012970

  1. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 5-32

Turn-signals lever p. 5-36

Front fog lamp switch* p. 5-37

Rear fog lamp switch p. 5-38

Headlamp washer switch* p. 5-42

  1. Instruments p. 5-02

  2. Audio remote control switches* p. 7-44, 7-63

  3. Wiper and washer switch p. 5-38

  4. Cruise control switches* p. 6-51

  5. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver's seat)* p. 4-28

Horn switch p. 5-44

  1. Ignition switch p. 6-12

  2. Hands-free & voice recognition switches* p. 7-84

  3. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 6-09

  4. Fuel tank filler door release lever* p. 2-02

  5. Bonnet release lever p. 10-03

  6. Fuses p. 10-20

  7. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 2* p. 6-49

  8. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 5-35

  9. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 1* p. 6-49 Rear differential lock switch* p. 6-34

  10. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirror switch* p. 6-10

RHD
Labeled diagram of a car interior showing numbered components for identification

AA5012723

  1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver's seat)* p. 4-28 Horn switch p. 5-44
  2. Audio remote control switches* p. 7-44, 7-63
  3. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 5-32 Turn-signals lever p. 5-36 Front fog lamp switch* p. 5-37 Rear fog lamp switch p. 5-38 Headlamp washer switch* p. 5-42
  4. Cruise control switches* p. 6-51
  5. Instruments p. 5-02
  6. Wiper and washer switch p. 5-38
  7. Ignition switch p. 6-12
  8. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirror switch* p. 6-10
  9. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 1* p. 6-49 Rear differential lock switch* p. 6-34
  10. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 5-35
  11. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 2* p. 6-49
  12. Fuses p. 10-20
  13. Bonnet release lever p. 10-03
  14. Fuel tank filler door release lever* p. 2-02
  15. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 6-09
  16. Hands-free & voice recognition switches* p. 7-84

Instruments and Controls (Single cab)

100100106148

LHD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

  1. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 5-37
  2. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 7-04
  3. Rear window demister switch p. 5-43
  4. Utility box p. 7-114
  5. Ventilators p. 7-02
  6. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passenger's seat)* p. 4-28
  7. Front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp* p. 4-32
  8. Glove box p. 7-112
    Front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch* p. 4-31
  9. Cigarette lighter p. 7-108
  10. Gearshift lever p. 6-16
  11. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 6-25
  12. Cup holder* p. 7-115
  13. Parking brake lever Type 1* p. 6-07
  14. Parking brake lever Type 2* p. 6-07
  15. Ashtray p. 7-107

RHID 2 3 4 5 1 6 7 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 AA5004186

  1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passenger's seat) p. 4-28

  2. Ventilators p. 7-02

  3. Utility box p. 7-114

  4. Rear window demister switch p. 5-43

  5. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 7-04

  6. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 5-37

  7. Cigarette lighter p. 7-108

  8. Parking brake lever Type 2* p. 6-07

  9. Parking brake lever Type 1* p. 6-07

  10. Cup holder* p. 7-115

  11. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 6-25

  12. Gearshift lever p. 6-16

  13. Ashtray p. 7-107

  14. Glove box p. 7-112

Front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch p. 4-31

  1. Front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp p. 4-32

Instruments and Controls (Club, Double cab)

100100108302

LHD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 AJ5101079

  1. Rear window demister switch (vehicle with heater/manual air conditioning) p. 5-43
  2. Utility box* p. 7-114
    Centre information display* p. 5-10
    Audio* p. 7-51
    MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System*
    Refer to the separate "MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System owner's manual"
  3. Centre information display* p. 5-10
  4. Ventilators p. 7-02
  5. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passenger's seat)* p. 4-28
  6. Front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp* p. 4-32
  7. Glove box p. 7-112
    Front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch* p. 4-31
    USB input terminal* p. 7-103
  8. Ashtray (fixed position)* p. 7-107
  9. Cigarette lighter p. 7-108
  10. Rear retractable power window switch* p. 3-09
  11. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 6-25, 6-30
  12. Parking brake lever p. 6-07
  13. Cup holder p. 7-115
  14. Ashtray (moveable)* p. 7-107
  15. Front console box* p. 7-113
  16. Heated seat switch* p. 4-07
  17. Gearshift lever* p. 6-16
    Selector lever* p. 6-19
  18. Audio* p. 7-15
  19. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 5-37
  20. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 7-04
    Automatic air conditioning* p. 7-09

RHD
Labeled diagram of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification

AJ5101082

  1. Centre information display* p. 5-10

  2. Rear window demister switch (vehicle with heater/manual air conditioning) p. 5-43

  3. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 7-04 Automatic air conditioning* p. 7-09

  4. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 5-37

  5. Audio* p. 7-15

  6. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 6-25, 6-30

  7. Heated seat switch* p. 4-07

  8. Parking brake lever p. 6-07

  9. Cup holder p. 7-115

  10. Ashtray (moveable)* p. 7-107

  11. Gcarshift lever* p. 6-16 Selector lever* p. 6-19

  12. Front console box* p. 7-113

  13. Cigarette lighter p. 7-108

  14. Rear retractable power window switch* p. 3-09

  15. Glove box p. 7-112

Front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch* p. 4-31 USB input terminal* p. 7-103

  1. Front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp* p. 4-32

  2. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passenger's seat)* p. 4-28

  3. Ventilators p. 7-02

  4. Utility box* p. 7-114

Centre information display* p. 5-10 Audio* p. 7-51

MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System*

Refer to the separate "MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System owner's manual"

Interior (Single cab)

10010820618

LHD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

  1. Lock switch* p. 3-11
  2. Electric window control switch* p. 3-09
  3. Room lamp p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36
  4. Digital clock p. 7-109
  5. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-09
  6. Sun visors p. 7-106
  7. Bottle holder p. 7-115
  8. Front seats p. 4-04
  9. Jack p. 8-07
  10. Tools*1 p. 8-07
  11. Accessory socket* p. 7-109
  12. Floor console box* p. 7-113
  13. Jack handle p. 8-07
  14. Head restraints p. 4-08
  15. Seat belts p. 4-10

NOTE: ^*1 - Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

RHID 1 2 3 4 5 15 6 7 8 9 14 13 12 11 10 AA5010484

  1. Digital clock p. 7-109
  2. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-09
  3. Room lamp p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36
  4. Lock switch* p. 3-11
  5. Electric window control switch* p. 3-09
  6. Seat belts p. 4-10
  7. Head restraints p. 4-08
  8. Tools*1 p. 8-07
  9. Jack p. 8-07
  10. Accessory socket* p. 7-109
  11. Floor console box* p. 7-113
  12. Jack handle p. 8-07
  13. Front seats p. 4-04
  14. Bottle holder p. 7-115
  15. Sun visors p. 7-106

NOTE: ^*1 - Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

Interior (Club cab)

100100206194

LHD
Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and labeled parts, likely for automotive or diagnostic reference.

AA5013283

  1. Lock switch* p. 3-11
  2. Electric window control switch* p. 3-08
  3. Room lamp (rear) p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36
  4. Personal lamps* p. 7-111, 10-26, 10-36
  5. Microphone (for Hands-free & voice recognition)* p. 7-85
  6. Sunglasses holder* p. 7-114
  7. Room lamp (front)* p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36
  8. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-09
  9. Digital clock* p. 7-109

  10. Sun visors p. 7-106

Card holder p. 7-106

Vanity mirror p. 7-107

  1. Bottle holder p. 7-115
  2. Front seats p. 4-04
  3. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front seat)* p. 4-37
  4. Secret box p. 7-114
  5. Rear seat* p. 4-07
  6. Floor console box p. 7-113

Accessory socket p. 7-109

Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)* p. 7-43

  1. Jack p. 8-07

Jack handle p. 8-07

Tools p. 8-07

  1. Head restraints p. 4-08
  2. Coat hook* p. 7-116
  3. Scat belts p. 4-10

Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 4-12

RHD
Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels for identification

AA5013296

  1. Personal lamps* p. 7-111, 10-26, 10-36

  2. Microphone (for Hands-free & voice recognition)* p. 7-85

  3. Sunglasses holder* p. 7-114

  4. Room lamp (front)* p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36

  5. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-09

  6. Digital clock* p. 7-109

  7. Room lamp (rear) p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36

  8. Lock switch* p. 3-11

  9. Electric window control switch* p. 3-08

  10. Seat belts p. 4-10

Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 4-12

  1. Coat hook* p. 7-116

  2. Head restraints p. 4-08

  3. Secret box p. 7-114

  4. Floor console box p. 7-113

Accessory socket p. 7-109

Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)* p. 7-43

  1. Rear seat* p. 4-07

  2. Jack p. 8-07

Jack handle p. 8-07

Tools p. 8-07

  1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front seat)*

p. 4-37

  1. Front seats p. 4-04

  2. Bottle holder p. 7-115

  3. Sun visors p. 7-106

Card holder p. 7-106

Vanity mirror p. 7-107

Interior - front area (Double cab)

100100204695

LHD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

  1. Lock switch* p. 3-11
  2. Electric window control switch* p. 3-09
  3. Sunroof switch* p. 3-14
  4. Microphone (for Hands-free & voice recognition)* p. 7-85
  5. Sunglasses holder p. 7-114
  6. Personal lamps p. 7-111, 10-26, 10-36
  7. Digital clock* p. 7-109
  8. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-09
  9. Room lamp (front) p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36
  10. Sun visors p. 7-106

Card holder p. 7-106

Vanity mirror p. 7-107

  1. Front seats p. 4-04
  2. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front seat)* p. 4-37
  3. Bottle holder p. 7-115
  4. Floor console box p. 7-113

Accessory socket* p. 7-109

Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)* p. 7-43

  1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag* p. 4-37
  2. Coat hook* p. 7-116
  3. Seat belts p. 4-10

Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats) p. 4-12

RHD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

  1. Sunroof switch* p. 3-14
  2. Microphone (for Hands-free & voice recognition)* p. 7-85
  3. Sunglasses holder p. 7-114
  4. Personal lamps p. 7-111, 10-26, 10-36
  5. Digital clock* p. 7-109
  6. Inside rear-view mirror p. 6-09
  7. Room lamp (front) p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36
  8. Lock switch* p. 3-11
  9. Electric window control switch* p. 3-09
  10. Seat belts p. 4-10
    Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats) p. 4-12
  11. Coat hook* p. 7-116
  12. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag* p. 4-37
  13. Floor console box p. 7-113
    Accessory socket* p. 7-109
    Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)* p. 7-43
  14. Bottle holder p. 7-115
  15. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front seat)* p. 4-37
  16. Front seats p. 4-04
  17. Sun visors p. 7-106
    Card holder p. 7-106
    Vanity mirror p. 7-107

Interior - rear area (Double cab)

1 Interior - rear area (Double cab)

100108201144

LHD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AA5004290

  1. Head restraints p. 4-08
  2. Bottle holder p. 7-115
  3. Room lamp (rear)* p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36
  4. Cup holder p. 7-115
  5. Armrest (for rear seat) p. 4-08
  6. Rear seats p. 4-07
  7. Tools*1 p. 8-07
  8. Jack p. 8-07
  9. Jack handle*1 p. 8-07
  10. Seat belts (for rear seats) p. 4-10

NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

RHID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AA5004232

  1. Room lamp (rear)* p. 7-110, 10-26, 10-36

  2. Bottle holder p. 7-115

  3. Head restraints p. 4-08

  4. Seat belts (for rear seats) p. 4-10

  5. Jack handle*1 p. 8-07

  6. Tools ^*1 p. 8-07

  7. Jack p. 8-07

  8. Rear seats p. 4-07

  9. Armrest (for rear seat) p. 4-08

  10. Cup holder p. 7-115

NOTE: ^*1 - Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

Exterior - front (Single cab)

1

Exterior - front (Single cab)

100100503952

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AA5010530

  1. Wiper and washers p. 5-38
  2. Antenna p. 7-83
  3. Outside rear-view mirrors p. 6-10
  4. Fuel tank filler door p. 2-02
  5. Locking and unlocking p. 3-02
  6. Side turn-signal lamps p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-30
  7. Front turn-signal lamps p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-29
  8. Headlamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 5-35
    Position lamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-29
  9. Headlamp washers* p. 5-42
  10. Engine compartment p. 11-22
    Bonnet p. 10-03

Exterior - rear (Single cab)

100100505419

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AA5008940

  1. High-mounted stop lamp p. 10-25, 10-34
  2. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-33
  3. Stop and tail lamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-33
  4. Reversing lamps p. 10-25, 10-33
  5. Tyre inflation pressures p. 10-12
    Changing tyres p. 8-18
    Tyre rotation p. 10-14
    Tyre chains p. 10-15
  6. Spare wheel p. 8-17
  7. Licence plate lamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-35
  8. Rear fog lamp (Driver's side only) p. 5-38, 10-25, 10-33
  9. Rear gate p. 3-11

Exterior - front (Club cab)

100100506852

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1

  1. Outside rear-view mirrors p. 6-10
  2. Side turn-signal lamps* p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-30
  3. Fuel tank filler door p. 2-02
  4. Locking and unlocking p. 3-02 Keyless entry system* p. 3-04
  5. Side turn-signal lamps* p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-30
  6. Front turn-signal lamps p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-30
  7. Headlamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-27 Position lamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-29
  8. Front fog lamps* p. 5-37, 10-25, 10-30
  9. Headlamp washers* p. 5-42
  10. Bonnet p. 10-03
    Engine compartment p. 11-22
  11. Wiper and washers p. 5-38
  12. Rain sensor* p. 5-39
  13. Antenna p. 7-83

Exterior - rear (Club cab)

L00100505057

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AA5010569

  1. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-33
  2. Stop and tail lamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-33
  3. Reversing lamps p. 10-25, 10-33
  4. Tyre inflation pressures p. 10-12
    Changing tyres p. 8-18
    Tyre rotation p. 10-14
    Tyre chains p. 10-15
  5. Spare wheel p. 8-17
  6. Licence plate lamps Type 1 p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-35
  7. Rear fog lamp (Driver's side only) Type 2* p. 5-38, 10-25, 10-33
  8. Rear fog lamp (Driver's side only) Type 1* p. 5-38, 10-25, 10-33
  9. Rear gate p. 3-11
  10. High-mounted stop lamp p. 10-25, 10-34

Exterior - front (Double cab)

100100506865

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 AJ5101109

  1. Antenna* p. 7-83

  2. Sunroof* p. 3-14

  3. Antenna* p. 7-83

  4. Outside rear-view mirrors p. 6-10

  5. Side turn-signal lamps* p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-30

  6. Fuel tank filler door p. 2-02

  7. Locking and unlocking p. 3-02 Keyless entry system* p. 3-04

  8. Side turn-signal lamps* p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-30

  9. Front turn-signal lamps p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-30

  10. Headlamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-27

Position lamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-29

  1. Front fog lamps* p. 5-37, 10-25, 10-30

  2. Headlamp washers* p. 5-42

  3. Bonnet p. 10-03

Engine compartment p. 11-22

  1. Wiper and washers p. 5-38

  2. Rain sensor* p. 5-39

Exterior - rear (Double cab)

100100505060

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AA5008966

  1. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 5-36, 10-25, 10-33

  2. Stop and tail lamps p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-33

  3. Reversing lamps p. 10-25, 10-33

  4. Tyre inflation pressures p. 10-12

Changing tyres p. 8-18

Tyre rotation p. 10-14

Tyre chains p. 10-15

  1. Spare wheel p. 8-17

  2. Licence plate lamps Type 1 p. 5-32, 10-25, 10-35

  3. Rear fog lamp (Driver's side only) Type 2* p. 5-38, 10-25, 10-33

  4. Rear fog lamp (Driver's side only) Type 1* p. 5-38, 10-25, 10-33

  5. Rear gate p. 3-11

  6. High-mounted stop lamp p. 10-25, 10-34

General information

Fuel selection.... 2-02

Filling the fuel tank....2-02

Installation of accessories.... 2-03

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems.... 2-04

Genuine parts.... 2-04

Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal information.... 2-05

Disposal information for used batteries.... 2-05

Fuel selection

Fuel selection

100200102907

Recommended fuel

Cetane number (EN590) 51 or higher

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Fuel selection - 1

CAUTION

- Your vehicle is designed to use only diesel fuel that meets the EN590 standard. Use of any other type of diesel fuel would adversely affect the engine's performance and durability.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

- Due to the separation of paraffin, the fluidity of the fuel decreases considerably as the temperature falls. Because of this fact there are two kinds of fuel: “summer” and “winter”. This must be considered in winter use. Select either of the two kinds of fuel in accordance with ambient temperature. Above -5 °C: “Summer” diesel Below -5 °C: “Winter” diesel When travelling abroad, find out in advance about the fuels served in local service stations.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- Poor-quality diesel fuel can cause deposits to form in the injector, resulting in black smoke and rough idling. If these problems occur, you are advised to add a cleaning additive to the diesel fuel when you refuel the vehicle. The additive will break up and remove the deposits, thereby returning the engine to a normal condition. Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER. Using an unsuitable additive could make the engine malfunction. For details, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Filling the fuel tank

E00200202025

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Filling the fuel tank - 1

WARNING

  • When handling fuel, comply with the safety regulations displayed by garages and filling stations.
    Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to get rid of your body's static electricity by touching a metal part of the car or the fuel pump. Any static electricity on your body could create a spark that ignites fuel vapour.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

● Perform the whole refueling process (opening the fuel tank filler door, removing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not let any other person come near the fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to help you and that person was carrying static electricity, fuel vapour could be ignited.
- Do not move away from the fuel tank filler until refueling is finished. If you moved away and did something else (for example, cleaning your windscreen) partway through the refueling process, you could pick up a fresh charge of static electricity.
- If the tank cap must be replaced, use only a MITSUBISHI MOTORS original part.

Fuel tank capacity

75 litres

Refueling

  1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
  2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left side of your vehicle.
    Type 1

Open the fuel tank filler door with the release lever located below the instrument panel.

LHD AA073592

RHID AA0973406

  1. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly turning the cap anticlockwise.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Refueling - 3

natural_image Mechanical component diagram showing a rotating dial with labeled points A and B (no text or symbols beyond labels)

A- Remove B- Close
Type 2

Slide the cover (1). Insert the key in the cap (2) and unlock it. Turn the cap and remove it.

1 2 AA0069692

OKTE15E3

CAUTION

- Since the fuel system may be under pressure, remove the fuel tank filler tube cap slowly. This relieves any pressure or vacuum that might have built up in the fuel tank. If you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.

  1. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it goes. Do not tilt the gun.

  2. When the gun stops automatically, do not fill with fuel any more.

  3. To close, turn the fuel tank filler tube cap slowly clockwise until you hear clicking sounds, then gently push the fuel tank filler door closed.

Installation of accessories

E00200300875

We recommend you to consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

● The installation of accessories, optional parts, should only be carried out within the limits prescribed by law in your country, and in accordance with the guidelines fitting instructions and warnings contained within the documents accompanying the parts or accessories.

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems

  • Improper installation of electrical components may cause an electrical fire if incorrectly fitted. Please refer to the Modification/alteration to the electrical or fuel systems section within this owner's manual.
  • Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the vehicle without an external antenna may cause electrical system interference, which could lead to unsafe vehicle operation.
  • Tyres and wheels which do not meet specifications must not be used. Refer to the “Specifications” section for information regarding wheel and tyre sizes.
  • When fitting accessories, ensure that maximum gross vehicle weight and maximum axle weight are not exceeded.

Important points!

Due to large number of accessory and replacement parts of different manufactures available in the market, it is not possible, not only for MITSUBISHI MOTORS, but also for a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point, to check whether the attachment or installation of such parts affects the overall safety of your MITSUBISHI-vehicle. Even when such parts are officially authorized, for example by a “general operators permit” (an appraisal for the part) or through the execution of the part in an officially approved manner of construction, or when a single operation permit following the attachment or installation of such parts, it cannot be deduced from that alone, that the driving safety of your vehicle has not been affected.

Consider also that there basically exists no liability on the part of the appraiser or the official. Only in the case of parts (MITSUBISHI MOTORS original replacement or exchange parts as well as MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine accessories) that are recommended and released by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point and that are attached or installed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point can you assume, that optimal safety has been provided. The same also pertains to modifications of MITSUBISHI vehicle with respect to the production specifications. For your own safety, in such cases, you should only undertake modifications according to the recommendations of a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems

E00200400238

MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION has always manufactured safe, high quality vehicles. In order to maintain this safety and quality, it is important that any accessory that is to be fitted, or any modifications carried out which involve the electrical or fuel systems, should be carried out in accordance with MITSUBISHI guidelines.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems - 1

CAUTION

- If the wiring interferes with any part of the vehicle bodywork or improper installation methods are used, i.e. protective fuses not installed, etc.), electronic devices may be adversely affected, possibly resulting in an electrical fire or other failures that may cause an accident.

Genuine parts

E00200500545

MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great lengths to bring you a superbly crafted automobile offering the highest quality and dependability.

Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts, designed and manufactured to maintain your MITSUBISHI MOTORS automobile at top performance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts are identified by this mark and are available at all MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Points.

Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal information

E00200600025

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact may cause serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and cancer.
● Avoid contact with the skin as far as possible and wash thoroughly after any contact.
- Keep used engine oils out of reach of children.

Protect the environment

It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil. Use authorized waste collection facilities, including civic amenity sites and garages providing facilities for disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If in doubt, contact your local authority for advice on disposal.

Disposal information for used batteries

E00201300029

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Disposal information for used batteries - 1

Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators.

Do not mix with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

OKTE15E3

General information

Locking and unlocking

Keys.... 3-02

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system).... 3-02

Keyless entry system* 3-04

Doors....3-06

Central door locks* 3-07

"Child-protection" rear doors (Double cab)....3-08

Manual window control* 3-08

Electric window control* 3-08

Quarter window (Club cab)....3-13

Rear gate.... 3-14

Sunroof* 3-14

Keys

Keys

E00300101608

Two keys are provided. The key fits all locks. Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.

Type 1 AF0004879

Type 2 AA0056496

WARNING

- When taking a key on flights, do not press any switches on the key while on the plane. If a switch is pressed on the plane, the key emits electromagnetic waves, which could adversely affect the plane's flight operation.

When carrying a key in a bag, be careful that no switches on the key can be easily pressed by mistake.

NOTE

● The key number is stamped on the tag as indicated in the illustration.

Make a record of the key number and store the key and key number tag in separate places, so that you can order a key in the event the original keys are lost.

● The key is a precision electronic device with a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe the following in order to prevent a malfunction.

  • Do not leave in a place that is exposed to direct sunlight, for example on the dashboard.
  • Do not disassemble or modify.
  • Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to strong impacts.
  • Do not expose to water.
  • Keep away from magnetic key holders.
  • Keep away from audio systems, personal computers, TVs, and other equipment that generates a magnetic field.

NOTE

- Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners of similar equipment.

- Do not leave the key where it may be exposed to high temperature or high humidity.

- The engine is designed so that it will not start if the ID code registered in the immobilizer computer and the key's ID code do not match. Refer to the "Electronic immobilizer" section for details and key usage.

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

ED0300203094

The electronic immobilizer is designed to significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt can only be achieved (subject to certain conditions) using a keyless operation system “registered” to the immobilizer system.

NOTE

- In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to receive the registered ID code from the key. This means the engine will not start even when the registered key is turned to the "START" position.

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- When the key contacts a key ring or other metallic or magnetic object

AJZ101049

- When the key grip contacts metal of another key

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2

natural_image Simple line drawing of a keyhole with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

- When the key contacts or is close to other immobilizing keys (including keys of other vehicles)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 3

NOTE

AJZ101065

In cases like these, remove the object or additional key from the vehicle key and turn the key back to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. Then try again to start the engine. If the engine does not start, we recommend you to contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2

NOTE

- Two keys are provided. If you lose one of them, order a replacement as soon as possible. To obtain a key, take your vehicle and all remaining keys to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. If you need an extra spare key, take your vehicle and all the keys to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. All the keys have to be re-registered in the immobilizer computer unit. The immobilizer allows up to 8 different ID codes to be registered, you can register a maximum of 8 keys for use.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

- Don't make any alterations or additions to the immobilizer system; alterations or additions could cause failure of the immobilizer.

Keyless entry system*

Keyless entry system\*

100300301860

Press the remote control switch, and all doors will be locked or unlocked as desired.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

AA0044750

1- LOCK switch
2- UNLOCK switch
3- Indication lamp

To lock

Press the LOCK switch (1), and all doors will be locked. When they are locked with the room lamp at the [•] position, the room lamp and the turn-signal lamps blink once.

To unlock

Press the UNLOCK switch (2), and all doors will be unlocked. When unlocked with the room lamp at the [•] position, the room lamp will be turned on for approximately 15 seconds and the turn-signal lamps will blink twice.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To unlock - 1

NOTE

● The indication lamp (3) comes on each time a switch is pressed.
- If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and any of the doors is not opened within approximately 30 seconds, relocking will automatically occur.
- It is possible to modify functions as follows: For further information, please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
- The time from pressing the UNLOCK switch (2) to the moment of automatic locking can be changed.
- The confirmation function (flashing of the turn-signal lamps) can be set to operate only when the doors are locked or only when the doors are unlocked.
- The confirmation function (this indicates locking or unlocking of the doors with the blink of the turn-signal lamps) can be deactivated.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • The number of times the turn-signal lamps are flashed by the confirmation function can be changed.
    ● The keyless entry system does not operate in the following conditions:
    • The key is left in the key cylinder.
  • The door is open.
  • The remote control switch will operate within approximately 4 m from the vehicle. However, the operating range of the remote control switch may change if the vehicle located near a power station, or radio/TV broadcasting station.
  • If either of the following problems occurs the battery may be exhausted.
  • The remote control switch is operated at the correct distance from the vehicle, but the doors are not locked/unlocked in response.
  • The indication lamp (3) is dim or does not come on.
    For further information, please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
    If you replace the battery yourself, refer to "Procedure for replacing the remote control switch battery" on page 3-05.
  • If your remote control switch is lost or damaged, please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point for a replacement remote control switch.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- If you wish to add a remote control switch, we recommend you to contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. A maximum of 4 remote control switches are available for your vehicle.

Procedure for replacing the remote control switch battery

F00309500190

  1. Before replacing the battery, remove static electricity from your body by touching.
  2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote control switch.

Technical diagram showing two types of car key designs with labeled parts and a magnified view of the tool's internal structure.

  1. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver in-

to the notch in the remote control switch case and use it to open the case.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Procedure for replacing the remote control switch battery - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a screwdriver with a handle and screwdriver tip, showing mechanical components (no text or symbols)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Procedure for replacing the remote control switch battery - 3

NOTE

- Be sure to perform the procedure with the MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when you open the remote control switch case, the switches may come out.

  1. Remove the remote control transmitter from the remote control switch case. Then, open the remote control transmitter using the method described in step 3.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a tool with a handle and screwdriver, no text or symbols present
  1. Remove the old battery.
  2. Install a new battery with the + side (B) down.

+ side - B - side Coin type battery CR1616 AA0092852

  1. Close the remote control transmitter firmly.

Doors

  1. Place the remote control transmitter in the remote control switch case, then securely close the remote control switch case.
  2. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.
  3. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Doors - 1

NOTE

● You may purchase a replacement battery at an electric appliance store.
● A MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point can replace the battery for you if you prefer.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

- When the remote control switch case is opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal components.

Doors

ED030401584

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Doors - 1

CAUTION

● Make sure the doors are closed: driving with doors not completely closed is dangerous.
● Never leave children in the vehicle unattended.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

● Be careful not to lock the doors while the key is inside the vehicle.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

- To prevent the key from being locked inside the vehicle, neither the lock knob on the driver's door nor the key can be used to lock the driver's door when it is open.

To lock or unlock with the key

1 2 3 AA0051071

1- Insert or remove the key
2-Lock
3- Unlock

To lock or unlock from inside the vehicle

1 2 AA0031864

1-Lock
2- Unlock

Pull the inside door handle towards you to open the door.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To lock or unlock from inside the vehicle - 2

NOTE

- The driver's door can be opened without using the lock knob by pulling on the inside door handle. If your vehicle is equipped with the central door lock system, all other doors are unlocked at the same time.

To lock without using the key

1 2 TA0001480

Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position, and close the door (2).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To lock without using the key - 2

NOTE

- The driver's door cannot be locked using the inside lock knob while the driver's door is opened.

● Each of the doors can be locked or unlocked independently by using the inside lock knob.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

● Repeated continuous operation between lock and unlock could activate the central door locking systems built-in protection circuit and prevent the system from operating. If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before operating the inside lock knob or the key.

All of the doors can be locked and unlocked as described hereafter.

Driver's door with key

Turn the key in the driver's door towards the front of the vehicle to lock the doors and towards the rear of the vehicle to unlock the doors.

1 2 AA805161

1-Lock
2- Unlock

Driver's door with inside lock knob

Set the inside lock knob on the driver's door towards the front of the vehicle to lock the doors. Set it towards the rear of the vehicle to unlock the doors.

1 2 AA0051084

1-Lock
2- Unlock

"Child-protection" rear doors (Double cab)

Unlocking doors using selector lever (vehicle with keyless entry system)

It is possible to unlock all of the doors using the selector lever by placing in the "P" position while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Unlocking doors using selector lever (vehicle with keyless entry system) - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a parking lift with a parking tag and circular symbol (no text or labels)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Unlocking doors using selector lever (vehicle with keyless entry system) - 2

NOTE

- The vehicle is shipped from the factory with a setting established such that the doors are not unlocked when the selector lever is placed in the "P" position with the ignition switch in the "ON" position. If you wish to change the setting such that the doors are unlocked, contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

"Child-protection" rear doors (Double cab)

E00300900742

2 1 Lock AA0096209

1-Lock

2- Unlock

Child protection helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the rear seat.

A lever is provided on each rear door.

If the lever is set to the locked position, the rear door cannot be opened using the inside handle.

To open the rear door while the child protection is in use, pull the outside door handle.

If the lever is set to the "Unlock" position, the child protection mechanism does not function.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - "Child-protection" rear doors (Double cab) - 2

CAUTION

- When driving with a child in the rear seat, please use the child protection to prevent accidental door opening which may cause an accident.

Manual window control\*

ED0302100067

1 2 AA001139

1- To open

2- To close

Electric window control\*

ED0302200127

The electric windows can only be operated with the ignition switch in the "ON" position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Electric window control\* - 1

WARNING

● Before operating the electric window control, make sure that nothing can get trapped (head, hand, finger, etc.).
● Never leave the vehicle without removing the key.
● Never leave a child (or other person who might not be capable of safe operation of the electric window control) in the vehicle alone.
● The child may tamper with the switch at the risk of its hands or head being trapped in the window.

Electric window control switch

E00302301431

Each window opens or closes while the corresponding switch is operated.

Driver's switch (LHD) 3 1 5 4 2 6 AA0095465

Driver's switch (RHD) 6 5 1 4 2 3 AA0096472

1- Driver's door window
2- Front passenger's door window
3- Rear left door window (Double cab)
4- Rear right door window (Double cab)
5- Lock switch
6- Rear retractable power window (Double cab)*

The switches can be used to operate all door windows. A window can be opened or closed by operating the corresponding switch.

Press the switch down to open the window, and pull up the switch to close it.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Electric window control switch - 3

natural_image Two-step diagram showing a hand pressing a button on a surface, with no text or symbols present.

If the switch is fully pressed down/pulled up, the door window automatically opens/closes completely.

If you want to stop the window movement, operate the switch lightly in the reverse direction.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Electric window control switch - 4

NOTE

● Repeated operation with the engine stopped will run down the battery. Operate the window switches only while the engine is running.
● The rear door windows only open halfway.

Electric window control*

Rear retractable power window switch (Double cab)\*

The rear retractable power window switch can be used to operate the rear retractable power window. The rear retractable power window stops in three positions: the fully closed position, a ventilation position, and the fully open position.

Diagram showing car air intake control panel with directional arrows and a mobile phone icon, labeled with numbers 1 and 2.

1- Close
2- Open

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Rear retractable power window switch (Double cab)\* - 2

NOTE

- It is not possible to stop the rear retractable power window in any position other than the fully closed position, ventilation position, and fully open position.

If the rear retractable power window is opened while the rear window demister is operating, the rear window demister automatically stops. When the rear retractable power window is subsequently fully closed,

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

the behaviour of the rear window demister depends upon the elapsed time of the rear window demister's timer. (The timer runs for about 20 minutes in total.)

  • If the rear window demister's timer is running, the rear window demister restarts for the remaining time.
  • If the rear window demister's timer has finished, the rear window demister does not operate. If you wish to activate the rear window demister, press the rear window demister switch again.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

natural_image Top-down view of a car's rearview showing front grille, dashboard, and side panels (no text or symbols)

A- Fully closed position

In this position, the rear retractable power window is fully closed.

To place the rear retractable power window in the fully closed position, firmly press the rear retractable power window switch (1).

B- Ventilation position

In this position, the rear retractable power window is slightly open.

To place the rear retractable power window in the ventilation position, lightly press the rear retractable power window switch (1) or (2).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2

WARNING

- In each of the following circumstances, the operating direction of the rear retractable power window switch and the operating direction of the rear retractable power window do not match each other. Exercise caution to avoid the risk of accidentally trapping a hand or your head when operating the rear retractable power window.

  • Even if the rear retractable power window switch (1) is lightly pressed while the rear retractable power window is moving from the fully closed position towards the ventilation position, the rear retractable power window does not return to the fully closed position.
  • Even if the rear retractable power window switch (2) is lightly pressed while the rear retractable power window is moving from the fully open position towards the ventilation position, the rear retractable power window does not return to the fully open position.

C- Fully open position

In this position, the rear retractable power window is fully open.

To place the rear retractable power window in the fully open position, firmly press the rear retractable power window switch (2).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

- If the rear retractable power window switch (1) is lightly pressed while the rear retractable power window is moving from the fully closed position towards the fully open position, the rear retractable power window will come up to the ventilation position. To avoid the risk of accidentally trapping a hand or your head, do not operate the switch while the rear retractable power window is moving.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

NOTE

● The rear retractable power window only opens halfway.

Lock switch

E00303100396

When this switch is operated, the passenger's switches and the rear retractable power window switch cannot be used to open or close the windows.

To unlock, press it once again.

1 2 TA0013649

1- Lock

2- Unlock

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Lock switch - 2

NOTE

- The driver's switch can open or close any door windows.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

WARNING

- A child may tamper with the switch at the risk of its hands or head being trapped in the window. When driving with a child in the vehicle, please press the window lock switch to disable the passenger's switches and rear retractable power window switch.

Timer function

L00302400709

Door's window

The door windows can be opened or closed for 30 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. If the driver's door is opened during this period, the door window can be opened or closed for another 30 seconds.

However, once the driver's door is closed, the windows cannot be operated.

Rear retractable power window

The rear retractable power window can be opened or closed for 30 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. If the driver's door is opened during this period, the rear retractable power window can be opened or closed for another 30 seconds. However, once the driver's door is closed, the rear retractable power window cannot be operated.

Safety mechanism

E00302501912

Door's window

If a hand or head is trapped in the closing power window, it will lower automatically. Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head or hand out of the power window when closing a power window. The lowered window will become operational after a few seconds.

Electric window control*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Door's window - 1

WARNING

- If the safety mechanism is activated three or more times successively, the safety mechanism will be temporarily cancelled. If a hand or head got trapped, a serious injury could result.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

- The safety mechanism is cancelled just before the power window is fully closed. This allows the power window to close completely. Therefore be especially careful that no fingers are trapped in the power window.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

● The safety mechanism can be activated if the driving conditions or other circumstances cause the power window to be subjected to a physical shock similar to that caused by a trapped hand or head.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- If the safety mechanism is activated three or more times in a row, the safety mechanism will be cancelled and the power window will not close correctly. In such a case, the following procedure should be implemented to rectify this situation. Repeatedly raise the appropriate power window switch until that power window has been fully closed. Following this, release the switch, raise the switch once again and hold it in this condition for at least one second, then release it. You should now be able to operate the power window in the normal fashion.

Rear retractable power window

If a hand or head is trapped in the closing rear retractable power window, it will lower automatically.

Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head or hand out of the rear retractable power window when closing a rear retractable power window.

The lowered window will become operational after a few seconds.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Rear retractable power window - 1

WARNING

- If the safety mechanism is activated three or more times successively, the safety mechanism will be temporarily cancelled. If a hand or head got trapped, a serious injury could result.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

● The safety mechanism is cancelled just before the rear retractable power window is fully closed. This allows the rear retractable power window to close completely. Therefore be especially careful that no fingers are trapped in the rear retractable power window.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

● The safety mechanism can be activated if the driving conditions or other circumstances cause the rear retractable power window to be subjected to a physical shock similar to that caused by a trapped hand or head.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- If the safety mechanism is activated three or more times in a row, the safety mechanism will be cancelled and the rear retractable power window will not close correctly. In such a case, the following procedure should be implemented to rectify this situation. Repeatedly press the rear retractable power window switch (1) until that rear retractable power window has been fully closed. Following this, release the switch, press the switch once again and hold it in this condition for at least 1 second, then release it. You should now be able to operate the rear retractable power window in the normal fashion.

AJZ101238

Quarter window (Club cab)

L00302600088

To open

  1. Pull the lever towards you.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To open - 1

natural_image Illustration of a hand holding a small object with an arrow, viewed through a magnified circular inset (no text or symbols)
  1. Push the lever towards the outside of the vehicle.

  2. Push the lever towards the rear of the vehicle to secure it in place.

3 2 TA0012665

To close

Pull the lever, returning it to its original position and securing it in place.

Rear gate

Rear gate

100303000050

3 To open

Lift up the handle and lower the rear gate.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To open - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car interior showing a seatbelt with directional arrows, and a close-up inset of the seatbelt (no text or symbols)

To close

Raise the rear gate and close with enough force to latch the assembly securely into position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To close - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car interior showing a door handle and seat area with dashed lines indicating alignment or movement (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

  • Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when loading and unloading luggage. Heat from the exhaust could lead to burns.
    ● Pay attention not to catch your fingers in the rear gate.
    ● Do not weight the rear gate.
    ● Before driving, make sure that the rear gate is securely closed. If the rear gate opens while driving the vehicle, objects stored in the cargo area could fall out onto the road.

Sunroof\*

E00302700887

The sunroof can only be operated with the ignition switch in the "ON" position.

2 1 3 AA0070245

To open

The sunroof automatically opens if the switch (3) is pressed.

To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch (1) or (2).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To open - 1

NOTE

● The sunroof automatically stops just before reaching the fully open position.
Press the switch again to fully open it.

To close

The sunroof closes while the switch (2) is pressed.

To tilt up

When the switch (1) is pressed, the rear edge of sunroof rises for ventilation.

To tilt down

The sunroof tilt down while the switch (2) is pressed.

Safety mechanism

F0030380029

If a hand or head is trapped in the closing sunroof, it will reopen automatically. Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head or hand out of the sunroof when opening or closing.

The opened sunroof will become operational after a few seconds.

If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or more times consecutively or the switch (1) is kept pressed for 10 seconds or longer with the sunroof stationary in the fully tilted up position, normal closing of the sunroof will be aborted. In such an event, you should take the following steps:

  1. Press the switch (1) repeatedly until the sunroof has been fully tilt up.

  2. Once the fully tilt up position has been reached, press again and hold the switch (1) for at least 3 seconds.

  3. After pressing the switch (3) to perform full opening, press the switch (2) to fully close the sunroof.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Safety mechanism - 1

NOTE

● The safety mechanism can be activated if the driving conditions or other circumstances cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physical shock similar to that caused by a trapped hand or head.
● Avoid stopping the sunroof before it reaches the opening or closing end during operations. If this should accidentally happen, repeat the process from step 1.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

● The safety mechanism is cancelled just before the sunroof is fully closed. This allows the sunroof to close completely. Therefore be especially careful that no fingers are trapped in the sunroof.

  1. Following this action, it should be possible to operate the sunroof in the normal manner.

Sunshade

F0030790X44

Slide the sunshade manually to open and close it.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Sunshade - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car rearview dashboard and backrest (no text or symbols)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Sunshade - 2

CAUTION

● Be careful that hands are not trapped when closing the sunshade.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

● The sunshade will operate together with the sunroof when the sunroof is opened.
- Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before closing the sunshade.
● The sunshade cannot be closed with the sunroof opened. Do not attempt to close the sunshade when the sunroof is opened.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

WARNING

  • Do not put head, hands or anything else out of the sunroof opening while driving the vehicle.
    ● Never leave a child (or other person who might not be capable of safe operation of the sunroof switch) in the vehicle alone.
    ● Before operating the sunroof, make sure that nothing is capable of being trapped (head, hand, finger, etc.).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

NOTE

● The sunroof stops just before reaching the fully open position.
If the vehicle is driven with the sunroof in this position, wind throb is lower than with the sunroof fully open.
- When leaving the vehicle unattended, make sure you close the sunroof and remove the ignition key.
- Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is frozen closed (after snow fall or during extreme cold).
- Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the sunroof or roof opening edge.
- Release the switch as soon as the sunroof reaches the fully open or fully closed position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • If the sunroof does not operate when the sunroof switch is operated, release the switch and check whether something is trapped by the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, we recommend you to have the sunroof checked.
  • Depending on the model of ski carriers or roof carriers, the sunroof may make contact with the carrier when the sunroof is tilted up. Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if such a ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed.
    ● Be sure to close the sunroof completely when washing the vehicle or when leaving the vehicle.
  • Be careful, not to put any wax on the weatherstrip (black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot maintain a weatherproof scal with the sunroof.
    ● After washing the vehicle or after it has rained, wipe off any water that is on the sun-roof before operating it.
    ● Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the engine stationary will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof while the engine is running.

Seat and seat belts

Seat....4-02

Seat adjustment.... 4-03

Front seat....4-04

Rear seat ^* 4-07

Head restraints....4-08

Seat belts.... 4-10

Pregnant women restraint....4-13

Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system*....4-13

Child restraint....4-14

Seat belt inspection.... 4-27

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag* 4-28

Seat

Seat

E00400102042

Technical diagram of car seat assembly with labeled parts 1 and 2

AA1008724

1-Front seat

● To adjust forward or backward → p. 4-04
● To recline the seatback → p. 4-04
● To adjust the seat height (Driver's seat)* → p. 4-05
- To get in and out of the cargo space (Club cab, passenger's seat) → p. 4-06
- Folding the seatback forward (Single cab, passenger's seat)* → p. 4-06
● Heated seats* → p. 4-07

2-Rear seat\*

● Folding the seatback forward (Double cab) → p. 4-08
● Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab)* → p. 4-08
● Armrest (Double cab) → p. 4-08

Seat adjustment

E00400300200

Adjust the driver's seat so that you are comfortable and that you can reach the pedals, steering wheel, switches etc. while retaining a clear field of vision.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Seat adjustment - 1

WARNING

- Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. This can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. After adjustments are made, ensure the seating is locked in position by attempting to move the seat forward and rearward without using the adjusting mechanism.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ride in the cargo area (inside or outside) of a vehicle.
Also, the cargo area and rear seats should never be used as a play area by children. In a collision, people or children riding unrestrained in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people or children to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts, and make sure that everyone travelling in your vehicle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, or in the case of a child is strapped in a child restraint.
● To minimize the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision or sudden braking, the seatbacks should always be in the almost upright position while the vehicle is in motion. The protection provided by the seat belts may be reduced significantly when the seatback is reclined. There is greater risk that the passenger will slide under the seat belt, resulting in serious injury, when the seatback is reclined.

CAUTION

● Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or with adult supervision for correct and safe operation.
- Do not place a cushion or the like between your back and the seatback while driving. The effectiveness of the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an accident.
- When sliding the seats, be careful not to catch your hand or foot.
- When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, pay careful attention to the rear seat passengers. (Double cab and Club cab)

Front seat

Front seat

L0400400012

To adjust forward or backward

E00400500824

Manual type

Pull the seat adjusting lever and adjust the seat forward or backward to the desired position. After adjustment, release the adjusting lever to lock the seat in position.

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle adjustment with magnified detail view

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Manual type - 2

WARNING

● To ensure the seat is locked securely, try to move the seat forward or backward without using the adjusting lever.

Power type

Adjust the seat by operating the switch as indicated by the arrows.

1 2 AA0051282

1- Adjustment forward
2- Adjustment backward

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Power type - 2

NOTE

● To prevent the battery from running down operate the power type seat with the engine running.

To recline the seatback

E00400601037

Manual type

In order to recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, pull the seatback lock lever up, and then lean backward to the desired position and release the lever. The seatback will lock in that position.

Diagram showing car seatbelting instruction with magnified view of wheel movement and directional arrows

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Manual type - 2

CAUTION

● The reclining mechanism of the seatback is spring loaded, causing it to return to the vertical position when the lock lever is operated. When operating the lever, sit close to the seatback or hold it with your hand to control its return motion.

Power type

Adjust the seatback angle by operating the switch as indicated by the arrows.

1 2 AA0051228

1- To move to forward direction
2- To recline rearward

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Power type - 2

NOTE

● To prevent the battery from running down operate the power type seat with the engine running.

To adjust the seat height (Driver's seat)\*

E00400701113

Manual type

Dial type

To adjust the seat cushion height, turn the dial as shown in the illustration.

1 2 AA6113029

1- To move the seat cushion up
2- To move the seat cushion down

Lever type

Adjust the seat height by repeatedly operating the lever.

1 2 AA0051231

1- Raise
2-Lower

Power type

To adjust the seat height, operate the switch as indicated by arrows.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Power type - 1

NOTE

● To prevent the battery from running down operate the power type seat with the engine running.

Front seat

1 1 AA0051244

1- To move the front of the seat up and down

3 3 3 3 AA0051260

3- To move the whole seat up and down

2 2 AA0651257

2- To move the rear of the seat up and down

To get in and out of the cargo space (Club cab, passenger's seat)

E0041100002

The lever can be used to make getting in and out easier.
Diagram illustrating seatbelt buckle assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement

1- To get in or out
2- To get out

When the lever or pedal is used, the seatback will tilt forward and at the same time the entire seat will move forward. To return the seat, slide the entire seat rearward and then raise the seatback rearward to lock the seat in position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 6

WARNING

- Do not drive the vehicle with the seatback folded forward. The seat is not retained position if it is not kept in an upright position, so serious injuries could be suffered in the event of hard braking or a collision.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

● The reclining mechanism of the seatback is spring loaded, causing it to return to the vertical position when the lock lever is operated. When using the lever, sit close to the seatback or hold it with your hand.

● Use a foot to operate the pedal (2).

Folding the seatback forward (Single cab, passenger's seat)\*

E00410400031

To access the onboard tool kit, fold forward the seatback of the passenger's seat. Refer to "Tools, jack and jack handle" on page 8-07.

Pull the band and fold the seatback forward.

Diagram showing car seatbelting technique with magnified detail and directional arrow indicating movement

Heated seats\*

E00401100784

The heated seats can be operated with the ignition switch in the "ON" position.

A B C L0 N1 1 2 3 AA3096212

1 (HI)- Heater high (for quick heating).

2- Heater off.

3 (LO)-Heater low (to keep the seat warm).

The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.

CAUTION

● Switch off seat heaters when not in use.
- Operate in the high position for quick heating. Once the seat is warm, set the heater to low to keep it warm. Slight variations in seat temperature may be felt while using the heated seats. This is caused by the operation of the heater's internal thermostat and does not indicate a malfunction.

- If the following types of persons use the heated seats, they might become too hot or receive minor burns (red skin, heat blisters, etc.):

• Children, elderly or ill people
• People with sensitive skin
• Excessively tired people
• People under the influence of alcohol or sleep inducing medication (cold medicine, etc.)

- Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects into it.

- Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other material with high heat insulation properties on the seat while using the heater; this might cause the heater element to overheat

CAUTION

- When cleaning the seat, do not use benzene, kerosene, petrol, alcohol, or other organic solvents; these might damage the surface of the seat and also the heater element.

- If water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before attempting to use the heater.

● Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be malfunctioning during use.

Rear seat\*

E00401300148

When a person is sitting in the middle seating position of the rear seat, adjust the head restraint to height at which it lock in position. Refer to "Head restraints" on page 4-08.

Head restraints

Folding the seatback forward (Double cab)

E00401600242

Pull up the band on the top of the seatback and fold it forward.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Folding the seatback forward (Double cab) - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car backseat with seatbelt and side panel, showing a directional arrow and magnified view of the seat area (no text or symbols)

Confirm that the seatback locks securely when it is returned.

Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab)\*

E00411300024

The right and left seat cushions can be folded up separately.

To fold the seat cushions up, raise the seat cushions.

Securely retain the seat cushion by hooking the retaining band (A) onto the head restraint (B) of the rear seat.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical device with labeled parts A and B, including an inset view of a lever mechanism.

Armrest (Double cab)

E00401700605

To use the armrest, fold it down. To return to the original position, push it backward (into the seatback) until it is level with the seat.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Armrest (Double cab) - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car backseat with seatbelt and seatbelt cover (no text or symbols)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Armrest (Double cab) - 2

NOTE

  • Do not stand or sit on the armrest. It could break.
    ● The top surface of the armrest contains a cup holder for rear seat occupants. Refer to “Cup holder” on page 7-115.

Head restraints

E00403300995

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Head restraints - 1

WARNING

● Driving without the head restraints in place can cause you and your passengers serious injury or death in an accident. To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, always make sure the head restraints are installed and properly positioned when the seat is occupied.
● Never place a cushion or similar device on the seatback. This can adversely affect head restraint performance by increasing the distance between your head and the restraint.

To adjust height

Adjust the head restraint height so that the centre of the restraint is as close as possible to eye level to reduce the chances of injury in the event of collision. Any person too tall for the restraint to reach their seated eye level, should adjust the restraint as high as possible.

To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To lower the restraint, move it downward while pushing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direction of the arrow. After adjustment, push the head restraint downward and make sure that it is locked.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To adjust height - 1

natural_image 3D CAD model of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

To remove

Lift the head restraint with the height adjusting knob (A) pushed in.

To install

Confirm that the head restraint is facing the correct direction, and then insert it into the seatback while pressing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direction indicated by the arrow.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To install - 1

natural_image 3D CAD model of a mechanical component with two views (top and side), showing a curved top and base with mounting points, no text or symbols present.

CAUTION

- Confirm that the height adjusting knob (A) is correctly adjusted as shown in the illustration, and also lift the head restraints to ensure that they do not come out of the seatback.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Two 3D model of a mechanical component with a prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the components)

CAUTION

- If your vehicle is equipped with the rear seat head restraint, the head restraints for the front and rear seats differ in size. When installing head restraints, make sure the front and rear head restraints are fitted in their respective seats.

AA0055170

Seat belts

Seat belts

E00404800825

To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is most important that the seat belts are worn correctly while driving.

A seat belt for a front seat equipped with an airbag has a pretensioner system. These belts are used the same way as a conventional seat belt.

Refer to “Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system” on page 4-13.

WARNING

● Always place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put it behind you or under your arm.
● One seat belt should be used by only one person. Doing otherwise can be dangerous.
● The seat belt will provide its wearer with maximum protection if the recliner seatback is placed in fully upright position. When the seatback is reclined, there is greater risk that the passenger will slide under the belt, especially in a forward impact accident, and may be injured by the belt or by striking the instrument panel or seatbacks.
- Seat belts should always be worn by every adult who drives or rides in this vehicle, and by all children who are tall enough to wear seat belts properly.

WARNING

  • Remove any twists when using the belt.
  • No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.
  • To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury in an accident, including the deploying driver's airbag, adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still allows good visibility and good control of the steering wheel, the brake and accelerator, and vehicle controls.
    ● Never hold a child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, even if you are wearing your seat belt. To do so risks severe or fatal injury to the child in a collision or sudden stop.
    ● Always adjust the seat belt to a snug fit.

AA0011587

3-point type seat belt (with emergency locking mechanism)

E00404901126

This type of belt requires no length adjustment. Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the movement of the wearer, but in the event of a sudden or strong shock, the belt automatically locks to hold the wearer's body.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 3-point type seat belt (with emergency locking mechanism) - 1

NOTE

- You can check if the belt locks by pulling it forward quickly.

To fasten

  1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the latch plate.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To fasten - 1

NOTE

  • When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a locked condition, pull the belts once force fully and then return them. After that, pull the belts out slowly once again.
  • Insert the latch plate into the buckle until a "click" is heard.

Diagram showing a person using a belt switch to adjust the seat, with an inset close-up highlighting the component.

WARNING

● Never wear the lap portion of the belt across your abdomen. During accidents it can press sharply against the abdomen and increase the risk of injury.
● The seat belts must not be twisted when worn.

  1. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as desired.

To unfasten

Hold the latch plate and push the button on the buckle.

Diagram showing a person using a belt buckle to lift a seatbelt, with an inset magnified view highlighting the seatbelt component.

NOTE

- As the belt retracts automatically, keep holding the latch plate while retracting so that the belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could damage the vehicle.

Seat belt reminder/warning lamp

E00409802026

A tone and warning lamp are used to remind the driver and front passenger (if so equipped) to fasten the seat belt.

NOTE

● For the front passenger seat, the warning function works only while a person is sitting on the seat.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

natural_image Diagram of a pulley system with a person inside, showing no text or symbols

When the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, the warning lamp will come on and a tone will sound for about 6 seconds. If the front seat belt remains unfastened approximately 1 minute later, the warning lamp will flash and the tone sounds intermittently (each 12 times) when the vehicle is driven. If the passenger subsequently unfastens the seat belt while driving, the warning lamp and tone will issue further warnings. And if the seat belt remains unfastened, the warning lamp and tone will issue further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving from a stop. When the seat belt is fastened, the warnings will stop.

Seat belts

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2

WARNING

- In order to reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury in an accident, always wear your own seat belt. Do not allow anyone to ride in your vehicle unless he or she is also seated and wearing a seat belt. Children should additionally be restrained in a secure child restraint system.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

NOTE

- When luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may depending on the weight and position of the luggage, cause the warning tone to sound and the warning lamp to come on (Double cab).

Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats)\*

F00405000299

The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.

Move the seat belt anchor down with the lock knob (A) depressed. To move the anchor up, slide it without depressing the lock knob (A).

Anchor down Anchor up
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats)\* - 1

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats)\* - 2

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats)\* - 3

WARNING

- When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set it at a position that is sufficiently high so that the belt will make full contact with your shoulder but will not touch your neck.

Lap belts\*

E00405100128

The lap belts should be adjusted by holding the belt and latch plate at right angles to each other, and then pulling the belt as shown in the illustration to a snug fit around the occupant.

90° 1 2 AA0042338

1- Tighten
2- Loosen

While holding the latch plate, insert the latch plate into the buckle until a "click" is heard.

Pregnant women restraint

E00405600064

WARNING

- Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Pregnant women should use the available seat belts. This will reduce the likelihood of injury to both the woman and the unborn child. The lap belt should be worn across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible, but not across the waist. Consult your doctor if you have any additional questions or concerns.

Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system\*

E00405700283

The driver's and front passenger's seat equipped with an airbag has a pretensioner seat belt.

Pretensioner system

E00405801089

The pretensioner system will retract their respective seat belts instantaneously, thus maximizing the seat belt's effectiveness, if there is a frontal impact severe enough to injure the driver and/or front passenger and the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "START" position.

The seat belt pretensioner includes the following components:

1 2 3 4 5 AA0051305

1- Front impact sensors
2- Seat belt pretensioners
3- Airbag control unit

WARNING

● To obtain the best results from your pretensioner seat belt, make sure you have adjusted your seat correctly and wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

● Installation of audio equipment or repairs in the vicinity of the pretensioner seat belts or floor console must be performed in line with MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines. It is important to do so because the work could affect the pretensioner systems.

CAUTION

- If you need to scrap the vehicle, please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. It is important to do so because unexpected activation of the pretensioner seat belts could cause injuries.

NOTE

● The pretensioner seat belts will be activated if the vehicle suffers a severe frontal impact, even if the seat belts are not worn.
● The pretensioner seat belts are designed to work only once. After the pretensioner seat belts have been activated, we recommend you have them replaced by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

SRS warning lamp

F00405900126

This warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbags and the pretensioner seat belts.

Refer to "SRS warning lamp" on page 4-40.

Force limiter system

E00406000078

In the event of a collision, each force limiter system will effectively absorb the load applied to the seat belt so as to minimize the impact to the passenger.

Child restraint

Child restraint

E00406401297

When transporting children in your vehicle, some type of child restraint system should always be used according to the size of the child. This is required by law in most countries.

The regulations concerning driving with children in the front seat may differ from country to country. You are advised to comply with the relevant regulations.

WARNING

  • When possible, put children in the rear seat. Accident statistics indicate that children of all sizes and ages are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat rather than in the front seat. (Double cab and Club cab)
  • Holding a child in your arms is no substitute for a restraint system. Failure to use a proper restraint system can result in severe or fatal injury to the child.
    ● Each child restraint device or fixing is to be used only by one child.
  • When attaching a child restraint to the rear seat, place the front seatbacks in the upright position.
    Otherwise, the child could be seriously injured in the event of hard braking or a collision. (Double cab and Club cab)

Caution for installing the child restraint on vehicles with a front passenger airbag

E00406500565

The label shown here is attached on vehicles with a front passenger airbag.

SURBID NO BURDIN

WARNING

- Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

WARNING

- A REARWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT must NOT be used in the front passenger seat if the front passenger's airbag has not been deactivated. The force of an inflating airbag could kill or cause serious injuries to the child.

Front passenger's air bag ON AA0117942

NOTE

- If you have a rearward facing child restraint system that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch before using it. (Refer to "To turn an airbag off" on page 4-31.)

Front passenger's air bag OFF AA117953

WARNING

● A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE-STRAINT should not be used in the front passenger seat whenever possible; if used in the front passenger seat, adjust the seat to the most rearward position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Illustration of a baby sitting in a car seat with a diagonal guide line and dashed outline (no text or symbols)

Infants and small children

E00406602124

When transporting infants and small children in your vehicle, follow the instruction given below.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Infants and small children - 1

natural_image Illustration of three different car seatbelt scenarios: indoor, mid-level, and stationary (no text or symbols)

Instruction:

● For small infants, an infant carrier should be used. For small children whose height when seated allows the shoulder belt to lie in contact with the face or the throat, a child seat should be used.
- The child restraint system should be appropriate for the child's weight and height and properly fit in the vehicle.

- Before purchasing a child restraint system, try installing it in the seat to make sure there is a good fit. Because of the location of the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it may be difficult to securely install some manufacturer's child restraint systems. If the child restraint system can be pulled forward or to either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt has been tightened, choose another manufacturer's child restraint system.

WARNING

  • When installing a child restraint system, refer to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the restraint system. Failure to do so can result in severe or fatal injury to the child.
    ● After installation, push and pull the child restraint system back and forth, and side to side, to see that it is properly secured. If the child restraint system is not installed securely, it may cause injury to the child or other occupants in the case of accident or sudden stops.
  • When the child restraint system is not in use, keep your child restraint system secured with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle in order to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during an accident.

Child restraint

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

NOTE

● Depending on the seating position in the vehicle and the child restraint system that you have, the child restraint can be attached using one of the following two locations:
• To the lower anchorage in the rear seat ONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIX mountings (Double cab, See page 4-25).
• To the seat belt (See page 4-27).

Older children

E00406700235

Children who have outgrown the child restraint system should be seated in the rear seat and wear combination lap shoulder belt. The lap portion of the belt should be snug and positioned low on the abdomen so that it is below the top of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the belt could intrude into the child's abdomen during an accident and cause injury.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Older children - 1

WARNING

● Children who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in an accident.
● Children who are not buckled up can strike other people in the vehicle in an accident.
● A child should never be left unattended in your vehicle. When you leave the vehicle, take the child with you.

Suitability for various ISOFIX positions
F00411401729

Mass group Size class FixtureVehicle ISOFIX positions
Rear Outboard (Double cab)
CarrycotF ISO/L1 X
G ISO/L2 X
0 - Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X
0+ - Up to 13 kgE ISO/R1 IL^*1
D ISO/R2 X
C ISO/R3 X
I -9 to 18 kgD ISO/R2 X
C ISO/R3 X
B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF, IL^*2
A ISO/F3 IUF
II -15 to 25 kg X
III -22 to 36 kg X

CAUTION

- When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.

Key of letters to be inserted in the table above:

  • IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
  • IL- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems given in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts).
    ● X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

4

IL (Genuine part information)

Genuine part No. UNR44 Approval No.
*1MZ314393 (Child restraint system), MZ314394 (ISOFIX base)E1-04301146
*2MZ313045 E1-04301133

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Key of letters to be inserted in the table above: - 1

NOTE

● MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement. For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Suitability for various seating positions

E00406802445

Single cab (Separate seat)

Mass groupScating position
Front passenger
Activated airbagDeactivated airbag#
0 - Up to 10 kg X X
0+ - Up to 13 kg XL*1

Child restraint

Mass groupSeating position
Front passenger
Activated airbagDeactivated airbag#
1-9 to 18 kg X L^*2
II -15 to 25 kg X L^*3
III -22 to 36 kg X L^*3

^a : With front passenger's airbag deactivated by means of front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Suitability for various seating positions - 1

CAUTION

- When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.

Key of letters to be inserted in the table above:

● L- Suitable for particular child restraints in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts).
● X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

L (Genuine part information)

Genuine parts No. UN-R44 Approval No.
*1MZ314393 E1-04301146
*2MZ313045 E1-04301133
*3MZ314250 E1-04301169

Child restraint

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Key of letters to be inserted in the table above: - 1

NOTE

  • There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Parts to the Mass Group "0-Up to 10 kg".
    MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement. For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Single cab (Bench seat)

Mass groupSeating position
Front passengerFront centre
Activated airbagDeactivated airbag#
0 - Up to 10 kg X X X
0+ - Up to 13 kg X L^*1 X
I -9 to 18 kg X L^*2 X
II -15 to 25 kg X L^*3 X
III -22 to 36 kg X L^*3 X

: With front passenger's airbag deactivated by means of front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - : With front passenger's airbag deactivated by means of front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch - 1

CAUTION

- When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.

Key of letters to be inserted in the table above:

● L- Suitable for particular child restraints in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts).
● X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

L (Genuine part information)

Genuine parts No. UN-R44 Approval No.
*1MZ314393 E1-04301146
*2MZ313045 E1-04301133
*3MZ314250 E1-04301169

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Key of letters to be inserted in the table above: - 1

NOTE

- There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Parts to the Mass Group "0-Up to 10 kg".

MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement. For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Club cab

Mass groupSeating position
Front passengerRear outboard
Activated airbagDeactivated airbag#
0 - Up to 10 kg X X X
0+ - Up to 13 kg XL*1L*1
I -9 to 18 kg XL*2L*2
II -15 to 25 kg XL*3X
III -22 to 36 kg XL*3X

: With front passenger's airbag deactivated by means of front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch

Child restraint

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - : With front passenger's airbag deactivated by means of front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch - 1

CAUTION

- When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat if the head restraint is adjustable.

Key of letters to be inserted in the table above:

● L- Suitable for particular child restraints in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts).
● X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

L (Genuine part information)

Genuine parts No. UN-R44 Approval No.
*1MZ314393 E1-04301146
*2MZ313045 E1-04301133
*3MZ314250 E1-04301169

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Key of letters to be inserted in the table above: - 1

NOTE

- There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Parts to the Mass Group "0-Up to 10 kg".

MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement. For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Double cab

Mass groupSeating position
Front passengerRear outboard Rear centre
Activated airbagDeactivated airbag#
0 - Up to 10 kg X X U X

Child restraint

Mass groupScating position
Front passengerRear outboard Rear centre
Activated airbagDeactivated airbag#
0+ - Up to 13 kg XL*1U, L*1X
I -9 to 18 kg XL*2U, L*2L*2
II -15 to 25 kg XL*3U, L*3L*3
III -22 to 36 kg XL*3U, L*3L*3

: With front passenger's airbag deactivated by means of front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch

CAUTION

- When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.

Key of letters to be inserted in the table above:

  • U- Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
    ● L- Suitable for particular child restraints in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts).
    ● X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

L (Genuine part information)

Genuine parts No. UN-R44 Approval No.
*1MZ314393 E1-04301146
*2MZ313045 E1-04301133
*3MZ314250 E1-04301169

Child restraint

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Key of letters to be inserted in the table above: - 1

NOTE

- There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Parts to the Mass Group "0-Up to 10 kg". MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement. For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Child restraint anchorage points (Double cab)\*

100406900354

Anchorage locations

There are 2 child restraint anchorage points on the floor, located behind the rear seat. These are for securing a child restraint system tether strap to each of the 2 rear seating positions in your vehicle.

Diagram showing vehicle seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows and component labels

*: Rear of the vehicle

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Anchorage locations - 2

CAUTION

● The anchorages are only applicable for child restraints fitted in the rear seat.

Tether anchorage strap installation

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Tether anchorage strap installation - 1

WARNING

● Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

  1. Remove the head restraint from the location in which you wish to install a child restraint.

  2. Drop the child restraint's tether strap (A) down the back of the rear seatback.

A AA0056832

  1. Tip the armrest forward. Open the fastener (B) that is located in the space where the armrest was stowed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, door, and window (no text or symbols)
  1. Put your hand in the opening of the fastener, attach the tether strap's hook (C) to the tether anchorage (D), and securely tighten the tether strap.

C D AA0057220

Installing a child restraint system to the lower anchorage (ISOFIX child restraint mountings)\*

E00408900114

Your vehicle's second seat is fitted with lower anchorages for attaching a child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Installing a child restraint system to the lower anchorage (ISOFIX child restraint mountings)\* - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car rear seat rack with three seats and two side compartments (no text or symbols)

Child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings

E00409000574

The child restraint system is designed only for seats that incorporate lower anchorages. Retain the child restraint system using the lower anchorages.

It is not necessary to retain the child restraint system using the vehicle's seat belts.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car seat assembly (no text or symbols)

A- Child restraint system connectors

To install

WARNING

- If there is any foreign material in or around the connectors, remove it before installing the child restraint system. Also, make sure the seat belt is away from, not looped through or otherwise interfering with, the child restraint system. If foreign matter is not removed and/or the seat belt interferes with the child restraint system, the child restraint system will not be secured properly and could move forward in the event of sudden braking or a collision, seriously injuring the child and possibly other vehicle occupants.

Child restraint

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Child restraint - 1

WARNING

- When the vehicle is moving do not adjust the seat where the child restraint system is installed.

  1. Remove the head restraint from the location in which you wish to install a child restraint. Refer to "Head restraints" on page 4-08.
  2. Push the child restraint system's connectors into the lower anchorages (A) in accordance with the instructions provided by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

A AM117463

If your child restraint system requires the use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in accordance with steps 3 through 5. If a tether strap is unnecessary, perform the step 6.

  1. Drop the child restraint's tether strap (B) down the back of the rear seatback.

B AA0017246

  1. Tip the armrest forward. Open the fastener (C) that is located in the space where the armrest was stowed.

AA007259 c

  1. Put your hand in the opening of the fastener, attach the tether strap's hook (D) to the tether anchorage (E), and securely tighten the tether strap.

D E AA0057262

  1. Push and pull the child restraint system in all directions to be sure it is firmly secured.

To remove

Remove the child restraint in accordance with the instructions provided by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Installing a child restraint system to a 3-point type seat belt (with emergency locking mechanism)

E00408700822

Installation:

  1. Put a child restraint system on the seat in which you wish to install it.
    If the head restraint is adjustable, remove the head restraint from the seat. Refer to "Head restraints" on page 4-08
  2. Fasten the seat belt to secure the child restraint system.
    Make sure you hear a "click" when you insert the latch plate in the buckle.
  3. Remove all slack by using the locking clip.
  4. Push and pull the child restraint in all directions to be sure it is secure.

WARNING

- For some types of child restraint, the locking clip (A) should be used to help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden manoeuvre.

It must be fitted and used in accordance with the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

The locking clip must be removed when the child restraint is removed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Pure mechanical component diagram without any text, numbers, or symbols

Seat belt inspection

E00406300475

- Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed webbing and for cracked or deformed metallic parts. Replace the belt assembly if defective.

● A dirty belt should be cleaned with neutral detergent in warm water. After rinsing in water, let it dry in the shade. Do not attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts because this affects their characteristics.

WARNING

We recommend you have all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware inspected after any collision. We recommend that seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly.
- Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the seat belt assemblies; we recommend you to have this work done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. Incorrect repair or replacement could reduce the effectiveness of the belts and could result in serious injury in the event of a collision.
- Once the pretensioner has activated, it cannot be re-used. It must be replaced together with the retractor.

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag\*

E00407202273

4

The information written in this Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important points concerning the driver, front passenger, side and curtain airbags.

The SRS driver and front passenger airbags are designed to supplement the primary protection of the driver and front passenger side seat belt systems by providing those occupants with protection against head and chest injuries in certain moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.

The SRS side airbag is designed to supplement the properly worn seat belts and provide the driver and front passenger with protection against chest injury in certain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions.

The SRS curtain airbags are designed to supplement the properly worn seat belts and provide the driver and passengers with protection against head injuries in certain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions.

The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts; for maximum protection in all types of crashes and accidents, seat belts should ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or rides in this vehicle.

WARNING

● IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS PROPERLY WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT, EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG:

- Seat belts help keep the driver and passengers properly positioned, which reduces injury risk in all collisions, and reduces the risk of serious or fatal injuries when the airbags inflate.

During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained or improperly restrained driver or passengers can move forward into direct contact with or within close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the collision.

The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful which could cause serious or fatal injuries if the occupant contacts it at this stage.

- Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in roll-overs, rear impact collisions, and in lower-speed frontal collisions, because driver's and passenger's airbags are not designed to inflate in those situations.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

- Seat belts reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle in a collision or roll-over.

● IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY SEATED.

A driver or front passenger too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured.

Airbags inflate very fast, and with great force.

If the driver and front passenger are not properly seated and restrained, the airbags may not protect you properly, and could cause serious or fatal injuries when it inflates.

- Before driving, adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while still maintaining complete control of the vehicle.

- Before driving, adjust the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

- Make sure all vehicle occupants are always properly restrained using the available seat belts.

- With seat belts properly fastened, the driver and passengers should sit well back and upright without leaning against the window or door.

- Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or lean head or chest close to the steering wheel or instrument panel.

Do not put feet or legs on or against the instrument panel.

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*

Illustration showing a person performing a no-smoking exercise with a 'no' symbol, alongside another person seated in a chair.

WARNING

- Infants and small children should never be unrestrained, stand up against the instrument panel or be held in your arms or on your lap. They could be seriously injured or killed in a collision, including when the airbag inflates. They should be properly seated in an appropriate child restraint system. See the "Child restraint" section of this owner's manual.

Two-panel cartoon showing a person in a car stopper and another person in a hospital bed, both with a 'No' symbol above their respective illustrations.

WARNING

- A REARWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT must NOT be used in the front passenger seat if the front passenger's airbag has not been deactivated. The force of an inflating airbag could kill or cause serious injuries to the child.

Front passenger's air bag ON AA6817942

NOTE

- If you have a rearward facing child restraint system that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch before using it. (Refer to "To turn an airbag off" on page 4-31.)

Front passenger's air bag OFF AA0117955

WARNING

● A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE-STRAINT should not be used in the front passenger seat whenever possible; if used in the front passenger seat, adjust the seat to the most rearward position. Failure to do so could kill or cause serious injuries to the child.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a baby sitting in a car seat, viewed from above (no text or symbols)

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 2

WARNING

● Older children should be seated, properly wearing the seat belt, with an appropriate booster seat if needed.

4

Caution for installing the child restraint on vehicles with a front passenger airbag

E00408800588

The label shown here is attached on vehicles with a front passenger airbag.

PITISH ONION RESIDENCE AA3008799

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Caution for installing the child restraint on vehicles with a front passenger airbag - 2

WARNING

● Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child re- straint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

How the Supplemental Restraint System works

E00407301352

The SRS includes the following components:

1 2 3 4 5 6 AA0097756

1- Airbag module (Driver)
2- Front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp
3- Airbag module (Passenger)
4- Front impact sensors
5- Airbag control unit
6-Front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch

7 8 9 7 8 AA0097765

7- Side airbag modules

8- Side impact sensors

9- Curtain airbag modules

The airbags will operate only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "START" position.

When the airbag control unit detect an impact of sufficient frontal or side force, it sends an ignition signal to the airbag modules to ignite materials in the inflator and generate gas and inflate the airbags.

The airbags deployment produces a sudden, loud noise, and releases some smoke and powder, but these conditions are not injurious, and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. People with respiratory problems may feel some temporary irritation from chemicals used to produce the deployment; open the windows after airbag deployment, if safe to do so.

The airbags deflate very rapidly after deployment, so there is little danger of obscured vision.

The time required from the sensors detecting an impact to deflation of the airbags after deployment is shorter than a blink of an eye.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - How the Supplemental Restraint System works - 3

CAUTION

● Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid speed. In certain situations, contact with inflating airbags can result in abrasions, light cuts, bruises, and the like.

Front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch

E00410100331

The front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch can be used to disable the front passenger's airbag. If you have a rearward facing child restraint system that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch before using it. (Refer to "To turn an airbag off" on page 4-31.)

The front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch is located in the glove box.

AIRBAG OFF RIGHT ON OFF PASSENGER TACCAMPS AA0113018

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch - 2

WARNING

● To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:
- Always remove the key from the ignition switch before operating a front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch. Failure to do so could adversely affect the airbag performance.
- Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch after turning the ignition switch from "ON" position to "LOCK" position.
The SRS airbag system is designed to retain enough voltage to deploy the air-bag.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

- Always remove the key from the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch after operating that switch. Failure to do so could lead to improper position of the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch.

To turn an airbag off

E00410600440

To turn an airbag off, follow these steps:

  1. Insert the key into the key opening of the appropriate front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch, and turn that airbag ON-OFF switch to the "OFF" position.
  2. Remove the key from the key opening of the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch.
  3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and turn the ignition to the "ON" position.

AIRBAG A SEKTIACHOCTI OFF ON SWEET PASSENGER TACCAMPA AIR OFF AAH13061

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*

The front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp will stay on to show that the front passenger's airbag is not operational. ("Front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp" on page 4-32)

That airbag will remain OFF, and will NOT deploy, until it is turned ON again.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To turn an airbag off - 2

WARNING

● To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:
- If the indication lamp does not come on when the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch is turned OFF, do not fit a rearward facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat.
- Do not turn OFF the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch except when a rearward facing child restraint system is fitted to the front passenger seat.

To turn an airbag on

L00410700135

To turn an airbag on, follow these steps:

  1. Insert the key into the key opening of the appropriate front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch, and turn that airbag ON-OFF switch to "ON" position.
  2. Remove the key from the key opening of that front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch.

  3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and turn the ignition to the "ON" position.

AIRBAG ПОДУБИНА ВЕЗОПА OFF INJECT ON WAIT PASS AIRB PASSENGER ПАСКАЖИРА AA0113074

The front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp goes off to show that the front passenger's airbag is operational.

That airbag will remain ON, and will be ready to deploy, until it is again turned OFF.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To turn an airbag on - 2

WARNING

- To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury: - Turn ON the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch immediately after removing a rearward facing child restraint system from the front passenger seat.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

- If the indication lamp remains on when the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger seat.

Front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp

E00410200257

The front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp is located in the instrument panel.

PASS AIR REL OFF AA0051374

When the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch is turned OFF, the indication lamp will stay on to show that the front passenger's airbag is not operational.

When the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON, the indication lamp goes off to show that the front passenger's airbag is operational.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Front passenger's airbag OFF indication lamp - 2

WARNING

- If the indication lamp behaves in any of the following ways, there may be a fault in the airbag system.

Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point as soon as possible.

  • The indication lamp does not come on when the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch is turned OFF.
  • The indication lamp stays on when the front passenger's airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

- Do not fit any accessory that makes the indication lamp impossible to see, and do not cover the indication lamp with a sticker. You would not be able to verify the status of the passenger airbag system.

Driver's and passenger's front airbag system

E00407400330

The driver's airbag is located under the pad-ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel. The front passenger's airbag is contained in the instrument panel above the glove box.

The driver's airbag and the front passenger's airbag are designed to inflate at the same time even if the passenger seat is not occupied.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Driver's and passenger's front airbag system - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior with two seated figures and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Deployment of front airbags

F00407501354

The front airbags ARE DE- SIGNED TO DEPLOY when...

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*

Head-on collision with a solid wall at speed of approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) or higher

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - The front airbags ARE DE- SIGNED TO DEPLOY when... - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a pickup truck with a flashlight emitting exhaust smoke, no text or symbols present

Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - The front airbags ARE DE- SIGNED TO DEPLOY when... - 2

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car's front view showing dashboard and rear seats (no text or symbols)

AA1002966

The front airbags are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical condition is shown in the illustration.

The front airbags will deploy if the severity of impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) collision when impacting straight into a solid wall that does not move or deform. If the severity of the impact is below the above threshold level, the front airbags may not deploy. However, this threshold speed will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object that absorbs the impact by either deforming or moving (for example, another stationary vehicle, pole or a guard rail).

Because frontal collisions can easily move you out of position, it is important to always properly wear your seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep you in a safe distance from the steering wheel and instrument panel during the initial stages of airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful, and can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in a collision. The SRS airbags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.

The front airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when...

With certain types of frontal collisions, the vehicle's body structure is designed to absorb the shock to help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehicle body's front area may deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the front airbags may not deploy irrespective of the deformation and damage to the vehicle body. Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration.

Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration.

Because the front airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.

The front airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when...

Because the front airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow objects Vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck Oblique frontal impacts AA2001070

The front airbags are not designed to deploy in conditions where they cannot typically provide protection to the occupant. Such conditions are shown in the illustration.

Rear end collisions Side collisions Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

The front airbags MAY DE- PLOY when...

The front airbags may deploy if the bottom of the vehicle suffers a moderate-to-severe impact (undercarriage damage).

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*

Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration.

Because the front airbags may deploy in certain types of unexpected impacts as shown in the illustration that can easily move you out of position, it is important to always properly wear your seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe distance from the steering wheel and instrument panel during the initial stages of airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful and can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries if you contact it at this stage.

Collision with an elevated median/island or kerb

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - The front airbags MAY DE- PLOY when... - 1

natural_image Simple line drawing of a pickup truck on a road (no text or symbols)

Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - The front airbags MAY DE- PLOY when... - 2

Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - The front airbags MAY DE- PLOY when... - 3

natural_image Simple line drawing of a car speeding with motion lines (no text or symbols)

WARNING

  • Do not attach anything to the steering wheel's padded cover, such as trim material, badges, etc. It might strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
  • Do not set anything on, or attach anything to, the instrument panel above the glove box. It might strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior with a mug and a circular no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

WARNING

  • Do not attach accessories to, or put them in front of, the windscreen. These objects could restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and injure an occupant if the airbags inflate.
  • Do not put packages, pets or other objects between the airbags and the driver or front passenger. It could affect airbag performance, or could cause injury when the airbag inflates.
    ● Right after the airbag inflation, several airbag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you could be burned.
    ● The airbag system is designed to work only once. Once the airbags have deployed, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced, and we recommend you to have the entire airbag system inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Side airbag system

E00407600563

The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver and front passenger seatbacks. The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Side airbag system - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car seatbelt with labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond label)

The label shown here is attached to the seat-backs with a side airbag.

SRS AIRBAG AA0113087

Curtain airbag system

E00409100474

The curtain airbags are contained in the front pillars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat or rear seat.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Curtain airbag system - 1

natural_image Line drawing of two people seated in a car, one wearing a headset, with no visible text or symbols

Deployment of side airbags and curtain airbags

E00407701011

The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when...

The side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate-to-severe side impact to the middle of the passenger compartment.

The typical condition is shown in the illustration.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when... - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car with exhaust lines indicating airflow or traffic (no text or symbols)

The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in a collision. The SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*

The side airbags and curtain airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when...

With certain types of side collisions, the vehicle's body structure is designed to absorb the shock to help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehicle body's side area may deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the side airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy irrespective of the deformation and damage to the vehicle body.

Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration.

Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of side collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.

Side impacts in an area away from the passenger compartment Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collides with the side of vehicle Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object AA2001897

Oblique side impacts Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof AA3005727

The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when...

The side airbags and curtain airbags are not designed to deploy in conditions where they cannot usually provide protection to the occupant. Typical conditions are shown in the illustration.

Head-on collisions Rear end collisions AA3005730

Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.

WARNING

  • The side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to supplement the driver and passenger seat belts in certain side impacts. Seat belts should always be worn properly, and the driver and passenger should sit well back and upright without leaning against the window or door.
  • The side airbags and curtain airbags inflate with great force. The driver and front passenger should not put their arms out the window, and should not lean against the door, in order to reduce the risk of serious or possible fatal injury from the deploying side airbag and curtain airbag.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Illustration of a person breastfeeding in a car seat with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

WARNING

  • Do not allow a child to kneel on the passenger seat facing the passenger's side door, since the side airbags and curtain airbags inflate with great force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

AA0026110

WARNING

  • Do not allow any rear seat occupant to hold onto the seatback of either front seat, in order to reduce risk of injury from the deploying side airbag. Special care should be taken with children.
  • Do not place any objects near or in front of the seatback of either front seat. They could interfere with proper side airbag inflation, and also could cause injury if thrown free by side airbag deployment.

Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

  • Do not place stickers, labels or additional trim on the seatback of either front seat. They could interfere with proper side air-bag inflation.
  • Do not install seat covers on seats with side airbags. Do not re-cover seats that have side airbags. This could interfere with proper side airbag inflation.
  • Do not attach a microphone (A) or any other device or object around the part where the curtain airbags (B) activate such as on the windscreen, side door glass, front and rear pillars and roof side or assist grips. When the curtain airbags inflate, the microphone or other device or object will be hurled with great force or the curtain airbags may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.

B A AA0089379

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 2

WARNING

- Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object on the coat hook.

If the curtain airbag was activated, any such item could be propelled away with great force and could prevent the curtain airbag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly on the coat hook (without using a hanger).

Make sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook.

- Do not allow a child to lean against or close to the front door even if the child is seated in a child restraint system.

The child's head should also not be leaned against or be close to the area of the seat where the side airbag and curtain airbag are located. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain airbag inflate.

Failure to follow all of these instructions could lead to serious or fatal injury to the child.

We recommend work around and on the side airbags and curtain airbags system to be done by MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. Improper work could result in inadvertent deployment of a side airbags and curtain airbags, or could render a side airbags and curtain airbags inoperative; either situation could result in serious injury.

SRS warning lamp

E00407802761

There is a Supplemental Restraint System (“SRS”) warning lamp on the instrument panel. The system checks itself every time the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. The SRS warning lamp will come on for several seconds and then go out. This is normal and means the system is working properly. If there is a problem involving one or more of the SRS components, the warning lamp will come on and stay on.

The SRS warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbag and the seat belt pretensioner system.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - SRS warning lamp - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical device with a magnified inset showing a person holding a tool (no text or symbols present)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - SRS warning lamp - 2

WARNING

- If any of the following conditions occur, there may be a problem with the SRS airbags and/or seat belt pretensioners, and they may not function properly in a colli-

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

sion or may suddenly activate without a collision:

  • Even when the ignition switch is in "ON" position, the SRS warning lamp does not come on or it remains on.
  • The SRS warning lamp comes on while driving.

The SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to help reduce the risk of serious injury or death in certain collisions. If either of the above conditions occurs, immediately have your vehicle checked by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

SRS servicing

E00407901244

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - SRS servicing - 1

WARNING

We recommend any maintenance performed on or near the components of the SRS to be performed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Improper work on the SRS components or wiring could result in inadvertent deployment of the airbags, or could render the SRS inoperative; either situation could result in serious injury.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

  • Do not modify your steering wheel, seat belt retractor or any other SRS components. For example, replacement of the steering wheel, or modifications to the front bumper or body structure can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury.
  • If your vehicle has sustained any damage, we recommend you to have the SRS inspected to ensure it is in proper working order.
    ● On vehicles equipped with side airbags, do not modify your front seats, centre pillar and centre console.
    It can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury.
    Also, if you have found any tear or open seam in the seat fabric at the portion near the side airbag, we recommend you to have the seat inspected.
  • On vehicles with the curtain airbags, if you have found any scratch, crack or damage to the portion of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, we recommend you to have the SRS inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

NOTE

  • When you transfer ownership of the vehicle to some other person, we urge you to alert the new owner that it is equipped with the SRS and refer the new owner to the applicable section in this owner's manual.
  • If you junk or scrap the vehicle, we urge you to first take the vehicle to a MITSUBISH MOTORS Authorized Service Point so that the SRS can be rendered safe.

Instruments and controls

Instruments....5-02

Indication and warning lamps.... 5-06

Indication lamps....5-07

Warning lamps.... 5-08

Centre information display* 5-10

Combination headlamps and dipper switch.... 5-32

Headlamp levelling switch* 5-35

Turn-signals lever....5-36

Hazard warning flasher switch....5-37

Front fog lamp switch* 5-37

Rear fog lamp switch....5-38

Wiper and washer switch.... 5-38

Rear window demister switch.... 5-43

Horn switch....5-44

Instruments

Instruments

E00500100876

Type A Type B

1 2 3 4 5 6 F 1234 123456 P 1234 123456 4

1- Tachometer
2- Speedometer
3- Fuel gauge
4- Odometer/Tripmeter
5- Tripmeter reset button/Daytime dipper button*
6- Water temperature gauge

Speedometer

F0050021X0880

Indication for km/h

The speedometer indicates the vehicle's speed in kilometers per hour (km/h).

km/h AA0096661

Indication for km/h and mph

The speedometer indicates the vehicle's speed in miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

MPH km/h A43095674

Tachometer

EDOS(KB300780)

The tachometer indicates the engine speed (r/min). The tachometer can help you obtain more economical driving and also warns you of excessive engine speeds.

A4899657

OKTE15E3

CAUTION

- When driving, watch the tachometer to make sure that the engine speed indication does not rise into the red zone (excessive engine rpm).

Odometer/Tripmeter

E00500601113

When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, odometer and tripmeter indications are given.

Type 1 Type 2 A B C A B C AA80965690

A- Odometer

B- Tripmeter

C- Reset button

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has travelled.

Instruments and controls

Instruments

Tripmeter

The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled during a particular trip or period.

There are two tripmeter displays: TRIP A and B

TRIP A can be used to measure the distance travelled since the current trip began. At the same time, TRIP B can be used to measure the distance from an intermediate location.

Every time the reset button (C) is pressed lightly (less than 1 second), the tripmeter display changes (between TRIP A and B

Type 1 TRIP 35.8 ↓ ↑ TRIP 8.0 AA0043887

Type 2 P TRIP 35.8 ↓ ↑ P TRIP 8.0 AA0045890

To reset the tripmeter

To return the display to "0", press the reset button (C) for more than 1 second. Only the currently displayed value will be reset. If TRIP A is displayed, for example, only TRIP A will be reset.

NOTE ● Display TRIP And caB have a max- imum distance of 999.9 km (999.9 miles). ● When disconnecting the battery terminal for a long time, the memory of tripmeter display TRIP And aB cleared, and the dis- play returns to "0".

Fuel gauge

E00500700902

The fuel gauge indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

F E A AA0096784

F-Full

E- Empty

NOTE ● When the engine on diesel-powered vehicles fails to operate due to running out of fuel, it may sometimes be difficult to start after refueling. This is due to air entering the fuel system. Therefore, air must be bled from the system. (Refer to “Bleeding the fuel system” on page 8-05.)

Fuel lid mark

The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel tank filler door is located on the left side of the vehicle (Refer to "Filling the fuel tank" on page 2-02).

Low fuel warning lamp

E00508100739

The warning lamp (A) comes on when the fuel level is getting low (approx. 11 litres) with the ignition switch in the "ON" position. Refuel as soon as possible.

A AA896717

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Low fuel warning lamp - 2

NOTE

● On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel warning lamp may indicate incorrectly.

Water temperature gauge

EDDS00800479

The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

H 7 A4096720

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Water temperature gauge - 2

CAUTION

- If the indication needle enters the H zone while the engine is running, it indicates that the engine is possibly overheating. Immediately park your vehicle in a safe place and make the necessary corrections. (Refer to "Engine overheating" on page 8-04.) While driving, care should always be taken to maintain the normal operating temperature.

Daytime dipper button (meter illumination control)\*

E00508800273

The rheostat can be adjusted while the head-lamps or tail lamps turn on. Turn the dial to adjust the illumination (meter, multi centre display, audio system's control panel, heater control panel, etc.) to the desired brightness.

AA0096733

1- To reduce brightness
2- To increase brightness

Indication and warning lamps

E00501503533

Type 1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Type 2
Type 2 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

AA1008740

  1. CRUISE indication lamp* → p. 6-51
  2. Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard warning indication lamps → p. 5-07
  3. High-beam indication lamp → p. 5-07
  4. Front fog lamp indication lamp ^* → p. 5-07
  5. Rear fog lamp indication lamp → p. 5-07
  6. Seat belt reminder/warning lamp → p. 4-11
  7. Low fuel warning lamp → p. 5-05
  8. 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp* → p. 6-27, 6-32

  9. Rear differential lock indication lamp* → p. 6-35

  10. Check engine warning lamp → p. 5-08
  11. Diesel preheat indication lamp → p. 5-07
  12. Oil pressure warning lamp → p. 5-09
  13. Fuel filter indication lamp → p. 5-08
  14. Charge warning lamp → p. 5-09
  15. A/T (automatic transmission) fluid temperature warning lamp (vehicles with A/T) → p. 6-23
  16. Selector lever position indicator (vehicles with A/T) → p. 6-20

  17. Diesel particulate filter (DPF) warning lamp* → p. 6-15

  18. Brake warning lamp → p. 5-08
  19. Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) OFF indication lamp* p. 6-49
  20. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamp* → p. 6-46
  21. Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) indication lamp* → p. 6-49
    22- Door ajar warning lamp → p. 5-10
  22. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning lamp* → p. 4-40

Indication lamps

E00501600012

Turn-signal indication lamps/ Hazard warning indication lamps

F00501700185

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Turn-signal indication lamps/ Hazard warning indication lamps - 1

These indication lamps blink on and off when a turn-signal lamp is operating.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Turn-signal indication lamps/ Hazard warning indication lamps - 2

NOTE

- If the blinking is too fast, the cause may be a blown lamp bulb or a faulty turn-signal connection.

When the hazard warning lamp switch is pressed, all turn-signal lamps will flash on and off continuously.

High-beam indication lamp

00501800115

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - High-beam indication lamp - 1

This indication lamp illuminates when the high-beam is used.

Front fog lamp indication lamp\*

L00501900347

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Front fog lamp indication lamp\* - 1

This indication lamp illuminates while the front fog lamps are on.

Rear fog lamp indication lamp

E00502000114

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Rear fog lamp indication lamp - 1

This indication lamp illuminates while the rear fog lamp is on.

Diesel preheat indication lamp

L00502300250

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Diesel preheat indication lamp - 1

This indication lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position. As the glow plug becomes hot, the lamp goes out and the engine can be

started.

CAUTION

- If the diesel preheat indication lamp comes on after the engine is started, the engine speed may not rise above the idling speed because of fuel freezing. In this case, keep the engine idling for about ten minutes, then turn off the ignition switch and immediately turn it on again to confirm that the diesel preheat indication lamp is off.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

  • If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indication lamp is on for a longer time.
  • When the engine has not been started within about 5 seconds after the diesel preheat indication lamp went out, return the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position. Then, turn the switch to the "ON" position to preheat the engine again.
  • When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat indication lamp does not come on even if the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position.

Warning lamps

Fuel filter indication lamp

E00509900170

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Fuel filter indication lamp - 1

This indication lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and goes off after the engine has started. If it lights up while the engine is

running, it indicates that water has accumulated inside the fuel filter; if this happens, remove the water from the fuel filter.

Refer to "Removal of water from the fuel filter" on page 8-06.

When the lamp goes out, you can resume driving. If it either does not go out or comes on from time to time, we recommend you to have the vehicle inspected.

Warning lamps

E00502400017

Brake warning lamp

F00502501637

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Brake warning lamp - 1

This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, and goes off after a few seconds. Always make sure that the lamp goes off before driving.

With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, the brake warning lamp illuminates under the following conditions:

  • When the parking brake lever has been engaged.
  • When the brake fluid level in the reservoir falls to a low level.
  • When the brake force distribution function is not operating correctly. (vehicles with anti-lock brake system)

CAUTION

- In the situations listed below, brake performance may be compromised or the vehicle may become unstable if brakes are applied suddenly; consequently, avoid driving at high speeds or applying the brakes suddenly. Furthermore, immediately the vehicle should be brought to a stop in a safe location and to have it checked.

  • The brake warning lamp does not illuminate when the parking brake is applied or does not turn off when the parking brake is released.
  • The ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp illuminate at the same time. For details, refer to “ABS warning lamp” on page 6-46. (vehicles with anti-lock brake system)
  • The brake warning lamp remains illuminated during driving.

● The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the following manner when brake performance has deteriorated.

- Depress the brake pedal harder than usual. Even if the brake pedal moves down to the very end of its possible stroke, keep it pressed down hard.

CAUTION

- Should the brakes fail, use engine braking to reduce your speed and carefully pull the parking brake lever to park your vehicle. Depress the brake pedal to operate the stop lamp to alert the vehicles behind you.

Check engine warning lamp

E00502601944

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Check engine warning lamp - 1

This lamp is a part of an on-board diagnostic system which monitors the emissions, engine and automatic transmission control systems.

If a problem is detected in one of these systems, this lamp illuminates.

Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, we recommend you to have the system checked as soon as possible.

[ Vehicles to comply with the Euro 3 and Euro 4 regulation]

This lamp will also illuminate for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. If it does not go off after a few seconds, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked.

[ Vehicles to comply with the Euro 5+]

This lamp will also illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, and goes off after the engine has started. If it does not go off after the engine has started, we recommend you to have the system checked.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Check engine warning lamp - 2

CAUTION

● Prolonged driving with this lamp on may cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and drivability.
- If the lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, we recommend you to have the system checked.
- If the lamp illuminates while the engine is running, avoid driving at high speeds and we recommend you to have the system checked. During vehicle operation with the lamp illuminated, the vehicle may not accelerate when you depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle is stationary with the lamp illuminated, you must depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual since the engine idling speed is higher than usual and the vehicle with an A/T has a stronger tendency to creep forward.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

● The engine electronic control module accommodating the onboard diagnostic system has various fault data (especially about the exhaust emission) stored. This data will be erased if a battery cable is disconnected which will make a rapid diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect a battery cable when the check engine warning lam is ON.

Charge warning lamp

100502700821

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Charge warning lamp - 1

This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, and goes off after the engine has started.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Charge warning lamp - 2

CAUTION

- If the lamp comes on while the engine is running, the probable cause is as shown below. Park the vehicle immediately at a safe place and we recommend you to have it checked. - Broken drive belt or abnormality in the charging system. A broken drive belt causes poor braking efficiency. Depress the brake pedal harder than usual to park the vehicle in a safe place.

Oil pressure warning lamp

F:00502800620

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Oil pressure warning lamp - 1

This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, and goes off after the engine has started. If it illuminates while the engine is running,

the oil pressure is too low.

If the warning lamp illuminates while the engine is running, turn the engine off and have it inspected.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Oil pressure warning lamp - 2

CAUTION

  • If this lamp illuminates when the engine oil level is not low, have it inspected.
    ● This warning lamp does not indicate the amount of oil in the crankcase. This must be determined by checking the oil level on the dipstick, while the engine is switched off.
  • If you continue driving with low engine oil level or with this warning lamp illuminated, engine seizure may occur.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

- The oil pressure warning lamp should not be treated as an indication of the engine's oil level. The oil level must be checked using the dipstick.

Centre information display*

Door ajar warning lamp

E00503300475

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Door ajar warning lamp - 1

This lamp illuminates when a door is either open or not completely closed.

If the vehicle speed reaches approximately 8 km/h

(5 mph) with a door open or

incompletely closed, the warning lamp flashes 16 times and a buzzer simultaneously sounds 16 times as a warning.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Door ajar warning lamp - 2

CAUTION

● Before moving your vehicle, check that the warning lamp is OFF.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

- It is possible to change the buzzer setting for either of the following types of operation. For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • No buzzer operation (buzzer disabled)
    • Continuous buzzer operation

Centre information display\*

F00517801407

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Centre information display\* - 1

WARNING

- When operating the system for a prolonged period, make sure the vehicle is parked in a well-ventilated area to avoid the accumulation of toxic fumes inside and outside of the passenger compartment.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

● The driver should not operate the display while the vehicle is in motion.
- When operating the system, stop the vehicle in a safe area.

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" position, the screen switches on automatically.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

  • Placing a cellular phone in the monitor's small storage compartment may weaken the phone's reception. This does not indicate a fault with the system.
  • Use of wireless devices such as transceivers or a cellular phone near the monitor may make the following condition on the display. This does not indicate a fault with the system.

• The screen goes dark temporarily.
- The compass may not show the correct direction.
- Depending on the angle of view, you may see reddish horizontal lines on the monitor. The lines are a characteristic of the vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) used in the monitor. They do not indicate a fault.

Centre information display*

1 AM 12:00 FUEL ECONOMY 0 | 3°C AVG 10.5L/100km -4h MANUAL RESET ADJ 6 7 8 9

AA1008001

1- Digital clock → p. 5-20

Indicates the time.

2- Electronic compass

This display shows the direction of the vehicle.

3- Frozen road warning → p. 5-16

Gives an indication when the outside temperature is 3 °C or lower.

4- Outside temperature → p. 5-16

5- Centre information display indications Indicates details of each display.

6- "INFO" button

Used to select various kinds of information for display.

7- Function buttons

Press this button to select options shown in the display.

8- "ADJ" button

Used for adjusting the clock and for selecting settings displays.

9- Display for function buttons

This display shows the options available for each function button.

Centre information display*

Adjusting the time

E00518000063

AM 12:00 18°C MENU CT ON A AA0097017

Following modes are available for clock adjustment:

  • For vehicles with MITSUBISHI genuine audio: "Automatic mode" and "Manual mode"
  • Except for vehicles with MITSUBISHI genuine audio:

"Manual mode" only

Automatic mode (MITSUBISHI genuine audio)

The automatic adjustment mode can set the local time automatically by using the signal from the local RDS stations. In this mode, "CT" (A) (Clock Time: sent with the RDS signal) is shown in the audio display.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Automatic mode (MITSUBISHI genuine audio) - 1

NOTE

● Automatic clock adjustment does not take place while a settings display is shown.

Manual mode

The manual mode is also available in case the automatic mode shows the incorrect time when the adjacent local RDS stations are located in a different time zone. Refer to “Radio data system (RDS)” on page 7-20. It is possible to manually adjust the time.

Refer to “Changing the clock settings” on page 5-20.

Changing the information display

E00517901349

Every time the "INFO" button is pressed lightly, the display can be changed to the following:

AM 12:00 CD TRACK 10 12' 34 DISC NAME MY BEST COLLECTIVE AA0095488

Centre information display*
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Changing the information display - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["1 AM 12:00"] --> B["2 AM 12:00"]
    B --> C["3 AM 12:00"]
    C --> D["4 AM 12:00"]
    D --> E["5 AM 12:00"]
    E --> F["6 AM 12:00"]
    F --> G["7 AM 12:00"]
    G --> H["8 AM 12:00"]
    H --> I["9 AM 12:00"]
    I --> J["10 AM 12:00"]

    subgraph Time_Steps
        K["CD TRACK 10 12° 34 DISC NAME MY BEST COLLECTIF INFO"] --> L["FUEL ECONOMY AVG 10.5L-100km -4h AUTO"] --> M["RANGE 170km -4h RESET ADJ"]
    end

    subgraph Sensor_Steps
        N["OUTSIDE TEMP 3 °C"] --> O["SPEED AVG 40km/h"] --> P["BAROMETER 1010hPa"]
    end

    subgraph Control_Steps
        Q["ELEVATION 1500m 3000"] --> R["BARometer 1100"]
    end

    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style P fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Q fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style R fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style S fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style T fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style U fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style V fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style W fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style X fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Y fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Z fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

1- Audio information* → p. 7-15
2- Average fuel consumption → p. 5-14
3- Driving range → p. 5-14
4- Average speed → p. 5-15
5- Outside temperature → p. 5-16
6- Altimeter → p. 5-17
7- Barometer → p. 5-18
8- Calendar → p. 5-18
9- Clock-only → p. 5-18
10- Blank → p. 5-19

Centre information display*

Average fuel consumption

E00518200267

The average fuel consumption during the period since the last reset is shown in (A) and the momentary fuel consumption in (C). The average value of the fuel consumption is graphed every 5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B). When you press the "MANUAL" function button in the auto reset mode, the mode will be changed to the manual reset mode. When you press the "AUTO" function button in the manual reset mode, the mode will be changed to the auto reset mode.

Auto reset mode FUEL ECONOMY 12:00 AVG 18.5V/1000A 48° C A B C Manual reset mode FUEL ECONOMY 12:00 AVG 18.5V/1000A 48° C A B C AA3007675

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Average fuel consumption - 2

NOTE

  • When you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position after turning it from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position in the manual reset mode, the auto reset mode will automatically be selected.
  • When the average fuel consumption cannot be calculated, “--.-” will be shown.
    ● The average and momentary fuel consumption change depending on the driving condition (road condition, driving behavior, etc.). The indications may differ from the actual fuel consumption. Therefore, it is recommended to use the indications as reference.
  • The unit indication can be changed to your desired setting {km/L, L/100 km, mpg (UK GALLON), or mpg (US GALLON)}. Refer to “User customization” on page 5-27.

Resetting the average fuel consumption

Press the "RESET" function button to reset the average fuel consumption indication.

AM 12:00 FUEL ECONOMY @1 AVG -- -L/100km -4kL 18°C 20 AA0101514

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Resetting the average fuel consumption - 2

NOTE

● The average fuel consumption can be reset separately for the auto reset mode and for the manual reset mode.
- When you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position about 4 hours (or more) after turning it from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position in the auto reset mode, the average fuel consumption indication will automatically be reset.

Driving range

E00518300095

This value (A) shows the distance (in km or miles) that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The driving range is graphed every 5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B).

AM 12:00 RANGE 174km A B 18° 500 0 AU AA0095505

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Driving range - 2

NOTE

  • When the driving range is 50 km (30 miles) or less, the display shows “----”.
    When it is 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or more, "3,000 km" or "2,000 miles" will be shown
  • When the driving range cannot be measured, the display shows “----”.
    ● The driving range is shown based on the accumulated fuel consumption data, however, may be changed depending on the driving condition (road condition, driving behavior etc.). If the battery terminals are disconnected, the accumulated fuel consumption data will be erased. It is recommended to use the indication as reference.
  • When the vehicle is fueled, the driving range will be updated. However, if the amount of fueling is small, the indication may not be correct. Therefore, fill up the tank as much as possible in case of fueling.
  • When the vehicle is stopped on a steep slope, the value of the driving range may increase. This is caused by the fuel movement inside the tank on the slope and is not deemed as a failure.

Resetting the driving range

Press the “RESET” function button to reset the driving range plotted in graph.

AM 12:00 RANGE 200km C 18° -40Hz A03 AA0095518

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Resetting the driving range - 2

NOTE

  • Pressing the "RESET" function button will not reset the indication (C).
  • It is possible to set the display unit to km or miles.
    Refer to "User customization" on page 5-27.

Average speed

E00518400126

The average speed during the period since the last reset is shown in (A) and the momentary speed in (C). The average value of the vehicle speed is graphed every 5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B).

When you press the “MANUAL” function button in the auto reset mode, the mode will be changed to the manual reset mode. When you press the “AUTO” function button in the manual reset mode, the mode will be changed to the auto reset mode.

Auto reset mode
12:00 SPEED 8 RUG 40km/h A B C 18 W V H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Manual reset mode

AM 12:00 SPEED 圈 HV8 40kA.m./h A B C 18° 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 -31 -32 -33 -34 -35 -36 -37 -38 -39 -40 -41 -42 -43 -44 -45 -46 -47 -48 -49 -50 -51 -52 -53 -54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 -78 -79 -80

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Average speed - 3

NOTE

  • When you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position after turning it from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position in the manual reset mode, the auto reset mode will automatically be selected.
  • When the average speed cannot be calculated, “---” will be shown.

Centre information display*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

● The average and momentary speed change depending on the driving condition (road condition, driving behavior, etc.). The indications may differ from the actual speed. Therefore, it is recommended to use the indications as reference.
- The unit indication can be changed to you desired setting (km/h or mph). Refer to “User customization” on page 5-27.

Resetting the average speed

Press the “RESET” function button to reset the average vehicle speed.

AM 12:00 SPEED @ AVG --Km/h -4mL 18°C 1:00 0 AUTO 1 1 MANUAL 2 RESET 3 ADD AA0095521

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Resetting the average speed - 2

NOTE

● The average speed can be reset separately for the auto reset mode and for the manual reset mode.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- When you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position about 4 hours (or more) after turning it from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position in the auto reset mode, the average speed indication will automatically be reset.

Outside temperature

E00518501108

The outside temperature is graphed every 5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (A). The current outside temperature is shown in (B).

AM 12:00 OUTSIDE TEMP A B 3°C 15 0 -400 0.007 0.01

AA0095534

Resetting the outside temperature

Press the “RESET” function button to reset the graph of the outside temperature.

AM 12:00 OUTSIDE TEMP 3℃ W/2 44 1 MΩ 1.5V 450

AA0095547

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Resetting the outside temperature - 2

NOTE

● Depending on factors such as the driving conditions, the displayed temperature may vary from the actual outside temperature.
- It is possible to set the display unit to ^ or ^ .

Refer to "User customization" on page 5-27.

Frozen road warning

E00537100021

This shows the temperature outside the vehicle.

When the outside air temperature drops below about 3 °C (37 °F), the alarm sounds and the outside air temperature warning symbol (A) flashes for about 10 seconds.

AM 12:00 OUTSIDE TEMP A 3° 15 0

To adjust the elevation

It is possible to adjust the currently indicated elevation using the following function buttons:

A 12:00 ELEVATION +300mm 18 °C 750 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CAUTION

● There is a danger the road might be icy, even when this symbol is not flashing, so please take care when driving.

Altimeter

E00518600069

The current elevation in units of 100 m (400 ft) is shown in (A). The elevation is graphed every 5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B).

“+”- Adjustment of elevation

The elevation increases by 100 m (400 ft) every time you lightly push the "+" button.

If you continue pressing the button for about 2 seconds or more, the elevation indication is fast-forwarded. Then the setting is changed to the elevation selected.

“-”- Adjustment of elevation

The elevation decreases by 100 m (400 ft) every time you lightly push the “-” button. If you continue pressing the button for about 2 seconds or more, the elevation indication is fast-forwarded. Then the setting is changed to the elevation selected.

NOTE

● The elevation is determined from changes in atmospheric pressure. Depending on weather conditions, the indicated elevation may differ from the actual elevation. Variations in atmospheric pressure can cause different elevations to be shown even in the same location. This behavior does not indicate a fault. Use the indication as a guide only.

Centre information display*

Resetting the elevation

Press the "RESET" function button to reset the elevation plotted in graph.

C AM 12:00 18 °C ELEVATION +300m -40 AA0095576

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Resetting the elevation - 2

NOTE

  • Pressing the "RESET" function button will not reset the indication (C).
  • It is possible to set the display unit to m or ft.

Refer to "User customization" on page 5-27.

Barometer

E00518700044

This display shows the atmospheric pressure at the present location in (A). The atmospheric pressure values are graphed every 5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B).

AM 12:00 EHROMETER 1816HPA A B 18℃ 1100 800 AA0095589

Resetting the atmospheric pressure

Press the "RESET" function button to reset the atmospheric pressure plotted in graph.

AM 12:00 BAROMETER 1010MPa C 18℃ -4mL 400V A3J AA0095592

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Resetting the atmospheric pressure - 2

NOTE

  • Pressing the "RESET" function button will not reset the indication (C).
  • It is possible to set the display unit to hPa, mb, kPa, or inIg. Refer to "User customization" on page 5-27.

Calendar

E00518800032

The date is shown. The calendar pattern can be changed to your desired setting.

Refer to "Changing the calendar setting" on page 5-24.

AM 12:00 18° DEC.30.2003 AA0095606

Clock-only

E00518900033

Only the clock is shown. The time notation can be changed to your desired setting. (12 hour/24 hour)

Refer to "User customization" on page 5-27.

AM 12:00 AA0095619

Blank

E00519000015

The whole display can be turned into blank. In this case, buttons remain illuminated.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Blank - 1

natural_image Solid black rectangle on white background with no text or symbols

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Blank - 2

NOTE

- If you operate the audio system, the audio display pops up.

Selecting settings displays

ED051910009D

Every time the "ADJ" button is pressed lightly, the display can be changed to the following:

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Selecting settings displays - 1

CAUTION

● The driver should not operate the display while the vehicle is in motion.
- When operating the system, stop the vehicle in a safe area.

AM 12:00 18°C CLOCK ADJUST AA095622

1- Changing the clock settings → p. 5-20
2- Adjusting the display brightness → p. 5-21
3- Correcting the compass p. 5-22
4- Changing the calendar setting → p. 5-24
5- User customization → p. 5-27
6-Adjusting the barometer p. 5-30

Centre information display*

1 AM 12:00 CLOCK ADJUST 2 AM 12:00 BRIGHTNESS ADJUST 1/2 • BRIGHTNESS FOR DAY TIME 3 AM 12:00 COMPASS SETTING COMPASS VARIANCE 4 AM 12:00 CALENDAR 1/2 CALENDAR ADJUST 5 AM 12:00 USER CUSTOM 1/4 LIMIT 6 AM 12:00 BAROMETER 1/2 BAROMETER ADJUST AA2001894

Changing the clock settings

E00519200121

  1. Press the "ADJ" button to select the clock setting display.

AM 12:00 CLOCK ADJUST AA0095635

  1. It is possible to adjust the clock using the function buttons.

AM 12:00 CLOCK ADJUST 18°C AA095648

“H”- Adjust “hour”.

The indication increases by one hour, every time you lightly press the "H" function button. If you continue pressing the button for about 2 seconds or more, the indication is fast-forwarded, and then the setting is changed to the hour selected.

“M”- Adjust “minute”.

The indication increases by one minute, every time you lightly press the "M" function button. If you continue pressing the button for about 2 seconds or more, the indication is fast-forwarded, and then the setting is changed to the minute selected.

"SET" To reset the minutes to zero.

The time is adjusted as described below by pressing the function button "SET".

In this occasion, the display flashes twice and then the setting is changed.

  1. After making the adjustment, press the "INFO" button to select the information display.

AM 12:00 18°C CLOCK ADJUST 103 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AA0095651

Adjusting the display brightness

E00519300034

The display brightness can be adjusted at 13 levels for both daytime and nighttime.

● BRIGHTNESS FOR DAY TIME
The display brightness is adjusted when the light switch is in the "OFF" position.
● BRIGHTNESS FOR NIGHT TIME
The display brightness is adjusted when the light switch is in the D” or “D” position.

  1. Press the "ADJ" button to show the brightness adjusting display.

AM 12:00 BRIGHTNESS ADJUST 1/2 BRIGHTNESS FOR DAY TIME AA8995664

  1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to select the setting you wish to adjust (daytime or nighttime). Then press the “SELECT” function button.

AM 12:00 BRIGHTNESS ADJUST 1/2 BRIGHTNESS FOR DAY TIME AA8995677

  1. Use the function buttons to adjust the brightness.

AM 12:00 18°C BRIGHTNESS FOR DAY TIME BRIGHTNESS 2 AA8095680

“+”- To make the display brighter The display becomes brighter by one step, every time you lightly press the “+” function button. If you continue pressing the button for about 2 seconds or more, the indication is fast-forwarded.

“-”- To make the display darker The display becomes darker by one step, every time you lightly press the “-” function button. If you continue pressing the button for about 2 seconds or more, the indication is fast-forwarded.

“SET” To set the brightness

- Press function button "SET" to set the new brightness. The display will flash twice.

Centre information display*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Adjusting the display brightness - 4

NOTE

  • If you next wish to adjust the other adjustment setting (daytime or nighttime), press the "ADJ" button or "BACK" function button.
  • After adjustment, press the "INFO" button to select the information display.

AM 12:00 BRIGHTNESS FOR DAY TIME BRIGHTNESS AA0095693

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2

NOTE

● As the display brightness can be adjusted in the center information display only, the brightness inside the meter cannot be changed.

Correcting the compass

E00519400178

This compass shows the direction of the vehicle by the 8 azimuth system.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Correcting the compass - 1

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Correcting the compass - 2

NOTE

  • This system uses the earth's magnetic field, and so may not show the correct direction depending on the traffic condition or in the following places where the earth's magnetic field is disrupted.
    • Car parks located in buildings and tunnels
    • Expressways and underground cables
    • Area over the subway
  • Transforming station
  • Areas along the railroad
    In these cases, the correct direction will be displayed once the vehicle returns to a place where the earth's magnetic field is stable.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- Do not install ski racks, antennas, etc. which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.

Setting the declination

The declination is the difference between true north (the direction of the geographic north pole) and where a compass needle points to. Since the declination varies from place to place, it needs to be set for each region. Otherwise the compass will not show the correct direction.

Set the declination by the following steps:

W20 E20 W10 E10 W5 E10' E5' W10' W15' E15' W10' E20' E5' W10' W15' AA3060455

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Setting the declination - 2

NOTE

● The default declination setting is 0 degrees. In accordance with the illustration, set the declination setting to the declination contour nearest to a region where you drive the vehicle.
● The declination can be set at intervals of 1 degrees, from 28 degrees west (W28) to 28 degrees east (E28).

With a settings display showing, press the "ADJ" button and select "COMPASS VARIANCE".

  1. Press the function button for "SELECT".

AM 12:00 18°C COMPASS SETTING 1/2 COMPASS VARIANCE AA0995716

  1. Press the function button for “←” or “→” to set the desired declination.

Pressing “←” or “→” for more than 1 second makes the value change rapidly.

AM 12:00 18° COMPASS VARIANCE 11°EAST AA6095723

  1. When the declination adjustment has been completed, press the "SET" function button.

AM 12:00 18°C COMPASS VARIANCE 11°EAST AUTO BACK ↑ 1 SET 1 ADD AA0095736

Setting the compass

The compass is usually calibrated automatically when the vehicle is moving. At times when complete calibration is not possible, no compass indications are given. Manually set the compass using the following procedure.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Setting the compass - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric diagram with curved dotted lines and a triangle, no text or symbols present

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Setting the compass - 2

NOTE

- If your vehicle has a sunroof, keep the sunroof closed when calibrating the compass. Having the sunroof open when calibrating the compass could render the compass unable to correctly show directions.

With a settings display showing, press the "ADJ" button and select "COMPASS CALI-BRATION".

Centre information display*

  1. Press the function button for "SELECT".

AM 12:00 18° COMPRESS SETTING 2/2 COMPRESS CALIBRATION AA0093752

  1. Press the function button for "SELECT".

  2. Turn the vehicle slowly through 360 degrees in a safe, open area with no buildings and other vehicles.

AM 12:00 18° PLEASE DRIVE SLOWLY IN A SAFES OPEN AREA NOTE 1. BOX 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. AA0095778

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 3

NOTE

- The "Completed the calibration". message may be displayed even if you terminate the turn before it is complete and return to the vehicle's original direction. The compass may not be properly calibrated in this case, so you must turn the vehicle through at least 360 degrees.

  1. The compass setting will finish automatically and the words "COMPASS CALIBRATION COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.

AM 12:00 18℃ COMPASS CALIBRATION CALIBRATION READY? NO. T - NO. T - NO. T - NO. T - NO. AA0095765

NOTE ● If you wish to stop calibrating the compass part-way through the procedure, press the "INFO" button or "ADJ" button.

AM 12:00 18°C PLEASE DRIVE SLOWLY IN A SAFE OPEN AREA AUTO | END | OFF | ADD AA6095781

AM 12:00 W 18° COMPASS CALIBRATION COMPLETE AA0993794

Changing the calendar setting

The date and the calendar indication patterns can be changed.

Date setting

  1. Press the "ADJ" button to select the calendar setting display.

AM 12:00 18°C CALENDAR 1/2 CALENDAR ADJUST NO. 1 1= 1 +1 HUST 1 ADJ AA0995808

  1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to select “CALENDAR ADJUST”. Then press the “SELECT” function button.

AM 12:00 H 18°C CALENDAR 1/2 CALENDAR ADJUST INT 1 T=1 T=1 MUST 1 AU AA005811

  1. Use the function buttons to set the calendar.

AM 12:00 18°C CALENDAR ADJUST CEH 38.2009 ADD ADD ADD AA0098312

“→”- Select “YEAR”, “MONTH”, “DAY” you wish to change. “YEAR”, “MONTH”, and “DAY” are changed over by turns every time you lightly press the “→” function button.

“+”- Change “YEAR”, “MONTH”, “DAY” you have selected. The indication is changed to your desired date every time you lightly press the “+” function button. If you continue pressing the button for about 2 seconds or more, the indication is forwarded.

“SET”- Determine the date. Press the “SET” function button. Then the display flashes twice and the setting is changed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Date setting - 4

NOTE

● The year changes in the following sequence: 2012 → 2013 → ... 2099 → 2012 or 2013 → 2014 → ... 2099 → 2013.
- You can return to the previous display by pressing the “BACK” function button.

  1. After setting the date, press the "INFO" button to return to the information display.

AM 12:00 18°C CALENDAR ADJUST 19/01/30/2009 ADD BACK F + T - T INT A U AA0098825

Centre information display*

Changing the calendar pattern

  1. Press the "ADJ" button to select the calendar setting display. Press the "←" or "→" function button to select "CALENDAR PATTERN SELECT". Then press the "SELECT" function button.

AM 12:00 18° CALENDAR 2/2 4 CALENDAR PATTERN SELECT F AA0095840

  1. Press function button “←” or “→” to select your desired indication pattern.

Type 1 AM 12:00 H 18° CALENDAR PATTERN SELECT 1/3 4 2009 12/8/2009 ↓ ↑ Type 2 AM 12:00 H 18° CALENDAR PATTERN SELECT 2/3 4 DEC.30.2009 ↓ ↑ Type 3 AM 12:00 H 18° CALENDAR PATTERN SELECT 3/3 4 30DEC.2009 ↓ ↑ AA400602

  1. Press the function button "SET". The display will flash twice, and the indication pattern will be updated.

12:00 18°C CALENDAR PATTERN SELECT 2/3 DEC 30/2009 AA0095853

NOTE ● You can return to the previous display by pressing the "BACK" function button.

  1. After setting the calendar pattern, press the "INFO" button to return to the information display.

AM 12:00 18°C CALENDAR PATTERN SELECT 2/3 DEC.30.2009 AA005866

User customization

E00519600183

You can set the indication of unit, language, and the time notation.

In addition, you can return these settings to the factory default settings.

Selecting the item to set

  1. Press the "ADJ" button to select the user customization display.

AM 12:00 18°C USER CUSTOM 1/4 4 UNIT P A A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA095879

  1. Press the function button “←” or “→” to select the item you wish to set.

● "UNIT": Changing the unit
● "LANGUAGE": Changing the language
● “12h ↔ 24h”: Changing the time format
● "DEFAULT": Resetting to factory settings

Push the function button "SELECT". The setting display for your selected item will appear.

AM 12:00 18°C USER CUSTOM 3/4 12h(=)24h NO. 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 AA00958K2

Changing display units

It is possible to change the display units for the fuel consumption, driving range, average speed, outside temperature, elevation, and atmospheric pressure as shown below.

FUEL ECONO-MYkm/L → L/100 km →mpg (UK GALLON) →mpg (US GALLON)
RANGE km → miles
SPEED km/h → mph
OUTSIDE TEM-PERATURE°C → °F
ELEVATION m → ft
BAROMETERhPa → mb → kPa → inHg

● Changing the display unit for fuel consumption

  1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to select “FUEL ECONOMY”. Then press the “SELECT” function button.

AM 12:00 UNIT FUEL ECONOMY 18℃ 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/4

  1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to select “km/L”. Then press the “SET” function button. The display will flash twice, and the display unit will be updated to the selected one.

Centre information display*

AM 12:00 18°C FUEL ECONOMY 1/4 km/L HWD 1 SWEI 1 = 1 = 1 = 1 = 1 = 1 = 1 AA009598V

NOTE ● You can return to the previous display by pressing the "BACK" function button.

  1. After setting, press the "INFO" button to return to the information display.

AM 12:00 FUEL ECONOMY 1/4 km/L AA0095912

Changing the language

It is possible to set the display language of the centre information display.

● To change the display language to English
1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to select “ENGLISH”. Then press the “SET” function button. The display will flash twice, and then the setting is completed to the language selected.

AM 12:00 18°C LANGUAGE 1/6 ENGLISH NO. 1 RED 1 + - + - + - + - + - AA0095925

NOTE ● You can return to the previous display by pressing the "BACK" function button.

  1. After setting the language, press the "INFO" button to return to the information display.

AM 12:00 LANGUAGE ENGLISH 1/6 AA0095938

Changing the time notation

It is possible set the time notation to 12-hour or 24-hour.

  1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to select “12h TIME NOTATION” or “24h TIME NOTATION”. Then press the “SET” function button. The display will flash twice, and the display time notation will be updated to the selected one.

AM 12:00 12h<=24h 12h TIME MOTATION AA005941

12-hour 24-hour w 1159 2353 AA0085954

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Changing the time notation - 3

NOTE

- You can return to the previous display by pressing the "BACK" function button.

  1. After setting the time notation, press the "INFO" button to return to the information display.

AM 12:00 18° 12h<=24h 1/2 12h TIME NOTATION No 1 Max 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AA8995967

Returning display items to their factory settings

You can return to the setting of each item to the factory default settings.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Returning display items to their factory settings - 1

NOTE

● The factory settings are as follows:

• Fuel consumption: L/100 km (62 mph)
- Driving range: km
• Average speed: km/h
- Outside temperature: °C
- Elevation: m
• Atmospheric pressure: hPa
• Display language: English
• Time notation: 12-hour

  1. Push the "SELECT" function button.

AM 12:00 USER CUSTOM 4/4 DEFAULT 18°C SELECT 1 AND AA8095976

  1. Press the “←” function button to select “YES”.

AM 12:00 18°C DEFAULT RETURN TO DEFAULT? YES AA0095983

Centre information display*

  1. Press the "SELECT" function button.

AM 12:00 18° DEFAULT RETURN TO DEFAULT? No NO 1 BACK 1 +1 SHIFT 1 NO AA009838

  1. Once more press the “←” function button to select “YES”.

AM 12:00 18°C DEFAULT REALLY? YES NO AA0096087

  1. Press the "SET" function button.

AM 12:00 18°C DEFAULT REALLY? NO A02 I BACK I T +1 S21 I ASS AA0096018

  1. The display shown below will appear, and the display items will return to their factory settings.

AM 12:00 18°C DEFAULT COMPLETE MISI ENIX ALL AA096023

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 7

NOTE

- If the battery terminals are disconnected, the settings for the date and time may be erased. If this happens, please set the date and time again.

Adjusting the barometer

E00524400033

It is possible to adjust the barometer indication and return it to the factory setting.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Adjusting the barometer - 1

NOTE

- It is not necessary to adjust the barometer because it has been adjusted at the factory. However, if you wish, adjust it using an accurate barometer.

To adjust the barometer

  1. Press the "ADJ" button to select the barometer adjustment display.

AM 12:00 18° BAROMETER 1/2 BAROMETER ADJUST AA096636

  1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to select the “BAROMETER ADJUST” display. Then press the “SELECT” function button.

AM 12:00 BAROMETER 4 BAROMETER ADJUST 1/2 18°C AA3996049

  1. Adjust the barometer by pressing the function buttons.

AM 12:00 BAROMETER ADJUST 1014hPa AA0096052

“+”- To adjust the barometer Each gentle press of the “+” function button will increase the indicated barometer by 2 hPa. If you continue pressing the button for about 2 seconds or longer, the indication is fast-forwarded.

“-”- To adjust the barometer Each gentle press of the “-” function button will decrease the indicated barometer by 2 hPa. If you continue pressing the button for about 2 seconds or longer, the indication is fast-forwarded.

“SET” To set the barometer - Press the “SET” function button. The display will flash twice, and the new setting will be established.

NOTE
● You can return to the previous display by pressing the "BACK" function button.
  1. After setting the barometer adjust, press the "INFO" button to return to the information display.

AM 12:00 18℃ BAROMETER ADJUST 1014hPa TIME BACK REF ASS AA0096065

Resetting to the factory setting

  1. Press the "ADJ" button to select the barometer adjustment display. Press the “←” or “→” function button to select the "BAROMETER DEFAULT" display. Then press the "SELECT" function button.

AM 12:00 18°C BAROMETER 2/2 BAROMETER DEFAULT OFF 1 TIME TIME SHIFT AUTO AA6096078

Combination headlamps and dipper switch

  1. Press the "SET" function button. The display will flash twice and the barometer indication will return to the factory settings.

AM 12:00 18° BARMETER DEFAULT CURRENT VALUE 1914h.Pa REALLY? OFF 1 BACK 1 1 INT 1 ALL AA00960K1

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Combination headlamps and dipper switch - 2

NOTE

  • Although the barometer value is changed to the factory setting, a barometer unit you have selected is unchanged.
  • You can return to the previous display by pressing the "BACK" function button.

  • After setting the barometer default, press the "INFO" button to return to the information display.

AM 12:00 18°C BARDIMETER DEFAULT CURRENT VALUE 1014kPa M/S T S/CK T T T A/U AA0096094

Care of the monitor

E00519700012

If the monitor becomes covered in fingerprints or otherwise dirty, clean it with a soft and dry cloth.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Care of the monitor - 1

NOTE

- Don't use a wet cloth or abrasive cleaner as this may cause damage.

Combination headlamps and dipper switch

E00506003533

Headlamps

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Headlamps - 1

NOTE

  • Do not leave the headlamps and other lamps on for a long time while the engine is stationary (not running). A run-down battery could result.
  • When it rains or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a functional problem. When the lamp is switched on, the heat will remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recommend you to have it checked.

Type 1

Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.

E D O E OFF 3D 2D AA0010885

OFFAll lamps off
Position, tail, licence plate and instrument panel lamps on
Headlamps and other lamps go on

Type 2

Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.

ED -0.0°C AUTO OFF 3.0°C AUTO OFF AA0097020

OFF All lamps off
AUTOWith the ignition switch in the “ON” position, headlamps, position, tail, licence plate, and instrument panel lamps turn on and off automatically in accordance with outside light level. All lamps turn off automatically when the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
EDGEPosition, tail, licence plate and instrument panel lamps on
EDHeadlamps and other lamps go on

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Type 2 - 2

NOTE

● The sensitivity of the automatic on/off control can be adjusted.
For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
- When the headlamps are turned off by the automatic on/off control with the ignition switch in the "ON" position, the front fog lamps (if so equipped) and rear fog lamp also go off. When the headlamps are subsequently turned back on by the automatic on/off control, the front fog lamps also come on but the rear fog lamp stays off. If you wish to turn the rear fog lamp back on, operate the switch again.
- Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to the windscreen.

A AJZ101195

Combination headlamps and dipper switch

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2

NOTE

- If the lamps do not turn on or off with the switch in the "AUTO" position, manually operate the switch and we recommend you to have your vehicle checked.

[ Vehicles with Daytime Run- ning Lamp]

When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the lamp switch is set to the "OFF" position, the low beam of the headlamps, tail lamps, etc., will illuminate.

Lamps (headlamps, fog lamps, etc.) auto-cutout function

- If the ignition key is turned to "LOCK" or "ACC" position or removed from the ignition switch and the lamps will stay on for about 3 minutes without opening the driver's door while the lamp switch in the "≡D" position, the lamps automatically turn off. - If the ignition key is turned to "LOCK" or "ACC" position or removed from the ignition switch and the driver's door is opened within 3 minutes while the lamp switch in the "≡D" position, a buzzer will sound to warn the driver that the lamps have not been turned off, and these lamps will automatically turn off.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Lamps (headlamps, fog lamps, etc.) auto-cutout function - 1

NOTE

- The lamp auto-cutout will not function when the lamp switch is in the “Position. - When the ignition key has been turned either to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed from the ignition switch with the lamp switch in the ☑ position, and the lamp switch is returned to the “OFF” position within approximately 3 minutes, the auto-cutout function will not be activated.

When you want to keep the lamps on

- Turn the lamp switch in the "OFF" position to switch off all lamps while the ignition key is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position or remove it from the ignition switch. - Turn on the lamps with the switch in the "E005" or "ED" position again, then the lamps will remain on.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - When you want to keep the lamps on - 1

NOTE

- It is possible to alter the auto-cutout function such that: - Auto-cutout function is never activated. For details, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Lamp monitor buzzer

E00506100184

If the driver's door is opened when the ignition key is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position or removed from the ignition switch while the lamps are on, a buzzer will sound to remind the driver to turn off the lamps. When the lamp auto-cutout function acts, the buzzer will stop automatically. When this function does not act, turn off the lamp switch to stop the buzzer.

Dipper (High/Low beam change)

E00506200286

When the lamp switch is in the ' position, the beam changes from high to low (or low to high) each time the lever is pulled to (1). While the high-beam is on, the high-beam indication lamp in the instrument cluster will also illuminate.

1 2 D AA0050898

Headlamp flasher

E00506300157

The high-beams flash when the lever is pulled slightly (2), and will go off when it is released.

When the high-beam is on, the high-beam indication lamp in the instrument cluster will also illuminate.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Headlamp flasher - 1

NOTE

● The high-beams can also flash when the lamp switch is in the "OFF" position.
- If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps set to high-beam illumination, the headlamps are automatically returned to their low-beam setting when the lamp switch is next turned to the “Position.

Headlamp levelling switch\*

E00506400826

The angle of the headlamp beam varies depending on the load carried by the vehicle. The headlamp levelling switch can be used to adjust the headlamp illumination distance (when the lower beam is illuminated) so that the headlamps' glare does not distract other drivers.

Set the switch (referring to the following table) to the appropriate position according to the number of people and the load in the vehicle.

Diagram showing a hand holding a car with a magnified view of the car's left side, highlighting a directional arrow.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Headlamp levelling switch\* - 2

CAUTION

● Always perform adjustments before driving. Do not attempt to adjust while driving, as it could cause an accident.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

- When adjusting the beam position, first put the dial in the "0" position (the highest beam position).

Single cab

Vehicle conditionMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2
Switch position“0” “2”

•: 1 person

: Full luggage loading

Switch position 0- Driver only

Switch position 2- Driver + Full luggage loading

Club cab

Vehicle conditionMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 3MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 4
Switch position“0” “3” or “4”

•: 1 person

: Full luggage loading

Switch position 0- Driver only

Turn-signals lever

Switch position 3- Driver + Full luggage loading {Vehicles with heavy duty suspension}

Switch position 4- Driver + Full luggage loading {Vehicles without heavy duty suspension}

Double cab

Vehicle conditionMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Turn-signals lever - 1MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Turn-signals lever - 2
Switch position“0”“2” or “3” or “4”

●: 1 person

Full luggage loading

Switch position 0- Driver only

Switch position 2- Driver + Full luggage loading {Vehicles with heavy duty suspension for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine}

Switch position 3- Driver + Full luggage loading

{Vehicles with heavy duty suspension except for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine}

{Vehicles with head-lamp - type 2* and without heavy duty suspension}

Switch position 4- Driver + Full luggage loading

{Vehicles with head-lamp - type 1* and without heavy duty suspension}

*: Refer to "Outside" on page 10-25

Turn-signals lever

E00506501273

The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is operated (with the ignition switch in the "ON" position). At the same time, the turn-signal indication lamps flash.

1 2 2 1 AA0050902

1- Turn-signals

When making a normal turn, use position (1). The lever will return automatically when cornering is completed.

There are times when the lever will not return after cornering. This occurs when the steering wheel is turned only slightly.

In such cases, return the lever by hand.

2- Lane-change signals

When changing lanes, use position (2). It will return to the neutral position when released.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Turn-signals lever - 2

NOTE

  • If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned out. We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected.
  • It is possible to activate the following functions. For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

  • Flashing of the turn-signal lamps and the indication lamp in the instrument cluster when the lever is operated with the ignition switch in the "ACC" position

  • Flashing of the turn-signal lamps and the indication lamp in the instrument cluster three times when you move the lever to (2) slightly then release it
  • The time required to operate the lever for the 3-flash function can be adjusted.

Hazard warning flasher switch

E00506602066

Use the hazard warning flasher switch when the vehicle has to be parked on the road for any emergency.

The hazard warning flashers can always be operated, regardless of the position of the ignition key.

Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning flashers; push the switch again to turn them off.

When this switch is operated, all turn-signal lamps flash continuously, as do the turn-signal indication lamps in the instrument cluster.

AJA106414

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Hazard warning flasher switch - 2

NOTE

  • If the lamps are kept flashing for a long time, the battery will be discharged, resulting in hard engine starting or no start condition.
  • If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned out.

We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected.

Front fog lamp switch\*

L00506800934

The front fog lamps can be used only when the headlamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the knob once in the "ON" direction to turn on the front fog lamps. The indication lamp in the instrument cluster will also come on. To turn the front fog lamps off, turn the knob once in the "OFF" direction. While the rear fog lamp is on, turn the knob twice in the "OFF" direction to turn the front fog lamps off. The knob will automatically return to its original position when you release it.

ON OFF +PDOS AA0086899

Rear fog lamp switch

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Front fog lamp switch\* - 2

NOTE

  • The front fog lamps are automatically turned off when the headlamps or tail lamps are turned off. To turn the front fog lamps or again, turn the knob in the "ON" direction after turning on the headlamps or tail lamps.
  • Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
  • In case of vehicles with Daytime Running Lamp, the front fog lamp can be operated even if the lamp switch is set to the "OFF" position, because the low beam of the head-lamps, tail lamps, etc. illuminate when the ignition key is at the "ON" position.

Rear fog lamp switch

F00506900313

The rear fog lamp illuminates only when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) are on.

An indication lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the rear fog lamp is turned on.

[ Vehicles without front fog lamps ]

Turn the knob once in the "ON" direction to turn on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp off, turn the knob once in the "OFF" direction. The knob will automatically return to its original position when you release it.

[ Vehicles with front fog lamps ] Turn the knob once in the "ON" direction to turn on the front fog lamps. Turn the knob once more in the "ON" direction to turn on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp off, turn the knob once in the "OFF" direction. Turn the knob once more in the "OFF" direction to turn off the front fog lamps. The knob will automatically return to its original position when you release it.

ON OFF

AA0088851

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Rear fog lamp switch - 2

NOTE

● The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off when the headlamps and front fog lamps (if so equipped) turned off.
- To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the knob once in the "ON" direction after turning on the headlamps. (Vehicles without front fog lamps)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

● To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the knob twice in the "ON" direction after turning on the headlamps. (Vehicles with front fog lamps)
- In case of vehicles with Daytime Running Lamp, the rear fog lamp can be operated even if the lamp switch is set to the "OFF" position, because the low beam of the head-lamps, tail lamps, etc. illuminate when the ignition key is at the "ON" position.

Wiper and washer switch

E00507101191

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Wiper and washer switch - 1

CAUTION

- If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer fluid sprayed against the glass may freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm the glass with the defroster or rear window demister before using the washer.

Windscreen wipers

E00516900303

Except for vehicles equipped with rain sensor

The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

MIST OFF INT LO HI AA0010944

MIST Misting function - The wipers will operate once.

OFF-Off

INT- Speed sensitive intermittent operation Interval between wipers varies in accordance with vehicle speed.

LO-Slow

III- Fast

To adjust intermittent intervals

With the lever in the "INT" (speed-sensitive) position, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by turning the knob (A).

FRONT MUST OFF INT LO HI A 1 2 AA0050973

1- Fast 2- Slow

NOTE

● The speed-sensitive-operation function of the windscreen wipers can be deactivated. For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Misting function

Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and release, to operate the wipers once. Use this function when you are driving in mist or drizzle.

If the lever is held in the upward position (MIST), the wipers continue operating until the lever is released.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Misting function - 1

natural_image Diagram of a finger with a curved handle and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Vehicles with rain sensor

E00526400369

The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

Wiper and washer switch

If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

MIST OFF AUTO LO HI AA0097046

MIST- Misting function The wipers will operate once.

OFF-Off

AUTO- Auto-wiper control Rain sensor The wipers will automatically operate depending on the degree of wetness on the windscreen.

LO-Slow

HI-Fast

Rain sensor

Can only be used when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

If the lever is put in the "AUTO" position, the rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain (or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the wipers will operate automatically. Keep the lever in the "OFF" position if the windscreen is dirty and the weather is dry. Wiper operation under these conditions can scratch the windscreen and damage the wipers.

A AA0097013

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Rain sensor - 2

CAUTION

  • With the ignition switch in the "ON" position and the lever in the "AUTO" position, the wipers may automatically operate in the situations described below.
    If your hands get trapped, you could suffer injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position or move the lever to the "OFF" position to deactivate the rain sensor.
  • When cleaning the outside surface of the windscreen, if you touch the rain sensor.
  • When cleaning the outside surface of the windscreen, if you wipe with a cloth the rain sensor.
  • When using an automatic car wash.
    • A physical shock is applied to the wind-screen.
  • A physical shock is applied to the rain sensor.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

● To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this operation of the wipers does not take place when the vehicle is stationary and the ambient temperature is about 0 °C or lower.
- Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker or label to the windscreen. Also, do not put any water-repellent coating on the windscreen. The rain sensor would not be able to detect the extent of rain, and the wipers might stop working normally.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- In the following cases, the rain sensor may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

- When the wipers operate at a constant interval despite changes in the extent of rain. - When the wipers do not operate even though it is raining.

- The wipers may automatically operate when things such as insects or foreign objects are affixed to the windscreen on top of the rain sensor or when the windscreen is frozen. Objects affixed to the windscreen will stop the wipers when the wipers cannot remove them. To make the wipers operate again, place the lever in the "LO" or "HI" position. Also, the wipers may operate automatically due to strong direct sunlight or electromagnetic wave. To stop the wipers, place the lever in the "OFF" position.

- Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point when replacing the windscreen or reinforcing the glass around the sensor.

To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor

With the lever in the "AUTO" (rain sensor) position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor by turning the knob (A).

FRONT MST OFF AUTO HI + - PULL A AA8097039

"+"- Higher sensitivity to rain

"-"- Lower sensitivity to rain

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor - 2

NOTE

- It is possible to activate the following functions. For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

- Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive) can be changed to intermittent operation (vehicle-speed sensitive).

• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive) can be changed to intermittent operation (except vehicle-speed sensitive).

Misting function

Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and release, to operate the wipers once.

Use this function when you are driving in mist or drizzle.

If the lever is held in the upward position (MIST), the wipers continue operating until the lever is released.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Misting function - 1

natural_image Diagram of a finger with a curved handle and an arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)

Wiper and washer switch

The wipers will operate once if the lever is moved to the "AUTO" position and the knob (A) is turned in the "+" direction when the ignition switch is "ON" position.

MUT OFF FRONT AUTO 10 A + - AUTO PULL AA0097062

Windscreen washer

100507200805

The windscreen washer can be operated with the ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the windscreen by pulling the lever towards you. The wipers operate automatically several times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.

On a vehicle equipped with a headlamp washer, the headlamp washer operates together with the windscreen washer the first time the windscreen washer is used if the headlamps are on.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Windscreen washer - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with curved arrows indicating motion or rotation (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

- If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer fluid sprayed against the glass may freeze resulting in poor visibility. I eat the glass with the defroster or demister before using the washer.

NOTE

- It is possible to spray washer fluid without activating the wipers. To do so, hold the lever in the pulled position and turn the ignition switch to the "ON" or "ACC" position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- It is possible to cause the wipers never to operate when washer fluid is sprayed. For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Headlamp washer switch\*

ED0510100273

The headlamp washer can be operated when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position and the headlamps are on.

Push the button once and the washer fluid will be sprayed on to the headlamps.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Headlamp washer switch\* - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Headlamp washer switch\* - 2

NOTE

- If the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position and the headlamps are on the headlamp washer operates together with the windscreen washer the first time the windscreen washer lever is pulled.

Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers

E00507600014

  • If the moving wipers become blocked by ice or other deposits on the glass, the motor may burn out even if the wiper switch is turned to OFF. If obstruction occurs, park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the ignition, and clean the deposits from the glass so that the wipers operate smoothly.
  • Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry. They may scratch the glass surface and the blades wear out prematurely.
    ● Before using the wipers in cold weather, check that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the glass. The motor may burn out if the wipers are used with the blades frozen onto the glass.
    ● Avoid using the washer continuously for more than 20 seconds. Do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

Otherwise, the motor may burn out.

- Periodically check the level of washer fluid in the reservoir and refill if required.

During cold weather, add a recommended washer solution that will not freeze in the washer reservoir. Failure to do so could result in loss of washer function and frost damage to the system components.

Rear window demister switch

100507900961

The rear window demister switch can be operated with the ignition switch in the "ON" position.

Push the switch to turn on the rear window demister. It will be turned off automatically in about 20 minutes. To turn off the demister within about 20 minutes, push the switch again.

The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while the demister is on.

Type 1 A A0089483

Type 2 A AA0051013

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Rear window demister switch - 3

NOTE

- If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, these operate in conjunction with the demister. Refer to "Heated mirror" on page 6-11.

Horn switch

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Horn switch - 1

NOTE

● The demister switch is not to melt snow but to clear mist. Remove snow before use of the demister switch.
● To avoid unnecessary discharge of the battery, do not use the rear window demister during starting of the engine or when the engine is not running. Turn the demister off immediately after the window is clear.
- When cleaning the inside of the rear window, use a soft cloth and wipe gently along the heater wires, being careful not to damage the wires.
- Do not allow objects to touch the inside of the rear window glass, or damaged or broken wires may result.

Type 2 AA0096762

Horn switch

E00508000608

Press the steering wheel on or around the "→" mark.

Type 1 AA0096759

Starting and driving

Economical driving....6-02

Driving, alcohol and drugs....6-02

Safe driving techniques....6-03

Running-in recommendations....6-04

Parking brake....6-07

Parking 6-08

Steering wheel height adjustment.... 6-09

Inside rear-view mirror....6-09

Outside rear-view mirrors.... 6-10

Ignition switch....6-12

Steering wheel lock....6-13

Starting....6-13

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)*....6-15

Manual transmission.... 6-16

Automatic transmission Sports Mode 4A/T, 5A/T....6-19

Easy select 4WD* 6-25

Super select 4WD*....6-29

Rear differential lock* 6-34

4-wheel drive operation.... 6-38

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation....6-41

Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles....6-41

Limited-slip differential* 6-43

Braking....6-43

Brake assist system* 6-44

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*....6-45

Power steering system....6-48

Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)*......6-48

Cruise control*....6-50

Cargo loads....6-55

Trailer towing....6-55

Economical driving

Economical driving

E00600100620

For economical driving, there are some technical requirements that have to be met. The prerequisite for low fuel consumption is a properly adjusted engine. In order to achieve longer life of the vehicle and the most economical operation, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked at regular intervals in accordance with the service standards. Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas and noise are highly influenced by personal driving habits as well as the particular operating conditions. The following points should be observed in order to minimize wear of brakes, tyres and engine as well as to reduce environmental pollution.

Starting

Avoid rapid acceleration and sudden starts; such operation will result in higher fuel consumption.

Shifting

Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine speed. Always use the highest gear possible. The transfer shift lever should be set to “2H” when driving 4WD vehicles on normal roads and express ways to obtain best possible fuel economy.

City traffic

Frequent starting and stopping increases the average fuel consumption. Use roads with smooth traffic flow whenever possible. When driving on congested roads, avoid use of a low gear at high engine speeds.

Idling

The vehicle consumes fuel even during idling. Avoid extended idling whenever possible.

Speed

The higher the vehicle speed, the more fuel consumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a slight release of the accelerator pedal will save a significant amount of fuel.

Tyre inflation pressure

Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular intervals. Low tyre inflation pressure increases road resistance and fuel consumption. In addition, low tyre pressures adversely affect tyre wear and driving stability.

Load

Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the cargo area. Especially during city driving where frequent starting and stopping is necessary, the increased weight of the vehicle will greatly affect fuel consumption.

Cold engine starting

Starting of a cold engine consumes more fuel.

Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused by keeping a hot engine running. After the engine is started, commence driving as soon as possible.

Air conditioning\*

The use of the air conditioning will increase the fuel consumption.

Driving, alcohol and drugs

E00600200012

Driving after drinking alcohol is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you have been drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use public transportation.

Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober.

Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs affect your alertness, perception and reaction time. Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driving while under the influence of any of these medications.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Driving, alcohol and drugs - 1

WARNING

● NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.

Your perceptions are less accurate, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired.

Safe driving techniques

E00600300491

Driving safety and protection against injury cannot be fully ensured. However, we recommend that you pay extra attention to the following:

Seat belts

Before starting the vehicle, make sure that you and your passengers have fastened your seat belts.

Floor mats

WARNING

  • Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by correctly laying floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle.
    To prevent the floor mats from slipping out position, securely retain them using the hooks etc.
    Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal or laying one floor mat on top of another can obstruct pedal operation and lead to a serious accident.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Simple line drawing of a car interior with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

Carrying children in the vehicle

● Never leave your vehicle unattended with the key in the ignition and children inside the vehicle. Children may play with the driving controls and this could lead to an accident.

● Make sure that infants and small children are properly restrained in accordance with the laws and regulations, and for maximum protection in case of an accident.
● Prevent children from playing in the car-go area. It is quite dangerous to allow them to play there while the vehicle is moving.

Running-in recommendations

Running-in recommendations

100600403679

During the running-in period for the first 1,000 km (620 miles), it is advisable to drive your new vehicle using the following precautions as a guideline to aid long life as well as future economy and performance.

● Do not race the engine at high speeds.
● Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking and prolonged high-speed running.
- Keep to the running-in speed limit shown below.

Please note that the legal speed limits displayed must be adhered to.

  • Do not exceed loading limits.
    ● Refrain from towing a trailer.

Vehicles with manual transmission
2WD

Shift point Speed limit
Vehicles with 15 inch tyre Vehicleswith 16 inch tyre
1^st gear20 km/h (12 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph)
2^nd gear40 km/h (25 mph) 45 km/h (28 mph)
3^rd gear65 km/h (40 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph)
4^th gear95 km/h (59 mph) 105 km/h (65 mph)
5^th gear120 km/h (74 mph) 135 km/h (84 mph)

4WD

Shift point Speed limit
Vehicles with easy select 4WD Vehicles with super select 4WD
2H, 4H 4L 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc
1^st gear20 km/h (12 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph)
2^nd gear40 km/h (25 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph)
3^rd gear70 km/h (43 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)
4^th gear100 km/h (62 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (30 mph)
5^th gear130 km/h (81 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 130 km/h (81 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph)

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Vehicles with 4A/T

Shift pointSpeed limit
2WDVehicles with easy select 4WD Vehicles with super select 4WD
2II, 4II 4L 2II,4II, 4IILc 4LLc
1^st gear25 km/h (16 mph) 25km/h (16 mph) 15 km/h(9 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph)15 km/h (9 mph)
2^nd gear65 km/h (40 mph) 65km/h (40 mph) 35 km/h(22 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph)35 km/h (22 mph)
3^rd gear100 km/h (62 mph) 1000 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h(30 mph) 100 km/h(62 mph) 50 km/h (30 mph)
4^th gear135 km/h (84 mph)140 km/h (87 mph)135 km/h (84 mph)

Running-in recommendations

Vehicles with 5A/T

Shift pointSpeed limit
2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc
1^st gear25 km/h (16 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph)
2^nd gear45 km/h (28 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph)
3^rd gear70 km/h (43 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)
4^th gear100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (30 mph)
5^th gear135 km/h (84 mph) —

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Vehicles with automatic transmission - 1

NOTE

- On 4WD vehicles with automatic transmission, when the transfer shift lever is in "4LLc", the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

- On 4WD vehicles, the “4LLc” range gives maximum torque for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult surfaces. On vehicles with A/T, do not exceed speeds of approximately 70 km/h (43 mph) in “4LLc” range.

Parking brake

100600501562

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then move the gearshift lever to ^st l (on an uphill) or Reverse (on a downhill) position for vehicles with manual transmission or set the selector lever to "P" (PARK) position on automatic transmission vehicles.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Parking brake - 1

CAUTION

● Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and brake warning lamp is off.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking brake, the brake will be overheated, resulting in ineffective braking and possible brake failure.
- When you intend to apply the parking brake, firmly press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete stop before pulling the parking brake lever. Pulling the parking brake lever with the vehicle moving could make the rear wheels lock up, thereby making the vehicle unstable. It could also make the parking brake malfunction.
- If the brake warning lamp does not extinguish when the parking brake is fully released, the brake system may be abnormal. Have your vehicle checked immediately. For details, refer to "Brake warning lamp" on page 5-08.

Type 1

To apply

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To apply - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal, then pull the lever up without pushing the button at the end of hand grip.

To release

1 2 3 AA0051938

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal, then pull the lever up slightly.
2- Push the button at the end of hand grip.
3- Lower the lever fully.

OKTE15E3

Type 2

To apply

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To apply - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a vehicle head and side panel showing internal components (no text or symbols)

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal, then pull the lever out.

Starting and driving

Parking

To release
LHD RHD 1 1 AA0100894

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal, then pull the lever out slightly and turn it clockwise (LHD) or anticlockwise (RHD).

LHD RHD 2 2 2 AA0100968

2- Push in the lever completely.

Parking

E00600601202

Parking on a hill

To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow these procedures:

Parking on a downhill slope

Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and move the vehicle forward until the kerb side wheel gently touches the kerb. Set the parking brake and place the gearshift lever into the "R" (Reverse) position (with M/T) or the selector lever into the "P" (PARK) position (with A/T). If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.

Parking on an uphill slope

Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and move the vehicle back until the kerb side wheel gently touches the kerb. Set the parking brake and place the gearshift lever into the 1 ^st position (with M/T) or the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position (with A/T). If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Parking on an uphill slope - 1

NOTE

- If your vehicle is equipped with A/T, be sure to apply the parking brake before moving the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position. If you move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position before applying the parking brake, it may be difficult to disengage the selector lever from the "P" (PARK) position when next you drive the vehicle, requiring application of a strong force to the selector lever to move from the "P" (PARK) position.

Parking with the engine run- ning

Never leave the engine running while you take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the engine running in a closed or poorly ventilated place.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Parking with the engine run- ning - 1

WARNING

● Leaving the engine running risks injury or death from accidentally moving the gearshift lever (on M/T vehicles) or the selector lever (on A/T vehicles) or the accumulation of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger compartment.

Where you park

Your front bumper can be damaged if you scrape it over kerbs or parking stop blocks. Be careful when travelling up or down steep slopes where your bumper can scrape the road.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Where you park - 1

WARNING

- Do not park your vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.

When leaving the vehicle

Always remove the key from the ignition switch and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.

Steering wheel height adjustment

E00600700219

To adjust the steering wheel height, release the tilt lock lever while holding the steering wheel by hand, and raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired height.

After adjustment, securely lock the lever by pulling it upward.

Diagram showing car interior components with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement

1- Locked

2- Release

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Steering wheel height adjustment - 2

WARNING

● After adjusting to the desired height, check to be sure that the lever is locked.
- Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while you are driving the vehicle.
- When releasing the tilt lock lever, move it to the release position (2) and hold the steering wheel by hand to prevent it falling to the lowest position.

Inside rear-view mirror

L00600800106

Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making any seat adjustments so you have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Inside rear-view mirror - 1

WARNING

  • Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view mirror while driving. This can be dangerous.
    Always adjust the mirror before driving.

Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the view through the rear window.

To adjust the vertical mirror position

It is possible to move the mirror up and down to adjust its position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To adjust the vertical mirror position - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical or electrical component with a curved spring-like structure and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

AA0015422

Outside rear-view mirrors

To reduce the glare

The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare from the headlamps of vehicles behind you during night driving.

A 2 1 AA001499

1- Normal
2- Anti-glare

Outside rear-view mirrors

E00600900149

To adjust the mirror position

E00601000482

WARNING

  • Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view mirrors while driving. This can be dangerous.
    Always adjust the mirrors before driving.

WARNING

  • Your vehicle is equipped with convex type mirrors.
    Please take into consideration, that objects you see in the mirror will look smaller and farther away compared to a normal flat mirror.
    Do not use this mirror to estimate distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

Manual outside rear-view mirrors\*

Adjust the mirror surface by hands as indicated by the arrows.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Manual outside rear-view mirrors\* - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car side mirror with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors\*

The electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors can be operated when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

Push the switch (A) on the same side as the mirror whose adjustment is desired.

Type 1 A L R 1 4 MIRROR 3 2 B Type 2 A L R 1 4 MIRROR 3 2 B AA3005423

L- Left outside mirror adjustment
R- Right outside mirror adjustment

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors\* - 2

NOTE

● After adjustment, lightly push the switch on the opposite side to return it to the neutral position.

Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or down to adjust the mirror position.

1-Up
2-Down
3- Right
4- Left

To fold the mirror

E00601100467

The outside mirror can be folded in towards the side window to prevent damage when parking in narrow areas.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To fold the mirror - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car door handle mechanism with rotation arrow and connector (no text or symbols)

Mirror retractor switch\*

The mirror retractor switch can be operated with the ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

Push the switch to fold the mirrors inward, and push the switch again to return them to extended position.

L R MIRROR AA0079594

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Mirror retractor switch\* - 2

NOTE

  • It is also possible to fold and return the mirrors by hand.
  • When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail to operate as intended, please refrain from repeated pushing of the retractor switch as this action can result in burn-out of the mirror motor circuits.

Heated mirror\*

F00601200253

When the rear window demister switch (C) is pressed, the outside rear-view mirrors are demisted or defrosted. Current will flow through the heater element inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or condensation.

The indication lamp (D) will illuminate while the demister is on. The heater will be turned off automatically in about 20 minutes.

Type 1 D C

Type 2 C D A AA3082771

Ignition switch

Ignition switch

E00601402044

M/T A/T

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Ignition switch - 1

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Ignition switch - 2

AA0113218

LOCK

The engine is stopped and the steering wheel locked. The key can only be inserted and removed when the switch is in this position.

ACC

The engine is stopped, but the electrical devices such as the radio and cigarette lighter can be operated.

ON

The engine is running, and all the vehicle's electrical devices can be operated.

START

The starter motor operates. After the engine has started, release the key and it will automatically return to the "ON" position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - START - 1

NOTE

  • If your vehicle is equipped with the Daytime Running Lamp, when the ignition switch is in the "ON", the headlamp low beams etc. are turned on.
    Refer to "Headlamps" on page 5-32.
  • Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer.
    To start the engine, the ID code which the transponder inside the key sends must match the one registered in the immobilizer computer.
    Refer to "Electronic immobilizer" on page 3-02.

To remove the key

For vehicles with a M/T, when removing the key, push the key in at the "ACC" position and keep it depressed until it is turned to the "LOCK" position, and remove it.

Diagram showing car steering wheel and gear shift with a close-up of the gear mechanism labeled 'DEEASE OF COLDING'

For vehicles with an A/T, when removing the key, first set the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position, and then turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and remove it.

Diagram showing car steering wheel with clockwise shift knob and circular inset highlighting the rotary knob

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To remove the key - 3

CAUTION

  • Do not remove the ignition key from the ignition switch while driving. The steering wheel will lock, causing loss of control.
  • If the engine is stopped while driving, the brake servomechanism will cease to function and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering system will not function and it will require greater manual effort to operate the steering.
  • Do not leave the key in the "ON" position for a long time when the engine is not running, doing so will cause the battery to be discharged.
  • Do not turn the key to the "START" position when the engine is running, doing so could damage the starter motor.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

  • For vehicles with an A/T, when the selector lever is in the "P" (PARK) position, do not operate the lock button of selector lever repeatedly for more than 30 seconds. You may not be able to remove the key from the ignition switch, because the protection circuit is activated. If this occurs, wait a few moments before removing the key.
    Refer to "Selector lever operation" on page 6-19.

Steering wheel lock

L00601500227

Diagram showing car steering wheel and gear shift with magnified inset highlighting rotational components

To lock

Remove the key at the "LOCK" position. Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.

To unlock

Turn the key to the "ACC" position while moving the steering wheel slightly.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To unlock - 1

CAUTION

- Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

  • If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn the key from "LOCK" to "ACC". Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or to the right as you turn the key.

Starting

E00601600404

Tips for starting

  • Do not operate the starter motor continuously for anything longer than 10 seconds; doing so could run down the battery. If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch back to "LOCK" position, wait a few seconds, and then try again.
    Trying repeatedly with the starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism.
  • If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak or dead, refer to the "Emergency starting" section for instructions on starting the engine.
    ● The engine is well warmed up if the coolant temperature gauge needle starts to move (the engine speed decreases). Extended warming-up operation will result in excessive fuel consumption.

Starting

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Starting - 1

WARNING

● Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and can be fatal.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

● Never attempt to start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle. Especially the automatic transmission, since the structure is different from a manual transmission, it is not possible to start the engine by using this technique. Never attempt this or it could damage the automatic transmission.
- Do not run the engine at high rpm or drive the vehicle at high speed until the engine has had a chance to warm up.
- Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts to avoid damaging the starter motor.
- Do not stop the engine immediately after high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the engine to idle to give the turbocharger a chance to cool down.

Starting the engine

E00601702223

  1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt.
  2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
  3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

  4. On vehicles with manual transmission, place the gearshift lever in the "N" (Neutral) position and depress the clutch pedal all the way. On vehicles with automatic transmission, make sure the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position.

Vehicles with manual transmission

Vehicles with automatic transmission

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Starting the engine - 2

AA0113221

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Starting the engine - 3

NOTE

- On vehicles with automatic transmission, the engine will not start if the selector lever is in any position other than "P" (PARK) or "N" (NEUTRAL) position. For safety, start the engine with the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position because in this position the rear wheels are locked in place.

  1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position. The diesel preheat indication lamp will first illuminate, and then after a short

time go out, indicating that preheating is completed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indication lamp is on for a longer time.
  • When the engine has not been started within about 5 seconds after the diesel preheat indication lamp went out, return the ignition key to the "LOCK" position. Then, turn the key to the "ON" position to preheat the engine again.
  • When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat indication lamp does not come on even if the ignition key is placed in the "ON" position. Start the engine by turning the ignition key right to the "START" position.

  • Operate the accelerator pedal as described below in accordance with the atmospheric temperature and/or engine condition and then start the engine.

  • When the atmospheric temperature is moderate or the engine is warm, start the engine without depressing the accelerator pedal.

  • When the atmospheric temperature is low and the engine is cold, start the engine while depressing the accelerator pedal.

Fuel injection amount learning process

E00616000028

To keep exhaust emissions and engine noise low, the engine very occasionally performs a learning process for the fuel injection amount.

The engine sounds slightly different from usual while the learning process is taking place. The change in the engine sound does not indicate a fault.

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)\*

E00619800232

The diesel particulate filter (DPF) is a device that captures most of the particulate matter (PM) in the exhaust emissions of the diesel engine. The DPF automatically burns away trapped PM during vehicle operation. Under certain driving conditions, however, the DPF is not able to burn away all of the trapped PM and, as a result, an excessive amount of PM accumulates inside it.

WARNING

● The DPF reaches very high temperatures. Do not park your vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust system since a fire could occur.

CAUTION

- Do not use any type of fuel or engine oil that is not specified for your vehicle. Also, do not use any moisture-removing agent or other fuel additive. Such substances could have a detrimental effect on the DPF. Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 2-02 and “Engine oil” on page 10-04.

NOTE

● To minimize the likelihood of excessive accumulation of PM, try to avoid driving for long periods at low speeds and repeatedly driving short distances.

DPF warning lamp

The DPF warning lamp comes on or flashes in the event of an abnormality in the DPF system. Provided the DPF system is working normally, the DPF warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and goes off a few seconds later.

AA8104560

If the DPF warning lamp comes on during vehicle operation

Steady illumination of the DPF warning lamp shows that the DPF has not been able to burn away all of the trapped PM and that, as a result, an excessive amount of PM has accumulated inside it. To enable the DPF to burn away the PM, try to drive the vehicle as follows:

Manual transmission

- With the needle of the water temperature gauge stabilized in roughly the middle of the scale, drive for about 20 minutes at a speed of at least 40km / h (24 mph).

If the DPF warning lamp subsequently stays on, contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

6

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Manual transmission - 1

CAUTION

- You do not have to continuously drive exactly as indicated above. Always strive to drive safely in accordance with road conditions.

If the DPF warning lamp flashes during vehicle operation

Flashing of the DPF warning lamp indicates an abnormality in the DPF system. Have the system inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - If the DPF warning lamp flashes during vehicle operation - 1

CAUTION

● Continuing to drive with the DPF warning lamp flashing could result in engine trouble and DPF damage.

Manual transmission

E00602000199

The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift lever knob. Be sure to always fully depress the clutch pedal before attempting to shift the lever.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Manual transmission - 1

AA0052036

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Manual transmission - 2

CAUTION

  • Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse while the vehicle is moving forward; doing so will damage the transmission.
  • Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving as this will cause premature clutch wear or damage.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

- If the clutch is engaged suddenly while the engine revolution is high, an extremely large load will be applied instantaneously to the power train, possibly leading to the breakage of that component. Please ensure, therefore, that the clutch pedal is always applied in a slow yet firm manner.

Your vehicle has a special feature to protect the power train from damage; the engine is controlled in such a way that excessive increase in engine revolution is prevented in situations where the accelerator pedal is depressed while the gearshift lever is in the 1 ^st position and the clutch pedal has been depressed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

  • If it is hard to shift into 1^st , depress the clutch pedal again; the shift will then be easier to make.
  • To shift into reverse from 5^th gear, move the gearshift lever to the "N" (Neutral) position, and then shift it into reverse.

Changing gears

F00610600136

Always take care to change the gear with the vehicle speed matched to the engine speed. Proper shifting will prolong engine life.

Manual transmission

Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this may cause excessive engine speed (the tachometer needle into the red zone) and damage the engine.

OKTE15E3

Starting and driving

Manual transmission

Possible driving speed

ED0610802637

2WD

Shift point Speed limit
Vehicles with 15 inch tyre Vehicleswith 16 inch tyre
1^st gear30 km/h (19 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)
2^nd gear60 km/h (37 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph)
3^rd gear100 km/h (62 mph) 110 km/h (68 mph)
4^th gear145 km/h (90 mph) 160 km/h (99 mph)

4WD

Shift point Speed limit
1^st gear35 km/h (22 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph)
2^nd gear65 km/h (40 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 30 km/h (19 mph)
3^rd gear105 km/h (65 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph) 105 km/h (65 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph)
4^th gear155 km/h (96 mph) 80 km/h (50 mph) 150 km/h (93 mph) 80 km/h (50 mph)

5^th gear is an overdrive ratio and its use reduces engine speed below that of the 4^th gear. Use 5^th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum fuel economy.

Automatic transmission Sports Mode 4A/T, 5A/T

E00603200710

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Automatic transmission Sports Mode 4A/T, 5A/T - 1

NOTE

- During running-in period or immediately after reconnection of the battery cable, there may be a case where gear shifts are not made smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty transmission. Gear shifts will become smooth after the transmission has been shifted several times by the electronic control system.

Selector lever operation

E00603301082

The transmission has 4 forward gears (4A/T), 5 forward gears (5A/T) and 1 reverse gear. The individual gears are selected automatically, depending on the position of the gear selector lever, the speed of the vehicle and the position of the accelerator pedal.

The selector lever has 2 gates; the main gate (1) and the manual gate (2).

1 + 2 - P R N D AA0096296

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Selector lever operation - 2

NOTE

- For information on manual gate operation, please refer to "Sports mode" on page 6-21.

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 positions, and is equipped with a lock button (A) to avoid inadvertent selection of the wrong gear.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled point A (no text or symbols beyond label)

P R N D + - AA0113234

The lock button must be pushed while the brake pedal is depressed to move the selector lever.
The lock button must be pushed to move the selector lever.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 3

The lock button need not be pushed to move the selector lever.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 4

WARNING

  • If the lock button is always pushed to operate the selector lever, the lever may be accidentally shifted into the "P" (PARK) or "R" (REVERSE) position. Be sure not to push the lock button when performing the operations indicated by ↓ in the illustration.
    ● Always depress the brake pedal when shifting the selector lever into a gear from the "P" (PARK) or "N" (NEUTRAL) position.
    When beginning to drive, do not shift the selector lever from the "P" (PARK) or "N" (NEUTRAL) position while depressing the accelerator pedal, doing so is dangerous because the vehicle will "jump" forward or backward.

When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the "P" (PARK) position

When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the "P" (PARK) position to another position while the brake pedal is pressed and held down with the ignition switch at the "ON" position, the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunctioning.

Immediately have your vehicle checked by an authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

If you need to move the vehicle, shift the selector lever as follows.

  1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
  2. Stop the engine if it is running.
  3. Depress the brake pedal with the right foot.
  4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position.
  5. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver in the shiftlock release hole (A). Shift the selector lever to the "N" (NEUTRAL) position while pressing the straight blade (or minus) screwdriver down.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the "P" (PARK) position - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical lever assembly with labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond label)

Selector lever position indicator

F00603500885

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the current position of the selector lever is indicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instrument cluster {i.e. "P" (PARK), "R" (REVERSE), "N" (NEUTRAL), "D" (DRIVE)}.

AA0096326

Selector lever positions (Main gate)

E00603800729

"P" PARK

This position locks the transmission to prevent the vehicle from moving. The engine can be started in this position.

“R” REVERSE

This position is to back up.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - “R” REVERSE - 1

CAUTION

● Never shift into the "P" (PARK) or "R" (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion to avoid transmission damage.

“N” NEUTRAL

At this position the transmission is disengaged. It is the same as the neutral position on a M/T, and should only be used when the vehicle is stationary for an extended length of time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - “N” NEUTRAL - 1

WARNING

  • Never move the selector lever to the "N" (NEUTRAL) position while driving. A serious accident could occur since you could accidentally move the lever into the "P" (PARK) or "R" (REVERSE) position or you will lose engine braking.
  • On a gradient the engine should be started in the "P" (PARK) position, not in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position.
    ● Always keep your right foot on the brake pedal when shifting into or out of "N" (NEUTRAL), to minimize the risk of loss of control.

“D” DRIVE

This position is for normal driving. The transmission automatically selects a suitable gear ratio for your speed and acceleration.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - “D” DRIVE - 1

CAUTION

● Never shift into the "D" (DRIVE) position from the "R" (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion to avoid transmission damage.

Sports mode

E00603901323

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by gently pushing the selector lever from the "D" (DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A). To return to "D" range operation, gently push the selector lever back into the main gate (B).

In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rapidly simply by moving the selector lever backward and forward. In contrast to a manual transmission, the sports mode allows gear shifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Sports mode - 1
SHIFT DOWN

AA0096339

+ (SHIFT UP)

Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

- (SHIFT DOWN)

Pull the lever backward once to shift down one gear.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - - (SHIFT DOWN) - 1

CAUTION

- In sports mode, the driver must execute upward shifts in accordance with prevailing road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

- By rapidly moving the selector lever backward (SHIFT DOWN) twice, it is possible to skip one gear, i.e., 3^rd to 1^st , 4^th to 2^nd or 5^th to 3^rd . Since sudden engine braking and/or rapid acceleration can cause a loss of traction, downshifts must be made carefully in accordance with the vehicle's speed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

  • In sports mode, only the 4 or 5 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever to the "R" (REVERSE) or "P" (PARK) position as required.
  • To maintain good running performance, the transmission may refuse to perform an upshift when the selector lever is moved to the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine, the transmission may refuse to perform a downshift when the lever is moved to the “- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain vehicle speeds.
  • In sports mode, downward shifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1^st gear is automatically selected.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- When driving away on a slippery road, push the selector lever forward into the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position. This causes the transmission to shift into the 2^rd gear which is better for smooth driving away on a slippery road. Push the selector lever to the “-(SHIFT DOWN)” side to shift back to the 1^st gear.

Sports mode indicator

E00612300498

In sports mode, the currently selected position is indicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instrument panel.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Sports mode indicator - 1

natural_image Diagram of three circular components with internal symbols and a labeled point A, no readable text or labels present.

When a malfunction occurs in the automatic transmission

E00615100152

E00615200238

When the selector lever position indicator blinks while you are driving, there could be a malfunction in the automatic transmission system.

D or through 1 4 5 AA300744

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - When the selector lever position indicator blinks - 2

CAUTION

  • If the selector lever position indicator blinks while you are driving, it is likely that a safety device is operating because of a malfunction in the automatic transmission. We recommend you to have your vehicle inspected as soon as possible.
  • The selector lever position indicator warning function does not operate with the selector lever in the "P" (PARK), "R" (REVERSE) or "N" (NEUTRAL) position.

When the A/T (automatic transmission) fluid temperature warning lamp comes on

F00615300141

The automatic transmission fluid temperature warning lamp comes on when the automatic transmission fluid temperature becomes abnormally high. Normally the warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, and then will go out after a few seconds.

A/T TEMP AA0096355

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - When the A/T (automatic transmission) fluid temperature warning lamp comes on - 2

CAUTION

- If the lamp comes on, reduce the engine speed and stop the vehicle in a safe area. Then set the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position and idle the engine until the warning lamp goes off. When the warning lamp goes off, resume normal driving. If the warning lamp does not go off, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected.

Operation of the automatic transmission

F00604200528

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Operation of the automatic transmission - 1

CAUTION

● Before selecting a gear with the engine running and the vehicle stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the gear is engaged, especially when the engine speed is high, at fast idle or with the air conditioning operating, the brakes should only be released when you are ready to drive away.
● Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at all times.
Using the left foot could cause driver movement delay in case of an emergency.
● To prevent sudden acceleration, never race the engine when shifting from the "P" (PARK) or "N" (NEUTRAL) position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

● Operating the accelerator pedal while the other foot is resting on the brake pedal will affect braking efficiency and may cause premature wear of brake pads.

- Use the selector lever in the correct shift position in accordance with driving conditions. Never coast downhill backward with the driving shift position {"D" (DRIVE) or sports mode} or coast forward with the "R" (REVERSE) position.

The engine stops and the brake pedal effort or the steering wheel handling weight increasing could lead to an accident.

- Do not race the engine with brake pedal pressed when the vehicle is stationary. This can damage the automatic transmission.

Passing acceleration

E00604500329

To gain extra acceleration in "D" (DRIVE) position, push the accelerator to the floor. The automatic transmission will automatically downshift.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Passing acceleration - 1

NOTE

- In "Sports mode", downshifts do not take place when the accelerator is depressed all the way to the floor.

Waiting

E00604600304

For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals, the vehicle can be left in gear and held stationary with the service brake.

For longer waiting periods with the engine running, place the selector lever in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position..

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Waiting - 1

CAUTION

● Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill using the accelerator pedal (without using the brake pedal). Always apply the parking brake and/or service brakes.

● Unexpected acceleration may occur if the selector lever is in a position other than "P" (PARK) or "N" (NEUTRAL). Prior to moving off after having stopped the vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in the "D" (DRIVE) position.

Parking

E00604700262

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position.

If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, always switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Parking - 1

NOTE

- On a slope, be sure to apply the parking brake before moving the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position. If you move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position before applying the parking brake, it may be difficult to disengage the selector lever from the "P" (PARK) position when next you drive the vehicle, requiring application of a strong force to the selector lever to move from the "P" (PARK) position.

When the automatic transmission makes no speed change

If the transmission does not change speeds while driving, or your vehicle does not pick up enough speed when starting on an uphill slope, it may be that there is something unusual happening in the transmission, causing a safety device to activate. We recommend you to have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.

  1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving up-hill, shift the selector lever into 2 ^nd gear of the “Sports mode”. This method might not work depending on the type of transmission malfunction.

  2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level road, move the selector lever back to "D" (DRIVE).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - When the automatic transmission makes no speed change - 1

NOTE

- When the selector lever position indicator in the instrument panel blinks, it means that there is an abnormal condition in the transmission. Refer to “When the selector lever position indicator blinks” on page 6-22.

Easy select 4WD\*

L00614700148

Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive can be made by operating the transfer shift lever (A). Shift the transfer shift lever to an appropriate position according to the road surface conditions. In addition, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp indicates the transfer shift lever shifting state. Refer to "2WD/4WD operation indication lamp" on page 6-27.

Vehicles with manual transmission A Vehicles with automatic transmission A AA580671

Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp

E00614800080

Transfer shift lever position2WD/4WD operation indication lampDriving conditions
2HRear-wheel driveMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 1When driving on dry paved road.
4H4-wheel driveMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 2When driving on rough, sand or snow covered roads.

Easy select 4WD*

Transfer shift lever position2WD/4WD operation indication lampDriving conditions
4LLow range 4-wheel driveMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 3When driving up or down steep hills, on rough or muddy roads (especially when increased torque is required).

□: Illuminate

: Remain off

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 4

NOTE

- On vehicles with automatic transmission, when the transfer shift lever is in "4L", the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear.

CAUTION

  • The “4L” range gives maximum torque for lowspeed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult surfaces. On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not exceed speeds of approximately 70 km/h (43 mph) in “4L” range.
  • Do not drive your vehicle in the "4H" or "4L" on dry paved roads and highways. Doing so may result in excessive tyre wear, increased fuel consumption, and possible noise generation. It may also increase the differential oil temperature, which may damage the drive system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, resulting in oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious problems. On dry paved roads and highways, drive the vehicle in "2H" only.

Transfer shift lever operation

E00614900111

The shift pattern is shown on the transfer shift lever knob.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Transfer shift lever operation - 1

The transfer shift lever should be positioned in accordance with the following operating conditions:

To shift fromToProcedure
Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicleswith automatic transmission
2H 4HThe transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle is either moving or stationary.The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle is either moving or stationary.

Easy select 4WD*

To shift from ToProcedure
Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicleswith automatic transmission
4H 2HWhen the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the transfer shift lever.When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be steered straight ahead, release the accelerator pedal before operating the transfer shift lever.When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating the transfer shift lever.When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be steered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D” (DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal before operating the transfer shift lever.
4H 4LStop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor and operate the transfer shift lever.Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, and operate the transfer shift lever.If operation is made with the selector lever placed in any other position than “N” (NEUTRAL) position, a gear noise may be generated, with a possible failure to shift into a proper gear.
4L 4H

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Transfer shift lever operation - 2

NOTE

  • Shifting of the transfer shift lever between "2H" "4H" should only be done at speeds below 100 km/h (62 mph).
    ● During driving, never attempt to shift from "4H" to "4L".
  • When shifting from "2H" to "4H" in cold weather while the vehicle is in motion, the transmission gear may make some noise. In cold weather, try to shift the gear while the vehicle is stopped.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • There may be a case that the transfer shift lever feels heavy when it is moved from "4H" to "2H" with the steering wheel in turned position.
    This is normal and not any indication of trouble.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

- Do not operate the transfer shift lever while the rear wheels of the vehicle are slipping on snow or ice.

2WD/4WD operation indication lamp

F00615000122

Diagram of a mechanical device with labeled components and an annotated diagram showing a linkage mechanism.

Easy select 4WD\*

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp shows the shifting condition. The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp illuminates at each transfer shift lever position as follows:

“2H” “4H”

Transfer shift lever position2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
2HMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Easy select 4WD\* - 1MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Easy select 4WD\* - 2
Drive mode switching in progressMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Easy select 4WD\* - 3MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Easy select 4WD\* - 4
Transfer shift lever position2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
4HMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Easy select 4WD\* - 5MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Easy select 4WD\* - 6

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Easy select 4WD\* - 7

: Illuminate

: Remain off

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Easy select 4WD\* - 8

NOTE

  • When the transfer shift lever is shifted between 2H 4H, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp does not switch to illuminate or remain off while the selection is in process. Take the following precautions when the indication lamp remains on or off.
  • Keep the steering wheel in the straight ahead position while making range selections. If you attempt to drive forward with the steering wheel turned, gear rattling may occur and the desired range may not actually be selected.
  • When the transfer shift lever is shifted between “211” ↔ “411” while the vehicle is stopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp does not switch to illuminate or remain off while the selection is in process. Drive slowly and normally after confirming that the lamp is switched.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • Do not move the selector lever while the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp is switched.
  • If the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp does not switch after a “2H” “4H” selection has been made with the vehicle moving, hold the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and slowly depress the accelerator pedal several times.

“4H” “4L”

Transfer shift lever position2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
4HMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1
[ami]
Drive mode switching in progressMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2
— —
Transfer shift lever position2WD/4WD opcr- tion indication lamp
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 3
4L

□: Illuminate
: Remain off

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 4

NOTE

- The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp will go out momentarily during shifting process from "4H" to "4L" or vice versa, as the transfer shift lever passes through the neutral position. Be sure to operate the transfer shift lever until the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp illuminates again.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- If, after a "4H" "4L" selection has been made, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp remains off and the desired range is not actually selected, return the transfer shift lever to its previous position. Place the steering wheel in the straight ahead position, drive the vehicle forward, and release the accelerator pedal. Next, hold down the clutch pedal (with manual transmission) or place the selector lever in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position (with automatic transmission) and make the range selection again.

Super select 4WD\*

E00605700214

Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive can be made by operating the transfer shift lever (A). Shift the transfer shift lever to an appropriate position according to the road surface conditions. In addition, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp indicates the transfer shift lever shifting state. Refer to "2WD/4WD operation indication lamp" on page 6-32.

Vehicles with manual transmission
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Super select 4WD\* - 1

natural_image Mechanical diagram showing a lever mechanism with labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond label)

Vehicles with automatic transmission
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Super select 4WD\* - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a hand using a tool to press or install a component, labeled 'A' (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Super select 4WD*

Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
E00605800228

Transfer shift lev-er position2WD/4W D opera-tion indi-cation lampDriving conditions
2HRear-wheel driveMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Super select 4WD\* - 3When driving on dry paved road.
4HFull-time 4-wheel driveMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Super select 4WD\* - 4The basic position for super select 4WD.When driving on dry paved or slippery roads.
4HLcCentre dif-ferential lock en-gaged 4-wheel driveMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Super select 4WD\* - 5When driving on rough, sand or snow cov-cred roads.
Transfer shift lev-er position2WD/4W D opera-tion indi-cation lampDriving conditions
4LLcLow range centre dif-ferential lock en-gaged 4-wheel driveMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Super select 4WD\* - 6When driving up or down steep hills, on rough or muddy roads (es-ppecially when in-creased torque is required).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Super select 4WD\* - 7

: Illuminate

: Remain off

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Super select 4WD\* - 8

NOTE

- On vehicles with automatic transmission, when the transfer shift lever is in "4LLc", the transmission will not shift into the over-drive gear.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

- The "4LLc" range gives maximum torque for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult surfaces. On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not exceed speeds of approximately 70 km/h (43 mph) in "4LLc" range.

- Do not drive your vehicle in the "4HLc" or "4LLc" on dry paved roads and highways. Doing so may result in excessive tyre wear, increased fuel consumption, and possible noise generation. It may also increase the differential oil temperature, which may damage the drive system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, resulting in oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious problems. On dry paved roads and highways, drive the vehicle in "2H" or "4H" only.

Transfer shift lever operation

E00605900173

The shift pattern is shown on the transfer shift lever knob.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Transfer shift lever operation - 1

The transfer shift lever should be positioned in accordance with the following operating conditions:

☐: Not push down the transfer shift lever
: Push down the transfer shift lever

To shift from ToProcedure
Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicleswith automatic transmission
2H 4HThe transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle is either moving or stationary.When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the transfer shift lever.When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be steered straight ahead, and release the accelerator pedal before operating the transfer shift lever.The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle is either moving or stationary.When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating the transfer shift lever.When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be steered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D” (DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal before operating the transfer shift lever.
4H2H or 4HLc
4HLc 4H
4HLc 4LLcStop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor and operate the transfer shift lever while keeping the transfer shift lever pushed down.Keep depressing the clutch pedal while the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp continues to blink.Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, and operate the transfer shift lever while keeping the transfer shift lever pushed down.If operation is made with the selector lever placed in any other position than “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-

Super select 4WD*

To shift from ToProcedure
Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicleswith automatic transmission
4LLc 4HLction, a gear noise may be generated, with a possible failure to shift into a proper gear.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Transfer shift lever operation - 2

NOTE

  • Shifting of the transfer shift lever between “2H” ↔ “4H” should only be done at speeds below 100 km/h (62 mph).
  • During driving, never attempt to shift from "4HLc" to "4LLc".
  • When shifting from “2H” to “4H” in cold weather while the vehicle is in motion, the transmission gear may make some noise. In cold weather, try to shift the gear while the vehicle is stopped.
  • When the transfer shift lever is shifted from "4H" to "4HLc" while the vehicle is stopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp blinks while the selection is in process.
    Drive slowly and normally after confirming that the lamp is illuminated. (Refer to "2WD/4WD operation indication lamp" on page 6-32.)
  • Do not move the selector lever while the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp is blinking.
  • The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp will go out momentarily during shifting process from "4HILc" to "4LLc" or vice versa, as the transfer shift lever passes through the neutral position.
    Be sure to operate the transfer shift lever until the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp illuminates again.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • There may be a case that the transfer shift lever feels heavy when it is moved from "211" to "411" with the steering wheel in turned position.
    This is normal and not any indication of trouble.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

- Do not operate the transfer shift lever while the rear wheels of the vehicle are slipping on snow or ice.

2WD/4WD operation indication lamp

E00625900036

A B C AA0652111

A- Front wheel lamp
B- Centre differential lock lamp
C- Rear wheel lamp

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp shows the shifting condition. The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp comes on at each transfer shift lever position as follows:

“2H” “4H”

Transfer shift lever position2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
2HMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 2
[7062]
Drive mode switching in progressMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 3
[3762]
4HMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 4

“4H” “4HLc”

Transfer shift lever position2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
4HMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 5
[08W6]
Drive mode switching in progressMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 6
[07T0]
4HLcMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 7

“4HLc” “4LLc”

Transfer shift lever position2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
4HLcMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 8brack
Drive mode switching in progressMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 9borr
4LLcMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 10

[NO TEXT]
Blink
:
Illuminate
-
Remain off
[Figure]
Blink
-
: Illuminate
m = 311
: Remain off
[NO TEXT]
Blink
[NO TEXT]
: Illuminate
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), if the GT contains lines used for stylistic emphasis or as background (like ruled paper), the OCR result must ignore them. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is incorrect because underscores are not equivalent to a solid line and are not permitted under the “Stylistic/Background Lines (Ignore)” rule. Outputting underscores for a stylistic line violates the rule and constitutes an error. Therefore, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
: Remain off

Rear differential lock*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp - 11

NOTE

● The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp blinks while the selection is in process. Take the following precautions when the indication lamp is blinking or remains off.
- Keep the steering wheel in the straight ahead position while making range selections. If you attempt to drive forward with the steering wheel turned, gear rattling may occur and the desired range may not actually be selected.
- If you move the transfer shift lever from "411" to "411Lc" while the vehicle is stationary, keep your speed initially very low when you subsequently make a standing start. Before driving at normal speeds, confirm that the centre differential lock lamp has changed from blinking to steady illumination.
- If you move the transfer shift lever from "4HLC" to "4H" and the centre differential lock lamp does not stop blinking, place the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and slowly depress the accelerator pedal several times.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • If you move the transfer shift lever from "411" to "211" and the front wheel lamp does not stop blinking, confirm safety around the vehicle then accelerate, decelerate, and reverse until the front wheel lamp goes off. When the front wheel lamp goes off, you can then proceed to drive the vehicle. If you accelerate, decelerate, and reverse but the front wheel lamp still does not stop blinking, return the transfer shift lever to "411" then have your vehicle inspected.
  • When you move the transfer shift lever from "411" to "411Lc", there may be a slight delay before the centre differential lock lamp illuminates.

Rear differential lock\*

100606200115

If one wheel starts to spin freely and the vehicle becomes stuck and cannot be freed even using 4-wheel drive, the rear differential lock switch (A) can be used to activate the rear differential lock for extra traction.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Rear differential lock\* - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and control panel (no text or symbols)

Operating the rear differential lock

  1. Move the transfer shift lever to "4L" or "4H" position (easy select 4WD),
    "4LLc" or "4HLc" position (super select 4WD).
  2. To activate the rear differential lock, press the rear differential lock switch (1).

  3. To deactivate the rear differential lock, press the rear differential lock switch (2).

R/D LOCK 1 2 AA0052137

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Operating the rear differential lock - 2

CAUTION

● Operate the rear differential lock switch after the wheels are stopped. Operating the switch with the wheels turning may cause the vehicle to dart in unexpected directions.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

● The rear differential lock does not operate when the transfer shift lever is in "2H" position (easy select 4WD), "2H" or "4H" position (super select 4WD).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- When the rear differential is locked with the transfer shift lever in "4L" or "4H" position (easy select 4WD), "4LLc" or "4HLc" position (super select 4WD) changing the shif lever to "2H" position (easy select 4WD), "2H" or "4H" position (super select 4WD) makes the rear differential unlock automatically.

The rear differential lock indication lamp

ED060630035D

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the rear differential lock indication lamp (A) in the meter cluster illuminates for a few seconds then indicates the rear differential lock's operating status (activated or deactivated).

Easy select 4WD R/D LOCK A AA0052225

Super select 4WD AA0052238

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - The rear differential lock indication lamp - 3

NOTE

- The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp also illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. Refer to "2WD/4WD operation indication lamp" on pages 6-27, 6-32. The status of the rear differential lock (resulting from depression of the rear differential lock switch) is shown by blinking or steady illumination of the rear differential lock indication lamp.

The operation state of rear differential lockRear differential lock indication lamp
Easy select 4WDSuper select 4WD

Rear differential lock*

The operation state of rear differential lockRear differential lock indication lamp
Rear differential lock deactivatedMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2
[1980][1980]
Switching in progressMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 3MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 4
[1750][1750]
Rear differential lock activatedMITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 5MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 6

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 7

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 8

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 9

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 10

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 11

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 12

NOTE

  • The indication lamp blinks while the rear differential lock is being switched between its activated and deactivated conditions. When the switching operation is complete, the indication lamp is either illuminated steadily or not illuminated.
  • On vehicles with the active stability & traction control (ASTC) and anti-lock brake system (ABS), the ASTC and ABS functions are suspended while the rear differential lock is activated. ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indication lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated while these functions are suspended. It does not indicate a problem. When the rear differential lock is disengaged, these lamps go out and function again. Refer to “ABS warning lamp” on page 6-46, “ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indication lamp” on page 6-49.
  • On vehicles with the anti-lock brake system (ABS), the ABS function is suspended while the rear differential lock is activated. The ABS warning lamp is illuminated while ABS functionality is suspended. Refer to “ABS warning lamp” on page 6-46.
  • If the indication lamp continues blinking after the switch has been pressed to deactivate the rear differential lock, hold the steering wheel in the straight ahead position then slowly depress and release the accelerator pedal several times.
  • If the indication lamp continues blinking after the switch has been pressed to activate

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

the rear differential lock, bear in mind the following instructions:

  • If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h (7 mph) or higher, decelerate to a speed of 6 km/h (4 mph) or lower. The indication lamp will illuminate steadily and the rear differential lock will be activated.
  • If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h (7 mph) or lower, turn the steering wheel from side to side until the indication lamp illuminates steadily. If the vehicle is stuck in soft ground, make sure the area around the vehicle is clear then repeatedly attempt to drive forward and backward. The indication lamp will illuminate steadily and the rear differential lock will be activated.

Examples of effective use of the rear differential lock

E0D606400058

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Examples of effective use of the rear differential lock - 1

CAUTION

- Use the rear differential lock only as an emergency measure when the vehicle is stuck and cannot be freed with the transfer shift lever in "4L" or "4H" position (easy select 4WD) or in "4LLc" or "4HILc" position (super select 4WD). Deactivate the rear differential lock immediately after using it.

When one of the wheels has fallen in a ditch

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - When one of the wheels has fallen in a ditch - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car on an inclined ramp, no text or symbols present

When driving on rocky roads

When the vehicle is unable to move because one of the wheels is suspended in the air.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - When driving on rocky roads - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car with wheels and grass at the base (no text or symbols)

When getting out of snow

When the vehicle is unable to get going because one of the wheels is on the snow and the other on a paved road.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - When getting out of snow - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a pickup truck with wheels and water spray (no text or symbols)

Examples of incorrect use of the rear differential lock

E00606500059

WARNING

- If the "4L" or "4H" position (easy select 4WD), "4LLc" or "4HLc" position (super select 4WD) is selected along with the rear differential lock, the following phenomena appear and it is very dangerous. Please be sure to release the rear differential lock on normal roads.

WARNING

- If the rear differential lock is used by mistake when driving on a paved road: With the rear differential lock on, the power to drive the vehicle straight ahead becomes very strong, which may make it difficult to turn the steering wheel.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car driving on a mountain road with trees and hills in the background (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- If the rear differential lock is used by mistake when turning a curve or making a right or left turn at a crossing or the like: The vehicle is unable to make a turn and may go straight ahead.

4-wheel drive operation
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Simple line drawing of a car on a road with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car driving on a mountain road with trees and hills in the background (no text or symbols)

WARNING

  • If the rear differential lock is used by mistake except when making an emergency escape on snow or frozen road: It becomes difficult to make a steady turn.
  • In the case where the condition of the road is different for the right tyre to drive from the left tyre (such as one tyre on paved road and the other on ice), direction of the vehicle may change abruptly when engine braking or accelerating. Do not use the rear differential lock except when making an emergency escape on a snow or frozen road, but drive with 4WD.

4-wheel drive operation

E00606601028

By selecting 4-wheel drive, both axles of the vehicle are rigidly connected with each other. This improves the traction characteristics. When turning sharp corners or moving forward and backward repeatedly, however, the drive line is stressed, which is felt as a braking effect. A 4-wheel drive vehicle can accelerate more quickly and smoothly. However, note that the braking distance is not shorter than that of a rear-wheel drive vehicle. When using 4-wheel drive on rough roads (snow, mud, sand, etc.), it is important to operate the vehicle correctly.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 4-wheel drive operation - 1

NOTE

● The driving posture should be more upright and closer to the wheel than usual; adjust the seat to a good position for easy steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear the seat belt.
● After driving on rough roads, check each part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly with water. Refer to the "Vehicle care" section and "Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation" on page 6-41.

Driving on dry paved road and highway

Select "2H" position (easy select 4WD), "2H" or "4H" position (super select 4WD) to drive on the dry paved road. Especially on dry highway, never select the "4H" or "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "4HLc" or "4LLc" position (super select 4WD).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Driving on dry paved road and highway - 1

CAUTION

- Selecting "4H" or "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "41Lc" or "4LLc" position (super select 4WD) to drive on dry paved road will increase the fuel consumption with possible noise generation and early tyre wear. It may also increase the differential oil temperature, resulting in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious faults.

Driving on snowy or icy roads

Set the transfer shift lever to "4H" or "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "4H" or "4HLc" position (super select 4WD) in accordance with the road conditions, and then gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Driving on snowy or icy roads - 1

NOTE

- The use of snow tyres and/or tyre chains is recommended. - Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, avoid sudden braking, and use engine braking (downshifting).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

● Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration, and sharp turning; such operations could cause skidding and spinouts.

Driving on sandy or muddy roads

Set the transfer shift lever to "4H" or "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "4HLc" or "4LLc" position (super select 4WD) and then gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant as possible, and drive at low speed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Driving on sandy or muddy roads - 1

CAUTION

- Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly on sandy surfaces. In comparison with normal road surfaces, the engine and other drive-system components are put under excessive strain when driving on such a surface, and this could lead to accidents. - If any of following conditions occur while the vehicle is being driven, immediately park your vehicle in a safe place and follow these procedures: - The needle in the temperature gauge approaches the overheating zone. Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-04.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION

- Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning lamp comes on. Refer to "When the A/T (automatic transmission) fluid temperature warning lamp comes on" on page 6-23.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

WARNING

- When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that the area around the vehicle is clear of people and physical objects. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly launch forward or backward, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

NOTE

- Avoid sudden braking, acceleration, and turning; such operations could result in the vehicle becoming stuck. - If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or muddy roads, it can often be moved a rocking motion. Move the selector lever rhythmically between the "D" (DRIVE) and "R" (REVERSE) position (with M/T, between 1^st and Reverse), while applying slight pressure to the accelerator pedal.

4-wheel drive operation

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - 4-wheel drive operation - 1

NOTE

- It is recommended to start the vehicle with parking brake partially, but not completely applied by slightly pulling the parking brake lever.

After the vehicle has become free, do not forget to release the parking brake.

- If it is necessary to drive in extremely muddy conditions, the use of tyre chains is recommended. Because the extent of muddy conditions is difficult to judge and the vehicle could become bogged down very deeply, operation should be at a low speed. If possible, get out of the vehicle and check the conditions ahead before proceeding.

● Driving over roads in coastal areas or roads on which anti-skid preparations have been spread can cause rust on the vehicle; was the vehicle thoroughly as soon as possible after such use.

Climbing sharp grades

Set the transfer shift lever to "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "4LLc" position (super select 4WD) to maximize the engine torque.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Climbing sharp grades - 1

WARNING

- Go straight up. Do not try to traverse across a steep slope.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

WARNING

- If you begin to lose traction, case off the accelerator pedal and gently turn the steering wheel alternatively left and right to regain adequate traction again.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

NOTE

  • Choose as smooth a slope as possible with few stones or other obstacles.
    ● Before attempting to drive up the slope, walk up it to confirm that the vehicle can handle the grade.

Descending sharp grades

Set the transfer shift lever to "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "4LLc" position (super select 4WD), use the engine brake (down-shifting) and descend slowly.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Descending sharp grades - 1

WARNING

● Avoid snaking down a sharp grade. Descend the grade as straight as possible.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

NOTE

- When descending a sharp grade, if the brakes are applied suddenly because of an obstacle encountered, control of the vehicle could be lost. Before descending the slope, walk down it and confirm the path.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

● Before descending a grade, it is necessary to choose the appropriate gear. Avoid changing gears or depressing the clutch while descending the grade.
● MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsible to the operator for any damage or injury caused or liability incurred by improper and negligent operation of a vehicle. All techniques of vehicle operation described herein depend on the skill and experience of the operator and other participating parties and any deviation from the recommended operation instructions above is at their own risk.

Turning sharp corners

When turning a sharp corner in "4H" or "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "4IILc" or "4LLc" position (super select 4WD) at low speed, a slight difference in steering may be experienced similar to as if the brakes were applied. This is called tight corner braking and results from each of the 4 tyres being at a different distance from the corner.

The phenomenon is peculiar to 4-wheel drive vehicles. If this occurs, either straighten the steering wheel, or change to rear-wheel drive.

Crossing a stream

4-wheel drive vehicles are not necessarily waterproof. If the electrical circuits become wet, further operation of the vehicle will be impossible; therefore, avoid crossing streams unless absolutely necessary. If crossing a stream is unavoidable, use the following procedure:

  1. Check depths of a stream and geographical features before attempting to cross a stream and ford the stream where the water is as shallow as practicable.
  2. Set the transfer shift lever to "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "4LLc" position (super select 4WD).
  3. Drive slowly at a speed of approximately 5 km/h (3 mph) to avoid splashing too much water.

CAUTION

● Never cross a stream where the water is deep.

Do not change gears while crossing the stream.

Frequent crossing of streams can adversely affect the life span of the vehicle; we recommend you to take the necessary measures to prepare, inspect, and repair the vehicle.

After crossing a stream, apply the brakes to be sure they are functioning properly. If the brakes are wet and not functioning properly, dry them out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal.

Inspect each part of the vehicle carefully.

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

E00606700048

After operating the vehicle in rough road conditions, be sure to perform the following inspection and maintenance procedures:

  • Check that the vehicle has not been damaged by rocks, gravel, etc.
  • Carefully wash the vehicle with water. After washing, drive the vehicle slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal in order to dry out the brakes. If the brakes still do not function properly, we recommend you to have the brakes checked as soon as possible.
  • Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clogging the radiator core.
    ● After crossing a stream, be sure to have the following items inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point and take the necessary measures.

  • Check the brake system and, if necessary, have it serviced.

  • Check the engine, transmission, transfer, and differential oil or grease level and turbidity. If the oil or grease is milky, it indicates water contamination. Replace it with new oil or grease.
  • Grease the propeller shaft.
  • Check the inside of the vehicle. If ingress of water is found, dry the carpet etc.
  • Inspect the headlamps. If the head-lamp bulb is flooded with water, we recommend you to have it drained.

Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles

E00606800368

Tyres and wheels

Since the driving torque can be applied to the 4 wheels, the performance of the vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is greatly affected by the condition of the tyres.

Pay close attention to the tyres.

- Install specified tyres on all wheels. Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page 11-19.

Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles

  • Be sure to fit all 4 tyres and wheels of In the following cases, transport the vehicle the same size and type. using a tow truck.
    When replacement of any of the tyres or wheels is necessary, replace all of them.
    ● All tyres should be rotated whenever the wear difference between the front and rear tyres is recognizable.
    In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a tow truck.
    ● The engine runs but the vehicle does not move or abnormal noise is produced.
  • Inspection of the vehicle's underside reveals that oil or some other fluid is leaking.

Good vehicle performance cannot be expected if there is a difference in wear between tyres. Refer to "Tyre rotation" on page 10-14.

- Check the tyre inflation pressure regularly.

CAUTION

● Always use tyres of the same size, same type, and same brand, and which have no wear differences. Using tyres of different size, type, brands or degree of wear, will increase the differential oil temperature, resulting in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious faults.

Towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service.

Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in "Towing" on page 8-22.

A
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Towing - 1

B
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Towing - 2

c
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Towing - 3
D

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Towing - 4
AA2001113

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Towing - 5

CAUTION

  • Be sure to shift the transfer shift lever to "2H" position and transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type A, C or D) as illustrated.
    Never try to tow with the transfer shift lever in "4H" or "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "4H", "4HLc" or "4LLc" position (super select 4WD) and with the front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A or B) as illustrated. This could result in damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing.
    If you cannot shift the transfer shift lever to "2H" position or the transmission is malfunctioning or damaged, transport the vehicle with all the wheels on a carriage (Type C or D) as illustrated.

Jacking up a 4-wheel drive vehicle

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Jacking up a 4-wheel drive vehicle - 1

WARNING

  • Do not crank the engine while jacking up the vehicle.
    The tyre on the ground may turn and the vehicle may roll off the jack.

Clutch operation

Quick or slight clutch engagement made while the engine is running at high speed will cause damage to the clutch and transmission because the tractive force is very great.

Operate the pedal slowly and positively.

Limited-slip differential\*

E00606900037

A limited-slip differential is applied for the rear wheel differential only. The features of this limited-slip differential are described below:

Just as with a conventional differential, the wheel on one side is allowed to turn at a different speed from the wheel on the other side when the vehicle is cornering. The difference between the limited-slip differential and a conventional differential is that if the wheel on one side of the vehicle loses traction, a greater amount of torque is applied to the wheel on the other side to improve traction.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Limited-slip differential\* - 1

NOTE

● Even if there is a difference in the amount of traction the wheels can get, if both of them are spinning, the limited-slip differential will not be effective.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

● Never start the engine while one of the rear wheels is jacked up and the other in contact with the ground; doing so may cause the vehicle to jump forward.
- When attempting to extract the vehicle from snow, mud, etc., and the engine is run continuously at high speed, the limited-slip differential will be adversely affected.

Braking

E00607001928

All the parts of the brake system are critical to safety. We recommend you to have the vehicle checked at regular intervals according to the service booklet.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Braking - 1

CAUTION

- Avoid driving habits that cause heavy braking and never “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. It causes brake overheating and fade.

Brake assist system*

Brake system

The service brake is divided into two brake circuits. And your vehicle is equipped with power brakes. If one brake circuit fails, the other is available to stop the vehicle. If you should lose the power assist for some reason, the brakes will still work. In these situations, even if the brake pedal moves down to the very end of its possible stroke or resists being depressed, keep depressing the brake pedal down harder and further than usual; stop driving as soon as possible and have the brake system repaired.

WARNING

  • Do not turn off the engine while your vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the engine while driving, the power assistance for the braking system will stop working and your brakes will not work effectively.
  • If the power assist is lost or if either brake hydraulic system stops working properly, have your vehicle checked immediately.

Warning lamp

The brake warning lamp illuminates to indicate a fault in the braking system. Refer to "Brake warning lamp" on page 5-08.

When brakes are wet

Check the brake system while driving at a low speed immediately after starting, especially when the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally.

A film of water can be formed on the brake discs or brake drums and prevent normal braking after driving in heavy rain or through large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal.

When driving downhill

It is important to take advantage of the engine braking by shifting to a lower shift position while driving on steep downhill roads in order to prevent the brakes from overheating.

WARNING

  • Do not leave any objects near the brake pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the full pedal stroke that would be necessary in an emergency. Make sure that the pedal can be operated freely at all times. Make sure the floor mat is securely held in place.

Brake pads and linings

  • Avoid hard braking situations. New brakes need to be broken-in by moderate use for the first 200 km (124 miles).
    ● The disc brakes are provided with a warning device which emits a shrieking metallic sound while braking if the brake pads have reached their wear limit.
    If you hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced.

WARNING

● Driving with worn brake pads will make it harder to stop, and can cause an accident.

Brake assist system\*

E00627000392

The brake assist system is a device assisting drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal firmly when it is necessary to do so (such as in emergency stop situations) and provides greater braking force.

If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the brakes will be applied with more force than usual.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Brake assist system\* - 1

CAUTION

● The brake assist system is not a device designed to exercise braking force greater than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a sufficient distance between vehicles in front of you without relying too much on the brake assist system.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

  • Once the brake assist system is operational, it maintains great braking force even if the brake pedal is lightly released. To stop its operation, completely remove your foot from the brake pedal.
  • When the brake assist system is in use while driving, you may feel the brake pedal attempt to resist, the pedal moves in small motions in conjunction with the operation noise, or the vehicle body and the steering wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake assist system is operating normally and does not indicate faulty operation. Continue to firmly depress the brake pedal.
  • When the active stability & traction control (ASTC) indication lamp is illuminated, the brake assist system may not function.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)\*

E00607100775

Environmental conditions can have an effect on braking. During sudden braking when there is snow, ice, oil, water etc. on the road surface, a skid may occur. In this situation, steering control and braking effectiveness is reduced and the stopping distance is increased. The vehicle may also go into an uncontrolled spin.

The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking during braking, thus maintaining directional stability, ensuring controllability and providing optimum braking force.

Driving hints

  • With ABS fitted, steering during sudden braking (when the ABS functions) differs slightly from when the brakes are not being applied. Steer the vehicle carefully in these conditions.
    ● Always maintain the same distance from the vehicle in front of you as you would for a vehicle not equipped with ABS.

Compared with vehicles not fitted with ABS, your vehicle may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

- Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads.

  • Driving with tyre chains installed.
  • Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.
  • Driving on bumpy roads or other poor driving surfaces.

  • Operation of ABS is not restricted to situations where brakes are applied suddenly. This system may also operate to prevent wheel lock when you are driving over manholes, steel road-work plates, or the vehicle is driven over steps or level differences in the road, road markings, or other surfaces which are difficult for the wheels to grip.

  • When the ABS is activated, you may feel the brake pedal pulsation and hear a characteristic noise. Also at this time, you may feel as if the pedal attempts to resist being depressed.

In this situation, to let the ABS work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake. This pumping will result in reduced braking performance.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Driving hints - 1

CAUTION

  • Even the ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. It cannot for instance avoid accidents that may result from excessive speed on bends or following another vehicle too closely or aquaplaning. It should remain the driver's task to observe safety precautions to judge speeds and brake applications correctly in such conditions.
  • Be sure to use tyres of the same type and size on 4 wheels. If tyre types or sizes are mixed, ABS may not function normally.
    ● Never install a limited-slip differential, which is not a MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine part, as the ABS may not function normally.
    We recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

ABS warning lamp

E00607201164

The ABS warning lamp should illuminate when the ignition switch is turned "ON", and should go off in a few seconds.

ABS AA0041348

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - ABS warning lamp - 2

CAUTION

- If the warning lamp stays on or does not illuminate when you start the vehicle, it indicates that the ABS is not functioning and that only the standard brake system is in operation. (In this condition the standard hydraulic brake system will still function.) We recommend you to have your vehicle inspected as soon as possible.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

  • On vehicles with the rear differential lock ABS and the active stability & traction control (ASTC) functions are suspended while the rear differential lock is activated.
    ASTC indication lamp, Active Stability Control function OFF indication lamp, ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp are illuminated while these functions are suspended.
    It does not indicate a problem. When the rear differential lock is disengaged, these lamps go out and function again.
    Refer to "ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indication lamp" on page 6-49.
    ● On vehicles with rear differential lock, ABS functionality is suspended while the rear differential lock is operating.
    The ABS warning lamp is illuminated while ABS functionality is suspended. It does not indicate a problem. When the rear differential lock is disengaged, the ABS warning lamp goes off and the ABS functions again. Refer to "Rear differential lock" on page 6-34.

If the warning lamp illuminates while driving

E00607302436

If only the ABS warning lamp illuminates

● Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Restart the engine and check to see whether the lamp goes out after a few minutes driving; if it then remains off during driving, there is no problem.
However, if the lamp does not go out, or if it lights up again when the vehicle is driven, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
● The ABS warning lamp can illuminate if the battery voltage is insufficient when the engine is started. In this case, it does not indicate an ABS fault.
Charge the battery by allowing the engine to idle for a while.
If the battery has been charged but the ABS warning lamp continues to illuminate or illuminates intermittently, have the vehicle inspected.

If the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp illuminate at the same time

The ABS and brake force distribution function will not work, so hard braking could make the vehicle unstable.

Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - If the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp illuminate at the same time - 1

NOTE

  • Immediately after the vehicle starts moving after engine start up, a whining sound of a motor will be heard from the engine compartment. If the brake pedal is depressed at that moment, you can feel the brake pedal pulsating.
    This pulsation is due to the self-diagnosis operation of the ABS and does not indicate a malfunction.
    ● After driving on snowy roads, remove any snow and ice which may have become adhered to the wheel areas.
    When doing this, be careful not to damage the wheel speed sensors (A) and cables loca-

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

ted at each wheel on vehicles equipped with an ABS.

Front
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car wheel assembly with a coiled cable and labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond labels)

Rear
MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2

natural_image Mechanical component diagram showing a wheel assembly with concentric rings and labeled point A (no text or symbols beyond label)

● The ABS becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 7 km/h (4 mph).

Power steering system

Power steering system

E00607400387

The power steering system operates while the engine is running. It helps reduce the effort needed to turn the steering wheel. The power steering system has mechanical steering capability in case the power assist is lost. If the power assist is lost for some reason, you will still be able to steer your vehicle, but you will notice it takes much more effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected at an authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS service point.

WARNING

- Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is moving. Stopping the engine would make the steering wheel extremely hard to turn, possibly resulting in an accident.

CAUTION

- Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the way in one direction. This can cause damage to the power steering system.

Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)\*

E00616700344

The active stability & traction control (ASTC) takes overall control of the anti-lock brake system, traction control function and Active Stability Control function to help maintain the vehicle's control and traction. Please read this section in conjunction with the page on the anti-lock brake system, traction control function and Active Stability Control function.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) → p. 6-45 Active Traction Control function → p. 6-49 Active Stability Control function → p. 6-49

CAUTION

  • Do not over-rely on the ASTC. This system, like any other system, has limits and cannot help you to maintain traction and control of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driving may lead to accidents. Always drive carefully, taking into account the traffic, road and environmental conditions.
  • Be sure to use the same specified type and size of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the ASTC may not work correctly.

NOTE

● After your vehicle is driven a short distance after starting the engine, a click is heard from the engine compartment; however, this is only the sound of ASTC being checked.
- Some vibration will be felt in the vehicle body and a whining sound of a motor will be heard from the engine compartment when the ASTC functions. This is a normal result of the ASTC operation, and does not indicate a malfunction.
● The ASTC does not operate while the ABS warning lamp is illuminated.
- On vehicles with the rear differential lock, the ASTC and ABS functions are suspended while the rear differential lock is activated. ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indication lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated while these functions are suspended. It does not indicate a problem. When the rear differential lock is disengaged, these lamps go out and function again.
Refer to "ABS warning lamp" on page 6-46, "ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indication lamp" on page 6-49.

Driving hints

E00616800039

When extricating the vehicle from mud, sand or fresh snow, you may find that operation of the ASTC prevents the engine speed from increasing in response to depression of the accelerator pedal. If this happens and the vehicle remains stuck as a result, deactivate the ASC function by pressing the "ASC OFF" switch. The vehicle will then be easier to extricate. (Brake control of the ATC function is still working to prevent wheel spins when the ASC function is deactivated by pressing the "ASC OFF" switch.)

Active Stability Control function

F00616900115

The Active Stability Control function is designed to improve the vehicle's stability by restraining its tendency to slip sideways (for example, when rounding a curve in slippery conditions, or when the driver takes rapid steering action to avoid an obstacle). It works by controlling the engine output and brake on each wheel.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Active Stability Control function - 1

NOTE

● On vehicles with rear differential locks, the Active Stability Control function does not operate when the rear differential lock is activated.

"ASC OFF" switch

The Active Stability Control function is automatically activated when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. You can deactivate the system by pressing the "ASC OFF" switch when the vehicle speed is below 40 km/h (25 mph). To reactivate the Active Stability Control function, press the ASC OFF switch again. It is strongly recommended that the Active Stability Control function normally be kept activated.

Type 1 Type 2 AA3008760

OKTE15E3

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - "ASC OFF" switch - 2

NOTE

- If the vehicle speed increases to about 120 km/h (74 mph) with the Active Stability Control function deactivated, the Active Stability Control function automatically starts operating. To subsequently stop the Active Stability Control function, stop the vehicle and press the ASC OFF switch again.

Active Traction Control function

E00617000025

On slippery surfaces, active traction control function prevents the drive wheels from excessive spinning, thus helping the vehicle to start moving from a stop. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle turns at accelerated speeds.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Active Traction Control function - 1

CAUTION

- When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy road, be sure to install snow tyres and drive the vehicle at moderate speeds.

ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indication lamp

F00617100114

The Active Stability Control function and active traction control function share the same indication lamp.

Starting and driving

Cruise control\*

The indication lamps should illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and should go off after a few seconds. If the indication lamps stay on or do not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected as soon as possible.

indication lamp blinks when the Active Stability Control function or active traction control function is operating.
indication lamp is illuminated when the Active Stability Control function is OFF.

OFF AA0113306

CAUTION

- When Indication lamp blinks, Active Stability Control function or active traction control function is operating, which means that the road is slippery or that your vehicle's wheels are slipping excessively. If this happens, drive slower with less accelerator input.

CAUTION

- If an abnormal condition occurs in the system while driving, the Indication lamp will illuminate.

In these cases, follow these procedures:

  • If the temperature in the braking system continues to increase due to continuous brake control on a slippery road surface, the Indication lamp will illuminate, and operation of the Active Stability Control function and active traction control function will be suspended to protect the brake system. (Normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.) Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the temperature in the braking system has come down, the Indication lamp will go off and the Active Stability Control function and active traction control function will start operating again.
  • If the indication lamp does not go out even though the above procedure is followed, there could be a problem in the system.

Stop the engine and start the engine again and check whether the indication lamp goes out. If the indication lamp goes out, there is no abnormal condition.

If the Indication lamp illuminates even after your vehicle is driven a short distance after restarting the engine, we recommend you to have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Two line drawings of pickup trucks with cars, no text or symbols present

CAUTION

- If the vehicle is towed with the ignition switch in the "ON" position and only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, the ASTC may operate, resulting in an accident. When towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position. When towing the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, keep the ignition switch in the "ACC" position. Refer to "Towing" on page 8-22.

Cruise control\*

E00609100779

Cruise control is an automatic speed control system that keeps a set speed. It can be activated at about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Cruise control\* - 1

CAUTION

  • When you do not wish to drive at a set speed, turn off the cruise control for safety.
  • Do not use cruise control when driving conditions will not allow you to stay at the same speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
  • On vehicles with manual transmission, do not move the gearshift lever to the "N" (Neutral) position while driving at a set speed without depressing the clutch pedal. The engine will run too fast and might be damaged.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

NOTE

● Cruise control may not be able to keep your speed on uphills or downhills.
- Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. You may use the accelerator pedal if you want to stay at your set speed.
- Your speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep downhill. You must use the brake to control your speed. As a result, the set speed driving is deactivated.

Cruise control switches

E00624100103

Diagram of a steering wheel with labeled sections A, B, C, D and an inset showing internal components.

A- "ON OFF" switch

Used to turn on and off the cruise control.

B- "COAST SET" switch

Used to reduce the set speed and to set the desired speed.

C- "ACC RES" switch

Used to increase the set speed and to return to the original set speed.

D- "CANCEL" switch

Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - D- "CANCEL" switch - 1

NOTE

  • When operating the cruise control switches, press the cruise control switches correctly. The set speed driving may be deactivated automatically if two or more switches of the cruise control are pressed at the same time.

To activate

F006093D0771

  1. With the ignition switch in the "ON" position, press the "ON OFF" switch (A) to turn on the cruise control. The "CRUISE" indication lamp in the meter cluster will come on.

CRUISE A AA3087008

Cruise control*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To activate - 2

NOTE

  • If the cruise control is on when the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position, cruise control will be on automatically the next time you start the engine. The "CRUISE" indication lamp will also be on.
  • If the battery voltage is insufficient, the memory data for the cruise control may be erased.

As a result, the "CRUISE" indication lamp may not come on when you restart the engine.

If this happens, press the "ON OFF" switch once again to turn on the cruise control.

  1. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired speed, then press and release the "COAST SET" switch (B) when the "CRUISE" indication lamp is illuminated. The vehicle will then maintain the desired speed.

A0096371

Starting and driving

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2

NOTE

- When you release the "COAST SET" switch, the vehicle speed will be set.

To increase the set speed

1-00609400570

There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.

"ACC RES" switch

Press and hold the "ACC RES" switch (C) while driving at the set speed, and your speed will then gradually increase.

When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your new cruising speed is now set.

AA0096384

To increase your speed in small amounts, press the "ACC RES" switch for less than about 1 second and release it. Each time you press the "ACC RES" switch, your vehicle will go about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

OKTE15E3

Accelerator pedal

While driving at the set speed, use the accelerator pedal to reach your desired speed and then press the "COAST SET" switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Accelerator pedal - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a car interior panel with a hand valve and labeled component B (no text or symbols beyond labels)

To decrease the set speed

ED0609500500

There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.

"COAST SET" switch

Press and hold the "COAST SET" switch (B) while driving at the set speed, and your speed will slow down gradually.

When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your new cruising speed is now set.

AA006371

To slow down your speed in small amounts, press the "COAST SET" switch for less than about 1 second and release it. Each time you press the "COAST SET" switch, your vehicle will slow down by about 1.6km / h (1 mph).

Brake pedal

While driving at the set speed, use the brake pedal, which disengages the cruise control, then press the "COAST SET" switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed.

AA0096414

To temporarily increase or decrease the speed

E00619500154

To temporarily increase the speed

Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When you release the pedal, you will return to your set speed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To temporarily increase the speed - 1

natural_image Medical illustration of a surgical procedure on a patient's ear (no text or labels)

To temporarily decrease the speed

Depress the brake pedal to decrease the speed. To return to the previously set speed, press the "ACC RES" switch (C).

Cruise control\*

Refer to "To resume the set speed" on page 6-54.

Technical diagram showing car interior components with labeled parts and directional arrow

To deactivate

100609701088

The set speed driving can be deactivated as follows:

  • Press the "ON OFF" switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned off.)
  • Press the "CANCEL" switch (D).
    ● Depress the brake pedal.

AA0096430

Starting and driving

The set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any of the following ways.

  • When you depress the clutch pedal (on vehicles with M/T).
  • When your speed slows to about 15 km/h (9 mph) or more below the set speed because of a hill, etc.
  • When your speed slows to about 40 km/h (25 mph) or less.
  • When the active stability & traction control (ASTC) starts operating. (if so equipped)
    Refer to "Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)" on page 6-48.

WARNING

  • On vehicles with A/T, although, the set speed driving will be deactivated when shifting to the "N" (NEUTRAL) position, never move the selector lever to the "N" (NEUTRAL) position while driving.
    You would have no engine braking and could cause a serious accident.

Also, the set speed driving may be deactivated as follows:

- When the engine speed rises and approaches the tachometer's red zone (the red-coloured part of the tachometer dial).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - WARNING - 1

CAUTION

- When the set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any situation other than those listed above, there may be a system malfunction. Press the "ON-OFF" switch to turn off the cruise control and have it inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

To resume the set speed

E00609800561

If the set speed driving is deactivated by the condition described in "To deactivate" on page 6-54, you can resume the previously set speed by pressing the "ACC RES" switch (C) while driving at a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or higher.

c AA0096384

Under either of the following conditions, however, using the switch does not allow you

to resume the previously set speed. In these situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:

● The "ON OFF" switch is pressed.
● The ignition switch is turned OFF.
● “CRUISE” indication lamp is turned OFF.

Cargo loads

F(006099)1123

Cargo loads precautions

CAUTION

- When loading luggage, be careful to the following.

  • Stow cargo and luggage in the cargo area whenever possible.
  • Distribute cargo or luggage evenly not to be unbalanced in weight.
  • Do not place cargo or luggage on the instrument panel.

Also, do not stack up cargo or luggage on the front passenger's seat or the rear seat. Having the driver's vision blocked, and your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if you suddenly have to brake can cause a serious accident or injury.

Trailer towing

L00610001674

In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, when having a trailer towing device mounted that meets all relevant regulations in your area, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

The regulations concerning the towing of a trailer may differ from country to country.

You are advised to obey the regulations in each area.

CAUTION

● Danger of Accident! A towing bar should be fitted according to MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.

NOTE

- If you are going to tow a trailer, pay careful attention to the following points.

Maximum towable weight with brake and maximum trailer-nose weight

Never exceed the maximum towable weight with brake and the maximum trailer-nose weight as listed in the specifications. (Refer to "Vehicle weight" on page 11-11.)

If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than 1,000 m above sea-level, reduce your weight by 10 % of the gross combination weight for every increase of 1,000 m above sea-level, as the engine output is lowered owing to decrease in atmospheric pressure.

Towing bar mounting specifications

See the following table for fixing points (A) for the towing bar.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Towing bar mounting specifications - 1

Trailer towing

Single cab, Double cab A 15 16 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 10 11 12 13 14 AA4000181

Trailer towing

Club cabSingle cab, Double cab (Vehicles without long bed)Double cab (Vehicles with long bed)
1 30 mm30 mm 30 mm
2 55 mm55 mm 55 mm
3 115 mm60 mm 60 mm
4 872 mm812 mm 812 mm
5 20 mm20 mm 20 mm
6 85 mm85 mm 85 mm
7 687 - 698 mm681 - 695 mm, 579 - 581 mm* 682- 690 mm, 576 mm*
8 642 - 653 mm639 - 654 mm, 537 - 539 mm* 640- 649 mm, 534 mm*
9 612 - 623 mm609 - 624 mm, 507 - 509 mm* 610- 619 mm, 504 mm*
10 406 - 418 mm400 - 415 mm, 292 - 294 mm* 405- 414 mm, 302 mm*
11 486 - 498 mm480 - 496 mm, 486 - 488 mm* 476- 502 mm, 486 mm*
12 897 mm897 mm 897 mm
13 1,251 mm1,136 mm 1,316 mm
14 70 mm70 mm 70 mm
15 502.5 mm502.5 mm 502.5 mm
16 540.5 mm540.5 mm 540.5 mm

Item 7, 8, 9, 10, 11: at kerb weight *: 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres

NOTE

● The values under item 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 are applicable to unladen vehicles. These values can also be varied depending on the tyre size, optional equipment and suspension conditions.

Operating hints

- Do not let the clutch slip (vehicles with a M/a only) and do not increase the engine speed more than necessary when starting.

Trailer towing

  • Be sure that the driving speed does not exceed the maximum speed for trailer operation.
    ● To prevent shocks from the overrun brake, depress the brake pedal lightly at first and then more strongly.
    ● To make full use of engine braking, change to a lower gear before descending a slope.
    ● The body, brakes, clutch, and chassis will be under additional strain when towing a trailer.
    ● The heavier weight and higher rolling and air resistance will increase fuel consumption.

Additional precautions for vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission

The 2^nd gear (in “Sports mode”) is recommended on slopes or at low speed. Use the 1^st gear (in “Sports mode”) in mountainous areas in order to make better use of engine braking and to assist the brake system. However, be sure that the speed does not exceed the maximum speed limit for the selected gear.

For pleasant driving

Ventilators....7-02

Heater/Manual air conditioning* 7-04

Automatic air conditioning* 7-09

Important operation tips for the air conditioning.... 7-14

Air purifier* 7-14

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *....7-15

To play tracks from USB device (audio system type 1) *....7-30

To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (audio system type 1) *..... 7-40

To use the external audio input function (audio system type 1) *..... 7-43

Steering wheel remote control switch (audio system type 1) *...... 7-44

Error codes (audio system type 1)....7-47

Audio system anti-theft feature (audio system type 1)....7-49

Handling of compact discs (audio system type 1)....7-49

LW/MW/FM radio/CD player (audio system type 2)*....7-51

Handling of Discs (audio system type 2)....7-55

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (audio system type 2)....7-56

Important Points on Safety for the Customer (audio system type 2)....7-60

Operation Keys (audio system type 2)....7-60

Listen to Radio (audio system type 2)....7-63

Listen to DAB (audio system type 2) *....7-64

Listen to Traffic Messages (audio system type 2)....7-66

Listen to CDs (audio system type 2)....7-66

Listen to MP3s (audio system type 2)....7-67

Listen to an iPod (audio system type 2)....7-68

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device (audio system type 2)....7-70

Listen to Bluetooth Audio (audio system type 2) *....7-72

Use AUX (audio system type 2) *....7-74

Display Indicator (audio system type 2)....7-75

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment (audio system type 2)....7-75

System Settings (audio system type 2)....7-76

Troubleshooting (audio system type 2)....7-80

Antenna 7-83

Link System* 7-84

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface....7-84

USB input terminal* 7-103

Sun visors....7-106

Vanity mirror*....7-107

Ashtray....7-107

Cigarette lighter....7-108

Accessory socket ^* 7-109

Digital clock ^* 7-109

Interior lamps....7-110

Storage spaces....7-112

Cup holder ^* 7-115

Bottle holder....7-115

Convenient hook....7-116

Coat hook* 7-116

First-aid kit and warning triangle securing bands*....7-117

Ventilators

Ventilators

E00700100344

Technical diagram of a car interior with labeled parts, showing front and rear views with numbered annotations.

1- Centre ventilators
2- Side ventilators

Air flow and direction adjustments

E00700200749

Centre ventilators

Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the knob (A).

A TA0013737

Side ventilators

The ventilator can be opened and closed with the dial (B).

(三)

- Open

( )

- Close

Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the knob (C).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Side ventilators - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["LHD"] --> B["RHD"]
    B --> C["C"]
    C --> D["B"]
    D --> E["AA0094863"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Side ventilators - 2

NOTE

● On air conditioned vehicles, the cool air from the ventilators may appear as a mist. This is due to moist air being suddenly cooled by the air conditioning. This will clear after a few moments.

Changing the mode selection

E00700301008

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to "Mode selection dial" on pages 7-05, 7-11.)

These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the ventilators.

→: Small amount of air from the ventilators

→: Medium amount of air from the ventilators
→: Large amount of air from the ventilators

Face position

Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger compartment.

Diagram showing car interior and vehicle movement with directional arrows and a circular icon indicating motion direction.

Foot/Face position

Air flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment, and flows to the leg area.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Foot/Face position - 1

NOTE

- With the mode selection dial between the “and” positions, air flows mainly to the upper part of the passenger compartment. With the mode selection dial between the “and” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area.

Foot position

Air flows mainly to the leg area.

*: Optional equipment AA0057435

*: Optional equipment AA0657422

Foot/Demister position

Air flows to the leg area, the windscreen and the door windows.

*: Optional equipment AA0078281

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Foot/Demister position - 2

NOTE

- With the mode selection dial between the “” and “” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. With the mode selection dial between the “” and “” positions, air flows mainly to the windscreen and door windows.

Heater/Manual air conditioning*

Demister position

Air flows mainly to the windscreen and the door windows.

Diagram showing car dashboard and steering wheel with directional arrows indicating flow or movement

Heater/Manual air conditioning\*

E00700500410

The heater/air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.

Control panel

E00700600512

LHD 1 2 3 4 5 6 AA0076551

RHD 1 2 3 4 5 OFF 6 AA0076588

1- Mode selection dial
2- Rear window demister switch → p. 5-43
3- Blower speed selection dial
4- Air conditioning switch*
5- Temperature control dial
6- Air selection lever

Blower speed selection dial

E00700700119

Select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise.

The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned to the right.

When the blower speed selection dial is set to the "OFF" position, all fan-driven airflow will stop.

1 2 3 4 OFF AA0651589

Temperature control dial

E00700900209

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise to make the air cooler.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Temperature control dial - 1

natural_image Diagram of a circular mechanical component with concentric rings and directional arrows, no text or symbols present.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Temperature control dial - 2

NOTE

● While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the dial.

Mode selection dial

E00701100266

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-02.)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Mode selection dial - 1

natural_image Circular diagram with directional arrows and a central circular component, no text or symbols present.

Air selection lever

ED070130046D

To change the air selection, use the air selection lever.

● “Outside air
Outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment.
● “Recirculated air

Air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment.

LHD 1 2 3 4 OFF AA005561

RHD 1 2 3 4 OFF AA0051619

Heater/Manual air conditioning*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Air selection lever - 3

CAUTION

- Normally, use the “(outside) position to keep the windscreen and side windows clear and quickly remove fog or frost from the windscreen.

If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated, use the “(recirculation) position.

Set the air selection lever to the “” (outside) position periodically to increase ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up.

- Use of the “recirculation) position for extended time may cause the windows to fog up.

Air conditioning switch\*

100701500781

Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The air conditioning indication lamp (A) will come on.

LHD OFF A AA008183

RHD 1 2 3 4 OFF A AA008196

Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the indication lamp goes off.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Air conditioning switch\* - 3

CAUTION

- When using the air conditioning, the idling speed may slightly increase as the air conditioning compressor is switched on/off automatically. While the vehicle with an / T is stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.

Operating the air conditioning system

E00701800247

Heating

Set the mode selection dial to the “” position and set the air selection lever to the “” (outside) position.

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or anticlockwise to the desired temperature. Select the desired blower speed.

LHD 1 2 3 4 OFF AA005587

RHD 1 2 3 4 OFF 转 AA0051635

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Heating - 3

NOTE

- For maximum heat, set the blower speed at the 3^rd position.

Cooling (vehicles with air conditioning)

E00701900424

LHD B 1 2 3 4 OFF 转 AA3055590

RHD OFF 第 1 2 3 4 B AA885164K

  1. Set the mode selection dial to the position.
  2. Set the air selection lever to the (outside) position.
  3. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
  4. Change the temperature by turning the control dial clockwise or anticlockwise.

  5. Select the desired blower speed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Cooling (vehicles with air conditioning) - 3

CAUTION

- If the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated, or if high cooling performance is desired, set air selection lever to the (recirculation) position and the temperature control dial all the way to the left.

Set to the ⚙(outside) position periodically to increase ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up.

Combination of unheated air and heated air

ED0702000451

Select the mode selection dial to the position shown in the illustration and set the air selection lever to the “(outside) position. The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the upper part of the passenger compartment. Select the desired blower speed.

L.H.D 1 2 3 07 转 4 AA0100735

OKTE15E3

RHD 1 2 3 4 DPF U AA0100748

Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly warm air (depending upon temperature setting) flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment.

Demisting of the windscreen and door windows

E00702100579

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Demisting of the windscreen and door windows - 1

CAUTION

● For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows.

To remove frost or mist from the windscreen and door windows, use the mode selection dial ("or")

For pleasant driving

Heater/Manual air conditioning*

For ordinary demisting

Use this setting to keep the windscreen and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow).

LHD A005617

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - For ordinary demisting - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Directional dial"] --> B["Rotary button 1"]
    B --> C["Rotary button 2"]
    C --> D["Rotary button 3"]
    D --> E["Rotary button 4"]
    E --> F["Rotary button 5"]
    F --> G["Control panel"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
  1. Set the air selection lever to the “(outside) position.
  2. Set the mode selection dial to the “” position.
  3. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial.
  4. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial.
  5. Push the air conditioning switch (B). (vehicles with air conditioning)

For quick demisting
LHD 1 2 3 4 OFF B AA005628

RHD B 1 2 3 # 4 AA0051677

  1. Set the air selection lever to the “(outside) position.
  2. Set the mode selection dial to the "row" position.
  3. Set the blower to the maximum speed.
  4. Set the temperature to the maximum temperature position.
  5. Push the air conditioning switch (B). (vehicles with air conditioning)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - For ordinary demisting - 5

NOTE

● To demist effectively, direct the air flow from the side ventilators towards the door windows.
- Do not set the temperature control dial to the max. cool position. Cool air will blow against the window glasses and form mist on them.

Introduction of outside air

E00702200235

To introduce air into the vehicle during hot weather, set the air selection lever to the “outside” position and set the temperature control dial to the positions shown in the illustration. Be sure to set the temperature control dial all the way to the left. Select the desired blower speed.

L1H1 OFF 转 1 2 3 4 AA0855633

RHD OFF 转 1 2 3 4 AA9051680

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Introduction of outside air - 3

NOTE

● Turn the mode selection dial clockwise and air will flow to the leg area and the wind-screen.

Automatic air conditioning\*

E00702400110

The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.

Control panel

F00702502551

Type 1

1 PUBM AUTO 2 U DT PUBM AUTO 3 5 6 4

Type 2

1 PUSH AUTO 2 PUSH AUTO 3 PUSH AUTO 4 5 6

AA001:836

1- Mode selection dial
2- Blower speed selection dial
3- Temperature control dial
4- Rear window demister switch → p. 5-43
5- Air conditioning switch
6- Air selection switch

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Control panel - 3

NOTE

● There is an interior air temperature sensor (A) in the illustrated position.

Automatic air conditioning*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

Never place anything on top of the sensor since doing so will prevent it from functioning properly.

RHDLHD AJZ101081

When the blower speed selection dial is set to the "OFF" position, all fan-driven airflow will stop.

OFF PUSH AUTO

Temperature control dial

E00703000575

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise to make the air cooler.

Type 1 17 22 PUSH 27 AA0051710

Blower speed selection dial

ED0702800273

Select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise.

The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned to the right.

Type 2 25 20 PUSH 30 AA0056890

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Blower speed selection dial - 2

NOTE

● While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the dial.

Mode selection dial

F00703200274

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-02.)

AUTO PUSH AA0051725

Air selection switch

F00703400638

To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch.

- Outside air {Indication lamp (A) is OFF} Outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment. - Recirculated air {Indication lamp (A) is ON} Air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment.

AUTO PUBI AUTO OFF PUBI AUTO PUBI A AA008R255

CAUTION

- Normally, use the outside position to keep the windscreen and side windows clear and quickly remove fog or frost from the windscreen. If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside position periodically to increase ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up.

CAUTION

● Use of the recirculation position for extended time may cause the windows to fog up.

Air conditioning switch

F00703501128

Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The air conditioning indication lamp (A) will come on.

PUSH AUTO OFF PUSH AUTO A A A000R258

Push the switch again, and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the indication lamp goes off.

Automatic air conditioning*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Air conditioning switch - 2

CAUTION

- When using the air conditioning, the idling speed may slightly increase as the air conditioning compressor is switched on/off automatically. While the vehicle with an A/T is stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.

Operating the system in automatic mode

100704100919

PUSH AUTO OFF PUSH AUTO A AA008200

In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTO mode and follow these procedures:

  1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the "AUTO" position.

  2. Select the temperature control dial to the desired temperature. The temperature can be set within a range of 17 to 27 (Type 1) or 20 to 30 (Type 2). The temperature will gradually increase as the dial is turned to the right.

  3. Set the mode selection dial to the "AU-TO" position.

  4. Push the air conditioning switch to operate the air conditioning. When the air conditioning operates, the indication lamp (A) in the dial will come on.

The outlet port (except “” and blower speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will be controlled automatically.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Operating the system in automatic mode - 2

NOTE

● Set the temperature at about 22 (Type 1) or 25 (Type 2) under normal conditions.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- When the temperature is set to the highest or the lowest setting under the AUTO operation, the air selection, mode selection, blower speed and the air conditioning will be automatically changed as follows.

Also, if manually operated after an automatic changeover, manual operation will be selected.

- Quick Heating (When the temperature is set to the highest setting) Outside air will be introduced, the air flow will select foot position, and the air conditioning will stop.

- Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set to the lowest setting) Inside air will be recirculated, the air flow will select face position, and the air conditioning will operate.

Operating the system in manual mode

E00704200040

Blower speed and ventilator mode may be controlled manually by setting the blower speed selection dial and the mode selection dial to the desired positions. To return to automatic operation, set the dials to the "AUTO" position.

Demisting of the windscreen and door windows

E00704300689

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Demisting of the windscreen and door windows - 1

CAUTION

● For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows.

To remove frost or mist from the windscreen and door windows, use the mode selection dial ("or")

For ordinary demisting

Use this setting to keep the windscreen and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - For ordinary demisting - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Auto"] --> B["OFF"]
    B --> C["PUBR"]
    C --> D["A"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
  1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
  2. Set the mode selection dial to the “☐” position.
  3. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial.
  4. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial.
  5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).

For quick demisting

AUTO OFF AUTO PUSH AA0088226

  1. Set the mode selection dial to the "position."
  2. Set the blower to the maximum speed.
  3. Set the temperature to the highest position.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - For quick demisting - 2

NOTE

● While the mode selection dial is set to the "Wiposition, the air conditioning will operate automatically and the outside air position will also be selected automatically.
● To demist effectively, direct the air flow from the side ventilators towards the door windows.
- Do not set the temperature control dial to the max. cool position. Cool air will blow against the window glasses and form mist on them.

Important operation tips for the air conditioning

E00708300951

● Park the vehicle in the shade.
Parking in the hot sun will make the vehicle inside extremely hot, and it will require more time to cool the interior.
If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the windows for the first few minutes of air conditioning operation to expel the hot air.
- Close the windows when the air conditioning is in use. The entry of outside air through open windows will reduce the cooling efficiency.
● Too much cooling is not good for the health. The inside air temperature should only be 5 to 6 °C below the outside air temperature.
- When operating the system, make sure the air intake, which is located in front of the windscreen, is free of obstructions such as leaves and snow. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations

If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. We recommend you to have the system inspected.

The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the lubricant ZXL-100PG.

Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage which will result in the need to replace your vehicle's entire air conditioning system. The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere should be prevented.

It is recommended that the refrigerant be recovered and recycled for further use.

During a long period of disuse

The air conditioning should be operated for at least five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This is to prevent poor lubrication of the compressor internal parts and to maintain the air conditioning in the best operating condition.

Air purifier\*

E00708400675

An air filter has been incorporated into this air conditioning so that dirt and dust are cleaned from the air.

Replace the air filter periodically as its ability to clean the air will be reduced as it collects pollen and dirt. For the maintenance interval, refer to the “SERVICE BOOKLET”.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Air purifier\* - 1

NOTE

- Operation in certain conditions such as driving on a dusty road and frequent use of the air conditioning can lead to reduction of service life of the filter. When you feel that the air flow is lower than normal or when the windscreen or windows start to fog up easily, replace the air filter. We recommend you to have it checked.

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) \*

L00708503446

The audio system can be used when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

A B AM 12:00 FM1 ST CH6 18℃ AF TPCT 87.5 MHz INFO ADJ AA1007118

A- Display window
B- Audio system

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) \* - 2

NOTE

  • To listen to the audio system while the engine is stopped, turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.
  • If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, it may create noise from the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far away as possible from the audio equipment.
  • If foreign objects or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system. We recommend you to have it checked. Never try to repair it by yourself. Avoid continuous usage without inspection by a qualified person.
  • The audio system's control knob can be removed to deter thieves. For details, refer to "Audio system anti-theft feature (audio system type 1)" on page 7-49.
    ● The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is located under the front right seat.
    Do not subject the amplifier to a strong impact.
    It could damage the amplifier or malfunctioning could result.

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

Volume and tone control panel

F00708601140

1,2 3 4 FOLDER TEXT PAGE RPT RDM RADIO CD TP PTY MENU PLEASE

AM 12:00 VOLUME 45 INFO H 18°C T ADJ 5

AA1008186

1- PWR (On-Off) switch
2- VOL (Volume control) knob
3- (Mode change) button
4- Audio adjust button
5- Display

To adjust the volume

E00708700665

VOL (Volume control)

Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase the volume;

anticlockwise to decrease the volume. The status will be displayed in the display (5).

To adjust the tone

L00708801269

Press the ▶ button (3) to select BASS → TREBLE → FADER BALANCE SCV → Audio adjust mode off. The status will be displayed in the display (5).

OKTE15E3

For pleasant driving

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

BASS (Bass tone control)

Press the audio adjust button (4) either to select the desired bass level.

TREBLE (Treble tone control)

Press the audio adjust button (4) either to select the desired treble level.

FADER (Front/Rear balance control)

Press the audio adjust button (4) either to balance the volume of sound from the front and the rear speakers.

Radio control panel and display

BALANCE (Left/Right balance control)

Press the audio adjust button (4) either to balance the volume of sound from the left and the right speakers.

SCV (Speed Compensated Volume) function

The Speed Compensated Volume function is a feature that automatically adjusts the VOL, BASS, MID, and TREBLE settings in accordance with the vehicle speed.

The effects of the SCV function can be selected either of three levels (LOW, MID and HIGH). Select the degree of your choice by pressing the audio adjust button (4) either or y If you want to stop the SCV function, select the OFF.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - SCV (Speed Compensated Volume) function - 1

NOTE

● Audio adjust mode will be cancelled when another mode is selected or no adjustment is performed for more than 10 seconds.

E00708902296

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FOLDER TEXT PAGE RPT ROM RELEASE RADIO CD TP PTY MENU 5

6 AM 12:00 PMI ST CH6 INFO 7 W 18°C AFTFCT 87.5 MHz 9 ADJ

AA1008199

1- PWR (On-Off) switch
2- Memory select buttons
3- TUNE/SEEK (Up-step/Up-seek) button
4- TUNE/SEEK (Down-step/Down-seek) button

5- RADIO (FM/MW/LW selection) button
6-FM/MW/LW indicator
7- Preset memory number display
8- ST (Stereo) indicator*
9- Frequency display window

To listen to the radio

E00709D0896

  1. Press the PWR switch (1) to turn the audio system ON and OFF. The system turns on in the last mode used.
  2. Press the RADIO buttons (5) to select the desired band.
  3. Press the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) to tune to a station, or press one of the memory select buttons (2) to recall a station memorised for that button.

To tune the radio

E00709100451

Automatic tuning

After keeping the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) depressed, release the button, and the selected station reception will start.

Manual tuning

The frequency changes every time the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) is pressed. Press the button to select the desired station.

To enter frequencies into the memory

E00716101173

Manual setting

You can assign to the memory select buttons (2) a maximum of 18 stations in the FM band (6 FM1, 6 FM2 and 6 FM3 stations) and 6 stations each in the MW and LW band. (Stations already assigned to the memory select buttons are replaced by any newly assigned stations.)

AM 12:00 H 18°C PMI NF/RT ST CH6 87.5 MHz BND 1 AU2 1 2 3 4 AA999747

Follow the steps described below.

OKTE15E3

  1. Press either the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) to tune the frequency to be entered in the memory.
  2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) for 2 seconds or longer. The number of the button corresponding to the entry in the memory and the frequency are displayed.
  3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within 2 seconds.

Automatic setting

With the method, all manually set stations in the band currently selected for reception are replaced with stations in the same band that are automatically selected in order of signal strength. The radio automatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3 station only) and 6 stations each in the MW and LW band.

Follow the steps described below.

For pleasant driving

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

  1. With the radio mode selected, hold down the RADIO button (5) for 2 seconds or longer. The 6 stations with the best signal strength will automatically be assigned to the memory select buttons (2), with the lowest-frequency station being assigned to the lowest-number button.

  2. When you subsequently press a memory select button to select a channel number, the radio will begin receiving the station assigned to that number.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Automatic setting - 1

NOTE

- If you press the RADIO button (5) for 2 seconds or longer while tuning in the FM1 or FM2 band, the radio will automatically switch to the FM3 band, where the automatic seeking/storing will be activated.

Radio data system (RDS)

ED0709200452

1 2 3 4 5 6 FOLDER TEXT PAGE RPT RDM RELEASE RADIO CD TP PTY MENU 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 AM 12:00 W FM1 RDS PTY NEWS REG AFT PCT ST CH6 BBC KENT 107.5 MHz INFO I ADJ 15

1- PWR (On-Off) switch
2- Memory select buttons
3- TUNE/SEEK (Down-step/Down-seek) button
4- TUNE/SEEK (Up-step/Up-seek) button

5- RADIO (FM/MW/LW selection) button
6- TP (Traffic program) button
7- PTY (Program type) button
8- MENU button
9- RDS (Radio data system) indicator

10- PTY (Program type) indicator
11- REG (Regional program) indicator
12- AF (Alternative Frequencies) indicator
13- TP (Traffic program identification) indicator
14- CT (Clock time) indicator

15- Display

RDS uses PI (program identification) signal and AF (alternative frequency) list transmitted in addition to the normal FM broadcasting programs, and picks up the FM stations that are transmitting the same program from the AF list and automatically tunes to the station with the strongest signal intensity.

Therefore, you can continue listening to one program in, for example, a long distance driving without retuning to the other station transmitting the same program when you are leaving the service area of the currently receiving station.

The RDS radio also features the limited reception of the program types, the break-in reception of the traffic announcement to the EON (enhanced other network) and emergency broadcast, and the limited/unlimited reception of the regional programs.

AF (Alternative Frequencies) function

E00720900061

The AF function finds a station broadcasting the same program and selects the station with the strongest signal of AF lists.

The AF function is turned on (with the AF indicator (12) shown on the display) at all times unless you manually switch it off.

The AF function can be turned ON and OFF. Refer to "Function setup mode" on page 7-24.

CT (Clock Time) function

E00721000131

The clock can be set automatically by using the signal from the local RDS stations. Refer to “Adjusting the time” on page 5-12.

REG function limits to receive the stations broadcasting regional programs.

Regional programming and regional networks are organized differently depending on the country or area (they may be changed according to the hour, state, or broadcast area), so if you don't want to receive the regional programs automatically, you can set up REG ON not to receive regional programs.

The REG function can be turned ON and OFF.

Refer to "Function setup mode" on page 7-24.

PI (Program Identification) search function

E00721200221

When travelling long distance and the recalled preset station is weak, the radio searches another frequency broadcasting the same programming with the same PI code in AF list.

If there are no frequencies broadcasting the same programming, the radio searches a frequency broadcasting the regional programming. The radio succeeds in searching the regional programming, then the display shows the REG indicator (11).

If the radio does not succeed in searching the regional programming, the radio returns to the recalled preset station.

The PI function can be turned ON and OFF. Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 7-24.

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - PI (Program Identification) search function - 1

NOTE

● While searching, the audio system is muted. The display shows “WAIT” or “SEARCH”.

PTY (Program type)

ED0721300349

RDS broadcasts are classified according to program type (PTY) as follows. Use the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) to select your desired PTY.

  1. NEWS
  2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs)
  3. INFO (Information)
  4. SPORT
  5. EDUCATE (Education)
  6. DRAMA
  7. CULTURE
  8. SCIENCE
  9. VARIED
  10. POP M (Pop music)
  11. ROCK M (Rock music)
  12. EASY M (Easy music)
  13. LIGHT M (Light classics)
  14. CLASSICS
  15. OTHER M (Other music)
  16. WEATHER (Weather information)
  17. FINANCE
  18. CHILDREN
  19. SOCIAL
  20. RELIGION
  21. PHONE IN

7-22

For pleasant driving

  1. TRAVEL
  2. LEISURE
  3. JAZZ
  4. COUNTRY
  5. NATION M (National music)
  6. OLDIES
  7. FOLK M (Folk music)
  8. DOCUMENT

To search for a broadcast of desired program type:

  1. Press the PTY button (7).
  2. Press the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) for less than 1 second repeatedly to select your desired PTY.
  3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been selected, the radio will begin to search for a broadcast of your selected PTY. During search, the selected PTY on the display blinks.

  4. When the radio picks up a station with your desired PTY, the display will show the name of the station.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - PTY (Program type) - 1

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - PTY (Program type) - 2

AA0097150

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - PTY (Program type) - 3

NOTE

  • If the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) is pressed for more than 1 second, the radio will try to find out another broadcast of the same program type as currently selected.
  • If no station is found with your desired PTY, the display will show “EMPTY” for about 5 seconds and the radio will return to the previous station.

How to enter PTYs in the memory

E00721400135

As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory.

Follow the steps described below.

  1. Press either the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) to tune the PTY to be entered in the memory.
  2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) for 2 seconds or longer. The number of the button corresponding to the entry into the memory and the PTY are displayed.
  3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.

Traffic information

E00721600254

The radio will automatically tune in to traffic information broadcasts while receiving FM broadcasts or playing compact discs etc. To select this function, follow the instructions below.

  1. Press the TP button (6). The display will show "TP" (13). If the RDS data can be read, the display will show "RDS" (9). If not, the display will show "NO RDS" for about 5 seconds.

  2. If the radio detects traffic information on either the station currently selected or another station, the display will show "TRAF INF" for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indication of the frequency. Then, it will show the name of the station broadcasting the traffic information to which you will listen. The volume level is set separately for listening to normal audio programs and for listening to traffic information. The volume level will therefore change automatically to that set when traffic information was last received. When the traffic information broadcast is over, the radio will return to the previously received program and to the corresponding volume level.

  3. Press the TP button (6) to return to the previous condition.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Traffic information - 1

NOTE

● While “TP” is illuminated, the radio stops only at TP stations even if the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) is pressed.

AM 12:00 FMT1RDS PTV ST CH6 BBC R1 REG/ATP CT 87.5 MHz 18 °C 18 °C AM 12:00 FMT1RDS TRAF INF ST CH6 BBC KENT REG/ATP CT 87.5 MHz 18 °C 18 °C AM 12:00 FMT1RDS PTV ST CH6 REG/ATP CT 87.5 MHz 18 °C 18 °C AM 12:00 FMT1RDS PTV NEWS ST CH6 BBC KENT REG/ATP CT 87.5 MHz 18 °C 18 °C AM 12:00 FMT1RDS PTV ST CH6 BBC R1 REG/ATP CT 87.5 MHz

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

TP (Traffic information Program) search function

E00721800168

The traffic information program standby function is turned on (with the TP indicator (13) shown on the display) and after about 45 seconds since the RDS indicator (9) turns off due to weak signal or the tuning station is changed over from a TP station to a station which does not broadcast traffic information, and seeks out a TP station in all frequencies automatically.

The TP search function can be turned ON and OFF.

Refer to "Function setup mode" on page 7-24.

Emergency broadcasts

E00721700213

AM 12:00 W 18° FM1 RDS ALARM MP ST BBC KENT 107.5 MHz MHz 1 MHz AA0097163

If an emergency broadcast is caught while receiving a FM broadcast or playing back a compact disc with the ignition switch in "ACC" or "ON" position, the display will show "ALARM" and the emergency broadcast will interrupt the current program. The volume level is set separately for listening to normal audio programs and for listening to emergency broadcasts. The volume level will therefore change automatically to that set when an emergency broadcast or traffic information broadcast was last received. When the emergency broadcast is over, the radio will return to the previously received program and to the corresponding volume level.

Function setup mode

E00722501475

It is possible to change the following functions:

  • Gracenote Database*
    AF
    CT
  • REG*
  • TP-S
  • PI-S*
  • PHONE*

  • Press the "MENU" button to select the function setup mode.

MENU AA0104805

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Function setup mode - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["18° Gridenote Database"] --> B["18° RF SETTING AF: OFF ON"]
    B --> C["18° CT: OFF ON"]
    C --> D["18° REG: OFF ON"]
    D --> E["18° TP-S: OFF ON"]
    E --> F["18° RCS SETTING P1-S: OFF ON"]
    F --> G["18° RF SETTING IN-R"]
    G --> H["18° FM Tips PTY REG: RF"]
    H --> I["18° CHG EIRC KIENT 87.5 MHz"]

AA1008216

  1. Press the "MENU" button repeatedly to select the mode you wish to change. The order is: Gracenote Database* → AF → CT → REG* → TP-S → PI-S* → PHONE* → Function setup mode OFF.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Function setup mode - 3

NOTE

- Although “Gracenote Database” appear on the display, these functions is inoperative.

  1. Select the desired setting for each mode to be turned ON and OFF as shown below.

The setting will be shown on the display.

12:00 RDS SETTING AF OFF 18 12:00 RDS SETTING AF OFF ON

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 2

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 3

NOTE

● After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup mode by taking either of the following steps:

OKTE15E3

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • Press the "MENU" button for at least seconds.
  • Make no entry for 10 seconds.

For pleasant driving

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

CD control panel and display

E00709501205

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OI FOLDER TEXT PAGE RPT RDM RADIO CD TP PTY MENU RELEASE 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 AM 12:00 18°C CD TRACK 15 12' 34 H T T T T ADJ INFO 18

AA1008229

1- CD eject button
2- Disc-loading slot
3- FOLDER (Folder down) button
4- FOLDER (Folder up) button
5- TEXT (Title display) button
6- PAGE (Title scroll) button

7- RPT (Repeat) button
8- RDM (Random) button
9- Fast-forward/Track up) button
10- Fast-reverse/Track down) button
11-PWR (On-Off) switch
12- CD (CD mode changeover) button

13- (Return) button
14- (Select) button
15-RPT/RDM indicator
16- Track number indicator
17- Track play time indicator
18- CD indicator

To listen to a CD

E(07096)2290

  1. Insert a disc with the label facing up, and the CD player will begin playing even if another mode is being used. The CD indicator (18), the track number (16), the playing time (17) will appear on the display.
  2. When the CD mode is selected by pressing the CD (12) button several times with the disc in the player, the CD player will start playback.
  3. To stop the CD, turn off the power by pressing the PWR switch (11) or change over to the another mode by pressing the RADIO button or CD button, or eject the disc by pressing the eject button (1).

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To listen to a CD - 1

NOTE

● To adjust the volume and tone, refer to "To adjust the volume" on page 7-17 and "To adjust the tone" on page 7-17.
● An 8 cm compact disc cannot be played or this CD player.
- For information concerning the handling of compact discs, refer to "Handling of compact discs (audio system type 1)" on page 7-49.

To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc

Fast-forward

You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the button (9). While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.

Fast-reverse

You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the ¥ button (10). While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-reversed.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Fast-reverse - 1

NOTE

- When you have fast-forwarded/fast-reversed the disc, the playing-time may be shown with deviation.

To listen to an MP3 CD

This CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees, 100 folders, and 255 files per disc. During MP3 playback, the unit can display ID3 tag information. For information concerning ID3 tag, refer to "CD text and MP3 title display" on page 7-30.

AM 12:00 MP3 FOLDER TIME 18 5 8 1' 12 AM104485

  1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the slot.
  2. The display shows the folder number and the file number, then playback will begin.

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player (audio system type 1) *

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To listen to an MP3 CD - 2

NOTE

● While listening to a disc on which CD-DA (CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both been recorded, you can switch between reading of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files, and the external audio input mode (AUX) by pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer.
● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatically played first.
● The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding software and the bit rate. For details, refer to the user manual of your encoding software.
● Depending on file/folder configurations on a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
● MP3 encoding software and writing software are not supplied with this unit.
- You may encounter trouble in playing an MP3 or displaying the information of MP3 files recorded with certain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
- If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
● This unit does not record MP3 files.
- For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, refer to "Notes on CD-Rs/RWs" on page 7-51.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

CAUTION

- Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 format which has a ".mp3" file name may produce noise from the speakers and speaker damage, and can damage your hearing.

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Root folder (root directory)"] --> B["1"]
    A --> C["2"]
    A --> D["3"]
    A --> E["4"]
    A --> F["5"]
    A --> G["6"]
    A --> H["7"]
    A --> I["8"]
    A --> J["9"]
    B --> K["Leaf Node 1"]
    C --> L["Leaf Node 2"]
    D --> M["Leaf Node 3"]
    E --> N["Leaf Node 4"]
    F --> O["Leaf Node 5"]
    G --> P["Leaf Node 6"]
    H --> Q["Leaf Node 7"]
    I --> R["Leaf Node 8"]
    J --> S["Leaf Node 9"]

Folder selection

In the order

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 2

File selection

In the order

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CAUTION - 3

To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only)

Folder up

Press the FOLDER button (4) until the desired folder number appears on the display.

Folder down

Press the FOLDER button (3) until the desired folder number appears on the display.

To select a desired track

Track up

Press the 7 button (9) repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.

Track down

Press the Vbutton (10) repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Track down - 1

NOTE

- Pressing the Mutton (10) once during the song will cause the CD player to restart playback from the beginning of the song.

To find a file (MP3 CDs only)

Press the following buttons to select desired file.

The selected folder or file is shown in the display.

button (14)

: To start this mode or cancel the selection.

A button (9) or V : To show the folder or file. button (10)

▶ button (15)

: To select the folder or file.

NOTE

- If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or another button is operated after the Button or button has been pressed, searching of the desired file is cancelled.

- If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the file is displayed, playback starts.

To repeat a track

Press the RPT button (7) briefly while the track is playing. "RPT" will appear on the display.

To exit the repeat mode, press the RPT button.

To repeat a folder (MP3 CDs only)

Press the RPT button (7) for 1 second or longer (until you hear a beep). "F-RPT" will appear on the display. You can listen to all the files in the currently selected folder repeatedly.

NOTE

- With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be repeated.

To play tracks in random order

Random playback for a disc (music CDs only)

Press the RDM button (8) briefly. "RDM" will appear on the display. Tracks on the currently selected disc will be played in a random sequence.

To exit the random mode, press the RDM button again.

Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only)

Press the RDM button (8) briefly. "F-RDM" will appear on the display. Files on the currently selected folder will be played in a random sequence.

To exit the random mode, press the RDM button again.

Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only)

Press the RDM button (8) for 1 second or longer (until you hear a beep). "RDM" will appear on the display. Files from all the folders on the currently selected disc will be played in a random sequence.

To exit the random mode, briefly press the RDM button again.

NOTE

- With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the random mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played in a random sequence.

To eject a disc

When the CD eject button (1) is pressed, the disc automatically stops and is ejected.

NOTE

- If you do not remove the disc before 15 seconds have elapsed, the CD player will automatically reload the disc and stop.

To play tracks from USB device (audio system type 1) *

CD text and MP3 title display

E00725000676

This CD player can display CD text and MP3 titles including ID3 tag information.

CD text

The CD player can display disc and track titles for discs encoded with disc and track title information. Press the TEXT button (5) repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: disc name → track name → normal display mode.

Example Disc name AM 12:00 14 18°C CD TRACK 10 12°34 DISC NAME MY BEST COLLECTIP NO. 1 1 ADJ Track name AM 12:00 14 18°C CD TRACK 10 12°34 TR. NAME Let IT Be NO. 1 1 ADJ AA0096166

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - CD text - 2

NOTE

● The display can show up to 16 characters. If a disc name or track name has more than 16 characters, press the PAGE button (6) to view the next 16 characters.
- When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows "NO TITLE".

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as “”.

MP3 title

The CD player can display folder and file titles for discs encoded with folder and file information. Press the TEXT button (5) for less than 1 second repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: folder name → file name → normal display mode.

Example Folder name 12:00 H 18° MP3 FOLDER57 FILE 10 12° 34 FLO. NAMEY BEST COLLECTI# NWS 1 1 1 1 1 1 File name 12:00 H 18° MP3 FOLDER57 FILE 10 12° 34 FIL. NAME Let It Be NWS 1 1 1 1 1 1 AA0096179

ID3 tag information

The CD player can display ID3 tag information for files that have been recorded with ID3 tag information.

  1. Press the TEXT button (5) for 2 seconds or longer to switch to the ID3 tag information.

  2. Then press the TEXT button for less than 1 second repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: album name → title name artist name → normal display mode.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - ID3 tag information - 1

NOTE

● To return from ID3 tag information to the folder name, press the TEXT button (5) again for 2 seconds or longer.
- When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows "NO TITLE".
● The display can show up to 16 characters. If a folder name, track name, or item of ID tag information has more than 16 characters, press the PAGE button (6) to view the next 16 characters.
- Folder names and track names can each be displayed up to a length of 32 characters. Items of ID3 tag information can each be displayed up to a length of 30 characters.
- Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as “”.

To play tracks from USB device (audio system type 1)

*

E00756101276

You can connect your iPod or USB memory device to the USB input terminal and play music files stored in the iPod or USB memory device.

To play tracks from USB device (audio system type 1) *

See the following section for the types of connectable devices and supported files. Refer to "Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications" on page 7-105. See the following sections for the connecting methods, "How to connect an iPod" on page 7-104 and "How to connect a USB memory device" on page 7-103.

iPod control panel and display

If your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface, you can play music files in your iPod or USB memory device via voice operation.

Refer to "To play iPod tracks via voice operation" on page 7-33 and "To play USB memory device tracks via voice operation" on page 7-40.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - iPod control panel and display - 1

NOTE

● The protected file by copyright might not be able to start playback.
- It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of the connected device is flat.

E00756200238

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 FOLDER TEXT PAGE RPT ROM RADIO CD TP PTY MENU

14 15 AM 12:00 iPod TRACK 1/123 12' 34 RPT INFO 16 18°C ADJ

AA1008391

1- PWR (On-Off) button
2- FOLDER (Folder down) button
3- FOLDER (Folder up) button
4- TEXT button
5- PAGE (Title scroll) button

6- RPT (Repeat) button
7- RDM (Random) button
8- (Fast-forward/Track up) button
9- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button
10-RADIO button

11- CD (Mode change) button
12- (return) button
13- (Select) button
14- iPod indicator
15- TRACK indicator
16- RPT/SHUFFLE/A-SHUFFLE indicator

For pleasant driving

7-31

OKTE15E3

To play tracks from USB device (audio system type 1) *

To play from an iPod

F00756300372

  1. Press the PWR button (1) to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last mode used.
  2. Connect your iPod to the USB input terminal. Refer to "How to connect an iPod" on page 7-104.
  3. Press the CD button (11) several times to switch to the iPod mode. The mode changes every time the CD button is pressed.

CD mode → iPod mode → Bluetooth mode*

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To play from an iPod - 1

NOTE

  • If your vehicle is equipped with Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA), pressing and holding the CD button for 2 seconds or more switches the system to the AUX mode.
  • Once the device is selected, playback starts and "iPod" appears on the display.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

● Depending on the condition of your iPod, it may take a longer time before the playback starts.

  1. To stop the playback, change over to a different mode.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

  • Buttons on the iPod are disabled while the iPod is connected to the audio system.
    ● To adjust the volume and tone, refer to "To adjust the volume" and "To adjust the tone".

To fast-forward/reverse the track

E00756400113

Fast-forward

To fast-forward the current track, press the button (8). While the button is pressed, the track will be fast-forwarded.

Fast-reverse

To fast-reverse the current track, press the Y button (9). While the button is pressed, the track will be fast-reversed.

To select a desired track

F00756500097

Track up

Press the 7 button (8) repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.

Track down

Press the Ybutton (9) repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Track down - 1

NOTE

- Pressing the button (9) once during the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the song.

To find a track from the iPod menu

E00756600186

You can select desired tracks from the "Playlists", "Artists", "Albums", "Songs" or "Genre" (vehicles with Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface) menus on your iPod.

Press the following buttons to select desired tracks.

The selected menu or category or track is shown in the display.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To find a track from the iPod menu - 1

button

(12)

:To start this mode or cancel the selection.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To find a track from the iPod menu - 2

button (8)

or √ button

:To show the menu or category or track.

(9)

▶ button (13)

:To select the menu or category or track.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To find a track from the iPod menu - 3

NOTE

  • If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or another button is operated after the Button or Button has been pressed, searching of the desired tracks is cancelled.
  • If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the track is displayed, playback starts.

To play the same track repeatedly

E00756700099

Press the RPT button (6) during playback to show "RPT" in the display.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

To play tracks in random order

U07569VX61

Press the RDM button (7) to show "SHUFFLE" in the display. The iPod randomly selects tracks from the current category and plays the selected tracks.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

To play tracks in each album in random order

E00757000099

Press and hold the RDM button (7) until you hear a beep to show “A-SHUFFLE” in the display.

The iPod randomly selects tracks in the album from the current category and play the selected tracks.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

To switch the display

E00757100090

The display changes as follows every time the TEXT button (4) is pressed during play-back.

Album title → Track name → Artist name → Genre (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) → Normal display

Example Album title 12:00 14 18 1Pod TRICK 1/123 12' 34 ALD. RHOSELEBUN181 AA8104717

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To switch the display - 2

NOTE

  • Up to 16 characters are shown in the display at once. If the title is cut off in the middle, press the PAGE button (5). The next characters are displayed every time this button is pressed.
  • If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in the display.
  • Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “”.

To play iPod tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)

F(017572)0046

Desired tracks can be selected and played from your iPod by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playlist” and “Genre” using voice commands. For information concerning the voice recognition function or speaker enrollment function, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 7-84.

The following explains how to prepare for voice operation and play the tracks.

To play tracks from USB device (audio system type 1) *

Preparation for voice operation

E00757300135

To use the voice operation, press the SPEECH button (1) first.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - Preparation for voice operation - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car wheel with a small component inside, no text or symbols present

AA0104791

To search by artist name

E00757400019

  1. Say "Play" on the main menu.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To search by artist name - 1

NOTE

- The Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide.

  1. After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Artist”.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- If you say “Artist ,” you can skip step 3.

  1. After the voice guide says "What Artist would you like to play?," say the artist name.
  2. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6.
  3. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say "More than one match was found, would you like to play ?" If you say "Yes," the system proceeds to step 6. If you say "No," the next matching artist is uttered by the system.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- If you say “No” to three or all artist names uttered by the system, the voice guide will say “Artist not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2. - Search time is dependant on the number of songs on your connected device. Devices containing a large number of songs may take longer to return search results.

  1. After the voice guide says "Playing ," the system creates a playlist index for the artist.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the artist name is correct. If the artist name is correct, say "Yes". If not, say "No". After the voice guide says "Artist not found, please try again," the system returns to step 2.

  1. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback.

To search by album title

E00757500010

  1. Say "Play" on the main menu.

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - To search by album title - 1

NOTE

- The Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide.

  1. After the voice guide says "Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?," say "Album".

MITSUBISHI L200 (2015) - NOTE - 1

NOTE

- If you say "Album

," you can skip step 3.</p> <ol> <li>After the voice guide says "What Album would you like to play?" say the album title. </li> <li>If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6. </li> <li>If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say "More than one match was found, would you like to play <album title>?" If you say "Yes," the system proceeds to step 6. <br /> If you say “No,” the next matching album is uttered by the system.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/947c51fb00efa2e3f0554b631f3019dec09d2bf30620db95b1a21bd5c08a04d5.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-213">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>If you say “No” to three or all album titles uttered by the system, the voice guide will say “Album not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2.</p> </li> <li> <p>After the voice guide says "Playing <album title>," the system creates a playlist index for the album title.</p> </li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/64839292bde6de8c7a778911c910dfcd1029d8a921555d742c5b5a3f16e3a215.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-214">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the album title is correct. If the album title is correct, say "Yes". If not, say "No". After the voice guide says "Album not found, please try again," the system returns to step 2.</p> </li> <li> <p>The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback.</p> </li> </ul> <h1 id="to-search-by-playlist">To search by playlist</h1> <p>E00757600011</p> <ol> <li>Say "Play" on the main menu.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/73b5776ee02f908bbc32430f2c8b3abe51ffaeb6e5ebc8eff0fbb23de49f09ab.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-215">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. <br /> If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth ^® <br /> 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide.</p> </li> <li> <p>After the voice guide says “Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?,” say “Playlist”.</p> </li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/3430e268f5e85c547ef0a3ea38876fa1c0b4152efe4a5f3442036a6492377062.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-216">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip step 3. <br /> If the device has no playlist, the voice guide will say “There are no playlists stored on device” and the system returns to step 2.</p> </li> <li> <p>After the voice guide says "What Playlist would you like to play?," say the playlist name.</p> </li> <li> <p>If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6.</p> </li> <li> <p>If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say "More than one match was found, would you like to play <playlist>? If you say "Yes," the system proceeds to step 6. If you say "No," the next matching playlist name is uttered by the system.</p> </li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/ed8b4864b05c4a9e849d0f634175aecab5b8af15126ac931bf8402f85dfa8790.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-217">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you say “No” to three or all playlist names uttered by the system, the voice guide will say “Playlist not found, please try again” and the system returns to step 2.</p> <ol> <li>After the voice guide says "Playing <playlist>," the system creates an index for the playlist.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/da3e4d25f02fa9f11fec49da522871feda54f51a31b80a3871b539bdaf0cdee1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-218">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the playlist name is correct. If the playlist name is correct, say "Yes". If not, say "No". After the voice guide says "Playlist not found, please try again," the system returns to step 2. Refer to "Confirmation function setting" on page 7-87.</p> <ol> <li>The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback.</li> </ol> <p>To play tracks from USB device (audio system type 1) *</p> <h1 id="to-search-by-genre">To search by genre</h1> <p>E00757700041</p> <ol> <li>Say "Play" on the main menu.</li> </ol> <p>If you say "No," the next matching genre is uttered by the system.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/02fe317ca9b517522c50848dd8b88ee4800888d4ceda6a20357077b35d1e03e2.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-219">NOTE</h1> <p>- The Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6209ebce79f9c8241e777134736e8327409b63f6d823ecbedbb29bf9ab1af543.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-220">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you say "No" to three or all genres uttered by the system, the voice guide will say "Genre not found, please try again" and the system returns to step 2.</p> <ol> <li> <p>After the voice guide says "Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?," say "Genre".</p> </li> <li> <p>After the voice guide says "Playing <genre>," the system creates an index for the genre.</p> </li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/94989e268122f443c09bf9e8f669dec21736da1a1412c32b47362e16be7de768.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-221">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you say "Genre <type>," you can skip step 3.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f7c5279f39af759b40937e340967f5d47271ad44aad76d1cdda8dbcf6d2fb240.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-222">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. If the genre is correct, say "Yes". If not, say "No". After the voice guide says "Genre not found, please try again," the system returns to step 2. Refer to "Confirmation function setting" on page 7-87.</p> <ol> <li>After the voice guide says "What Genre would you like to play?," say the music type.</li> <li>If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6.</li> <li> <p>If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say "More than one match was found, would you like to play <genre>?" If you say "Yes," the system proceeds to step 6.</p> </li> <li> <p>The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback.</p> </li> </ol> <p>To play tracks from USB device (audio system type 1) *</p> <h1 id="usb-control-panel-and-display">USB control panel and display</h1> <p>F00758100231</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/bd1d44031a3ddce3043b575965c8c77247575e66d5a9e7be1a7413c4c1280b87.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OI FOLDER TEXT PAGE RPT ROM RADIO CD TP PTY MENU 10 11 12 13 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/08522e7f0bf9238a8dbe3408281e0f9e7dcdd5a1b6d9d10e86fb2cb31e0841ee.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 14 15 16 AM 12:00 USB FOLDER N FILE 1 12' 34 RPT INFO 17 18 °C ADJ </details> <p>AA1008434</p> <p>1- PWR (On-Off) button <br /> 2- FOLDER (Folder down) button <br /> 3- FOLDER (Folder up) button <br /> 4- TEXT button <br /> 5- PAGE (Title scroll) button <br /> 6- RPT (Repeat) button</p> <p>7- RDM (Random) button <br /> 8- Fast-forward/File up) button <br /> 9- Fast-reverse/File down) button <br /> 10- RADIO button <br /> 11- CD (Mode change) button <br /> 12- (Return) button</p> <p>13- (Select) button <br /> 14- USB indicator <br /> 15- FOLDER indicator <br /> 16- FILE indicator <br /> 17- RPT/F-RPT/F-RDM/RDM/SCAN/F-SCAN indicator</p> <h1 id="to-play-from-a-usb-memory-device">To play from a USB memory device</h1> <p>E00762500366</p> <ol> <li> <p>Press the PWR button (1) to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last mode used.</p> </li> <li> <p>Connect your USB memory device to the USB input terminal. Refer to "How to connect a USB memory device" on page 7-103. </p> </li> <li>Press the CD button (11) several times to switch to the USB mode. The mode</li> </ol> <p>changes as follows every time the CD button is pressed.</p> <p>CD mode → USB mode → Bluetooth mode*</p> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <p>To play tracks from USB device (audio system type 1) *</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/042dd382bb033bf3630fb2d9645941f3fee944bd367d92e882874501a33b6d39.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-223">NOTE</h1> <p>- If your vehicle is equipped with Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA), pressing and holding the CD button for 2 seconds or more switches the system to the AUX mode.</p> <ol> <li>Once the device is selected, playback starts and "USB" appears on the display.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/d8f6666280054e0cf9f907be88dea76a091ea2f36815d01e58d931001fc99e9c.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-224">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the condition of your USB device, it may take a longer time before the playback starts.</p> <ol> <li>To stop the playback, change over to a different mode.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/0216edadc67acfacabcbd9a781860ebaac47d77b44babf69505669cafecdd804.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-225">NOTE</h1> <p>● To adjust the volume and tone, refer to "To adjust the volume" and "To adjust the tone".</p> <h1 id="supported-compressed-music-files">Supported compressed music files</h1> <p>E00758300305</p> <p>This audio can play MP3, WMA, AAC and WAV files recorded in a USB memory device. This audio supports up to 65,535 files in 700 folders on 8 levels.</p> <h1 id="folder-selection-orderfile-playback-order-example">Folder selection order/file playback order (example)</h1> <p>The folder and file hierarchy in the USB memory device is shown below.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/348d9df5706f32f8bdae1bf0880bad0734edef1aed7d2947f86a992799f3474a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>flowchart</summary> <pre><code class="language-mermaid">graph TD A["Root folder (Root directory)"] --> B["1"] A --> C["2"] A --> D["3"] A --> E["4"] A --> F["5"] A --> G["6"] A --> H["7"] B --> I["Level 1"] C --> J["Level 2"] D --> K["Level 3"] E --> L["Level 4"] F --> M["Level 5"] G --> N["Level 6"] </code></pre> </details> <h1 id="folder-selection">Folder selection</h1> <p>In the order</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/675fec0feff6c2c84d7e92e3de78e45f927afc8b176d23dd710204c0c0fa1d3f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="file-selection">File selection</h1> <p>In the order</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5ac181ba6841f24bf932c58c459fc38bd3d6e76545aa6b845b17712f1d0d0d61.jpg" /></p> <p><img alt="" src="images/124a44299edb6e5b54ed6f09044cbd52d2d6315cf470a87899f535204f11d7ea.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-226">NOTE</h1> <p>- If a file protected by copyrights is played the file will be skipped.</p> <h1 id="to-fast-forwardreverse-the-track-2">To fast-forward/reverse the track</h1> <p>E00758400090</p> <h1 id="fast-forward-3">Fast-forward</h1> <p>To fast-forward the current track, press the button (8). While the button is pressed, the track will be fast-forwarded.</p> <h1 id="fast-reverse-3">Fast-reverse</h1> <p>To fast-reverse the current track, press the Y button (9). While the button is pressed, the track will be fast-reversed.</p> <h1 id="to-select-a-file">To select a file</h1> <p>E00758500088</p> <h1 id="file-up">File up</h1> <p>Press the 7button (8) repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display.</p> <h1 id="file-down">File down</h1> <p>Press the Vbutton (9) repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5879f4b49a3c5370e9be3530a8e74d88973f892f0933c2cc67fa72579fc9cb0e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-227">NOTE</h1> <p>- Pressing the button (9) once during the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the song.</p> <h1 id="to-find-a-file">To find a file</h1> <p>E00758600311</p> <p>You can select a folder to find a desired track.</p> <p>Press the following buttons to select desired folder or file.</p> <p>The selected folder or file is shown in the display.</p> <p>button To start this mode or cancel the selection. (12) <br /> button (8): To show the folder or file. or button <br /> (9) <br /> ▶ button : To select the folder or file. (13)</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d6d00e73ecdbff8c248045e6d0df10a42e3d57b0a9d6e832262dde89f3aed13c.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-228">NOTE</h1> <p>- If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or another button is operated after the Button or Button has been pressed, searching of the desired file is cancelled.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/045ad77dfdbbf821193e551b0c73cafc7b65801058117ea0908d195defed3577.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-229">NOTE</h1> <p>- If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the file is displayed, playback starts.</p> <h1 id="to-play-the-same-file-repeatedly">To play the same file repeatedly</h1> <p>E00758700093</p> <p>Press the RPT button (6) to show "RPT" in the display.</p> <p>To exit this mode, press the button again.</p> <h1 id="to-play-the-files-in-the-same-folder-repeatedly">To play the files in the same folder repeatedly</h1> <p>E00758800094</p> <p>Press and hold the RPT button (6) until you hear a beep to show "F-RPT" in the display.</p> <p>All files in the current folder are played repeatedly.</p> <p>To exit this mode, press the button again.</p> <h1 id="to-play-a-folder-in-random-order">To play a folder in random order</h1> <p>E00758900095</p> <p>Press the RDM button (7) to show "F-RDM" in the display.</p> <p>The audio randomly selects files from the current folder and plays the selected files.</p> <p>To exit this mode, press the button again.</p> <h1 id="to-play-all-folders-in-random-order">To play all folders in random order</h1> <p>E00759000093</p> <p>Press and hold the RDM button (7) until you hear a beep to show "RDM" in the display.</p> <p>The audio randomly selects files from all folders and plays the selected files.</p> <p>To exit this mode, press the button again.</p> <h1 id="to-switch-the-display-2">To switch the display</h1> <p>F00759300155</p> <p>The display changes as follows every time the TEXT button (4) is pressed during play-back.</p> <p>Folder title → File title → Normal display</p> <h1 id="id3-tag-information-2">ID3 tag information</h1> <ol> <li>Press and hold the TEXT button (4) until you hear a beep to show "TAG" in the display.</li> </ol> <p>To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (audio system type 1) *</p> <ol> <li>The display changes as follows every time the TEXT button (4) is pressed briefly.</li> </ol> <p>Album title → Track title → Artist name → Genre (vehicles with Bluetooth 2.0 interface) → Normal display</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d3705d7240f1e54d6f30e325217e9053fcea25a84d3e763c56a42aa617b674f7.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Example File title 12:00 18 USB FISER 2 FILE 1 12'34 FIL: NAME AA0104733 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/e15dfe759a235390a4cd9aff18a92e8c71a73ddbea42e90994ebaee540895a4f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-230">NOTE</h1> <p>● Press and hold the TEXT button (4) again until you hear a beep, and the tag information display returns to the folder title display. <br /> ● Up to 16 characters are shown in the display at once. If the title is cut off in the middle press the PAGE button (5). The next characters are displayed every time this button is pressed. <br /> - If no title is stored, "NO TITLE" is shown in the display. <br /> - Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “”.</p> <h1 id="to-play-usb-memory-device-tracks-via-voice-operation-vehicles-with-bluetooth-20-interface">To play USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)</h1> <p>E00759400130</p> <p>Desired tracks can be selected and played from your USB memory device by "Artist", "Album", "Playlist" and "Genre" using voice commands.</p> <p>For information concerning the voice recognition function or speaker enrollment function, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 7-84.</p> <p>The playback sequence of tracks is the same as when an iPod is connected. Refer to the "To play iPod tracks via voice operation" on page 7-33.</p> <h1 id="preparation-for-voice-operation-2">Preparation for voice operation</h1> <p>To use the voice operation, press the SPEECH button (1) first.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8909647edb8fa190c621652edda0ca1066dc62bac49dc767814d9e4df2a42fb1.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Diagram of a circular mechanical or biological structure with internal components, no visible text or symbols </details> <h1 id="to-play-tracks-from-a-bluetooth-device-audio-system-type-1">To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (audio system type 1) \*</h1> <p>E00759701215</p> <p>On vehicles with Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface, you can wirelessly connect a digital audio player or cellular phone supporting Bluetooth ^® to listen to the tracks on the connected device.</p> <p>Refer to "Bluetooth® 2.0 interface" on page 7-84.</p> <p>The following explains the basic playback method.</p> <p>To play tracks from a Bluetooth ^® device (audio system type 1) *</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/768a76de4def223f0262dac6dfad474114c58a6367d106fb8bece9cdc5669c86.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-231">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>According to the connected device, it is not to operate correctly or the limitation might be provided in available function. <br /> ● The protected file by copyright might not be able to start playback.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/0353936d52ee2ba595714921f5ae72fbf79cc80c11074d208e6c8b4823f1da1b.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-232">NOTE</h1> <p>- It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of the connected device is flat.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b9fc5a080951aaba302cb92cf0a7a6b60c59a2234ded8ea10f956c6cb5a281dc.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-233">NOTE</h1> <p>- The voice operation is not available to access music files on the connected Bluetooth® device.</p> <h1 id="bluetooth-device-control-panel-and-display">Bluetooth ^® device control panel and display</h1> <p>E00762600181</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/9d2d856981f9b547b57177ff8a0591300c8bd89d1abbb55ea3124cc09996ba66.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FOLDER TEXT PAGE RPT ROM RADIO CD TP PTY MENU 8 9 10 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/90cb51c4f94927e2c4aed3b53e09b0ac4db1590234deee7ffeadc919f78a892b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 11 AM 12:00 BT-A 1-PT 12 H TRACK 123 12' 34 18°C 13 AFO ADJ </details> <p>AA1008447</p> <p>1- PWR (On-Off) button <br /> 2- TEXT (Title display) button <br /> 3- PAGE (Title scroll) button <br /> 4- RPT (Repeat) button <br /> 5- RDM (Random) button</p> <p>6- Fast-forward/File up) button <br /> 7- YFast-reverse/File down) button <br /> 8- CD (Mode change) button <br /> 9- (Stop/Pause) button <br /> 10- (Play) button</p> <p>11- BT-A (Bluetooth®) indicator <br /> 12- TRACK indicator <br /> 13- 1-RPT/A-RPT/RDM/SCAN indicator</p> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <p>To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (audio system type 1) *</p> <h1 id="to-listen-to-tracks-from-a-device-connected-via-bluetooth">To listen to tracks from a device connected via Bluetooth®</h1> <p>L00762700225</p> <ol> <li>Press the PWR button (1) to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last mode used. </li> <li>Press the CD button (8) several times to switch to the BT-A (Bluetooth) mode. The mode changes as follows every time the CD button is pressed. <br /> CD mode → USB (iPod) mode → Bluetooth® mode</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/c16fcb677112c860486883fff7300edb39b1f45347aaf5fa178fc57215d7ff59.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-234">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>For vehicles equipped with Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA), pressing and holding the CD button for 2 seconds or more switches the system to the AUX mode.</p> </li> <li> <p>Connect your Bluetooth® device. Refer to "Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device" on page 7-90.</p> </li> <li> <p>Playback starts automatically.</p> </li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/013077c0ac3ea9ede378a044038d6e5fa164fc1c148a444d986b303f438e5e19.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-235">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the connected device, the playback may not start automatically. In this case, operate the connected device to start the playback.</p> <h1 id="to-stop-the-playback-if-supported-by-the-device">To stop the playback (if supported by the device)</h1> <p>F00762800079</p> <p>To stop the playback, press and hold the button (9) until you hear a beep. To restart the playback, press the button (10).</p> <h1 id="to-pause-the-playback-if-supported-by-the-device">To pause the playback (if supported by the device)</h1> <p>E00762900083</p> <p>To pause the playback, press the button (9). To restart the playback, press the button (10).</p> <h1 id="to-fast-forwardreverse-the-track-if-supported-by-the-device">To fast-forward/reverse the track (if supported by the device)</h1> <p>E00765600010</p> <h1 id="fast-forward-4">Fast-forward</h1> <p>To fast-forward the current track, press the button (6). While the button is pressed, the track will be fast-forwarded.</p> <h1 id="fast-reverse-4">Fast-reverse</h1> <p>To fast-reverse the current track, press the Y button (7). While the button is pressed, the track will be fast-reversed.</p> <h1 id="to-select-a-track-if-supported-by-the-device">To select a track (if supported by the device)</h1> <p>ED0763000094</p> <h1 id="track-up-3">Track up</h1> <p>Press the 7 button (6) repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.</p> <h1 id="track-down-3">Track down</h1> <p>Press the Ybutton (7) repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5165ff61763f4e06e5c8ae32079e94d34d3f62832c2b525f8680e91d709f6723.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-236">NOTE</h1> <p>- Pressing the button (7) once during the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the song.</p> <h1 id="to-play-the-same-track-or-all-tracks-repeatedly-if-supported-by-the-device">To play the same track or all tracks repeatedly (if supported by the device)</h1> <p>F00763100079</p> <p>Press the RPT button (4) several times to show “1-RPT” (same track repeat mode) or “A-RPT” (all tracks repeat mode) in the display.</p> <p>The mode changes as follows every time the RPT button is pressed.</p> <p>1-RPT mode → A-RPT mode → mode off</p> <p>To exit these mode, press the RPT button several times until the 1-RPT indicator or the A-RPT indicator goes off.</p> <h1 id="to-play-tracks-in-random-order-if-supported-by-the-device">To play tracks in random order (if supported by the device)</h1> <p>E00763200070</p> <p>Press the RDM button (5) to show "RDM" in the display.</p> <p>The system randomly selects and plays tracks from all tracks in the Bluetooth ^® device.</p> <p>To exit this mode, press the button again.</p> <h1 id="to-switch-the-display-if-supported-by-the-device">To switch the display (if supported by the device)</h1> <p>E00763400072</p> <p>The display changes as follows every time the TEXT button (2) is pressed briefly.</p> <p>Album title → Title name → Artist name → Genre → Normal display</p> <p>Example</p> <p>Album title</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/1c2919eb6740f1c59f972498b07e46e0603ac793d05e7bef3daf7d02601f752e.jpg" /></p> <p>AA8104746</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/bf6fd6ff502d93f9c1ad584532e9ffdf8485df4901f7d813071cb616e5585339.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-237">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Press and hold the TEXT button (2) again until you hear a beep, and the tag information disappears. </li> <li>Up to 16 characters are shown in the display at once. If the title is cut off in the middle, press the PAGE button (3). The next characters are displayed every time this button is pressed. </li> <li>If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in the display. </li> <li>Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “”.</li> </ul> <h1 id="to-use-the-external-audio-input-function-audio-system-type-1">To use the external audio input function (audio system type 1) \*</h1> <p>E00732202023</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/3bae3c03c291e98a92b81b3d67e269cdbd846d88f7bf093e6c11b156d9f96147.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA) A B AA0096182 </details> <p>Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)</p> <p>A- Left audio input connector (white) <br /> B- Right audio input connector (red)</p> <p>You can listen to commercially available audio equipment, such as a portable audio system, from your vehicle's speakers, by connecting the audio equipment to the audio input connectors, which are external input connectors (pin jacks).</p> <p>Steering wheel remote control switch (audio system type 1) *</p> <h1 id="to-activate-the-external-audio-input-mode">To activate the external audio input mode</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/f25acc9b0fe878ca4a7f4397c5dac68daa33d9ec3a864395522273cbf0e2aff0.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> F 1 2 3 4 5 6 FILTER TEXT PALE RPT WM RANG CD 20 PTY MENU D AM 12:00 H 18 RAN E AA0104K21 </details> <ol> <li>Use a commercially available audio cable to connect the audio equipment to the external audio input connector. </li> <li>Press the CD button (D) for more than 2 seconds. The display (E) will show "AUX" and then the external audio input mode will be activated. </li> <li>To deactivate the external audio input mode, press the RADIO button (F) or the CD button (D) to switch to another mode.</li> </ol> <h1 id="caution-103">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not operate the connected audio equipment while driving. <br /> This could distract you and an accident might occur.</li> </ul> <h1 id="note-238">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>The connected audio equipment cannot be operated with the vehicle's audio system. <br /> ● Depending on the connected audio equipment, it may produce noise from the speakers. </li> <li>Use the connected audio equipment's own power source, such as its battery. <br /> Noise may be produced from the speakers if the connected audio equipment is used while charging it using the accessory socket of the vehicle. </li> <li>Do not activate the external audio input mode when no audio equipment is connected. <br /> Otherwise, noise may be produced from the speakers. </li> <li>Connect audio equipment when the external audio input mode is deactivated or lower the vehicle's speaker volume before connecting it. <br /> Noise may be produced from the speakers if audio equipment is connected after the external audio input mode is activated. </li> <li>For information on how to connect and operate the audio equipment, refer to the owner's manual for the equipment.</li> </ul> <h1 id="steering-wheel-remote-control-switch-audio-system-type-1">Steering wheel remote control switch (audio system type 1) \*</h1> <p>E00710002034</p> <p>The remote control switches are located on the left side of the steering wheel.</p> <p>These switches can be used when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/75d4baa248218c24b0e3ecc89d95ebcdfca2599ca7bb10c0aac27e5ea01c00c7.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 4 5 AA0096643 </details> <p>1- Volume up button <br /> 2- Volume down button <br /> 3- PWR (ON-OFF)/Mode change button <br /> 4- Seek up/Fast-forward/Track up/File up button <br /> 5- Seek down/Fast-reverse/Track down/File down button</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ba4ad3c7be8e26c2c55dce32bb87f48d4e6592194eb2dc87d74f7eae56b23989.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-239">NOTE</h1> <p>- Do not push two or more of the steering wheel remote control switches at the same time.</p> <h1 id="to-turn-on-the-power">To turn on the power</h1> <h1 id="pwr-on-off-button-3">PWR ON-OFF button — 3</h1> <p>When the power is off, press this button to turn the power on.</p> <p>To turn the power off, press this button for 2 seconds or longer.</p> <h1 id="to-adjust-the-volume-2">To adjust the volume</h1> <h1 id="volume-up-button-1">Volume up button — 1</h1> <p>The volume will increase when this button is pressed.</p> <h1 id="volume-down-button-2">Volume down button — 2</h1> <p>The volume will decrease when this button is pressed.</p> <h1 id="mode-selection">Mode selection</h1> <p>Press the mode change button (3) to select the desired mode.</p> <p>The mode changes in the following order.</p> <p>FM1 FM2 FM3 MW LW CD</p> <p>→ USB or iPod* → Bluetooth®* → FM1</p> <h1 id="to-listen-to-the-radio-2">To listen to the radio</h1> <h1 id="to-select-fmmwlw-mode">To select FM/MW/LW mode</h1> <p>Press the mode change button (3) to select the desired mode.</p> <p>(AM/FM or LW/MW/FM)</p> <h1 id="automatic-radio-tuning">Automatic radio tuning</h1> <p>Seek up button — 4/Seek down button — 5</p> <p>After pressing these buttons, the reception of the selected station will begin.</p> <h1 id="to-listen-to-a-cd-2">To listen to a CD</h1> <h1 id="to-fast-forwardfast-reverse-the-disc-2">To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc</h1> <p>To fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press the fast-forward button (4) or the fast-reverse button (5).</p> <h1 id="fast-forward-button-4">Fast-forward button — 4</h1> <p>You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the fast-forward button. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.</p> <p>Fast-reverse button — 5</p> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p>You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the fast-reverse button. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-reversed.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/cb31cf31a148776d57bd3ff11400bcac95a5fca8c17e2fd69bfbef9b148b2f1d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-240">NOTE</h1> <p>- In the case of an MP3 CD, you can fast-forward and fast-reverse tracks in the same folder.</p> <h1 id="to-select-a-desired-track-3">To select a desired track</h1> <h1 id="track-up-button-4">Track up button — 4</h1> <p>Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.</p> <h1 id="track-down-button-5">Track down button — 5</h1> <p>Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.</p> <h1 id="to-listen-to-an-ipod">To listen to an iPod</h1> <p>Press the mode change button (3) and select iPod mode.</p> <h1 id="to-select-a-desired-track-4">To select a desired track</h1> <h1 id="track-up-button-4-2">Track up button — 4</h1> <p>Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <p>Steering wheel remote control switch (audio system type 1) *</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/34f33ce90ae2defa74f0681734c7443dfca2c9289df0bfdf25a76c64be4b8666.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-241">NOTE</h1> <p>● The track number increases continuously while the button is pressed.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/cb6916436e366e870e24a6ef9392ad4cbb808dda406504cdd55e57bf377e01fb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-242">NOTE</h1> <p>● The track number decreases continuously while the button is pressed.</p> <h1 id="track-down-button-5-2">Track down button — 5</h1> <p>Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c846aa81dafcbee62891cf93b28aa488f30c66b060ab34ce5304698537730e13.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-243">NOTE</h1> <p>● The track number decreases continuously while the button is pressed.</p> <h1 id="to-listen-to-a-usb-memory-device">To listen to a USB memory device</h1> <p>Press the mode change button (3) and select USB mode.</p> <h1 id="to-select-a-desired-file">To select a desired file</h1> <h1 id="file-up-button-4">File up button — 4</h1> <p>Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/25b2d85aef32f72176068e1e1c941ec05df45c81a1a0c0257c5cdfa870b344c9.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-244">NOTE</h1> <p>● The track number increases continuously while the button is pressed.</p> <h1 id="file-down-button-5">File down button — 5</h1> <p>Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.</p> <p>7-46</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <h1 id="error-codes-audio-system-type-1">Error codes (audio system type 1)</h1> <p>E00710102396</p> <p>If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.</p> <table><tr><td colspan="3">Mode Error display Problem Description</td><td>Repair</td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="4">CD</td><td colspan="2">NO DISC No disc inserted</td><td>Disc is not in CD player. Insert disc.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">ERROR 01 Focus error Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or excessive vehicle vibration.</td><td>Insert disc with label facing up.Remove moisture from disc.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">ERROR 02 Disc error Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or excessive vehicle vibration.</td><td>Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations stop.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">ERROR 03 Mechanism error</td><td>Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position.</td><td>Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, have the equipment inspected.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="6">iPod</td><td colspan="3">NO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the iPod.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">VERSION ERROR (Blink) The iPod or its software cannot be recognized. Connect a supported iPod.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">USB BUS POWER (Blink)</td><td>An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred.</td><td>Remove the iPod.Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">USB LSI ERROR (Blink)</td><td>Internal device errors</td><td>Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">CONNECT RETRY (Blink)</td><td>If the iPod indicator illuminates, the iPod cannot be authenticated.</td><td>Reconnect the iPod.</td></tr><tr><td>If the iPod indicator goes out, it shows the USB communication error.</td><td>Reconnect the iPod correctly.If this error is displayed again, have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr></table> <p>Error codes (audio system type 1) </p> <table><tr><td colspan="4">Mode Error display Problem Description Repair</td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="6">USB</td><td colspan="4">NO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the format supported by the USB memory device.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">USB FILE ERROR (Blink) The file cannot be played. The file is protected by copyright, etc. An error is displayed for several seconds, and the next playable file is played automatically.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">UNSUPPORTED FORMAT (Blink)</td><td>The USB memory device format cannot be recognized.</td><td>Remove the USB memory device.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">USB BUS POWER (Blink) An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred.</td><td>Remove the USB memory device.Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">USB LSI ERROR (Blink) Internal device errors Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">CONNECT RETRY (Blink) USB communication error Reconnect the USB memory device correctly.If this error is displayed again, have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Other</td><td>ERROR HOT</td><td>High temperature</td><td>Internal protection against high temperatures.</td><td>Allow CD player to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.</td></tr><tr><td>ERROR</td><td>Communication or power supply error</td><td>Communication error between external device and audio equipment.Power supply error of external device.</td><td>Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr></table> <h1 id="audio-system-anti-theft-feature-audio-system-type-1">Audio system anti-theft feature (audio system type 1)</h1> <p>E00710201387</p> <p>To prevent theft of the audio system, the control knob can be removed. Always remove the control knob when you leave the vehicle.</p> <h1 id="removing-the-control-knob">Removing the control knob</h1> <p>Slide the release button (A) to the right and remove the control knob from the audio system.</p> <p>The anti-theft function operates in two ways depending on the position of the ignition key.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a2d160e01fd363462ad7720b2778df7530c2e2098047d93af761f4a4fdea5308.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A D AA0104788 </details> <ol> <li>With the key in the "ON" or "ACC" position</li> </ol> <p>The "Please refit the control panel." indicator will appear on the display. Any audio system operation will be disabled while the "Please refit the control panel." indicator is displayed.</p> <ol> <li>With the key in the "LOCK" position The lamp (B) will start flashing to deter thieves.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/06fb2b3889692406eea8df0bee67c59df031055094022571e11602f8086c232c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A0046451 B </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/62f2dcafcf09b93faf45daecbd92cee53cfd10411900c05b81088cafe690d621.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-245">NOTE</h1> <p>- When sliding the release button, place one hand on the control knob to prevent it from falling out.</p> <h1 id="refitting-the-control-knob">Refitting the control knob</h1> <p>Put the control knob back into the original position and then push it until it clicks. The "Please refit the control panel." indicator will disappear or the lamp (B) will stop flashing.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d1d19bb1d92e354760fb3f600041bb6889332a8ab3b305fe2812a3c0fc84ab1a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-246">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Do not leave the control knob in any place where it may become hot (for example, the dashboard) or in any place where it may become wet. </li> <li>If you lose the control knob, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</li> </ul> <h1 id="handling-of-compact-discs-audio-system-type-1">Handling of compact discs (audio system type 1)</h1> <p>E00723001464</p> <p>● Use only the type of compact discs that have the mark shown in the illustration</p> <h1 id="handling-of-compact-discs-audio-system-type-1-2">Handling of compact discs (audio system type 1)</h1> <p>below. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs may cause problems.)</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a18bdfcb9700637936e046253100d6a2a9dd2a3fe22b4966e2c2872da8732fbe.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO AA0012063 </details> <p>● The use of special shaped, damaged compact discs (like cracked discs) or low-quality compact discs (like warped discs or burrs on the discs) such as those shown will damage the CD player.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5c671ff425e76c6b76adce8c510a66274a9ae652b5d3f2ee42dd3900b48c43cf.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Safety warning diagram with heart-shaped and hexagonal shapes, no text or symbols </details> <p>● In the following circumstances, moisture can form on discs and inside the audio system, preventing normal operation.</p> <ul> <li>When there is high humidity (for example, when it is raining). </li> <li>When the temperature suddenly rises, such as right after the heater is turned on in cold weather.</li> </ul> <p>In this case, wait until the moisture has had time to dry out.</p> <ul> <li>When the CD player is subjected to violent vibrations, such as during off-road driving, the tracking may not work. </li> <li>When storing compact discs, always store them in their separate cases. Never place compact discs in direct sunlight, or in any place where the temperature or humidity is high. <br /> ● Never touch the flat surface of the disc without a label. This will damage the disc surface and could affect the sound quality. When handling a compact disc, always hold it by the outer edge and the centre hole. <br /> ● To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth. Wipe directly from the centre hole towards the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Never use any chemicals such as benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/973ad7525517d4e402c66413626f4a03e2072283249689151d28b4b34c12865c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Illustration of two hands holding circular objects, one with a ring and the other with a disc (no text or symbols) </details> <ul> <li>Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil, etc. to write on the label surface of the disc. </li> <li>Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers (B) on compact discs. Also, do not use any compact disc on which a label or sticker has started to peel off or any compact disc that has stickiness or other contamination left by a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use such a compact disc, the CD player may stop working properly and you may not be able to eject the compact disc.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/3f89f918e71a1bb72d1a168cc465f739421ef20e2d27b4e7b8d76122d2d8351c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AA9016784 </details> <h1 id="notes-on-cd-rsrws">Notes on CD-Rs/RWs</h1> <p>E00725100039</p> <p>- You may have trouble playing back some CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders (CD-R/RW drives), either due to their recording characteristics or dirt, fingerprints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface.</p> <ul> <li>CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high temperatures and high humidity than ordinary music CDs. Leaving them inside a vehicle for extended periods may damage them and make playback impossible. </li> <li>The unit may not successfully play back a CD-R/RW that was made by the combination of writing software, a CD recorder (CD-R/RW drive) and a disc if they are incompatible with one another. <br /> ● This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs if the session is not closed. <br /> ● This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs which contain other than CD-DA or MP3 data (Video CD, etc.). </li> <li>Be sure to observe the handling instructions for the CD-R/RW disc.</li> </ul> <h1 id="warning-88">WARNING</h1> <p>- Operating the CD player in a manner other than specifically instructed herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not remove the cover and attempt to repair the CD player by yourself. There are no user servicable parts inside. In case of malfunction, we recommend you to have it checked.</p> <h1 id="lwmwfm-radiocd-player-audio-system-type-2">LW/MW/FM radio/CD player (audio system type 2)\*</h1> <p>E00708503459</p> <p>The audio system can only be used when the operation mode of the power switch is in ON or ACC.</p> <h1 id="note-247">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>To listen to the audio system while the engine is stopped, turn the ignition switch to the "ACC" position. </li> <li>If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, it may create noise from the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far away as possible from the audio equipment. </li> <li>If foreign objects or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system. We recommend you to have it checked. Never try to repair it by yourself. Avoid continuous usage without inspection by a qualified person. <br /> ● The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is located under the front right seat. Do not subject the amplifier to a strong impact. It could damage the amplifier or ma functioning could result.</li> </ul> <p>LW/MW/FM radio/CD player (audio system type 2)*</p> <h1 id="important-points-on-usage">Important Points on Usage</h1> <p>E00735500023</p> <h1 id="ipodiphone-playback-function">iPod/iPhone Playback Function\*</h1> <p>● This product supports audio playback from iPod/iPhone devices, however differing versions mean that playback cannot be guaranteed. <br /> - Please be aware that depending on the iPod/iPhone model or version, operation may differ.</p> <h1 id="how-to-clean">How to Clean</h1> <p>E00735700025</p> <ul> <li>If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a soft cloth. </li> <li>If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in neutral detergent diluted in water, and then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thinners, or other chemical wipes. This may harm the surface.</li> </ul> <h1 id="trademarks">Trademarks</h1> <p>F00735801108</p> <p>● Product names and other proper names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. <br /> ● Furthermore, even if there is no specific denotation of trademarks or registered trademarks, these are to be observed in their entirety.</p> <h1 id="made-for">Made for</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/35e5e8161934387dd15a3e36aac034dac9de69c069d972dfea4feaf0fa6bdd6c.jpg" /></p> <p>"Made for iPod", "Made for iPhone" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.</p> <p>iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.</p> <p>Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c60d5f883854ed80a6de40b7ebdfe9674a44081f939d913079e4785e230060a1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-248">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual users to privately reproduce and play back non- copyrighted material as well as material that may be legally copied and reproduced. Infringement of copyright is prohibited. <br /> ● Supported models for equipment by type (vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0 ^® interface) will vary. For details, see the Johnson Controls, Inc. website.</li> </ul> <p>LW/MW/FM radio/CD player (audio system type 2)*</p> <h1 id="ipod">iPod</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/c96e3dd59257eba9fff6ac047283bf92e32c29bde3abaf202a1fcc71aab13ffb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-2">iPod</h1> <p>5th generation</p> <p>(video)</p> <p>60GB 80GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/05a2d7b6bd15d569b86ef701680323a270533f74bde9176139f3fcba233a5776.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-3">iPod</h1> <p>5th generation</p> <p>(video)</p> <p>30GB</p> <h1 id="ipod-classic">iPod classic</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/9878ba22f6768e3eee04d24f4fa3448de8c7570d98a0c56b173864e3bd5e8ed4.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-classic-2">iPod classic</h1> <p>160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/df84eb8e0f253d4291a2d350d87adccd2d347aeacb7019ed01a9ba97d7f3680a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-classic-3">iPod classic</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/ebb6cefbf971445e04ee0f84cb44bb866f6b253dd844b47ab7bdf19350178aec.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-classic-4">iPod classic</h1> <h1 id="ipod-nano">iPod nano</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/72f5d83a078f65b75d065bc618cc9167e618605ef15f802b3dd373827bd231b8.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-nano-2">iPod nano</h1> <p>6th generation</p> <p>8GB 16GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/4cec8545c5539cb83db373e9c1f935fb1b3657055aca89d5805591cc8804b63d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-nano-3">iPod nano</h1> <p>5th generation</p> <p>(video camera)</p> <p>8GB 16GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7f77221825ccdfad423004e12406992c437dc8b91a9ab743d8e245241c7511d7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-nano-4">iPod nano</h1> <p>4th generation (video)</p> <p>8GB 16GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/76a3b673eeaa94a966da1a8363215001b0d4916371f2ccebbbd80c57d6e16c22.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-nano-5">iPod nano</h1> <p>3rd generation</p> <p>(video)</p> <p>4GB 8GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7646931d98b8351ccf33b207bd981ff4fbc8e73c3144c73504bc45cbe284c749.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-nano-6">iPod nano</h1> <p>2nd generation</p> <p>(aluminum)</p> <p>2GB 4GB 8GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8917b3680651a4fe17404678c923d4002aac33302a1b3c1ff90a29ff5948d341.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="ipod-nano-7">iPod nano</h1> <p>1st generation</p> <p>1GB 2GB 4GB</p> <p>AJ5101053</p> <p>LW/MW/FM radio/CD player (audio system type 2)*</p> <h1 id="ipod-touch">iPod touch</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/e46a588cbc1e98d8df6764ed2c83445ddfb3cc1e488713e9b2733484c09b56af.jpg" /><br /> iPod touch</p> <p>4th generation 8GB 32GB 64GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ba8c87897d1f73b0ec197169843d749d01bbb6cfe209f73a532bab6f735c8122.jpg" /><br /> iPod touch</p> <p>3rd generation 32GB 64GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/632a3bc3b558588ecff84d7b4df1002ff4e9431849b194849cd4b16fc9b0fef4.jpg" /><br /> iPod touch</p> <p>2nd generation 8GB 32GB 64GB</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/173ea4beea73e87748bde624291eb54f2ca64eda882f93f7da2fe61446d6e0ce.jpg" /><br /> iPod touch</p> <p>1st generation 8GB 32GB 64GB</p> <h1 id="iphone">iPhone</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/0b300b7164c08d917e30c4cd01954cc3df1ae1f0e8f3ed4c3b979c2877979e5c.jpg" /><br /> iPhone 4S</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/cc2467cdf8d9394a7d9911b3e56d1bccfd1aa9caa6b0b35a18a6b3ce509833d0.jpg" /><br /> iPhone 4</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/889066fdac7a31362d16ed0ab9f8f3c297fe95f5bd637b4738f80d80fc113cf3.jpg" /><br /> iPhone 3GS</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a936fb12d042e8e14d43e485e4ac4ccbc0ffdc2c1c7a477042f390d7e5164ca4.jpg" /><br /> iPhone 3G</p> <p>16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB</p> <p>AJ5101066</p> <h1 id="handling-of-discs-audio-system-type-2">Handling of Discs (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00735901066</p> <p>This explains care that should be taken in the handling of discs.</p> <h1 id="important-points-on-handling">Important Points on Handling</h1> <p>● Fingerprints or other marks on the read surface of the disc may result in its content being more difficult to read. When holding the disc, grip both edges, or one edge and the centre hole, in order that the read surface is not touched. <br /> - Do not affix paper or stickers, or otherwise damage the disc. <br /> - Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is already within the device. This can result in damage to discs, or malfunction.</p> <h1 id="cleaning">Cleaning</h1> <ul> <li>Periodically clean the read surface of the disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a circular motion. Instead, wipe gently outwards from the centre of the disc to the outer edge. </li> <li>New discs may have burring around the outer edge or in the hole in the centre. Ensure you check for these. If there are burrs, these may lead to faulty operation, therefore ensure these are removed.</li> </ul> <h1 id="important-points-on-storage">Important Points on Storage</h1> <ul> <li>When not using discs, ensure these are kept in cases, and stored out of direct sunlight. </li> <li>If discs are not going to be used for a long period of time, remove these from the product.</li> </ul> <h1 id="disc-playback-environment">Disc Playback Environment</h1> <p>In cold environments such as in mid-winter when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turning the heater on and immediately trying to use the product may cause condensation (water droplets) to form on the disc and internal optical components, and this may prevent the product from operating correctly. In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait a short time before use.</p> <h1 id="copyright">Copyright</h1> <p>Actions such as unauthorized reproduction, broadcast, public performance, or rental of discs that comprise other than personal use are prohibited by law.</p> <h1 id="types-of-disc-that-can-be-played-back">Types of Disc That Can Be Played Back</h1> <p>E00736001035</p> <p>The following marks are printed on the disc label, package, or jacket.</p> <table><tr><td>Type</td><td>Size</td><td>Maximum play-back time</td><td>Comments</td></tr><tr><td>CD-DA 12 <img src="images/566da387f2db8ba271e6f7cca79db373cf3390e79d70ebed685698c13332cbcd.jpg"/></td><td>cm</td><td>74 minutes</td><td>—</td></tr><tr><td>CD-TEXT <img src="images/7af82a798e6f126f53c9c76b413b1fe3e25e65a9475a0f7bbb3e56d465a9b98b.jpg"/></td><td>2 cm</td><td>74 minutes</td><td>—</td></tr><tr><td>CD-R/RW <img src="images/a38385a5c07edff749f81976b426a0c3b1ef8d45be425b203aae0b983fd3b6b3.jpg"/> <img src="images/7a5212d95a0f3c7fd0e4a6e804741749f2a884d353760241fcf83f5884bae522.jpg"/></td><td>2 cm</td><td>— •Disc</td><td>containing MP3 files</td></tr></table> <h1 id="discs-that-may-not-be-played-back">Discs That May Not Be Played Back</h1> <ul> <li>Playback of discs other than those described in “Types of Disc That Can Be Played Back” is not guaranteed. <br /> ● 8 cm discs may not be used.</li> </ul> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <h1 id="audio-files-mp3wmaaac-audio-system-type-2">Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (audio system type 2)</h1> <ul> <li>Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for example, heartshaped), as these may result in malfunction. Additionally, discs that have transparent portions may not be played back. <br /> ● Discs that have not been finalized cannot be played back. <br /> ● Even if recorded using the correct format on a recorder or computer, application software settings and environments; disc peculiarities, damage, or marking; or dirt or condensation on the lens inside the product may render the disc unplayable. <br /> ● Depending on the disc, some functions may not be used, or the disc may not play back. </li> <li>Do not use discs with cracks or warps. </li> <li>If the disc has stickers affixed, remains from removed stickers, or affixed adhesive, then do not use the disc. <br /> ● Discs that have decorative labels or stickers may not be used.</li> </ul> <h1 id="nonstandard-cds">Nonstandard CDs</h1> <p>This product will play back audio CDs, however please be aware of the following points regarding CD standards.</p> <p>- Ensure that you use discs with the label surface.</p> <ul> <li>Playback of other than standard CDs is not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be played back, the audio quality cannot be guaranteed. </li> <li>When playing back other than standard CDs, the following may occur.</li> </ul> <p>• There may be noise during playback. <br /> • There may be jumping in the audio. <br /> • The disc may not be recognized. <br /> • The first track may not be played back. <br /> - It may take longer than usual until start of playback of tracks. <br /> - Playback may start from within the track. <br /> • Some parts may not be played back. <br /> • Tracks may freeze during playback. <br /> • Tracks may be displayed erroneously.</p> <h1 id="audio-files-mp3wmaaac-audio-system-type-2-2">Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00736101036</p> <p>This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files recorded on CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, and USB devices.</p> <p>There are limitations on the files and media that can be used, therefore read the following prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files on discs or USB devices.</p> <p>Additionally, ensure you read the user manuals for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing software, and ensure these are used correctly. If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files includes title information or other data, then this can be displayed.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/485225ca7c213dbc12656ec9dfd3f9a64b47562fd57a70554c02f9a090f12392.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-104">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only play back MP3 format audio files. <br /> ● Actions such as copying audio CDs or files and either distributing these to others for free or for charge, or uploading files via the Internet or other means to servers is an infringement of the law. </li> <li>Do not append the file extensions ".mp3", ".wma", or ".m4a", to other than MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back discs with these types of files recorded upon them may cause the files to be incorrectly identified for playback, which may lead to loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or accident.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/52d685b7be5d9c1f8ecc4c5160c8c2b6b217e7bf13a3df29388efa0ae8206e51.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-249">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the condition of the disc recorder or recording software used, correct playback may not be possible. In these cases, refer to the user manual for your product or software.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f0058193c41285e801671cd7a4af2fc630eeb53f8ae56f23d73bc0033827acec.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-250">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Depending on your computer's operating system, version, software, or settings, files may not have a file extension appended. If these cases, append the file extensions ".mp3", ".wma", or ".m4a" when copying the files. </li> <li>Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be played back.</li> </ul> <h1 id="data-formats-that-can-be-played-back">Data Formats That Can Be Played Back</h1> <p>F00736200027</p> <p>Data formats that can be played on discs (CD-ROM, CDR/RW) and USB devices differ.</p> <table><tr><td>Data format</td><td colspan="2">DISC USB device</td></tr><tr><td>MP3</td><td>○</td><td>○</td></tr><tr><td>WMA X</td><td></td><td>○</td></tr><tr><td>AAC X</td><td></td><td>○</td></tr></table> <h1 id="folder-structure">Folder Structure</h1> <p>E00736301083</p> <p>Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized.</p> <p>You can create a folder structure as in Genre - Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files) for management of tracks.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/760286ebae0dc7de7453f84ecf908975c2e452ae0d71e16d2fb1f5fcc9fc097e.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>flowchart</summary> <pre><code class="language-mermaid">graph TD A["ROOT"] --> B["Folder"] B --> C["Audio file"] B --> D["Level 1"] B --> E["Level 2"] B --> F["Level 3"] B --> G["Level 4"] B --> H["Level 5"] style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333 style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333 style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333 style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333 style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333 style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333 style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333 </code></pre> </details> <table><tr><td>Name</td><td>Specification</td><td colspan="2">Explanation</td></tr><tr><td>Format specifications</td><td>ISO96 60</td><td>Level 1</td><td>Maximum 8 character file name, and 3 character file extension. (single-byte alphanumeric capital letters, numer-als, “_” may be used)</td></tr></table> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <table><tr><td>Name</td><td>Specification</td><td colspan="2">Explanation</td></tr><tr><td></td><td>ISO96 60 extension</td><td>Joliet F</td><td>Ics names up to a maximum 64 characters can be used.</td></tr><tr><td>Multisession</td><td colspan="3">Not supported (only first session supported)</td></tr><tr><td>Maximum number of levels</td><td colspan="3">8 levels (if the root is the 1^st level)</td></tr><tr><td>Maximum folder number</td><td colspan="3">700 folders (including root)</td></tr><tr><td>Maximum file number*1</td><td colspan="3">65,535 files (total number on media. Other than MP3, WMA, and AAC files not included)</td></tr><tr><td>File name and folder name restrictions</td><td colspan="3">Maximum 64 bytes (for Unicode, 32 characters), files/folders with file/folder names longer than this will not be displayed or played back.</td></tr><tr><td>USB supported formats</td><td colspan="3">The recommended file system is FAT32.1 partition only</td></tr></table> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <p>Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (audio system type 2)</p> <p>*1: Do not include other than MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if storing many tracks within the same folder, these may not be recognized even if less than the maximum number of tracks. In these cases, divide the tracks up into multiple folders.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/adb2c50ccb112171c2e640e7c9804be691c8b8bd5e66f0f09ba5e30b05a88873.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-251">NOTE</h1> <p>● The order in which folders and audio file are displayed on this product may be different to how they are displayed on a computer.</p> <h1 id="what-is-mp3">What Is MP3?</h1> <p>E00736400029</p> <p>MP3 is the abbreviation of "MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3". MPEG is an abbreviation of "Motion Picture Experts Group", and this is a video compression standard used in video CDs, etc.</p> <p>MP3 is one of the audio compression methods contained in the MPEG audio standard, and reduces the quality of sounds that are beyond the auditory resolution of the human ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus creating high-quality data with a lower data size.</p> <p>This can compress CD audio to approximately 1/10 its original data size without perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5357da7b901625194eb124927237b05b5d43440e9f6e3ae5fe6ad17b67658baf.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-105">CAUTION</h1> <p>● MP3 files different to the standards at right may not play back correctly, or file/folder names may not be displayed correctly.</p> <h1 id="standards-for-mp3-files-that-can-be-played-back">Standards for MP3 Files That Can Be Played Back</h1> <p>Specifications for MP3 files that can be played are as shown below.</p> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Item Details</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Specification</td><td>MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3</td></tr><tr><td>MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Sampling frequency [kHz]</td><td>MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48</td></tr><tr><td>MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Bit rate [kbps]</td><td>MPEG-1: 32 to 320</td></tr><tr><td>MPEG-2: 8 to 160</td></tr><tr><td>VBR (variable bit rate)</td><td>Support</td></tr><tr><td>Channel mode</td><td>Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual channel/ Monaural</td></tr><tr><td>File extension</td><td>mp3</td></tr></table> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Item Details</td></tr><tr><td>Supported tag information</td><td>ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4 (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-code)), Titles, Artist name, Album name</td></tr><tr><td>Maximum number of characters that can be indicated on the display</td><td>64 characters</td></tr></table> <h1 id="what-is-wma">What Is WMA?</h1> <p>E0073660103</p> <p>WMA is the abbreviation of Windows Media Audio, and this is an audio compression format from Microsoft. This is a compression format that has a higher compression ratio than MP3.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c6f923187e7bc5794e257d79c8208a147ddce9825397c8c017ec03cfc8ed0889.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-252">NOTE</h1> <p>● Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation (USA) and in other countries.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/4f440d90b9af9e1b00686f2e9dcb1ce26735ba6ee3d77a63e93849fee616de49.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-106">CAUTION</h1> <p>● WMA supports digital rights management (DRM). This product cannot play back WMA files protected using this system.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/3384a6df448f8f12629661f173320372dcf937b71ae474d89f1f1bb4d41728cb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-107">CAUTION</h1> <p>● WMA files different to the standards at right may not play back correctly, or file/folder names may not be displayed correctly. <br /> ● "Pro", "Lossless", and "Voice" are not supported.</p> <h1 id="standards-for-wma-files-that-can-be-played-back">Standards for WMA Files That Can Be Played Back</h1> <p>Specifications for WMA files that can be played are as shown below.</p> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Item Details</td></tr><tr><td>Specification</td><td>Windows Media Audio Version7.0/8.0/9.0</td></tr><tr><td>Sampling frequency [kHz]</td><td>32/44.1/48</td></tr><tr><td>Bit rate [kbps]</td><td>48 to 320</td></tr><tr><td>VBR (variable bit rate)</td><td>Support</td></tr><tr><td>Channel mode</td><td>Stereo/Monaural</td></tr><tr><td>File extension</td><td>wma</td></tr><tr><td>Supported tag information</td><td>WMA tagsTitle name, Artist name, Album name</td></tr></table> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Item Details</td></tr><tr><td>Maximum number of characters that can be indicated on the display</td><td>64 characters</td></tr></table> <h1 id="what-is-aac">What is AAC?</h1> <p>E00736801033</p> <p>AAC is the abbreviation of Advanced Audio Coding, and this is an audio compression standard used in "MPEG-2" and "MPEG-4". This features 1.4x the compression of MP3, with comparable audio quality.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/9d63ec4be77431e0fe586744bb4525bf7a6b5533cb4242d6878754778531fefe.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-108">CAUTION</h1> <p>● AAC supports digital rights management (DRM). This product cannot play back AAC files protected using this system. <br /> ● AAC files different to the standards at right may not play back correctly, or file/folder names may not be displayed correctly.</p> <h1 id="standards-for-aac-files-that-can-be-played-back">Standards for AAC Files That Can Be Played Back</h1> <p>Specifications for AAC files that can be played are as shown below.</p> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Item Details</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Specification Advanced AudioCodingMPEG4/AAC-LCMPEG2/AAC-LC</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Sampling frequency [kHz]</td><td>MPEG4 8</td><td>/11.025/12/16/22.05 /24/32/44.1/48</td></tr><tr><td>MPEG2 8</td><td>/11.025/12/16/22.05 /24/32/44.1/48</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Bit rate [kbps]</td><td>MPEG4 8</td><td>to 320</td></tr><tr><td>MPEG2 8</td><td>to 320</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">VBR (variable bit rate)</td><td>Support</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Channel mode Stereo/Monaural</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">File extension m4a</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Supported tag information</td><td>AAC tags or ID3 tagsTitle, Artist name, Album name</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum number of characters that can be indicated on the display</td><td>64 characters</td></tr></table> <p>Important Points on Safety for the Customer (audio system type 2)</p> <h1 id="important-points-on-safety-for-the-customer-audio-system-type-2">Important Points on Safety for the Customer (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00737001045</p> <p>This product features a number of pictorial indications as well as points concerning handling so that you can use the product correctly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent injury or damage to yourself, other users, or property.</p> <h1 id="warning-89">WARNING</h1> <p>● The driver should not pay close attention to the display while driving. This may prevent the driver looking where they are going, and cause an accident. <br /> ● The driver should not perform complicated operations while driving. Performing complicated operations while driving may prevent the driver looking where they are going, and cause an accident. <br /> Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe location before performing such operations. <br /> - Do not use during malfunctions, such as when no sound is audible. <br /> This may lead to accident, fire, or electric shock.</p> <h1 id="warning-90">WARNING</h1> <p>● Ensure water or other foreign objects do not enter the product. <br /> This may lead to smoking, fire, electric shock, or malfunction. <br /> - Do not insert foreign objects into the disc slot. <br /> This may lead to fire, electric shock, or malfunction. <br /> - In the event of abnormalities occurring when foreign objects or water enter the product, resulting in smoke or a strange smell, immediately stop using the product, and consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. <br /> Continuing to use the product may result in accident, fire, or electric shock. <br /> - Do not disassemble or modify the product. <br /> This may lead to malfunction, fire, or electric shock. <br /> ● During thunderstorms, do not touch the antenna or the front panel. <br /> This may lead to electrical shock from lightning.</p> <h1 id="caution-109">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks on the product. <br /> Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may prevent heat from escaping from within the product, leading to fire or malfunction.</li> </ul> <h1 id="caution-110">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not turn the volume up to the extent that you cannot hear sounds from outside the vehicle while driving. <br /> Driving without being able to hear sounds from outside the vehicle may result in an accident. </li> <li>Do not insert your hand or fingers into the disc slot. <br /> This may result in injury.</li> </ul> <h1 id="operation-keys-audio-system-type-2">Operation Keys (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00737101033</p> <h1 id="turn-the-power-onoff">Turn the Power ON/OFF</h1> <p>E00737200024</p> <ol> <li>Press the PWR/VOL key.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/d018c78518b432acac2d6d757cb407b93ceee16c71ed930e70177080e7a0e215.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> PWR / VOL 1 RPT 2 RDM 3 RADIO MEDIA DISP AA0113377 </details> <p>Turn the power on, and resume playback from the previous status.</p> <ol> <li>Press the PWR/VOL key. Turn the power OFF.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/21187aea3506fe67cca0da75155abe172a1206461669516748e4d3b793323ab7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-253">NOTE</h1> <p>● Hold down the steering MODE key to also turn the audio function ON/OFF.</p> <h1 id="adjust-volume">Adjust Volume</h1> <p>E00737300025</p> <ol> <li>Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the volume.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/c0a32e8015cd69a729ffecbff89d4d32d82ae3f7cfaf8295d4664da3065e922f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> PWR / VOL 1 RPT 2 RDM 3 RADIO MEDIA DISP AA0113380 </details> <p>Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to increase, and counter-clockwise to decrease the volume.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/af08db207609d3393528d7655ac6480c2836db7291a459821a68ca7ece815d50.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-254">NOTE</h1> <p>● The maximum value for volume is 45, and the minimum is 0.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e23047f90a4a8ad9d79472b14fabc5db6ac4f6462d8906b0ddc48289171ab554.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-255">NOTE</h1> <p>● The initial setting for volume is "17".</p> <h1 id="inserteject-discs">Insert/Eject Discs</h1> <p>L00737400026</p> <ol> <li>Insert the disc into the disc slot with the label surface up.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/e63e3bd1fd65816fa3d446917f31e99a1fa16cf83d0c5aef72f8c8fdfeeb5814.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Disc slot Disc *Label side AA0113393 </details> <p>Push the disc in a certain amount, and the product will pull the disc in, and playback will start.</p> <ol> <li>Press the ▲ key.</li> </ol> <p>This will eject the disc from the product, so remove the disc.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/9b0066fc558cc37d1e1f45ea9385c60473fa2bc867688f44dd2ae7e5059ed38f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-111">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>When replacing discs, first ensure that the vehicle is stopped in an area in which stopping is permitted. </li> <li>Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign objects into the disc slot. This may lead to injury, smoking, or fire. <br /> ● 8 cm CDs are not supported.</li> </ul> <p>Operation Keys (audio system type 2)</p> <h1 id="explanation-of-buttons">Explanation of Buttons</h1> <p>This explains names and functions of each part.</p> <p>E0D737501066</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7dbae35793d3d3c8966eeb90965865340003ce75d14edd0a31748fd56d06df5d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PAGE PAGE / VOL RPT RDM 3 4 5 6 b/GEI 13 14 15 16 17 MEDIA DISP PTY/SCAN MENU </details> <p>AA1008825</p> <p>1-</p> <p>Use to eject a disc.</p> <p>2-3 ◀cy/4 k▶</p> <p>For audio, rewind/fast forward.</p> <p>For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.</p> <p>3-2RDM key</p> <p>For audio, play random playback; for radio, use as preset key 2.</p> <p>4-1RPT key</p> <p>For audio, play repeat playback; for radio, use as preset key 1.</p> <p>5- RADIO key</p> <p>Switch the radio and the band.</p> <p>6- PWR/VOL key</p> <p>Adjust the volume, and turn the power ON/OFF.</p> <p>7-MEDIA key</p> <p>Switch between CD and other sources.</p> <p>8- DISP key</p> <p>Switch the content of the display.</p> <p>9- PTY/SCAN key</p> <p>For audio, play scan playback; for radio, search PTY.</p> <p>10- TP key</p> <p>Receive traffic messages.</p> <p>11- Disc slot</p> <p>12-PAGE key</p> <p>Display indicator page advance.</p> <p>13-5 ▶cy</p> <p>Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*, and use as preset key 5 for radio.</p> <p>14-6 key</p> <p>Return during audio track search, and</p> <p>stop Bluetooth Audio*.</p> <p>For radio, use as preset key 6.</p> <p>15-1 key key</p> <p>For audio, select audio track/file; for radio, perform automatic station selection.</p> <p>7-62</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p>16- MENU key</p> <p>Switch to Menu mode.</p> <p>17-/SEL key</p> <p>Adjust audio quality and select items.</p> <p>For radio, manually select stations.</p> <p>*: Requires a separately-purchased Bluetooth-capable audio device in equipment by type.</p> <h1 id="steering-wheel-audio-remote-control-switches">Steering wheel audio remote control switches</h1> <p>E00737601197</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d1a56ec380cf37e91b6cbfd18584f512476816990d69f378a189997145946d2e.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 AJA106182 </details> <p>1- Vol + key, - key</p> <p>Adjust audio functions and the mobile phone function volume.</p> <p>2- CH ▼ key, ▲key</p> <p>Select CD and other audio source tracks and radio stations.</p> <p>Hold down to skip up and down through tracks.</p> <p>3- MODE Key</p> <p>Hold down to turn the audio function ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is pressed, this switches the audio source.</p> <p>The order of switching is as shown below.</p> <p>If devices are not connected, then these are to be skipped, and the next source selected.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/298ac4a5ecf3b1e3031d8579f8ad03abcd11ce5d88e1522eed653e2fafaa16f5.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>flowchart</summary> <pre><code class="language-mermaid">graph TD A["CD or MP3"] --> B["iPod1 or USB device"] B --> C["Bluetooth Audio2"] C --> D["FM1, 2, 3"] D --> E["DAB1, 2, 33"] E --> F["MW"] E --> G["LW"] </code></pre> </details> <p>*1: An iPod cable (available separately) is required.</p> <p>*2: Requires a separately-purchased Bluetooth-capable audio device (vehicles with a Bluetooth 2.0® interface). <br /> *3: Requires DAB tuner connection.</p> <h1 id="listen-to-radio-audio-system-type-2">Listen to Radio (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00737701042</p> <p>This explains how to listen to FM, MW, and LW radio broadcasts.</p> <h1 id="to-listen-to-the-radio-3">To Listen to the Radio</h1> <p>Press the RADIO key to switch the band.</p> <p>Switch between FM1, FM2, FM3, MW, and LW bands.</p> <p>The selected band is indicated on the display.</p> <p>Listen to DAB (audio system type 2) *</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/079a1f766e9af2ecd88352afb0b11dab1cf1ec7f1a2667fc01b7e55e349a5ca1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-256">NOTE</h1> <p>- This switches in the order FM1, FM2, FM3, DAB1*, DAB2*, DAB3*, MW, and LW. *:When a DAB tuner is connected.</p> <h1 id="manualseek-station-selection">Manual/Seek Station Selection</h1> <p>Turn the SEL key to the frequency to listen to.</p> <table><tr><td>/SEL key (counter-clockwise)</td><td>Reduces the frequency being received.</td></tr><tr><td>/SEL key (clockwise)</td><td>Increases the frequency being received.</td></tr><tr><td>key(hold down)</td><td rowspan="2">Release the button to start seek station selection, and when a station is received, scanning stops.</td></tr><tr><td>key(hold down)</td></tr></table> <h1 id="preset-memory">Preset Memory</h1> <p>Register the broadcast station in advance, and select this at a later time.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Tune in to the frequency to register.</p> </li> <li> <p>Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT key to the 6 key.</p> </li> </ol> <p>A "Beep" sounds, and the preset key is registered.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f97d16ba6e831cc19f978af4471e5f3649272364cd0ce93c4d8e37f945eeba0d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-257">NOTE</h1> <p>● The preset memory can register a maximum of 6 stations for each band (FM1, FM2, FM3). <br /> - If a preset key that already has a station registered is selected, then this is overwritten with the new preset. <br /> - Pressing the preset key will select the previously registered frequency.</p> <h1 id="auto-memory-auto-store">Auto Memory (Auto Store)</h1> <p>The top 6 stations with a strong signal can be automatically registered in order with preset keys.</p> <p>Hold down the RADIO key.</p> <p>After completion of auto store operations, the product will receive the station registered in the preset key [1].</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/fc795c8e6917bb9342ee0b694b6ea54315048e3374c9aa5dfea1ff3b719bd061.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-112">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Please be aware that the formerly-registered frequency in the memory will be overwritten.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f60ef086f9d3169dbf91412f93b8a24295cdc1b414f26cc45c68f9572b22f234.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-258">NOTE</h1> <p>● Using auto store for FM1 and FM2 switches to FM3.</p> <h1 id="pty-search">PTY Search</h1> <p>Select PTY (program content), and automatically scan for stations.</p> <ol> <li> <p>During FM reception, press the PTY/SCAN key. This switches to the PTY selection mode.</p> </li> <li> <p>Turn the SEL key to select PTY. The PTY (program content) indicator will flash, and station selection will automatically start. When a station is received, the station name is displayed.</p> </li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/c968a4801374e37ad2679d2d89c9dc8b60524cb5504c154c01d6645848f8f554.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-259">NOTE</h1> <p>- This receives the station detected first. - 10 seconds after reception, PTY search mode will be cancelled.</p> <h1 id="listen-to-dab-audio-system-type-2">Listen to DAB (audio system type 2) \*</h1> <p>E00739101024</p> <p>This explains how to listen to DAB.</p> <p>Listen to DAB (audio system type 2) *</p> <h1 id="to-listen-to-dab">To listen to DAB</h1> <ol> <li>Press the RADIO key to switch the band. Switch between DAB1, DAB2, and DAB3 bands. The selected band is indicated on the display.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/57fcb612f2d2950c6759a4cdc0deccfb0448b2ac1b154eb97e2a5d427c2c7b9b.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-260">NOTE</h1> <p>● This switches in the order FM1, FM2, FM3, DAB1, DAB2, DAB3, MW, and LW.</p> <h1 id="select-a-service">Select a Service</h1> <ol> <li>Hold down the key or the key Receives the lead services of the ensembles that can be received.</li> <li>Press the key or the key to select the service.</li> </ol> <table><tr><td>|◀| key(hold down)</td><td>Automatically receives lower lead services within ensembles that can be received.</td></tr><tr><td>▶| key(hold down)</td><td>Automatically receives higher lead services within ensembles that can be received.</td></tr><tr><td>|◀| key</td><td>Switches to lower services.</td></tr><tr><td>▶| key</td><td>Switches to higher services.</td></tr></table> <p><img alt="" src="images/478e4cfb91d6c7f926f3a968b648af92b2becf631072042305756ce83513da84.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-261">NOTE</h1> <p>- Going to the first service or last service within the ensemble switches to the next ensemble.</p> <h1 id="register-the-service">Register the Service</h1> <p>Register the service in advance, and select this at a later time.</p> <ol> <li>Tune in to the service to register.</li> <li>Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT key to the 6 ➔ key. A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is registered.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/d3ddfcf1bbe546310d9c67d32870eca68745cad1ec02594897252f3114003285.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-262">NOTE</h1> <p>- If a preset key that already has a service registered is selected, then this is overwritten with the new preset. - Pressing the preset key will select the previously registered service.</p> <h1 id="search-for-a-service">Search for a Service</h1> <p>Search for ensembles and services that can be received.</p> <ol> <li>Turn the /SEL key to select the ensemble.</li> <li> <p>Press the ▶/SEL key. The service name within the selected ensemble is displayed.</p> </li> <li> <p>Turn the JSEL key to select the service.</p> </li> <li>Press the JSEL key. Receive the selected service.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/1d8218b1eaa87ab3bf94b8db10f561e526bf031f1803b8a150b24d74233ce539.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-263">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the text information for the service name cannot be obtained, then nothing is displayed. - If there is no operation for 10 seconds, then service search mode will be cancelled.</p> <h1 id="pty-search-2">PTY Search</h1> <p>Select PTY (program content), and automatically scan for services.</p> <ol> <li>Press the PTY/SCAN key. This switches to the PTY selection mode.</li> <li>Turn the ▶/SEL key to select PTY.</li> <li>Press the |▲key or |▼▶| This starts PTY search.</li> </ol> <table><tr><td>|◀◀ key</td><td>Lower PTY search starts.</td></tr><tr><td>▶▶1 key</td><td>Higher PTY search starts.</td></tr></table> <p>Listen to Traffic Messages (audio system type 2)</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6c9c4724b932e9e9c6e0882a61566c99b2312bc0f75ae11cd94c959fe8335a6a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-264">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>When selecting PTY, press any of the keys from the 1RPT key to the 6 by to switch to the PTY registered as a preset. </li> <li>When selecting PTY, select the PTY to register, and hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT key to the 6 key to register the PTY as a preset. <br /> ● While in PTY select status, if there is no operation for 2 seconds, then an upwards search within the selected PTY will start.</li> </ul> <h1 id="listen-to-traffic-messages-audio-system-type-2">Listen to Traffic Messages (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00739201025</p> <p>This explains how to listen to traffic messages.</p> <h1 id="to-listen-to-traffic-messages">To Listen to Traffic Messages</h1> <ol> <li>When not in MW or LW mode, press the TP key. If traffic messages are being broadcast, these are received.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/e2ed31ea429daaf8e667661d081fd16dd8760ecdd37477be5d79c28e43508228.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-113">CAUTION</h1> <p>- When receiving a MW or LW signal, traffic messages cannot be received.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/42940df7ac939a9e9044cfb0fdc8bee10cd07a8b9688563cf73eeb4051749724.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-265">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Receiving traffic messages will indicate "TRAF INF" on the display, and if text information can be received, the station name is displayed. </li> <li>If traffic messages are received, then this will switch to the volume of the previously received traffic messages or emergency broadcasts. The volume when receiving traffic messages or emergency broadcasts is that at which subsequent broadcasts will be received.</li> </ul> <h1 id="traffic-message-standby-mode">Traffic Message Standby Mode</h1> <p>When the broadcast of traffic messages starts, this automatically switches to the station that is broadcasting traffic messages.</p> <ol> <li>When not in MW or LW mode, press the TP key. <br /> “TP” is indicated on the display, and the product switches to standby mode. If traffic messages are being broadcast, these are received. </li> <li>When not in MW or LW mode, press the TP key. <br /> "TP" disappears from the display, and standby mode will be cancelled.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/9b998cffab0ca533a31391c799f15636387321fd18b2d90378aa1c9dd509593c.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-114">CAUTION</h1> <p>- When receiving a MW or LW signal, traffic message standby mode will be cancelled.</p> <h1 id="listen-to-cds-audio-system-type-2">Listen to CDs (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00737801085</p> <p>This explains how to listen to audio CDs (CD-DA/CD-TEXT).</p> <h1 id="play-cds">Play CDs</h1> <p>Insert the disc.</p> <p>Insert a disc to automatically start playback. → “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-61 If a disc is already within the product, press the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the source.</p> <h1 id="select-the-track">Select the Track</h1> <p>Press the ◀◀ key or ▶▶1 key to select the track.</p> <p>This enables selection of the next or previous track.</p> <h1 id="fast-forward-or-rewind">Fast Forward or Rewind</h1> <p>Hold down the 3 ◀ key or the 4 ▶ key.</p> <p>Fast forward/rewind is possible.</p> <h1 id="switch-playback-mode">Switch Playback Mode</h1> <p>Repeat playback, random playback, and scan playback are possible.</p> <h1 id="repeat-playback-rpt">Repeat Playback (RPT)</h1> <p>Press the 1RPT key.</p> <p>Repeat playback of the track currently being played.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ea8a6cea3aa2124f0a0c8b95036d1c80e6f72a72073ec98a8f15a9d7ba00f56f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-266">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Pressing again will cancel. </li> <li>Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding, or rewinding will cancel.</li> </ul> <h1 id="random-playback-rdm">Random Playback (RDM)</h1> <p>Press the 2RDM key.</p> <p>Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/83db9e4e921281b474321dd18789127dd6aabe6f91ba92e5ac1294f7923cea1e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-267">NOTE</h1> <p>● Pressing again will cancel. <br /> ● Ejecting will cancel this.</p> <h1 id="scan-playback-scan">Scan Playback (SCAN)</h1> <p>Press the PTY/SCAN key.</p> <p>Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks on the whole disc in order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/1f49ace052705b0827e4732921492d0f73d0789d7a8d4c2e2513947f99a67d62.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-268">NOTE</h1> <p>- Press this button again during playback if you wish to hear that track, and that track will play normally.</p> <h1 id="listen-to-mp3s-audio-system-type-2">Listen to MP3s (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00737901060</p> <p>This explains how to listen to audio files on a disc.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ab7dd3472b27ba916bedc38c1b64cfcbc299e91a7f49db535c2db34d7e73b4fc.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-115">CAUTION</h1> <p>- CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only play back MP3 format audio files.</p> <h1 id="to-listen-to-mp3s">To Listen to MP3s</h1> <p>Insert the disc.</p> <p>Insert a disc to automatically start playback. → “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-61 If a disc is already within the product, press the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the source.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/27ebbc74b95bf39992ec000e31fb1df7ea53de8848057070657c46bb8fba974f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-269">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the file structure, it may take some time to read the contents of the disc.</p> <h1 id="select-the-track-file">Select the Track (File)</h1> <p>Press the |◀ key or ▶| key to select the track.</p> <p>This enables selection of the next or previous track.</p> <h1 id="fast-forward-or-rewind-2">Fast Forward or Rewind</h1> <p>Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.</p> <p>Fast forward/rewind is possible.</p> <h1 id="switch-playback-mode-2">Switch Playback Mode</h1> <p>Repeat playback, random playback, and scan playback are possible.</p> <h1 id="repeat-playback-rpt-2">Repeat Playback (RPT)</h1> <p>Press the 1RPT key.</p> <p>Repeat playback of the track currently being played.</p> <p>Listen to an iPod (audio system type 2)</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/26bb665a8818c84ff2978787f17dd4adfa8ce17a6ed191794d7542cfdc97ca5d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-270">NOTE</h1> <p>● Pressing again will cancel. <br /> - Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or rewinding will cancel.</p> <h1 id="folder-repeat-playback">Folder Repeat Playback</h1> <p>Hold down the 1RPT key.</p> <p>Repeat playback of the tracks within the folder currently being played.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/296f05c01e98e29e4b9604220f013373fb9c4ccfcfe791989130738d5b3d1e50.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-271">NOTE</h1> <p>● Pressing again will cancel. <br /> ● Even if the file is selected, folder repeat playback will not be cancelled.</p> <h1 id="random-playback-rdm-2">Random Playback (RDM)</h1> <p>Press the 2RDM key.</p> <p>Play the tracks in the folder in a random order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8576eb57f1cac05f3cec6ddfe99be97abc3e7fe4e5967268394ebf7efe9c952b.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-272">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Pressing again will cancel.</li> </ul> <h1 id="folder-random-playback">Folder Random Playback</h1> <p>Hold down the 2RDM key.</p> <p>Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a random order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8ee282baca4e69fdaa45f40a6e9d05e18eaf16cef4043c6cec1da7b0c834319d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-273">NOTE</h1> <p>- Pressing again will cancel.</p> <h1 id="scan-playback-scan-2">Scan Playback (SCAN)</h1> <p>Press the SCAN key.</p> <p>Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks in the folder currently being played in order.</p> <h1 id="search-tracks">Search Tracks</h1> <p>Search folders and files, and select a track.</p> <ol> <li>Turn the SEL key to select the folder. </li> <li>Press the SEL key.</li> </ol> <p>Files within the selected folder are displayed.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Turn the ▶/SEL key to select the file.</p> </li> <li> <p>Press the SEL key.</p> </li> </ol> <p>This plays the selected file (track).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/1655d4aefc9780b034a233a75b7b560799caf54c4222c0a3812a7d21d2e91885.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-274">NOTE</h1> <p>● While the folder is selected, press the 6 key to cancel track search mode.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/9caa9a4c48c943b6a85f4578e6aaf5d0f7315d34d1b1f57196d257092e7ca3df.jpg" /></p> <p><img alt="" src="images/57ad6e4ca2161297bf45b1a332a1a7d2d19746c841d08570f2803ce4498f3dcf.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-275">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>If there is no operation for 10 seconds after selecting the folder, then track search mode will be cancelled. </li> <li>Select the folder, and hold down the ⒶEL key to start playback from the first track in that folder. <br /> ● While the file is selected, press the 6 key to return to the previous operation. <br /> ● While the file is selected, hold down the 6 → key to cancel track search mode. </li> <li>If there is no operation for five seconds after selecting the file, that file is played back. <br /> ● Disc operations such as selecting a track will cancel track search mode.</li> </ul> <h1 id="listen-to-an-ipod-audio-system-type-2">Listen to an iPod (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00738001101</p> <p>By connecting commercially-available iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can play back tracks on these through the product.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d8bc8b51384e59feba3d5d8edc0ddb6d886403698bf9a5e189db83a4bcb838e9.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-116">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in the vehicle. <br /> ● Never hold these devices in your hand to operate while driving, as this is dangerous. </li> <li>No indemnification for data loss resulting when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the product will be possible.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/783c5a8d9de8471939a160d6389bbb9e498e4a1753c62b26383207f09dfc8628.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-117">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Depending on how the devices are handled, audio files being damaged or lost, therefore it is recommended that data be backed up.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/24428307a997e80dc8765fe403f4669da00527a4ce87ffb2012bfbde4519a1c0.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-276">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Depending on the generation, model, or software version of the iPod/iPhone, playback on this product may not be possible. (→7-52) Additionally, playback as explained in this document may not be possible. </li> <li>Regarding details such as types of iPod/iPhone that can be connected to equipment by type, and types of files that can be played back, refer to “Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications” on page 7-105. <br /> ● Usage of iPod/iPhone hardware with the latest software version is recommended. </li> <li>Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone, refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page 7-104. </li> <li>When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a commercially available iPod connection cable. </li> <li>Set up the device in order that no unsafe actions, such as plugging in the connection cable are taken while driving. </li> <li>When inserting and removing the iPod/iPhone, for safety's sake first stop the vehicle.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/eddcef9691bd339df893ee001fc170f56d116e052a939040bc03dc6bc5d9ae32.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-277">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone, it may take some time until the device is recognized, or playback starts. <br /> ● Depending on the iPod/iPhone, the button functions on the product may not operate while the iPod/iPhone is connected. <br /> - iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may mean that connection is not possible, or result in differences in operation or display. <br /> ● Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone, track information may not be displayed correctly. <br /> ● Depending on the status of the vehicle and device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back after starting the engine. <br /> ● Data containing copyright information may not play back. <br /> - It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone equaliser settings be set to flat. <br /> ● Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to this product. <br /> - If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth as a Bluetooth-capable audio device then do not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod cable. Connection using both methods will result in erroneous operation. <br /> - If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly, then remove the iPod/iPhone from the product, reset, then reconnect.</p> <h1 id="play-ipod">Play iPod</h1> <p>Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the source.</p> <p>The selected source is indicated on the display.</p> <h1 id="select-the-track-file-2">Select the Track (File)</h1> <p>Press the ◀◀ key or ▶▶| key to select the track.</p> <p>This enables selection of the next or previous track.</p> <h1 id="fast-forward-or-rewind-3">Fast Forward or Rewind</h1> <p>Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.</p> <p>Fast forward/rewind is possible.</p> <h1 id="switch-playback-mode-3">Switch Playback Mode</h1> <p>Repeat playback and shuffle playback are possible.</p> <h1 id="repeat-playback-rpt-3">Repeat Playback (RPT)</h1> <p>Press the 1RPT key.</p> <p>Repeat playback of the track currently being played.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/be8e74575c4bfe94f1b21795a695159920fa716074aafc9172253b6986c5d35a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-278">NOTE</h1> <p>- Pressing again will cancel.</p> <p>Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device (audio system type 2)</p> <h1 id="shuffle-playback-rdm">Shuffle Playback (RDM)</h1> <p>Press the 2RDM key.</p> <p>Play tracks in the category currently being played in a random order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f76eaa7a719aab7a55f4b9170a7993ae5e8640263caf2809eee33160ce0a0d1d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-279">NOTE</h1> <p>● Pressing again will cancel.</p> <h1 id="album-shuffle-playback">Album Shuffle Playback</h1> <p>Hold down the 2RDM key.</p> <p>Play back the album in a random order (tracks in any order on the album).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/092297e2cbf484c58efd4e431e640d1d5567406dc47e3287e6ee8d452ef1d9cc.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-280">NOTE</h1> <p>● Pressing again will cancel.</p> <h1 id="search-tracks-2">Search Tracks</h1> <p>Search categories or track names, and select a track.</p> <ol> <li>Turn the JSEL key to select the category. </li> <li>Press the ▶/SEL key. Categories or tracks within the selected category are displayed. </li> <li>Turn the JSEL key to select the category or track.</li> </ol> <p>7-70</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <ol> <li>Press the JSEL key.</li> </ol> <p>Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks.</p> <p>Select the track, and press the ▶ /SEL key to play.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/365ab7a3a6ff884d73851d191a4592e825cddaa0235302dc368bdf7c07477458.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-281">NOTE</h1> <p>● While the category ( 1^st level) is selected, press the 6 ➔ key to cancel track search mode. <br /> - If there is no operation for 10 seconds after selecting the category, then track search mode will be cancelled. <br /> - Select the category, and hold down the /SEL key to start playback from the first track in that category. <br /> ● While the track is selected, press the 6 key to return to the previous operation. <br /> ● While the track is selected, hold down the 6 → key to cancel track search mode. <br /> - If there is no operation for five seconds after selecting the track, that file is played back. <br /> - iPod operations such as selecting a track will cancel track search mode.</p> <h1 id="listen-to-audio-files-on-a-usb-device-audio-system-type-2">Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00736501157</p> <p>By connecting commercially-available USB devices such as USB memory to this product, you can play back audio files on these through the product.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/9792fe63d3c75c6459977361d8eb2c39b1ee7ff454397feeed16182de4f9bc08.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-118">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not leave the USB device unattended in the vehicle. <br /> ● Never hold these devices in your hand to operate while driving, as this is dangerous. </li> <li>Do not use hard discs, card readers, or memory readers, as damage may occur to these or to the data contained therein. If these are erroneously connected, turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position, then remove. <br /> ● Because of the risk of data loss, it is recommended that files be backed up. </li> <li>No guarantee is made as regards damage to the USB device, nor regarding loss or damage to data contained therein. <br /> ● Depending on how the devices are handled, audio files being damaged or lost, therefore it is recommended that data be backed up.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/7256b269e7939ecf3e9f938345bed624e7e58b9aa37ada412335ea315994022c.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-282">NOTE</h1> <p>● Regarding details such as types of USB devices that can be connected, and USB input ports, refer to "Device types" on page 7-105.</p> <p>- Regarding details of types of files that can be played back in equipment by type (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface), refer to "File specifications" on page 7-106.</p> <p>- Regarding how to connect USB devices, refer to "How to connect a USB memory device" on page 7-103.</p> <p>- When connecting a USB device, use a connection cable. Failure to use a connection cable when connecting may place undue load on, or damage the USB connector.</p> <p>- Set up the device in order that no unsafe actions, such as plugging in the connection cable are taken while driving.</p> <p>- When inserting and removing the USB device, for safety's sake first stop the vehicle.</p> <p>- Do not insert other than audio devices into the USB port. Damage to the device or equipment may result.</p> <p>● Depending on the status of the USB device, it may take some time until the device is recognized, or playback starts.</p> <p>● Depending on the USB device, the button functions on the product may not operate while the USB device is connected.</p> <p>- USB device specifications and settings may mean that connection is not possible, or result in differences in operation or display.</p> <p>● Depending on audio data in the USB device, track information may not be displayed correctly.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e42c998fe8872fd1a433697f7ac3ce4fd17624469b8b9b22fc1171a531f2c8b3.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-283">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the status of the vehicle and device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back after starting the engine. <br /> ● Data containing copyright information may not play back. <br /> ● This product can play back MP3, WMA, and AAC format audio files. <br /> ● Depending on the type of USB device, usage may not be possible, or functions that can be used may be restricted. <br /> ● The recommended file system for USB memory is FAT32. <br /> ● The maximum supported capacity for USB memory is 32GB. <br /> ● Operate the USB device containing recorded audio files while connected to this product.</p> <h1 id="play-back-of-audio-files-on-a-usb-device">Play Back of Audio Files on a USB Device</h1> <p>Press the MEDIA key to set</p> <p>USB as the source. The selected source is indicated on the display.</p> <h1 id="select-the-track-file-3">Select the Track (File)</h1> <p>Press the |◀◀ key or ▶▶| key to select the track.</p> <p>This enables selection of the next or previous track.</p> <h1 id="fast-forward-or-rewind-4">Fast Forward or Rewind</h1> <p>Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.</p> <p>Fast forward/rewind is possible.</p> <h1 id="switch-playback-mode-4">Switch Playback Mode</h1> <p>Repeat playback, random playback, and scan playback are possible.</p> <h1 id="repeat-playback-rpt-4">Repeat Playback (RPT)</h1> <p>Press the 1RPT key.</p> <p>Repeat playback of the track currently being played.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/3c8f05927f4e2aa06ede6cbb4a3bc19c183d1ef8595ed4ed9d987289574c39b3.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-284">NOTE</h1> <p>● Pressing again will cancel. <br /> - Selecting a file will cancel this.</p> <h1 id="folder-repeat-playback-2">Folder Repeat Playback</h1> <p>Hold down the 1RPT key.</p> <p>Repeat playback of the tracks within the folder currently being played.</p> <p>Listen to Bluetooth Audio (audio system type 2) *</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a02dfa78106da814b2ea0a7063acac4c6628a4df50ac6d8a8819359adf7893e2.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-285">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Pressing again will cancel. <br /> ● Even if the file is selected, folder repeat playback will not be cancelled.</li> </ul> <h1 id="folder-random-playback-rdm">Folder Random Playback (RDM)</h1> <p>Press the 2RDM key.</p> <p>Play tracks in the folder currently being played in a random order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a8640e4ee08e9651c214689d6b52e4bcb36cc4df376961af41a7d1ffde8c657e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-286">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Pressing again will cancel. <br /> ● Even if the file is selected, folder random playback will not be cancelled.</li> </ul> <h1 id="all-folder-random-playback">All Folder Random Playback</h1> <p>Hold down the 2RDM key.</p> <p>Play the tracks in all folders in a random order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/037c5de99d92279eda2e27b81ccb9bbd19881d06f69b5cb782599bd377bd5c53.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-287">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Pressing again will cancel. <br /> ● Even if the file is selected, all folder random playback will not be cancelled.</li> </ul> <h1 id="scan-playback-scan-3">Scan Playback (SCAN)</h1> <p>Press the PTY/SCAN key.</p> <p>Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks on the whole USB device in order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/94ceeb7b428c52805173271802d6c5af1f6da1f0a068dc1d0f9c498c25e27a90.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-288">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Press this button again during playback if you wish to hear that track, and that track will play normally.</li> </ul> <h1 id="folder-scan-playback">Folder Scan Playback</h1> <p>Hold down the PTY/SCAN key.</p> <p>Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in each folder on the USB device in order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/db52cee42d7fad1a1daf7a3ca377c3e3642b00cff2ea6bcfcceb3c16278b8d2a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-289">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Press this button again during playback if you wish to hear that track, and that track will play normally.</li> </ul> <h1 id="search-tracks-3">Search Tracks</h1> <p>Search folders and files, and select a track.</p> <ol> <li>Turn the ▶/SEL key to select the folder. </li> <li>Press the SEL key.</li> </ol> <p>Files within the selected folder are displayed.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Turn the SEL key to select the file.</p> </li> <li> <p>Press the JSEL key.</p> </li> </ol> <p>This plays the selected file (track).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/aeecc22e363ceca4e747c3aa1a5a239c3b6cce28fe740b4c03e4cfc225a44891.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-290">NOTE</h1> <p>● While the folder is selected, press the 6 key to cancel track search mode. <br /> - If there is no operation for 10 seconds after selecting the folder, then track search mode will be cancelled. <br /> - Select the folder, and hold down the SEL key to start playback from the first track in that folder. <br /> ● While the file is selected, press the 6 key to return to the previous operation. <br /> ● While the file is selected, hold down the 6 → key to cancel track search mode. <br /> - If there is no operation for five seconds after selecting the file, that file is played back. <br /> ● Operations such as selecting a track will cancel track search mode.</p> <h1 id="listen-to-bluetooth-audio-audio-system-type-2">Listen to Bluetooth Audio (audio system type 2) \*</h1> <p>E00736701146</p> <p>This product can play back tracks on commercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio devices.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6546dff0ec394a4816bd1a77f80447256cbc7d65f7aaf3e093067da57f1eed7f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-119">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Never hold these devices in your hand to operate while driving, as this is dangerous. <br /> - Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device unattended in the vehicle. <br /> ● Depending on how the devices are handled, audio files being damaged or lost, therefore it is recommended that data be backed up.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e9eeee95a6e85c9e1ee69e42159cfbfb632426fa27587b4393c9a8442b760dd1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-291">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable audio devices, usage may not be possible, or functions that can be used may be restricted. <br /> - Confirm together with the user manuals for the commercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio devices. <br /> ● Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable audio devices, volume levels may differ. There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior to use, it is recommended that you turn the volume down. <br /> → "Adjust Volume" on page 7-61</p> <p>● Depending on the status of the Bluetooth audio device, it may take some time until the device is recognized, or playback starts.</p> <p>- Bluetooth audio device specifications and settings may mean that connection is not possible, or result in differences in operation or display.</p> <p>● Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth audio device, track information may not be displayed correctly.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5d3f9f655b8cb15ae0e9532c97b01bd22397a4a2622305de896cfae85a32d1c2.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-292">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Depending on the status of the vehicle and device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back after starting the engine.</li> </ul> <h1 id="connect-a-bluetooth-capable-audio-device">Connect a Bluetooth-capable Audio Device</h1> <p>Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth device, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device” on page 7-90.</p> <p>Operation methods below describe situations once connection has been completed.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b14d44206b805dfa527d484814787d542af2d3291b28b8d529e4e4d6db385abb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-293">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth as a Bluetooth-capable audio device then do not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod cable. Connection using both methods will result in erroneous operation.</li> </ul> <h1 id="play-bluetooth-audio">Play Bluetooth Audio</h1> <ol> <li>Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth Audio as the source. <br /> The selected source is indicated on the display. </li> <li>Press the 5 ▶ key. Bluetooth Audio playback starts.</li> </ol> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/1ea4e85e57681622e7c3775aa68148e2d8f861547887630265d29cc589edd1ee.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-294">NOTE</h1> <p>● Hold down the 5 key to pause. <br /> - Press the 6 key to stop.</p> <h1 id="select-the-track-file-4">Select the Track (File)</h1> <p>Press the |◀◀ key or ▶▶| key to select the track.</p> <p>This enables selection of the next or previous track.</p> <h1 id="fast-forward-or-rewind-5">Fast Forward or Rewind</h1> <p>Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.</p> <p>Fast forward/rewind is possible.</p> <h1 id="switch-playback-mode-5">Switch Playback Mode</h1> <p>Repeat playback, random playback, and scan playback are possible.</p> <h1 id="repeat-playback-rpt-5">Repeat Playback (RPT)</h1> <p>Press the 1RPT key.</p> <p>Repeat playback of the track currently being played.</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <p>Use AUX (audio system type 2) *</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/93262ef8046fac6847b1b58086b5af6dd462a0b11b38ec08a404bb6d59e3a2df.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-295">NOTE</h1> <p>● Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.</p> <h1 id="random-playback-rdm-3">Random Playback (RDM)</h1> <p>Press the 2RDM key.</p> <p>Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device in a random order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/1e96339e17d4e247842302887e4e57fa5265c8e2a5961d43c27ab3f6320286f7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-296">NOTE</h1> <p>- Pressing again will cancel.</p> <h1 id="scan-playback-scan-4">Scan Playback (SCAN)</h1> <p>Press the PTY/SCAN key.</p> <p>Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks on the whole Bluetooth Audio device in order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/94dad4d0b48001baf07fd1023bc88b514921ef96fa349cc1aab4fc74cda8ceb1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-297">NOTE</h1> <p>● Press this button again during playback if you wish to hear that track, and that track will play normally.</p> <h1 id="use-aux-audio-system-type-2">Use AUX (audio system type 2) \*</h1> <p>E00736901106</p> <p>By connecting external input cables and AUX devices to this product, you can play back tracks on these devices through the product.</p> <p>Hold down the MEDIA key.</p> <p>Switch to the AUX mode, and "AUX" is displayed.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8cb4a6ffb91cf84a50a94fde9021de2e86750a5935a13a98a2680b9f3a05722e.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA) A B AA0096182 </details> <p>Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)</p> <p>A- Left audio input connector (white)</p> <p>B- Right audio input connector (red)</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5a2d51ab78c8f6a8cc8ddea034698e9ae1e51631a6d132972bc1b54e74c6c3f4.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-120">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Connect an audio device with external sound input mode cancelled, or with the sound turned down.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c9dd7cc5d13f8a2fd1c6459db3e4c17ee157c7454198ccce695f04555bea5336.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-121">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Even if not inserted, the product will switch to AUX, therefore take care with volume levels when not inserted.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/4bf352f7333724141182517b745ee0314909167fa24a93897eea7f5b736b1d22.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-298">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the audio device to be connected, noise may be emitted.</p> <p>- For power, use the battery power source included in the audio device to be connected. Using the connected audio device while charging through the cigarette lighter socket in the vehicle may lead to noise being emitted through the speakers.</p> <p>- If no audio devices are connected, then do not select the external sound input mode. If external sound input mode is selected while no audio devices are connected, then sound may be emitted through the speakers.</p> <h1 id="display-indicator-audio-system-type-2">Display Indicator (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>L00738101069</p> <p>This explains content of the display indicator.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7437380724c41e6891e2f36d6431a39b3a691964679896c4fe71b96e4d9bf270.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> PAGE CD 10 10:00 TRACK NAME PWR / VOL 1 RPT 2 RDM 3 ← 4 ➤ 5 ➕ 6 → D/SEL RADIO </details> <h1 id="audio-quality-and-volume-balance-adjustment-audio-system-type-2">Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00738201031</p> <p>Change audio quality settings.</p> <h1 id="adjust-audio-quality-and-volume-balance">Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance</h1> <ol> <li>Press the SEL key to select settings items.</li> </ol> <p>Each time the ▶ /SEL key is pressed, this switches in the order BASS, TRE-BLE, FADER, BALANCE, SCV, and Cancel.</p> <ol> <li>Turn the ▶ /SEL key to adjust.</li> </ol> <table><tr><td>Adjust-ment items</td><td>Turn counter-clockwise</td><td>Turn clockwise</td></tr><tr><td>BAS S</td><td>-6 to 0(low low-pass volume)</td><td>0 to +6(high low-pass volume)</td></tr><tr><td>TRE-BLE</td><td>-6 to 0(Low high-pass volume)</td><td>0 to +6(High high-pass volume)</td></tr></table> <p>System Settings (audio system type 2) </p> <table><tr><td>Adjust-ment items</td><td>Turn counter-clockwise</td><td>Turn clockwise</td></tr><tr><td>FADER</td><td>CENTER to REAR 11(emphasise REAR)</td><td>FRONT 11 to CENTER(emphasise FRONT)</td></tr><tr><td>BALANCE</td><td>LEFT 11 to CENTER(emphasise LEFT)</td><td>CENTER to RIGHT 11(emphasise RIGHT)</td></tr><tr><td>SCV O</td><td>OFF, LOW(Low vehicle compensated vol-ume effect)</td><td>MID, HIGH(High vehicle compensated vol-ume effect)</td></tr></table> <h1 id="system-settings-audio-system-type-2">System Settings (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00738301133</p> <p>Change system settings such as product time.</p> <ol> <li>Press the MENU key. </li> <li>Press the ▶/SEL key to select settings items.</li> </ol> <p>Each time the ▶/SEL key is pressed, this switches in the order Gracenote DB*, PHONE settings, Adjust time, and Cancel.</p> <ol> <li>Turn the ▶/SEL key to set.</li> </ol> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <ol> <li>Press the JSEL key to determine.</li> </ol> <p>This completes settings, and displays the next settings item.</p> <p>*: Displayed when playing back audio files (vehicles with a Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface).</p> <h1 id="dab-setting">DAB Setting\*</h1> <h1 id="change-dab-settings">Change DAB settings</h1> <p>("Set value" bold typeface indicates factory default settings.)</p> <table><tr><td>Settings name</td><td>Settings value</td><td>Settings content</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">DAB-DAB Link settings</td><td>OFF</td><td rowspan="2">If low reception sensitivity, switch to another service.</td></tr><tr><td>ON</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">DAB Band settings</td><td colspan="2">BAND III Set used broadcast band to 174 to 239 MHz.</td></tr><tr><td>L-BAND</td><td>Set used broadcast band to 1452 to 1490 MHz.</td></tr></table> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <table><tr><td>Settings name</td><td>Settings value</td><td>Settings content</td></tr><tr><td>DAB Band settings</td><td>BOTH Set</td><td>used broadcast band to Band III and L-Band.</td></tr></table> <h1 id="rds-setting">RDS Setting</h1> <h1 id="change-rds-settings">Change RDS settings</h1> <p>("Set value" bold typeface indicates factory default settings.)</p> <table><tr><td>Settings name</td><td>Settings value</td><td>Settings content</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">AF</td><td colspan="2">AF ON Automatically track the same station as the program being received.</td></tr><tr><td>AF OFF</td><td>Do not automatically track the same station as the program being received.</td></tr></table> <p>System Settings (audio system type 2) </p> <table><tr><td>Settings name</td><td>Settings value</td><td>Settings content</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">REG</td><td colspan="2">REG ON Do not automatically track the local station for the program being received.</td></tr><tr><td>REG OFF A</td><td>Automatically track the local station for the program being received.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">TP-S</td><td>TP-S ON A</td><td>Automatically search for traffic messages (TP stations).</td></tr><tr><td>TP-S OFF D</td><td>Do not automatically search for traffic messages (TP stations).</td></tr></table> <table><tr><td>Settings name</td><td>Settings value</td><td>Settings content</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">PI-S</td><td colspan="2">PI-S ON Search for the same station or local station for that registered in the preset channel.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">PI-S OFF Do not search for the same station or local station for that registered in the preset channel.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">PTY ENGLISH Set the display language for the program content search (PTY search) to English.</td></tr></table> <table><tr><td>Settings name</td><td>Settings value</td><td>Settings content</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="4">PTY</td><td>FRANCAIS</td><td>Set the display language for the program content search (PTY search) to French.</td></tr><tr><td>DEUTSCH</td><td>Set the display language for the program content search (PTY search) to German.</td></tr><tr><td>SVENSK</td><td>Set the display language for the program content search (PTY search) to Swedish.</td></tr><tr><td>ESPANOL</td><td>Set the display language for the program content search (PTY search) to Spanish.</td></tr></table> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <p>System Settings (audio system type 2) </p> <table><tr><td>Settings name</td><td>Settings value</td><td>Settings content</td></tr><tr><td>PTY ITALIANO Set the</td><td colspan="2">dis-play language for the program content search (PTY search) to Italian.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">CT</td><td colspan="2">CT ON Update the time if time data is received.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">CT OFF Do not update the time even if time data is received.</td></tr></table> <p>*: It is necessary to press the [TP] key and turn traffic message standby mode "ON".</p> <h1 id="time-setting">Time Setting</h1> <p>Turning the RDS setting CT setting "CT OFF" enables manual setting of the time.</p> <ol> <li>Select "YES" at the "Adjust time" screen, and press the JSEL key.</li> </ol> <p>The hour can be adjusted. Press the ⬆/SEL key again to adjust the minutes.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Turn the ▶/SEL key to adjust the time.</p> </li> <li> <p>Press the JSEL key.</p> </li> </ol> <p>This completes the adjustment.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/56e8a2e580f0e7196ff04ae753c53dd7709dafe912907b49fde01774d531f73b.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-299">NOTE</h1> <p>- In order to finish adjusting the time, hold down the SEL key until the seconds are reset to "00".</p> <h1 id="phone-settings">PHONE Settings</h1> <p>Change the mobile phone voice cut- in settings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface language.</p> <p>Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings may not be possible.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/13d776b999f8d117305591afb3876322731fd82fd00f2ace1f6784c6730beef3.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-300">NOTE</h1> <p>- Cancel functions such as the mobile phone "dial lock", and connect while on the stand-by screen.</p> <p>● While connected, mobile phone (receiving calls, etc.) operations may not function correctly.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/cb6fdabf6b6789c9b28b125cd0a3c933acb150639a65de05770fb65fd33e27cf.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-301">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the distance between the product and the mobile phone, the conditions within the vehicle, and types of screening, connection may not be possible. In these cases, situate the mobile phone as close a possible to the product.</p> <p>● Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile phone, characteristics and specifications may mean that correct operation may not be possible.</p> <p>- For safety's sake, do not operate the mobile phone while driving. When operating the mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe location.</p> <p>● Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile phone, phone specifications and settings may result in differences in display, or prevent correct operation.</p> <p>● Some models may not be confirmed as connected, or may not connect.</p> <p>Supported profiles </p> <table><tr><td>Hands-free</td><td>HFP(v1.5)</td></tr><tr><td>Phone book transfer</td><td>OPP(v1.1),PBAP(v1.0)</td></tr></table> <h1 id="vehicles-without-a-bluetooth-20-interface">Vehicles without a Bluetooth® 2.0 Interface</h1> <p>A hands-free kit (available separately) is required.</p> <p>System Settings (audio system type 2)</p> <p>("Set value" bold typeface indicates factory default settings.)</p> <table><tr><td>Settings value</td><td>Settings content</td></tr><tr><td>PHONE OFF</td><td>Do not use mobile phone voice cut-in.</td></tr><tr><td>PHONE MUTE</td><td>During mobile phone voice cut-in, mute the audio.</td></tr><tr><td>PHONE ATT</td><td>During mobile phone voice cut-in, output audio from all speakers.</td></tr><tr><td>PHONE IN-L</td><td>During mobile phone voice cut-in, output sound from the left front speaker.</td></tr><tr><td>PHONE IN-R</td><td>During mobile phone voice cut-in, output sound from the right front speaker.</td></tr><tr><td>PHONE IN-LR</td><td>During mobile phone voice cut-in, output sound from the left and right front speakers.</td></tr></table> <h1 id="vehicles-with-a-bluetooth-20-interface">Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 Interface</h1> <p>("Set value" bold typeface indicates factory default settings.)</p> <table><tr><td>Settings name</td><td>Settings value</td><td>Settings content</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">PHONE IN set- tings</td><td>PHONE IN-R</td><td>During mobile phone voice cut-in, output sound from the right front speaker.</td></tr><tr><td>PHONE IN-L</td><td>During mobile phone voice cut-in, output sound from the left front speaker.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="8">HFM voice lan- guage settings</td><td>ENGLISH</td><td rowspan="8">Change the hands free mod- ule voice lan- guage.</td></tr><tr><td>FRENCH</td></tr><tr><td>GER- MAN</td></tr><tr><td>SPANISH</td></tr><tr><td>ITALIAN</td></tr><tr><td>DUTCH</td></tr><tr><td>PORTU- GUESE</td></tr><tr><td>RUSSI- AN</td></tr></table> <table><tr><td>NOTE</td></tr><tr><td>● Depending on the vehicle model, this may not display.</td></tr></table> <h1 id="gracenote-db-vehicles-with-a-bluetooth-20-interface">Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)</h1> <p>The version number can be confirmed.</p> <ol> <li>Select "Gracenote DB" and press the ▶/SEL key. </li> <li>Turn the /SEL key and select "DB Version". </li> <li>Press the JSEL key. The DB Version is displayed.</li> </ol> <p>Troubleshooting (audio system type 2)</p> <h1 id="troubleshooting-audio-system-type-2">Troubleshooting (audio system type 2)</h1> <p>E00738401105</p> <p>Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.</p> <h1 id="if-this-message-appears">If This Message Appears...</h1> <p>A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.</p> <table><tr><td>Mode</td><td colspan="2">Message Cause Response</td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="6" colspan="2">CD CHECK DISC</td><td colspan="2">The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">DISC ERROR</td><td>The disc is damaged.</td></tr><tr><td>The disc is dirty.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and insert the disc again. If the problem persists, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal temperature to return to normal.</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="5">USB</td><td colspan="3">FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.→“Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (audio system type 2)” on page 7-56</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage.</td><td rowspan="2">Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the problem persists, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason.</td></tr><tr><td>UNSUPPORTED FORMAT</td><td colspan="2">Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.→“Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) (audio system type 2)” on page 7-56</td></tr><tr><td>UNSUPPORTED DEVICE</td><td colspan="2">An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.</td></tr></table> <p>Troubleshooting (audio system type 2) </p> <table><tr><td colspan="3">ModeMessageCauseResponse</td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">iPod</td><td>NO SONG An</td><td>iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been connected.</td><td>Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the speakers.</td><td>Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the problem persists, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</td></tr></table> <p>Troubleshooting (audio system type 2)</p> <h1 id="if-you-think-something-is-not-working-properly">If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...</h1> <p>Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.</p> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Symptoms Cause Response</td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">There is no sound or quiet sound.</td><td>The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.</td><td>→ “Adjust Volume” on page 7-61</td></tr><tr><td>The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.</td><td>→ “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” on page 7-75</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">The disc cannot be inserted.</td><td>A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc.</td><td>→ “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-61</td></tr><tr><td>There is no disc in the product, but the product says it is loading.</td><td>Press the eject button once. → “Insert/Eject Discs” on page 7-61</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="3">The disc cannot be played.</td><td colspan="2">The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.</td></tr><tr><td>The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>The sound skips in the same place.</td><td>The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>There is no sound, even if the disc is inserted.</td><td>Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its data cannot be read.</td><td>Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their characteristics may render them unable to be played.</td></tr></table> <h1 id="antenna">Antenna</h1> <p>100710500822</p> <h1 id="pillar-antenna">Pillar antenna\*</h1> <p>100710700109</p> <p>When listening to the radio, fully extend the antenna.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ca638d6d066b0aa7653d676a8e3a28fe2beb47c681bf3c64fb9deff5b2f83c97.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Diagram of a car interior showing a lever and arrow indicator (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/86cae6f58198d20d31498c94015ea23d5e911b7f06c504b4c0946d179294c9b8.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-302">NOTE</h1> <p>● Be sure to retract the pillar antenna in the following cases:</p> <ul> <li>When entering a place with low clearance. </li> <li>When using an automatic car wash. </li> <li>When placing a car cover over the vehicle.</li> </ul> <h1 id="roof-antenna">Roof antenna\*</h1> <p>ED0710900071</p> <p>When listening to the radio, raise the antenna up until you hear it click.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/58519ac598549b6839a7e01c8feb96c4128f5ef0a14e91a0de3b623759a2b664.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Diagram showing a curved surface with a tool and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="to-remove-3">To remove</h1> <p>Turn the pole (A) anticlockwise.</p> <h1 id="to-install-3">To install</h1> <p>Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base (B) until it is securely retained.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/33e6125c3bac38b083446806411c6815c7beb6847b44fcdb48d5201ecac8044b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AA0050654 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/d8876e32e7d7bbaf487176860d21834c85fce9ce94ba07017b925a60065b1898.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-303">NOTE</h1> <p>● Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the following cases: <br /> - When using an automatic car wash. <br /> - When placing a car cover over the vehicle. <br /> ● Before driving into a structure that has a low ceiling, fold down the antenna to prevent it from hitting the ceiling.</p> <p>Link System*</p> <h1 id="link-system">Link System\*</h1> <p>E00764501309</p> <p>The Link System takes overall control of the devices connected via the USB input terminal or the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface allowing the connected devices to be operated by using the switches in the vehicle or voice commands. See the following section for details on how to operate.</p> <p>Refer to "Bluetooth® 2.0 interface" on page 7-84.</p> <p>Refer to "USB input terminal" on page 7-103.</p> <h1 id="vehicles-equipped-with-the-audio-system-type-1">Vehicles equipped with the audio system type 1</h1> <p>Refer to "To play tracks from USB device" on page 7-30.</p> <p>Refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth device” on page 7-40.</p> <p>Refer to “To use the external audio input function” on page 7-43.</p> <h1 id="vehicles-equipped-with-the-audio-system-type-2">Vehicles equipped with the audio system type 2</h1> <p>Refer to "Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device (audio system type 2)" on page 7-70.</p> <p>Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page 7-72.</p> <p>Refer to "Use AUX" on page 7-74.</p> <p>Bluetooth ^® is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.</p> <h1 id="link-system-end-user-licence-agreement">Link System End User Licence Agreement</h1> <p>E00764600013</p> <p>You have acquired a device that includes software licensed by MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the automotive experience business unit), and their subsequent 3 ^rd party suppliers. For a complete list of these 3 ^rd party products and their end user licence agreements, please go to the following website.</p> <p>http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldisclosure.pdf</p> <h1 id="bluetooth-20-interface">Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface</h1> <p>F00726001986</p> <p>The Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface allows for making/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle using a Bluetooth ^ compatible cellular phone based on the wireless communication technology commonly known as Bluetooth ^ . It also allows the user to play music, saved in a Bluetooth ^ music player, from the vehicle's speakers.</p> <p>The system is equipped with a voice recognition function, which allows you to make hands-free calls by simple switch operations and voice command operations using a defined voice tree.</p> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface can be used when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.</p> <p>Before you can use the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface, you must pair the Bluetooth ^® device and Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth ^® device” on page 7-90.</p> <p>Bluetooth ^® is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.</p> <h1 id="warning-91">WARNING</h1> <p>- Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows you to make hands-free calls, if you choose to use the cellular phone while driving, you must not allow yourself to be distracted from the safe operation of your vehicle. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e3d11570df406c109ac58af00dfa7ea9fd6e5df1eaaad84029e46e9bd2528d05.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-92">WARNING</h1> <p>- Refer to and comply with all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ce39fea7399a9ab45dfca6fc945412d80ba999970f9b1b55f6ba64735c624c91.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-304">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface cannot be used if the Bluetooth ^® device has a flat battery or the device power is turned off. <br /> ● Hands-free calls will not be possible if your phone does not have service available. </li> <li>If you place the Bluetooth ^ device in the cargo area, you may not be able to use the Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface. </li> <li>Some Bluetooth ^ devices are not compatible with the Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface. </li> <li>You can confirm the Link System software version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3 times (press and hold 2 times and then press briefly) within 10 seconds. </li> <li>For details on the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, you can see them by accessing the MITSUBISHI MOTORS website. Please read and agree on the "Warning about Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies" because it connects to other than MITSUBISHI MOTORS website. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/cn/products/index.html <br /> ● Software updates by cellular phone/digital audio device manufacturers may change/alter device connectivity.</li> </ul> <p>Steering control switch and microphone → p. 7-85</p> <p>Voice recognition function → p. 7-86</p> <p>Useful voice commands → p. 7-87</p> <p>Speaker enrollment function → p. 7-89</p> <p>Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and</p> <p>Bluetooth® device → p. 7-90</p> <p>Operating a music player connected via Bluetooth® → p. 7-94</p> <p>How to make or receive hands-free calls → p. 7-94</p> <p>Phone book function → p. 7-96</p> <h1 id="steering-control-switch-and-microphone">Steering control switch and microphone</h1> <p>E00727200324</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/84a34dd985b78a85fbbb44e87ca73f1179426c889b7dac81c7de88a464d3de8d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 4 5 6 A.A3008773 </details> <p>1- Volume up button <br /> 2- Volume down button <br /> 3- SPEECH button <br /> 4- PICK-UP button <br /> 5- HANG-UP button <br /> 6- Microphone</p> <h1 id="volume-up-button">Volume up button</h1> <p>Press this button to increase the volume.</p> <h1 id="volume-down-button">Volume down button</h1> <p>Press this button to decrease the volume.</p> <h1 id="speech-button">SPEECH button</h1> <p>- Press this button to change to voice recognition mode.</p> <p>While the system is in voice recognition mode, "Listening" will appear on the audio display.</p> <p>- If you press the button briefly while in voice recognition mode, it will interrupt prompting and allow voice command input.</p> <p>Pressing the button longer will deactivate the voice recognition mode.</p> <p>- Pressing this button briefly during a call will enable voice recognition and allow voice command input.</p> <h1 id="pick-up-button">PICK-UP button</h1> <p>- Press this button when an incoming call is received to answer the telephone.</p> <p>- When another call is received during a call, press this button to put the first caller on hold and talk to the new caller.</p> <p>- In such circumstances, you can press the button briefly to switch between callers. You will switch to the first caller and the other caller will be put on hold.</p> <p>- To establish a three-way call in such situations, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode and then say “Join calls”.</p> <h1 id="hang-up-button">HANG-UP button</h1> <ul> <li>Press this button when an incoming call is received to refuse the call. </li> <li>Press this button during a call to end the current call.</li> </ul> <p>When another call is on hold, you will switch to that call.</p> <p>- If this button is pressed in the voice recognition mode, the voice recognition mode will be deactivated.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/db4fe0e53dbd238d0760127b5f95823a3fac84db4f3cc2245b0436cf9ff3caa9.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-305">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>When you press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode with a cellular phone paired to the system, current information on the cellular phone, such as “remaining battery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,” will be displayed on the audio display.* <br /> *: Some cellular phones will not send this information to the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface. </li> <li>Call waiting and three-way calls can be used by the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface, only if it is possible to use those services with your cellular phone.</li> </ul> <h1 id="microphone">Microphone</h1> <p>Your voice will be recognized by a microphone in the overhead console, allowing you to make hands-free calls with voice commands.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b6599e660721cf6f447ac75cc86a724ff5fabda98dda796df800cc4eff04b96a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-306">NOTE</h1> <p>- If a cellular phone is brought close to the microphone, it may create noise in the voice on the phone. In such a case, take the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the microphone.</p> <h1 id="voice-recognition-function">Voice recognition function</h1> <p>EDD727300527</p> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface is equipped with a voice recognition function.</p> <p>Simply say voice commands and you can perform various operations and make or receive hands-free calls.</p> <p>With the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface, voice recognition is possible for English, French,</p> <p>Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese and Russian. The factory setting is “English” or “Russian.”</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ac7add8526013c10879e90d2e8d4574f5656c788867bd9c4d4c491ffdf7851db.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-307">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the voice command that you say differs from the predefined command or cannot be recognised due to ambient noise or some other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will ask you for the voice command again up to 3 times.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/682512c032cba0ceed0a776a3016d7f37f10bffe8d1f8809c32abb02786d74fe.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-308">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>For best performance and further reduction of ambient noise, close the vehicle windows, lower the blower speed and refrain from conversation with your passengers while engaging the voice recognition function. <br /> ● Depending on the selected language, some functions may not be available.</li> </ul> <h1 id="selecting-the-language">Selecting the Language</h1> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Setup". </li> <li>Say "Language." </li> <li>The voice guide will say “Select a language: English, French, Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese or Russian” Say the desired language. (Example: Say “English.”) </li> <li>The voice guide will say "English (French, Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese or Russian) selected. Is this correct?" Say "Yes." Answer "No" to return to Step 4.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/ce1623a56fe7d5f95999e148526e9b2b21973c8b6c12fbbfc0043230e061e2bf.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-309">NOTE</h1> <p>● The voice guide will repeat the same message twice. The first message is in the current language, and the second message is in the selected language. <br /> - If many entries are registered in the vehicle phone book, changing the language will take longer.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/1f6a3fdf54910373e735defab765779f2de417d82cbd3014c8a90d9c70e4b46d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-310">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Changing the language deletes the mobile phone book imported to the Bluetooth 2.0 interface. If you wish to use it, you will have to import it again. </li> <li>When the voice guide says “English (French, Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese or Russian) selected,” the language change process will be completed and the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ul> <h1 id="useful-voice-commands">Useful voice commands</h1> <p>ED076000019</p> <h1 id="help-function">Help function</h1> <p>ED0760100010</p> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface is equipped with a help function. If you say “Help” when the system is waiting for a voice command input, the system will tell you a list of the commands that can be used under the circumstances.</p> <h1 id="cancelling">Cancelling</h1> <p>ED0760200011</p> <p>There are two cancel functions.</p> <p>If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to exit from the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface.</p> <p>If you are anywhere else within the system, say "Cancel" to return to the main menu.</p> <h1 id="confirmation-function-setting">Confirmation function setting</h1> <p>E00760400013</p> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface is equipped with a confirmation function.</p> <p>With the confirmation function activated, you are given more opportunities than normal to confirm a command when making various settings to the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface. This allows you to decrease the possibility that a setting is accidentally changed.</p> <p>The confirmation function can be turned on or off by following the steps below.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Setup" </li> <li>Say "Confirmation prompts". </li> <li>The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to turn confirmation prompts <off/on>”. Answer “Yes” to change the setting or answer “No” to keep the current setting. </li> <li>The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are <off/on>” and then the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <h1 id="security-function">Security function</h1> <p>E00760500131</p> <p>It is possible to use a password as a security function by setting a password of your choice for the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface.</p> <p>When the security function is turned on, it is necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit password in order to use all functions of the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface, except for reception.</p> <h1 id="setting-the-password">Setting the password</h1> <p>Use the following procedure to turn on the security function by setting a password.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Setup". </li> <li>Say "Password." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Password is disabled. Would you like to enable it?" Answer "Yes."</li> </ol> <p>Answer "No" to cancel the setting of the password and return to the main menu.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say "Please say a 4-digit password. Remember this password. It will be required to use this system". <br /> Say a 4-digit number which you want to set as a password. </li> <li>For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say "Password <4-digit password>. Is this correct?" Answer "Yes." <br /> Answer "No" to return to the password input in Step 5. </li> <li>When the registration of the password is completed, the voice guide will say "Password is enabled" and the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <h1 id="note-311">NOTE</h1> <p>● Password will be required to access the system after the next ignition cycle. <br /> - It is required for a little time after engine stop that the entered password is actually recorded in the system.</p> <p>If the ignition switch is made to "ACC" or "ON" or the engine is started immediately after engine stop, there is a case when the entered password is not recorded in the system. At this time, please try to enter the password again.</p> <h1 id="entering-the-password">Entering the password</h1> <p>If a password has been set and the security function is enabled, the voice guide will say "Hands-free system is locked. State the password to continue" when the SPEECH button is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. Say the 4-digit password number to enter the password.</p> <p>If the entered password is wrong, the voice guide will say "<4-digit password>, Incorrect password. Please try again". Enter the correct password.</p> <h1 id="note-312">NOTE</h1> <p>- You can re-enter the password as many times as you want.</p> <h1 id="note-313">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you have forgotten your password, say "Cancel" to quit the voice input mode and then check with a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</p> <h1 id="disabling-the-password">Disabling the password</h1> <p>Use the following procedure to turn off the security function by disabling the password.</p> <h1 id="note-314">NOTE</h1> <p>- System must be unlocked to disable the password.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Setup". </li> <li>Say "Password." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Password is enabled. Would you like to disable it?"</li> </ol> <p>Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of the password and return to the main menu.</p> <ol> <li>When the disabling of the password is completed, the voice guide will say "Password is disabled" and the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <h1 id="speaker-enrollment-function">Speaker enrollment function</h1> <p>E00727400209</p> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface can use the speaker enrollment function to create a voice model for one person per language.</p> <p>This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface to recognise voice commands said by you.</p> <p>You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want.</p> <h1 id="speaker-enrollment">Speaker enrollment</h1> <p>E00727500196</p> <p>It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the speaker enrollment process.</p> <p>To ensure the best results, run through the process while in the driver's seat, in an environment that is as quiet as possible (when there is no rain or strong winds and the vehicle windows are closed). Please turn off your phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent interruption of the process.</p> <p>Use the following procedure for speaker enrollment.</p> <ol> <li>Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gearshift lever in the "N" (Neutral) position (M/T), or the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position (A/T), and pull the parking brake lever.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/938f08504a694c4747425913ba0f894a489f8035f93d5431418e0866241850ca.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-315">NOTE</h1> <p>● Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the vehicle in a safe area before attempting speaker enrollment.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Press the SPEECH button.</p> </li> <li> <p>Say "Voice training".</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say "This operation must be performed in a quiet environment while the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's manual for the list of required training phrases. Press and release the SPEECH button when you are ready to begin. Press the HANG-UP button to cancel at any time".</p> </li> </ol> <p>Press the SPEECH button to start the speaker enrollment process.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f1396aee22e8efb6090e9bd4852b46261a606a6db336c3232f716731b5f6cd79.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-316">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you do not start the speaker enrollment process within 3 minutes of pressing the SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment function will time out.</p> <p>The voice guide will say “Speaker Enrollment has timed out”. The system will the beep and the voice recognition mode will be deactivated.</p> <ol> <li> <p>The voice guide will prompt for phrase</p> </li> <li> <p>Repeat the corresponding phrase lis-</p> </li> </ol> <p>ted in table “Enrollment commands” on page 7-103.</p> <p>The system will register your voice and then move on to the registration of the next command. Continue the process until all phrases have been registered.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/faf93659b334da76ff450653cce920118f8ec1366cebac3707254562d1f8bbc5.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-317">NOTE</h1> <p>● To repeat the most recent voice training command, press and release the SPEECH button. <br /> - If you press the HANG-UP button anytime during the process, the system will beep and stop the speaker enrollment process.</p> <ol> <li>When all enrollment commands have been read out, the voice guide will say "Speaker enrollment is complete". The system will then end the speaker enrollment process and return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/10ab1d45b1bf731f2c3c9215f417631a842fdfbc8bcfc1fb27d350f484cfb4ed.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-318">NOTE</h1> <p>● Completing the speaker enrollment process will turn on the voice model automatically. <br /> - The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not work in this mode.</p> <h1 id="enabling-and-disabling-the-voice-model-and-retraining">Enabling and disabling the voice model and retraining</h1> <p>E00727600096</p> <p>You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want.</p> <p>You can also retrain the system.</p> <p>Use the following procedure to perform these actions.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Voice training". </li> <li>If you have completed a speaker enrollment process once already, the voice guide will say either "Enrollment is enabled. Would you like to disable or retrain?" or "Enrollment is disabled. Would you like to enable or retrain?" </li> <li>When enrollment is “enabled”, the voice model is on; when enrollment is “disabled”, the voice model is off. Say the command that fits your needs. Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enrollment process and recreate a new voice model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on page 7-89.)</li> </ol> <h1 id="connecting-the-bluetooth-20-interface-and-bluetooth-device">Connecting the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth ^® device</h1> <p>F00760601403</p> <p>Before you can make or receive hands-free calls or play music using the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface function, you must pair the Bluetooth ^® device and Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f16e43f6a1545ee00dac14bfb6a47a729f53dc2c9b5b7c793e57fc93e1e79afb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-319">NOTE</h1> <p>- Pairing is required only when the device is used for the first time. Once the device has been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, you only need to bring the device into the vehicle next time and the device will automatically connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if supported by the device).</p> <p>Up to 7 Bluetooth ^® devices can be paired with the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface.</p> <p>If multiple paired Bluetooth ^® devices are available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player most recently connected is automatically connected to the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface.</p> <p>You can also change a Bluetooth ^® device to be connected.</p> <h1 id="to-pair">To pair</h1> <p>To pair a Bluetooth ^® device with the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below.</p> <ol> <li>Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gearshift lever in the "N" (Neutral) position (M/T), or the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position (A/T), and pull the parking brake lever.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/86fd4a5bd107be1e7f2574e3bd8aeeee382eb3f1af0a27408e1ac6069d3c68d0.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-320">NOTE</h1> <p>- You cannot pair Bluetooth ^® devices with the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface unless the vehicle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth ^® device with the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface, confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Setup". </li> <li>Say "Pairing options." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list." Say "Pair."</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/fb0ff2b7ab334a9d507051a9b7894ab712953bc80e0a4d71577314ab8d43b54a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-321">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>If 7 devices have already been paired, the voice guide will say "Maximum devices paired" and then the system will end the pairing process. To register a new device, delete one device and then repeat the pairing process. <br /> (Refer to "Deleting a device" on page 7-92.)</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say "Please say a 4-digit pairing code." Say a 4-digit number.</p> </li> </ul> <p>When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm whether the number said is acceptable. Answer "Yes."</p> <p>Answer "No" to return to pairing code selection.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6c32fffc6e4a110932c524ac16961af6366f723aef2e55f8ec6f7551e4b9e129.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-322">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Some Bluetooth ^ devices require a specific pairing code. <br /> Please refer to the device manual for pairing code requirements.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/e73400bebd6b405aede692b8ee694c4129fe049697683c6a1234a6d8b2eaf13e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-323">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>The pairing code entered here is only used for the Bluetooth® connection certification. It is any 4-digit number the user would like to select. <br /> Remember the pairing code as it needs to be keyed into the Bluetooth ^® device later in the pairing process. <br /> Depending on the connection settings of the Bluetooth ^® device, this code may have to be entered each time you connect the Bluetooth ^® device to the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface. For the default connection settings, refer to the instructions for the device.</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say "Start pairing procedure on the device. See the device manual for instructions." Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number you have registered in Step 6.</p> </li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/007ba10e3c16f287589ce7ddfc3e2f1139a87bfccd4d578ef8737279622879fd.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-324">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>According to the corresponding device to Bluetooth ^ , it might take a few minutes to pair the Bluetooth ^ device with the Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface. </li> <li>If the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface cannot recognize the Bluetooth ^® device, the voice guide will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pairing process will be cancelled. <br /> Confirm that the device you are pairing supports Bluetooth ^® , and try pairing it again.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/3223999561f61cbb6008ebc1c34fc5e793e0797399e2d9e1cf5b26cdfa50b09f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-325">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>If you enter the wrong number, the voice guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pairing process will be cancelled. <br /> Confirm the number is right, and try pairing it again.</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the device after the beep.” You can assign a desired name for the Bluetooth ^® device and register it as a device tag. Say the name you want to register after the beep.</p> </li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/701ce67722c078404fddfcbfbc7cbe3dccca8f1df8007ab71e53fe24ba6ef40a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-326">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>When the confirmation function is on, after repeating the device tag you have said, the voice guide will ask "Is this correct?" Answer "Yes." <br /> To change the device tag, answer "No" and then say the device tag again.</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say “Pairing complete,” after which a beep will be played and the pairing process will end.</p> </li> </ul> <h1 id="selecting-a-device">Selecting a device</h1> <p>E00760701127</p> <p>If multiple paired Bluetooth ^® devices are available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player most recently connected is automatically connected to the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface.</p> <p>You can connect to the other cellular phone or music player by following setting change procedures.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/624bd1abf91ed05837f0861de4b0a6c39d5e9554ced65ffebdc1ab0645fce3a4.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="to-select-a-cellular-phone">To select a cellular phone</h1> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Setup". </li> <li>Say "Select phone." </li> <li>After the voice guide says "Please say," the numbers of the cellular phones and device tags of corresponding cellular phones will be read out in order, starting with the cellular phone that has been most recently connected.</li> </ol> <p>Say the number of the cellular phone that you want to connect to.</p> <p>When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask you again whether the phone that you want to connect to is correct. Answer "Yes" to continue and connect to the cellular phone.</p> <p>Answer “No,” and the voice guide will say “Please say.” Say the number of the phone that you want to connect to.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6f6b4ef4a3c493feaab61ea7e8b362c35867a0853f70ede27e2fc353933a432b.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-327">NOTE</h1> <p>- You can connect to a phone at any time by pressing the SPEECH button and saying the number, even before all of the paired numbers and device tags of corresponding cellular phones are read out by the system.</p> <ol> <li>The selected phone will be connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice guide will say "<device tag> selected" and then the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <h1 id="to-select-a-music-player">To select a music player</h1> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Setup". </li> <li>Say "Select music player." </li> <li>After the voice guide says "Please say," the numbers of the music players and device tags of corresponding music players will be read out in order, starting with the music player that has been most recently connected.</li> </ol> <p>Say the number of the music player that you want to connect to.</p> <p>When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask you again whether the music player that you want to connect to is correct. Answer "Yes" to continue and connect to the music player.</p> <p>Answer “No,” and the voice guide will say “Please say.” Say the number of the</p> <p>music player that you want to connect to.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5251cde539cfc137088c3ffe5d8def6dff0dc1466d8619635a2b3493a6289e86.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-328">NOTE</h1> <p>- You can connect to a music player at any time by pressing the SPEECH button and saying the number, even before all of the paired numbers and device tags of corresponding music players are read out by the system.</p> <ol> <li>The selected music player will be connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice guide will say “<device tag> selected” and then the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <h1 id="deleting-a-device">Deleting a device</h1> <p>E00740200028</p> <p>Use the following procedure to delete a paired Bluetooth ^® device from the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Setup". </li> <li>Say "Pairing options." </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list." Say "Delete."</p> </li> <li> <p>After the voice guide says "Please say," the numbers of the devices and device tags of corresponding devices will be read out in order, starting with the device that has been most recently connected. After it completes reading all pairs, the voice guide will say "or all."</p> </li> </ol> <p>Say the number of the device that you want to delete from the system.</p> <p>If you want to delete all paired phones from the system, say "All."</p> <ol> <li>For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say "Deleting <device tag> <number>. Is this correct?" or "Deleting all devices. Is this correct?"</li> </ol> <p>Answer "Yes" to delete the phone(s).</p> <p>Answer "No" to return to Step 4.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say "Deleted," and then the system will end the device deletion process.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/2a69d043c092fdcbe0398f16c71565a158d20f678d30d58173a92e4a08514607.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-329">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the device deletion process fails for some reason, the voice guide will say “Delete failed” and then the system will cancel deleting the device.</p> <h1 id="to-check-a-paired-bluetooth-device">To check a paired Bluetooth ^® device</h1> <p>E00760800017</p> <p>You can check a paired Bluetooth ^® device by following the steps below.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Press the SPEECH button.</p> </li> <li> <p>Say "Setup".</p> </li> <li> <p>Say "Pairing options."</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “List.”</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will read out device tags of corresponding devices in order, starting with the Bluetooth® device that has been connected most recently.</p> </li> <li> <p>After the device tags of all paired Bluetooth ^® devices have been read, the system will say “End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?”</p> </li> </ol> <p>To hear the list again from the beginning, answer "Yes."</p> <p>When you are done, answer "No" to return to the main menu.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/0df1bdcb8b69304ff619c2e2e3ba2c7e183d3c271bbcce4aee70d471ee6a2168.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-330">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you press and release the SPEECH button and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with the next highest number or “Previous” to return to the phone with the previous number.</p> <p>- You can change the device tag by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying “Edit” while the list is being read.</p> <p>- You can change the phone to be connected by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying "Select phone" while the list is being read.</p> <p>- You can change the music player to be connected by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying “Select music player” while the list is being read.</p> <h1 id="changing-a-device-tag">Changing a device tag</h1> <p>E00760900018</p> <p>You can change the device tag of a paired cellular phone or music player.</p> <p>Follow the steps below to change a device tag.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Press the SPEECH button.</p> </li> <li> <p>Say "Setup".</p> </li> <li> <p>Say "Pairing options."</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “Edit.”</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say “Please say,” and read out the numbers of the Bluetooth ^® devices and device tags of corresponding devices in order, starting with the Bluetooth ^® that has been most recently connected. <br /> After all paired device tags have been read, the voice guide will say “Which device, please?” Say the number of the device tag you want to change.</p> </li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/6b4f6f04066a09c69f504b67ae980e3545612650d06d2bd957a3ee833be7d222.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-331">NOTE</h1> <p>- You can press and release the SPEECH button while the list is being read, and immediately say the number of the device tag you want to change.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say "New name, please." Say the name you want to register as a new device tag. <br /> When the confirmation function is on, the voice guide will say "<New device tag>. Is this correct?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No," to say the new device tag you want to register again. </li> <li>The device tag is changed. When the change is complete, the voice guide will say “New name saved” and then the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <h1 id="operating-a-music-player-connected-via-bluetooth">Operating a music player connected via Bluetooth®</h1> <p>E00761001130</p> <p>Refer to the following sections for details on how to play music truck:</p> <h1 id="vehicles-equipped-with-the-audio-system-type-1-2">Vehicles equipped with the audio system type 1</h1> <p>Refer to "To play tracks from a Bluetooth device" on page 7-40.</p> <h1 id="vehicles-equipped-with-the-audio-system-type-2-2">Vehicles equipped with the audio system type 2</h1> <p>Refer to "Listen to Bluetooth Audio" on page 7-72.</p> <h1 id="how-to-make-or-receive-hands-free-calls">How to make or receive hands-free calls</h1> <p>F00761100020</p> <p>You can make or receive hands-free calls using a Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone connected to the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface. You can also use the phone books in the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface to make calls without dialling telephone numbers.</p> <p>"To make a call" on page 7-94</p> <p>"SEND function" on page 7-96</p> <p>"Receiving calls" on page 7-96</p> <p>"MUTE function" on page 7-96</p> <p>"Switching between hands-free mode and private mode" on page 7-96</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/53f7cdf9aebc55ec8aedca60bc505e1324e1fabb79ac512739edef3f536e4189.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-332">NOTE</h1> <p>● The hands-free calls might not be operated correctly when it makes calling or receiving by operating the cellular phone directly.</p> <h1 id="to-make-a-call">To make a call</h1> <p>E00761200122</p> <p>You can make a call in the following 3 ways using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface:</p> <p>Making a call by saying a telephone number, making a call using the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface's phone book, and making a call by redialing.</p> <h1 id="making-a-call-by-using-the-telephone-number">Making a call by using the telephone number</h1> <p>You can make a call by saying the telephone number.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Dial." </li> <li>After the voice guide says "Number please," say the telephone number. </li> <li>The voice guide will say “Dialing <number recognised>.” The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface will then make the call.</li> </ol> <p>When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm again the tele-</p> <p>phone number. To continue with that number, answer "Yes."</p> <p>To change the telephone number, answer "No." The system will say "Number please" then say the telephone number again.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/74339ce7c33c31eec7a124202c26e4132eb5610882b5b7fe538611dff4abfc69.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-333">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>In the case of English, the system will recognise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the number “0.” </li> <li>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface supports numbers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *). <br /> ● The maximum supported telephone number length is as follows:</li> </ul> <p>- International telephone number: + and telephone numbers (to 18 digits).</p> <p>- Except for international telephone number: telephone numbers (to 19 digits).</p> <h1 id="making-a-call-using-a-phone-book">Making a call using a phone book</h1> <p>You can make calls using the vehicle phone book or mobile phone book of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.</p> <p>For details on the phone books, refer to "Phone book function" on page 7-96.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Call."</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/e6a6bb67a762fe2920e925d3201214412f26e5bfbe2882f095e537acd1146b7d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-334">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone book and the mobile phone book are empty, the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone book is empty. Would you like to add a new entry now?”</p> <p>Answer "Yes," and the voice guide will say "Entering the phone book - new entry menu." You can now create data in the vehicle phone book.</p> <p>Answer "No," to return to the main menu.</p> <ol> <li> <p>After the voice guide says "Name please," say the name you want to call, from those registered in the phone book.</p> </li> <li> <p>If there is only 1 match, the system will proceed to Step 5. If there are 2 or more matches, the voice guide will say “More than one match was found, would you like to call <returned name>.” If that person is the one you want to call, answer “Yes.”</p> </li> </ol> <p>Answer “No,” and the name of the next matching person will be uttered by the voice guide.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8cc61a7dfbc4bd78ef8bf874cf077130c6e91bc57b548f305f57d28c28f90f47.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-335">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you say “No” to all names read by the system, the voice guide will say “Name not found, returning to main menu” and the system will return to the main menu.</p> <ol> <li>If only one telephone number is registered under the name you just said, the voice guide proceeds to Step 6.</li> </ol> <p>If two or more telephone numbers are registered that match the name you just said, the voice guide will say “Would you like to call <name> at [home], [work], [mobile], or [other]?” Select the location to call.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7e9ad16e5fc22dae09b61e069017c3d212ef84c1968402b2e33f6233cbaf6a19.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-336">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the name you selected has matching data in the vehicle phone book but no telephone number is registered under the selected location, the voice guide will say “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for <name>. Would you like to add location or try again?”</p> <p>Say "Try again," and the system will return to Step 3.</p> <p>Say “Add location” and you can register an additional telephone number under the selected location.</p> <p>- If the name you selected has matching data in the mobile phone book but no telephone number is registered under the selected location, the voice guide will say “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for <name>. Would you like to try again?”</p> <p>Answer "Yes," and the system will return to Step 3.</p> <p>Answer "No," and the call will be cancelled. Start over again from Step 1.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say "Calling <name> <location>" and then the system will dial the telephone number.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/97a07359ac4e27c7ed330325b581a662d86c3d6279f9503cc763e3397476bab0.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-337">NOTE</h1> <p>- When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the name and location of the receiver are correct.</p> <p>If the name is correct, answer "Yes."</p> <p>To change the name or location to call, answer "No." The system will return to Step 3.</p> <h1 id="redialing">Redialing</h1> <p>You can redial the last number called, based on the history of dialed calls in the paired cellular phone.</p> <p>Use the following procedure to redial.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Press the SPEECH button.</p> </li> <li> <p>Say "Redial."</p> </li> </ol> <h1 id="send-function">SEND function</h1> <p>E00761300035</p> <p>During a call, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode, then say "<numbers> SEND" to generate DTMF tones.</p> <p>For example, if during a call you need to simulate the press of a phone button as a response to an automated system, press the SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound SEND” and the 1234# will be sent on your cellular phone.</p> <h1 id="receiving-calls">Receiving calls</h1> <p>E00761600012</p> <p>If an incoming phone call is received while the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the audio system will be automatically turned on and switched to the incoming call, even when the audio system was originally off.</p> <p>The voice guide announcement for the incoming call will be output from the front passenger's seat speaker.</p> <p>If the CD player or radio was playing when the incoming call was received, the audio system will mute the sound from the CD player or radio and output only the incoming call.</p> <p>To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel control switch.</p> <p>When the call is over, the audio system will return to its previous state.</p> <h1 id="mute-function">MUTE function</h1> <p>100760300041</p> <p>At any time during a call, you can mute the vehicle microphone.</p> <p>Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying "Mute" during a call will turn ON the MUTE function and mute the microphone.</p> <p>Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn off the MUTE function and cancel the mute on the microphone.</p> <h1 id="switching-between-hands-free-mode-and-private-mode">Switching between hands-free mode and private mode</h1> <p>E00761400036</p> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface can switch between Hands-free mode (Hands-free calls) and private mode (calls using cellular phone). If you press the SPEECH button and say “Transfer call” during a Hands-free call, you can stop the Hands-free mode and talk in private mode.</p> <p>To return to Hands-free mode, press the SPEECH button again and say "Transfer call".</p> <h1 id="phone-book-function">Phone book function</h1> <p>F00763700017</p> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface has 2 types of unique phone books that are different from the phone book stored in the cellular phone. They are the vehicle phone book and the mobile phone book.</p> <p>These phone books are used to register telephone numbers and to make calls to desired numbers via the voice recognition function.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/3a2ba4a7d88d97b1f5a787838ab079beca46b91abe15efbf3b25bcdbea145b08.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-338">NOTE</h1> <p>- Disconnecting the battery cable will not delete information registered in the phone book.</p> <h1 id="vehicle-phone-book">Vehicle phone book</h1> <p>E00763801275</p> <p>This phone book is used when making calls with the voice recognition function.</p> <p>Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehicle phone book per language.</p> <p>Also, each entry has 4 locations associated with: home, work, mobile and other. You can register one telephone number for each location.</p> <p>You can register a desired name as a name for any phone book entry registered in the vehicle phone book.</p> <p>Names and telephone numbers can be changed later on.</p> <p>The vehicle phone book can be used with all paired cellular phones.</p> <h1 id="to-register-a-telephone-number-in-the-vehicle-phone-book">To register a telephone number in the vehicle phone book</h1> <p>You can register a telephone number in the vehicle phone book in the following 2 ways:</p> <p>Reading out a telephone number, and selecting and transferring 1 phone book entry from the phone book of the cellular phone.</p> <h1 id="to-register-by-reading-out-a-telephone-number">To register by reading out a telephone number</h1> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li> <p>Say "Phone book."</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "New entry."</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say "Name please." Say your preferred name to register it.</p> </li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/2e6b32ab6f7df4a4d3066c87dc35c454ba30ace0ad3831afa0d19ae15c1af3ca.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-339">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the maximum number of entries are already registered, the voice guide will say "The phone book is full. Would you like to delete a name?" Say "Yes" if you want to delete a registered name.</p> <p>Say "No," to return to the main menu.</p> <ol> <li>When the name has been registered, the voice guide will say "home, work, mobile, or other?" Say the location for which you want to register a telephone number.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/d73824e4a09c47ea37b1e9f52c43c576696f661ca716776122fab67f30ae9b7f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-340">NOTE</h1> <p>- When the confirmation function is on, the voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”</p> <p>Answer "No" to return to location selection in Step 5.</p> <p>If a telephone number has been registered for the selected location, the voice guide will say "The current number is <telephone number>, number please."</p> <p>If you do not want to change the telephone number, say "cancel" or the original number to keep it registered.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say "Number please." Say the telephone number to register it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/734282cdae6d1b8e5f7390f8887a9f2d2e5c947a741f39660151d03a868c181e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-341">NOTE</h1> <p>- In the case of English, the system will recognise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the number “0.”</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will repeat the telephone number you have just read, and then register the number.</li> </ol> <p>When the telephone number has been registered, the voice guide will say "Number saved. Would you like to add another number for this entry?"</p> <p>To add another telephone number for a new location for the current entry, answer "Yes." The system will return to location selection in Step 5.</p> <p>Answer "No" to end the registration process and return to the main menu.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2c0d6921f68758195fd08cd29ebdc03b92fad788a2073139b40bb0a75c3677b3.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-342">NOTE</h1> <p>- When the confirmation function is on, after repeating the telephone number you have read, the voice guide will ask "Is this correct?" Answer "Yes."</p> <p>Answer "No" to return to telephone number registration in step 6.</p> <h1 id="to-select-and-transfer-one-phone-book-entry-from-the-phone-book-of-the-cellular-phone">To select and transfer one phone book entry from the phone book of the cellular phone</h1> <p>You can select 1 phone book entry from the phone book of the cellular phone and register it in the vehicle phone book.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b6676889e7e0f45859c205441f2dd7bfbdb79e46530cad2514876380fbd6c6cb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-343">NOTE</h1> <p>● Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is parked. Before transferring, make sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. <br /> - All or part of data may not be transferred, even when the cellular phone supports Bluetooth ^ , depending on the compatibility of the device. <br /> ● The maximum supported telephone number length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first 19 digits. <br /> - If telephone numbers contain characters other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are deleted before the transfer. <br /> - For the connection settings on the cellular phone side, refer to the instructions for the cellular phone.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Phone book." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "Import contact." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Would you like to import a single entry or all contacts?" Say "Single entry."</li> </ol> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface will become ready to receive transferred phone book data.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/625bb66514a7b171069972fec4bb405b37dfb2a8fcc82b84ba99192a47f2f70a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-344">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the maximum number of entries are already registered, the voice guide will say "The phone book is full. Would you like to delete a name?" Say "Yes" if you want to delete a registered name. Say "No," to return to the main menu.</p> <ol> <li>After the voice guide says "Ready to receive a contact from the phone. Only a home, a work, and a mobile number can be imported," the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will receive the phone book data from the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone. </li> <li>Operate the Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone to set it up so that the phone book entry you want to register in the vehicle phone book can be transferred to the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/1bd5394016a333430c639dbdd45130b5c81d67ac50b6d460345f1be19536c766.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-345">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface cannot recognise the Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone or the connection takes too much time, the voice guide will say “Import contact has timed out” and then the system will cancel the registration. In such case, start over again from Step 1.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b418f7c706fe7ae9d4d70c7ea4363fcb87282e994378d9f9044d0aad8cef16b2.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-346">NOTE</h1> <p>- Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing and holding the SPEECH button will cancel the registration.</p> <ol> <li>When the reception is complete, the voice guide will say “<Number of telephone numbers that had been registered in the import source> numbers have been imported. What name would you like to use for these numbers?”</li> </ol> <p>Say the name you want to register for this phone book entry.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/dd86c684931bb3ae0776791cf01cb87bf74861f9a7b72e572f0feb5020977f09.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-347">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the entered name is already used for other phone book entry or similar to a name used for other phone book entry, that name cannot be registered.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say "Adding <name>."</li> </ol> <p>When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the name is correct. Answer "Yes."</p> <p>Answer "No," and the voice guide will say "Name please." Register a different name.</p> <ol> <li> <p>The voice guide will say "Numbers saved."</p> </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say "Would you like to import another contact?"</p> </li> </ol> <p>Answer "Yes" if you want to continue with the registration. You can continue to register a new phone book entry from Step 5.</p> <p>Answer "No," to return to the main menu.</p> <h1 id="to-change-the-content-registered-in-the-vehicle-phone-book">To change the content registered in the vehicle phone book</h1> <p>E00739800037</p> <p>You can change or delete a name or telephone number registered in the vehicle phone book.</p> <p>You can also listen to the list of names registered in the vehicle phone book.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2d246d0dfd98f8331831eae72db92651d794ab2937ca94dab4637d639bfd237b.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-348">NOTE</h1> <p>● The system must have at least one entry.</p> <h1 id="editing-a-telephone-number">Editing a telephone number</h1> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Phone book." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "Edit number." </li> <li>The voice guide will say “Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names.” Say the name of the phone book entry you want to edit.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/7dc56560134d0dda051bfb862d5623020fb4a920f4dc8fece9654662ce634ad3.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-349">NOTE</h1> <p>- Say “List names,” and the names registered in the phone book will be read out in order. Refer to “Listening to the list of registered names” on page 7-100.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say "Home, work, mobile or other?" Select and say the location where the telephone number you want to change or add is registered.</li> </ol> <p>When the confirmation function is on, the system will check the target name and location again. Answer "Yes" if you want to continue with the editing.</p> <p>Answer "No" to return to Step 3.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say "Number please." Say the telephone number you want to register.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/cd95d942dddae4c61ae0810c9e989b0e7c35451ce6a705219674aa865d7ca244.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-350">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the telephone number is already registered in the selected location, the voice guide will say “The current number is <current number>. New number, please.” Say a new telephone number to change the current number.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will repeat the telephone number.</li> </ol> <p>When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the number is correct. Answer "Yes."</p> <p>Answer "No" to return to Step 3.</p> <ol> <li>Once the telephone number is registered, the voice guide will say "Number saved" and then the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/1c4d4652a9ada349c72a99d251b9b53a3b0e80abb4e50a9212b35cf8a9a46831.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-351">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the location where a telephone number was already registered has been overwritten with a new number, the voice guide will say "Number changed" and then the system will return to the main menu.</p> <h1 id="editing-a-name">Editing a name</h1> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Phone book." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "Edit name." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names." Say the name you want to edit.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/1c3aaa6d81bb1a48973ee30b9a604134a7496df0be996c2d06e5618aa9d3c20f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-352">NOTE</h1> <p>- Say “List names,” and the names registered in the phone book will be read out in order. Refer to “Listening to the list of registered names” on page 7-100.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say “Changing <name>.”</li> </ol> <p>When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the name is correct. Answer "Yes" if you want to continue with the editing based on this information.</p> <p>Answer "No" to return to Step 4.</p> <ol> <li>The voice guide will say "Name please." Say the new name you want to register. </li> <li>The registered name will be changed. When the change is complete, the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <h1 id="listening-to-the-list-of-registered-names">Listening to the list of registered names</h1> <p>E00739900038</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Phone book." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "List names." </li> <li> <p>Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface will read out the entries in the phone book in order.</p> </li> <li> <p>When the voice guide is done reading the list, it will say "End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?" When you want to check the list again from the beginning, answer "Yes."</p> </li> </ol> <p>When you are done, answer "No" to return to the previous or main menu.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b6a56be37e3d1e9a44b30f36b0777ec097f3f94bc51a1098076090fde1e2b39d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-353">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>You can call, edit or delete a name that is being read out. <br /> Press the SPEECH button and say "Call" to call the name, "Edit name" to edit it, or "Delete" to delete it. <br /> The system will beep and then execute your command. </li> <li>If you press the SPEECH button and say "Continue" or "Previous" while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say "Continue" to proceed to the next entry or "Previous" to return to the previous entry.</li> </ul> <h1 id="deleting-a-telephone-number">Deleting a telephone number</h1> <p>E00740000039</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Phone book." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "Delete." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Please say the name of the entry you would like to de-</li> </ol> <p>lete, or say list names." Say the name of the phone book entry in which the telephone number you want to delete is registered.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/227351ba2d5dc97abf4e272995d21c2a80090aa99f1357498b7865b92e48eb5f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-354">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li> <p>Say “List names,” and the names registered in the phone book will be read out in order. Refer to “Listening to the list of registered names” on page 7-100.</p> </li> <li> <p>If only one telephone number is registered in the selected phone book entry, the voice guide will say "Deleting <name><location>."</p> </li> </ul> <p>If multiple telephone numbers are registered in the selected phone book entry, the voice guide will say “Would you like to delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], or all?”</p> <p>Select the location to delete, and the voice guide will say “Deleting <name><location>.”</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6091d3d7e2a75e4972205c2117424806aeea192bcb32c78ec799750fe9b550a7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-355">NOTE</h1> <p>- To delete the telephone numbers from all locations, say "All."</p> <ol> <li>The system will ask if you really want to delete the selected telephone number(s) to go ahead with the deletion, answer "Yes." <br /> Answer “No,” the system will cancel deleting the telephone number(s) and then return to Step 4. </li> <li>When the deletion of the telephone number is completed, the voice guide will say "<name> <location> deleted" and then the system will return to the main menu. <br /> If all locations are deleted, the system will say "<name> and all locations deleted" and the name will be removed from the phone book. If numbers still remain under the entry, the name will retain the other associated numbers.</li> </ol> <h1 id="erasing-the-phone-book">Erasing the phone book</h1> <p>E00740100030</p> <p>You can delete all registered information from the vehicle phone book.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Phone book." </li> <li> <p>The voice guide will say “Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact.” Say “Erase all.”</p> </li> <li> <p>For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will ask "Are you sure you want to erase everything from your hands-free system phone book?" Answer "Yes." <br /> Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phone book and return to the main menu. </p> </li> <li>The voice guide will say "You are about to delete everything from your hands-free system phone book. Do you want to continue?" Answer "Yes" to continue. <br /> Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phone book and return to the main menu. </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Please wait, erasing the handsfree system phone book" and then the system will delete all data in the phone book. <br /> When the deletion is complete, the voice guide will say “Hands-free system phone book erased” and then the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <h1 id="mobile-phone-book">Mobile phone book</h1> <p>F00763900048</p> <p>All entries in the phone book stored in the cellular phone can be transferred in a batch and registered in the mobile phone book.</p> <p>Up to 7 mobile phone books, each containing up to 1,000 names, can be registered.</p> <p>The Bluetooth ^® 2.0 interface automatically converts from text to voice the names registered in the transferred phone book entries, and creates names.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/48c26f5e9399de1823038ef3fa24b58f7f4cff9e8fca749adeec323adb0ac3d7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-356">NOTE</h1> <p>● Only the mobile phone book transferred from the connected cellular phone can be used with that cellular phone. <br /> - You cannot change the names and telephone numbers in the phone book entries registered in the mobile phone book. You cannot select and delete specific phone book entries, either. <br /> To change or delete any of the above, change the applicable information in the source phone book of the cellular phone and then transfer the phone book again.</p> <h1 id="to-import-a-devices-phone-book">To import a devices phone book</h1> <p>Follow the steps below to transfer to the mobile phone book the phone book stored in the cellular phone.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/87545344c5ad24187d4ab8c3e7b6635bd2b3509bbbe673bf1d8aefe3785b4144.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-357">NOTE</h1> <p>● Transfer should be completed while the vehicle is parked. <br /> Before transferring, make sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/72bc60c3061abc7632e038e48a8892068196285cd5dc81e706365d8429b624a8.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-358">NOTE</h1> <p>● The already stored phone book in the mobile phone book is overwritten by the stored phone book in the cellular phone. <br /> - All or part of data may not be transferred even when the cellular phone supports Bluetooth ^ , depending on the compatibility of the device. <br /> ● Only a home, a work, and a mobile number can be imported. <br /> ● The maximum supported telephone number length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first 19 digits. <br /> - If telephone numbers contain characters other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are deleted before the transfer. <br /> - For the connection settings on the cellular phone side, refer to the instructions for the cellular phone.</p> <ol> <li>Press the SPEECH button. </li> <li>Say "Phone book." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "Import contact." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Would you like to import a single entry or all contacts?" Say "All contacts." </li> <li>The voice guide will say "Importing the contact list from the mobile phone book. This may take several minutes to complete. Would you like to continue?" An-</li> </ol> <p>swer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile phone book the phone book stored in the cellular phone will start.</p> <p>Answer “No,” to return to the main menu.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/0bc652e0864f13c28262c09b76d128a7e6df29b423de4d0398e6fb7a23805938.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-359">NOTE</h1> <p>● The transfer may take some time to complete depending on the number of contacts. <br /> - If the Bluetooth ^ 2.0 interface could not be connected to the Bluetooth ^ compatible cellular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable to transfer contact list from phone” and then the system will return to the main menu. <br /> - If you press the HANG-UP button or press and hold the SPEECH button during the data transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and the system will return to the main menu. <br /> - If an error occurs during the data transfer, all transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide will say "Unable to complete the phone book import" and then the system will return to the main menu. <br /> - If there are no contacts in the phone book, the voice guide will say “There are no contacts on the connected phone.”</p> <ol> <li>When the transfer is complete, the voice guide will say "Import complete" and then the system will return to the main menu.</li> </ol> <p>Enrollment commands <br /> F007324D0249 </p> <table><tr><td>Phrase</td><td>English French S</td><td>Spanish Italian G</td><td>German Dutch P</td><td>Portuguese Russian</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>1</td><td>123456789 1234</td><td>56789 123456789</td><td>123456789 123456789</td><td>123456789 123456789</td><td>123456789</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>2</td><td>888 555 1212 88</td><td>8 555 1212 888</td><td>555 1212 888 555</td><td>1212 888 555 1212</td><td>888 555 1212</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>3</td><td colspan="3">Call Appeler Llamar Chiama Anrufen Bellen Ligar</td><td>Вызов</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>4</td><td>Dial</td><td>Composer</td><td>Marcar</td><td>Componi</td><td>Wählen</td><td>Nummer keuze</td><td>Marcar</td><td>Набор</td></tr><tr><td>5</td><td>Setup</td><td>Configurer</td><td>Configuración</td><td>Configura</td><td>Einrichtung</td><td>Setup</td><td>Configurar</td><td>Настройка</td></tr><tr><td>6</td><td>Cancel</td><td>Annuler</td><td>Cancelar</td><td>Annulla</td><td>Abbrechen</td><td>Annuleren</td><td>Cancelar</td><td>Отмена</td></tr><tr><td>7</td><td>Continue</td><td>Continuer</td><td>Continuar</td><td>Continua</td><td>Weiter</td><td>Doorgaan</td><td>Continuar</td><td>Продолжить</td></tr><tr><td>8</td><td>Help</td><td>Aide</td><td>Ayuda</td><td>Aiuto</td><td>Hilfe</td><td>Help</td><td>Ajuda</td><td>Справка</td></tr></table> <h1 id="usb-input-terminal">USB input terminal\*</h1> <p>E00761901171</p> <p>You can connect your USB memory device or iPod* to play music files stored in the USB memory device or iPod.</p> <p>The following explains how to connect and remove a USB memory device or iPod.</p> <p>Refer to the following sections for details on how to play music files:</p> <h1 id="vehicles-equipped-with-the-audio-system-type-1-3">Vehicles equipped with the audio system type 1</h1> <p>Refer to "To play tracks from USB device" on page 7-30.</p> <h1 id="vehicles-equipped-with-the-audio-system-type-2-3">Vehicles equipped with the audio system type 2</h1> <p>Refer to "Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device (audio system type 2)" on page 7-70.</p> <p>*: "iPod" is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.</p> <h1 id="how-to-connect-a-usb-memory-device">How to connect a USB memory device</h1> <p>F00762000202</p> <h1 id="to-connect">To connect</h1> <ol> <li>Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position.</li> </ol> <h1 id="usb-input-terminal-2">USB input terminal\*</h1> <ol> <li>Open the glove box and remove the connector cable (A) from clips (B).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/feef8cf434a0989678478c3e465e13b15fe3048a677c960bb434fa7f46d5f8e7.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AA0104629 </details> <ol> <li>Connect the USB memory device (C) to the connector cable (A). Be sure to hold the terminal part (D) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/635185847efdd9a011352c31463b01d9dad30259610a579c81ab5ae287a4e413.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A C D AA0104632 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/ad82e9659e8d289a8cec3bcf787c9e949ca357bab510f138b3886f942f1f4eda.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-122">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Keep the lid of the glove box closed while driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of the glove box could otherwise cause injuries.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/26d93c371c61d6caf6aa86ca69271b151f5faf8a619165a06976a3db1c6a5289.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-360">NOTE</h1> <p>- When closing the glove box, be careful not to trap the connector cable and USB memory device.</p> <h1 id="to-remove-4">To remove</h1> <ol> <li>Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position. </li> <li>Remove the USB memory device (C). Be sure to hold the terminal part (D) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/cdd1eb77341f947f3c2560d4bb604e1f3a90655d0633e6a5669a52b0c4a562d8.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> D C AA0104645 </details> <ol> <li>Fix the connector cable on the clips and close the glove box.</li> </ol> <h1 id="how-to-connect-an-ipod">How to connect an iPod</h1> <p>E00762100186</p> <h1 id="to-connect-2">To connect</h1> <ol> <li>Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position. </li> <li>Open the glove box and remove the connector cable (A) from clips (B).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/c7078a5b684fb11938268c893ba1986e6cc49b2ccd868d94a92ce32d77464cdf.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AA004629 </details> <ol> <li>Connect the Dock connector (C) to the iPod (D).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/b2fd64c2550111eec7aaae39a85c118b904e5708d61418e07fd1804117c30dc9.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> D C AA0104658 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/c35e4c8bddc006e04c183216378fc36d5c68f79a2f6cf46e73193078ef1cc7d4.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-361">NOTE</h1> <p>● Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple Inc.</p> <ol> <li>Connect the Dock connector (C) to the connector cable (A). Be sure to hold the terminal part (E) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/4efd4902d3fa7381772ceb7e036253dc2e70842e3f45a53ae4766dee070823f3.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A C E AA0194834 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/08bfb037af797a7718367f21de45aeffec74ea1951c00ae2d60023cc5990b5c7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-123">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Keep the lid of the glove box closed while driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of the glove box could otherwise cause injuries.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d0b5240c202a0451ea121bf50c564bd8aa7f1144af1fbfef420f7d7c87171fec.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-362">NOTE</h1> <p>- When closing the glove box, be careful not to trap the connector cable and iPod.</p> <h1 id="to-remove-5">To remove</h1> <ol> <li> <p>Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position.</p> </li> <li> <p>Remove the Dock connector (C). Be sure to hold the terminal part (E) of the connector cable as shown in the illustration.</p> </li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/183f35c375c71067e8d4951c9a08e3fccd826b91d1ea337257c1a139b88fccf7.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> E C A AA9104674 </details> <ol> <li>Fix the connector cable on the clips and close the glove box.</li> </ol> <h1 id="types-of-connectable-devices-and-supported-file-specifications">Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications</h1> <p>L00762200015</p> <h1 id="device-types">Device types</h1> <p>E00762300306</p> <p>Devices of the following types can be connected.</p> <table><tr><td>Model name Condition</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>USB memory device</td><td>Storage capacity of 256 Mbytes or more</td></tr><tr><td>iPod touch*</td><td>F/W Ver.1.1.1 or later</td></tr><tr><td>iPod classic*</td><td>F/W Ver.1.0 or later</td></tr><tr><td>iPod (fifth generation)*</td><td>F/W Ver.1.2.2 or later</td></tr><tr><td>iPod nano (fifth generation)*</td><td>F/W Ver.1.2 or later</td></tr><tr><td>iPod nano (second generation)*</td><td>F/W Ver.1.1.2 or later</td></tr><tr><td>Models other than USB memory devices and iPods</td><td>Digital audio player supporting mass storage class</td></tr></table> <p>": "iPod touch," "iPod classic," "iPod" and "iPod nano" are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.</p> <h1 id="sun-visors">Sun visors</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/6950b993d39539a6b6d11611582252415b48cee173e6eef1f9d2c99f2717d56f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-363">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depending on the type of the USB memory device or other device connected, the connected device may not function properly or the available functions may be limited. <br /> - It is recommended to use an iPod with firmware updated to the latest version. <br /> - You can charge your iPod by connecting to the USB input terminal when the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. <br /> - Do not keep your USB memory device or iPod in your vehicle. <br /> - It is recommended that you back up files in case of data damage. <br /> - Do not connect to the USB input terminal any device (hard disk, card reader, memory reader, etc.) other than the connectable devices specified in the previous section. The device and/or data may be damaged. If any of these devices was connected by mistake, remove it after turning the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position.</p> <h1 id="file-specifications">File specifications</h1> <p>E00762400017</p> <p>You can play music files of the following specifications that are saved in a USB memory device or other device supporting mass storage class.</p> <table><tr><td>Item Condition</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>File format</td><td>MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV</td></tr></table> <table><tr><td>Item Condition</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Maximum number of levels (including the root)</td><td>Level 8</td></tr><tr><td>Number of folders 700</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Number of files 65,535</td><td></td></tr></table> <p>Sun visors</p> <p>E00711200693</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/be82e084890fbbbff18ca70b970c8f789a52705ea9eae0f1e16590cf33451efe.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 224 1 2 AA0055499 </details> <p>1- To eliminate front glare</p> <p>2- To eliminate side glare</p> <h1 id="ticket-holder">Ticket holder\*</h1> <p>The driver's sun visor is provided with a ticket holder (A) on the backside.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/0867573f7aaf83e62ea2802665cc4dbc792db4b350c12491ed30cd797dbede1d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Pure technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled parts A and 1, no text or symbols beyond labels </details> <h1 id="card-holder">Card holder\*</h1> <p>Cards can be slipped into the front (A) of the lid of the passenger side vanity mirror.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2a465c8c5826ea119ba3da4c27815d245ceffdaed9df1aadcea8b7e9e7b3447a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a device casing with a labeled component 'A' and mounting tabs (no text or symbols beyond label) </details> <h1 id="vanity-mirror">Vanity mirror\*</h1> <p>100711300489</p> <p>A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor on the passenger side.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f8fe695c963bbaf33ebef57bd422a87dd76508a1e0c65f77efb61bf0bf8b65c0.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Simple line drawing of a door handle with a square opening and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="ashtray">Ashtray</h1> <p>E00711400826</p> <h1 id="caution-124">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Put out matches and cigarettes before they are placed in the ashtray. <br /> - Don't put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage. <br /> ● Always close the ashtray. If left open, other cigarette butts in the ashtray may be rekindled.</p> <h1 id="type-1-fixed-position">Type 1 (fixed position)</h1> <p>To use the ashtray, pull it out.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e6b1ef01d17b0a6ccaf7e7e4fed0628c718e4d259deaa2c579e42428e579604a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols) </details> <p>To remove the ashtray, pull it out while pressing the stop (A).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a9552f7374df0f37452d341aee8083f7f88e4cf4b2c0441cdb42594366b18f41.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Interior view of a car dashboard with a control panel and directional arrows (no text or symbols visible) </details> <h1 id="type-2-moveable">Type 2 (moveable)</h1> <p>To use the moveable ashtray, open the lid.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/bbfe5d80272643b5310728ec3cf5ef91ed6542a9c8dfa8201bb3b4e7775d965f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Simple line drawing of a cylindrical container with an arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="mounting-position-for-moveable-ashtray">Mounting position for moveable ashtray</h1> <p>The moveable ashtray can be fitted at the indicated position.</p> <h1 id="cigarette-lighter">Cigarette lighter</h1> <p>Refer to "Cup holder" on page 7-115.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a01ff88879c752ecba2bb6d9ba3a6bee0f7fd4c04113768f83d3bb104eb2c89e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="cigarette-lighter-2">Cigarette lighter</h1> <p>E00711501257</p> <p>The cigarette lighter can be used while the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e27191468e339916fc8a4883d5cf84f3bcfe3ae58be67f2f71827ec09f16530f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 AA0095417 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/1a55e4d9c4fda7b14f4169eb0508bfcb6483a78578ba5bbfb2ad0270b2e62ca1.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Typc 2 AA0095428 </details> <p>1- Push all the way in.</p> <p>The lighter will automatically return to its original position with a "click" when ready. Pull it out for use.</p> <p>After use, insert the lighter to its original position in the socket.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/78755ddde7891dc8574a5da96828cd64057384a4ec5102039835aa3558ae6db3.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-364">NOTE</h1> <p>- Do not leave the cigarette lighter removed from its socket, because the socket might become clogged by foreign material and be short-circuited.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f72db821716096a45db07aa6d11ba7695fea813c697afbdeb27caed548463d79.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-125">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not touch heating element or lighter housing. Hold only the knob to prevent burns. </li> <li>Do not allow children to operate or play with the cigarette lighter as burns may occur. </li> <li>Something is wrong with the cigarette lighter if it does not pop back out within approximately 30 seconds of being pushed in. Leaving the cigarette lighter pushed in for an extended period could cause fire. If it does not pop out by itself, we recommend you to have it checked. </li> <li>Do not leave the cigarette lighter pushed in or insert the cigarette lighter from another vehicle. Otherwise, the lighter may overheat and cause fire. </li> <li>It is recommended that only the lighter be inserted in its socket. Use of "plug-in" type accessories may damage the socket and result in poor retention of the lighter.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/2a655caab927a45a1420d742a76d80316ab429de3e74207f594f47db5f9005d5.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-126">CAUTION</h1> <p>- When the cigarette lighter socket is used as a power source for an electric appliance, be sure that the electric appliance operates at 12 V and has an electric capacity of 120 W or less. In addition, long use of the electric appliance without running the engine may run down the battery.</p> <h1 id="accessory-socket">Accessory socket\*</h1> <p>E00711601160</p> <p>The accessory socket can be used while the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.</p> <p>Open the cap (A) to uncover the socket. Use it to plug in an electrical device.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7ed4890f7df10ab328dea79609661c98ca5b02b4cc9fc7c405a8ebf1053bb1db.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 A AA0095202 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/fc5fcb04149fedc265253d8a34aba009201f3f7460a047e9f19c2e101a8c0ef5.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 AA8095215 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/9d013d9b88cb3b8be12bfeca1759a4bef10c6b3f253efea9b377fb1bfef50354.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-127">CAUTION</h1> <p>- When you connect an electrical device, make sure it is rated at 12 V and its electrical capacity does not exceed 120 W. Remember that prolonged use of an electrical device with the engine off could run down the battery. - When the accessory socket is not in use, be sure to close the cap, because the socket might become clogged by foreign material and be short-circuited.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/38601f12b83e8d7260fa2f3884ba4d943b6780a731186c1740a8ea399032b007.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-365">NOTE</h1> <p>● Long use of the electric appliance without running the engine may run down the battery. Especially avoid using it with the cigarette lighter.</p> <h1 id="digital-clock">Digital clock\*</h1> <p>L00711700193</p> <p>The digital clock indicates the time with the ignition switch in either "ON" or "ACC" position.</p> <h1 id="to-set-the-time">To set the time</h1> <p>Set the time by pressing the various buttons as described below.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6daecd4c99fcddfb8be16184ae45144ae5568faecbc8ac03f6c97a8dab42dd83.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 3 10:00 HSB SET MFB 2 TA0014486 </details> <p>1- To adjust the hour <br /> 2- To adjust the minutes <br /> 3- To reset the minutes to zero</p> <p>10:30 - 11:29..... Changes to 11:00</p> <p>11:30 - 12:29..... Changes to 12:00</p> <p>Interior lamps</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/fd7549e42cd902698296bae4c8b3a1172bd134704c27cbd3c331f1d447d324ae.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-366">NOTE</h1> <p>- If the battery cables are disconnected during repairs or for any other reason, reset the clock to the correct time after they are reconnected.</p> <p>Interior lamps</p> <p>ED0712000917</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/28e84cd5c3fef9aa1e1c1bae92b18923bed78bf0ed0c36207f47f3d823495ab8.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 4 TA0062012 </details> <p>1- Room lamp (Front)*</p> <p>Personal lamps*</p> <p>2- Room lamp (Rcar)* <br /> 3- Door courtesy lamps* <br /> 4- Centre console downlight</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/3e3b9f0befbc809d6e090f0bf6d3f2e9a57bd432743172151f2792aec43662d7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-367">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you leave the lamps on without running the engine, you will run down the battery. Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that all the lamps are off.</p> <p>Room lamps</p> <p>100712101289</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/20cb1000c54b2822789c68eb38fc4d05799aa5693d7b64171d8c621bd0b58e22.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Front* 3 2 1 TA0063530 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/2fa088faaaf970bc5fa28f198c2ac2dd9d688d0319fd425a3ee6858fedb931aa.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Rear (Type 1)* 1 2 3 TA0063527 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/deea52d4c119728f239f99db109fc542795f38db7844ac9fb89c38835fc43cfe.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Rear (Type 2)* 1 2 3 TA0014516 </details> <p>1</p> <p>(ON/ ) - The lamp illuminates.</p> <h1 id="2">2 (●-</h1> <p>[ Vehicles without central door locks system]</p> <p>The room lamp goes on when a door is opened. When all doors are closed, the room lamp is illuminated and dimmed gradually for 7 seconds then goes out. However, the lamp goes out immediately without being dimmed when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.</p> <p>[ Vehicles with central door locks system]</p> <p>The room lamp goes on when a door is opened. When all doors are closed, the room lamp is illuminated and dimmed gradually for 15 seconds then goes out. However, the lamp goes out immediately without being dimmed in case of the followings:</p> <p>● All doors are closed and the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. <br /> - All doors are locked using the key mechanism of the driver's door, the lock knob of the driver's door, or the remote control switch of the keyless entry system (if so equipped).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e599500f43c8da92cfcf05fe35fcee61db442ebba2620deb4cd5695bacb20159.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-368">NOTE</h1> <p>- On vehicles with keyless entry system, when the ignition key is removed with the doors closed, the lamp is illuminated and after about 15 seconds it goes off. The dimming period is also adjustable. For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</p> <h1 id="3">3</h1> <p>(OFF/○)</p> <p>- The lamp goes off.</p> <h1 id="personal-lamps">Personal lamps\*</h1> <p>ED0712500156</p> <p>Push the switch (A) to turn on the lamp. Push it again to turn it off.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/12ea2118ab3b93e20a849c102c620b7fa1a61839fd5918edffac86e1d7a8d3e1.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Interior view of a car showing a back panel with two arrows pointing to a digital display (no text or symbols visible) </details> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <h1 id="door-courtesy-lamps">Door courtesy lamps\*</h1> <p>F00717500034</p> <p>Each door courtesy lamp comes on when the relevant door is opened and goes off when the door is closed.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/95713427d4e64403d2bcc84159f6de446f462458a588c30f3a3092daeb4760e8.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and side panel, with a small sensor icon highlighting the front portion (no text or symbols present) </details> <h1 id="centre-console-downlight">Centre console downlight</h1> <p>E00733300043</p> <p>The centre console downlight go on when the lamp switch is in the “#or the ” position.</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <h1 id="storage-spaces">Storage spaces</h1> <p>Refer to "Combination headlamps and dipper switch" on page 5-32.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/15be8827a20538c690c61ab9fa3be120a26a3876e07da12cd498055209be4d1e.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 AA009522K </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/360244c6460d2ac1b17e305073aa1bfa4cd4ef6b706a0afbb5295261400ae9bc.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 AA0095231 </details> <h1 id="storage-spaces-2">Storage spaces</h1> <p>E00713101938</p> <h1 id="caution-128">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated drink, and spectacles in the cabin when parking the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will become extremely hot, so lighters and other flammable items may catch fire and unopened drink cans (including beer cans) may rupture. The heat may also deform or crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spectacle parts that are made of plastic. <br /> - Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a storage space could otherwise cause injuries.</p> <h1 id="note-369">NOTE</h1> <p>- Do not leave valuables in any storage space when leaving the vehicle.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/66ee8261d49b4d6ca592085f14d52d030696c55e6865967e07bb1adae0056421.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 4 5 6 AA0112817 </details> <p>1- Utility box* <br /> 2- Glove box <br /> 3- Sunglasses holder* <br /> 4- Front console box* <br /> 5- Floor console box* <br /> 6- Secret box (Club cab)</p> <h1 id="glove-box">Glove box</h1> <p>E00717601478</p> <h1 id="note-370">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>When the lamp switch is in the "EDGE" or "EDposition, the glove box lamp illuminates. <br /> Refer to "Combination headlamps and dipper switch" on page 5-32. <br /> ● The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is located in the glove box. <br /> For details, refer to "USB input terminal" on page 7-103.</li> </ul> <h1 id="type-1-3">Type 1</h1> <p>To open, pull the lever (A).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b343f169548fd944ce62aafd32b9e6fa948985e0d221e56772d116bb085c4865.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Close-up of a car dashboard with a directional arrow and label 'A' (no readable text or symbols beyond basic diagram) </details> <h1 id="type-2-3">Type 2</h1> <p>The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the key.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c726f4ce8ea2539422b88fb8df709e8dc9a19f04dd742ce6d714e122d359aa2c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 2 1 3 AA004058 </details> <p>1- To lock <br /> 2- To unlock <br /> 3- To open, pull the lever</p> <h1 id="front-console-box">Front console box\*</h1> <p>E00733400161</p> <p>To open, pull up the knob (A).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7dec274713089da9d488539b4e3832f2cfb3fa457f088d33d149085353d63574.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Diagram of a car interior showing airflow direction and component placement (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="floor-console-box">Floor console box\*</h1> <p>E00723302073</p> <h1 id="type-1-4">Type 1</h1> <p>To open, raise the lid.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/71120ddd4c17a42b0ffbfc82f325648c226b7afc7a368362f0d50c886ec9a6b3.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols </details> <h1 id="type-2-4">Type 2</h1> <p>Upper and lower boxes are located inside the floor console box.</p> <p>The floor console box can also be used as an armrest.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6efb168ed87dada962e4651497e551549721e03505cdb5b8c6af6e37889d039c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of two car seat compartments, one open and one closed, with no visible text or symbols. </details> <p>1- Upper box <br /> 2- Lower box</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d325ff4aa413021830a940a89dbfdbcb8b285a77aa4bc14eb1f9b20c109c4fb3.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-371">NOTE</h1> <p>● The Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA) is located in the lower box (if so equipped). For details, refer to "To use the external audio input function" on page 7-43 or refer to "Use AUX" on page 7-74.</p> <h1 id="storage-spaces-3">Storage spaces</h1> <h1 id="upper-box">Upper box</h1> <p>To open the upper box, lift the right release lever (A) and raise the lid.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/065eaddad0ab9ac3c8fea9c1f3988c1ee6eb1927cab1c400a9ce5cb9b95484fc.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Diagram showing car seatbelt mechanism with labeled components and directional arrows indicating movement </details> <h1 id="lower-box">Lower box</h1> <p>To open the lower box, lift the left release lever (B) and raise the lid.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/22ea0d7bf23fae75e69660f09df50928356b8e80f546b7426e259c2400e7a1eb.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> B AA0095273 </details> <h1 id="utility-box">Utility box\*</h1> <p>F00717900100</p> <p>To open, pull up the knob (A).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a7b051ecb7732db71c2b69428eef42cc626c845709837cbb344d5b90fc8cedc8.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Interior view of a car dashboard with a mounted screen and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="sunglasses-holder">Sunglasses holder\*</h1> <p>E00718600250</p> <p>Push the lid to open.</p> <p>Close the lid by pushing it till it clicks.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/03cfd9ea1584f3843dca7cab5f48b541cdc3d51e9ee970e3c754fa1492ea3fad.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Close-up of a car's front panel showing a button with an arrow icon and a side mirror (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/f3fe9648156659227c6b2c186c65f481665b44b6a13d895a2438d2eeed243e60.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-129">CAUTION</h1> <p>● The holder should not be used to store anything heavier than sunglasses. These objects could drop out.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/252bc7db15684981a837e3add05218c70f8d6e4c8b8e6ae28dcc40adc6083dc9.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-372">NOTE</h1> <p>● The holder may not be able to accommodate every possible size and shape of sunglasses; it is advisable to check compatibility before use.</p> <h1 id="secret-box-club-cab">Secret box (Club cab)</h1> <p>E00724900043</p> <p>The secret box is in the floor behind the seat. To use the box, open the lid.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7ab35102f20d212654804c08cd60d0225234e973d12c51ac3ffac4c75ca20072.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing upward, no visible text or symbols </details> <h1 id="cup-holder">Cup holder\*</h1> <p>100714500802</p> <h1 id="caution-130">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Do not drink beverages while driving the vehicle; doing so could distract you and result in an accident.</p> <h1 id="for-the-front-seat">For the front seat</h1> <p>The cup holder is located between the front seats.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e9407a0fca533e7059ecaadcc78b38e7cc67f1f915d4d1fe5165644f05a1d439.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 AA0095286 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/45e2d9499355ce4e0923f5dfe46192b7a2f798d78b1c7a280dfe7ed626868ea0.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 A AA0095299 </details> <h1 id="note-373">NOTE</h1> <p>● The cup holder adapter (A) can be removed to enable the cup holder to hold relatively large cup. Remove the cup holder adapter when necessary.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2c17308c7c58019690b0d004e6aeaa7082d87551861cd51f7bbabba84a647113.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 3 AA0095503 </details> <h1 id="for-the-rear-seat-double-cab">For the rear seat (Double cab)</h1> <p>F00716900389</p> <p>In order to use the cup holder, allow the arm-rest to drop down.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/90d7ece426ec861d515c767b98986be18082e2c8542d9457a9dacfdd1057cb08.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> 3D rendering of a car backseat with seat covers and a central box (no text or symbols visible) </details> <h1 id="bottle-holder">Bottle holder</h1> <p>F0071S200171</p> <h1 id="caution-131">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not drink beverages while driving the vehicle; doing so could distract you and result in an accident. <br /> ● Beverages can spill due to vibration or other movement during vehicle operation. Be careful not to get scalded by a hot beverage if spilled</li> </ul> <h1 id="note-374">NOTE</h1> <p>● Make sure the cap of any plastic bottle placed in a bottle holder is tightly closed.</p> <p>Convenient hook</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/29f0583a4d4026e93dd2cc36a10cb0f513daee58da638afc7077e786b00907da.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-375">NOTE</h1> <p>● The bottle holders may not accommodate bottles of certain shapes and sizes.</p> <h1 id="for-the-front-seat-2">For the front seat</h1> <p>The bottle holders are provided at both sides.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a5bdb552b62cbf9747c4a506f2473cbb4b65b41ef3e3e0df5e56843ca3e3f65b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Close-up of a car interior component with a curved arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible) </details> <h1 id="for-the-rear-seat-double-cab-2">For the rear seat (Double cab)</h1> <p>The bottle holders are provided at both sides.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/3a586c4205089d3e5b5cbaddeff5878fec95731fe89d6c834e3e51313c48d7f0.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Close-up of a car interior panel showing the dashboard and vent (no text or symbols visible) </details> <p>7-116</p> <p>For pleasant driving</p> <h1 id="convenient-hook">Convenient hook</h1> <p>E00732900071</p> <p>Light items of luggage can be hung from the hook.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e69555d5bbf3e957418e14898bbe419cc37494c0878722f8b56e4e6f6ae099b6.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Illustration of a medical procedure with surgical tools and a magnified view of a device (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/040d316611dc60129f620d9a9f5064daee923e9abb2304c1bb8a99a5723752de.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-376">NOTE</h1> <p>- Do not hang heavy luggage (more than about 4 kg) on the hook. Doing so could cause damage to the hook.</p> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <h1 id="coat-hook">Coat hook\*</h1> <p>E00725600438</p> <p>There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist grip.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/40480f5d053e71c75a762f08183d91b2caf3d2609855547ebccf7d77d6641328.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 Type 2 AA3805743 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/930673d9f634cebd989f8f348374e73731b4758a4268dbc1b67a782e211426f8.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-93">WARNING</h1> <p>- Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object on the coat hook. If the curtain airbag was activated, any such item could be propelled away with great force and could prevent the curtain airbag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Make sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook.</p> <h1 id="first-aid-kit-and-warning-triangle-securing-bands">First-aid kit and warning triangle securing bands\*</h1> <p>E00717200028</p> <p>A first-aid kit and a warning triangle can be secured with the band(s) installed in the illustrated position.</p> <h1 id="single-cab-double-cab">Single cab, Double cab</h1> <p>The wall behind the seat is provided with a band for securing a first-aid kit and a warning triangle.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c6dece6d643c5933707d0c06d1f57917c7dc32cd213eba886c092c829d8a9a46.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Single cab, Double cab* Double cab* AA005431 </details> <h1 id="club-cab">Club cab</h1> <p>A band for securing a first-aid kit is installed in the secret box.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/204c7d9fd8a52ed74e77a8e9ddced426e51f3c795d0285d33abd599714861592.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a car seatbelt device with a belt switch (no text or symbols) </details> <p>A band for securing a warning triangle is installed left under the rear seat.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/fdc904b3a318de3233f97cdc0e3c8ac5a27f34c4dc594d8a1a80e1028d9e6952.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a car seatbelt mechanism with a directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="for-emergencies">For emergencies</h1> <p>If the vehicle breaks down....8-02</p> <p>Emergency starting.... 8-02</p> <p>Engine overheating.... 8-04</p> <p>Bleeding the fuel system....8-05</p> <p>Removal of water from the fuel filter.... 8-06</p> <p>Tools, jack and jack handle....8-07</p> <p>Jacking up the vehicle.... 8-13</p> <p>Spare wheel....8-17</p> <p>How to change a tyre.... 8-18</p> <p>Towing 8-22</p> <p>Operation under adverse driving conditions.... 8-25</p> <p>If the vehicle breaks down</p> <h1 id="if-the-vehicle-breaks-down">If the vehicle breaks down</h1> <p>E00800101166</p> <p>If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move it to the shoulder and use the hazard warning flashers and/or the warning triangle etc. Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on page 5-37.</p> <h1 id="if-the-engine-stopsfails">If the engine stops/fails</h1> <p>Vehicle operation and control are affected if the engine stops.</p> <p>Before moving the vehicle to a safe area, be aware of the following:</p> <p>● The brake booster becomes inoperative and the pedal effort will increase. Press down the brake pedal harder than usual. <br /> - Since the power steering pump is no longer operative, the steering wheel feels heavy when turning it.</p> <h1 id="emergency-starting">Emergency starting</h1> <p>L00800502112</p> <p>If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper cables to start the engine.</p> <h1 id="warning-94">WARNING</h1> <p>● To start the engine using jumper cables connected from another vehicle, perform the correct procedures according to the instruction manual. Incorrect procedures could result in a fire or explosion or damage to the vehicles.</p> <ol> <li>Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren't touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don't want. The vehicle will not start, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.</li> </ol> <h1 id="caution-132">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li> <p>Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery. If the other system isn't 12-volt, shorting can damage both vehicles.</p> </li> <li> <p>You could be injured if the vehicles move. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in "P" (PARK) or a manual transmission in "N" (Neutral). Turn off the ignition switch.</p> </li> </ul> <h1 id="warning-95">WARNING</h1> <p>● Turn off the ignition on both vehicles beforehand. <br /> Make sure that the cables or your clothes cannot be caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal injury could result.</p> <h1 id="note-377">NOTE</h1> <p>● Turn off all lamps, heater and other electrical loads. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.</p> <ol> <li>Make sure battery electrolyte is at the proper level. Refer to "Battery" on page 10-10.</li> </ol> <h1 id="warning-96">WARNING</h1> <ul> <li> <p>If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or appears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt Jump Starting! <br /> A battery might rupture or explode if the temperature is below the freezing point or if it is not filled to the proper level.</p> </li> <li> <p>Connect one end of one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (A), and the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (B).</p> </li> </ul> <h1 id="vehicles-with-1-battery">Vehicles with 1 battery</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/8c5de23a871b90a3014c54a2c695774d75c1cbbb1b1a26aee46bce157b23983e.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram of a car engine showing labeled parts and a magnified inset of the engine compartment with arrows indicating flow or movement. </details> <p>Vehicles with 2 batteries <br /> <img alt="" src="images/d717d647a098298c78a30388f8251d228e23e15cc2523662d101b68cf86555a9.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram showing engine components with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a specific component. </details> <ol> <li>Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery (B), and the other end to the engine block of the vehicle with the discharged battery at the point farthest from the battery.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/df294d9f16299e7aacf0d39f60f906f89ccfd8d900a10f89dcbe0c3a359c079d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-378">NOTE</h1> <p>- Open the cover before connecting the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the battery. (Refer to "Battery" on page 10-10.)</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ce06500559ade9f44ce248656938110eb0180dcd2a06a17491ebc98d222a1214.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-97">WARNING</h1> <p>- Be sure to observe the connecting sequence of ①→②→③→④ - Make sure that the connection made to the appointed position (shown in the illustration). If the connection is made directly to the negative side of the battery, the inflammable gasses generated from the battery might catch fire and explode. - When connecting the jumper cables, do not connect the positive (+) cable to the negative (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks might cause explosion of the battery.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5a1d55e629fb75b5744f6dc1d26e15b42e7c85fe5811b05897b3e47176e4d90c.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-133">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Take care not to get the jumper cable caught in the cooling fan or other rotating part in the engine compartment. - Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size. Otherwise heat damage to the cables could result. - Check the jumper cables for damage and corrosion before use.</p> <ol> <li>Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/840ce869dd13656b4b5a9c80dad75a6939d0261e81882e0d6cd9cb381cc64be2.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-134">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assistance running. 7. After the engine is started, disconnect the cables in the reverse order.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ede96916db0c4cfd57671249fca6eb82de1fa472c3502fb9f262b7a429a46529.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-98">WARNING</h1> <p>- Charging the battery while it is installed in the vehicle might cause the battery to catch fire and explode. Or damage to the vehicle could result. If it has to be charged in that condition for unavoidable reasons, disconnect the vehicle side negative (-) terminal connected to the battery. - Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away from the battery because the battery may produce an explosion. - Use adequate ventilation when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space. - Remove all the caps before charging the battery.</p> <h1 id="engine-overheating">Engine overheating</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/c38d051cc1d35308418919156a13526a3a69dd809e6eb7400371f0559c3b00ae.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-99">WARNING</h1> <p>- Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric acid. If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into contact with your hands, eyes, clothes and the painted surface of your vehicle, it should be thoroughly flushed with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them with water immediately and thoroughly, and get prompt medical attention.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/0b3d1921a69f20ff28bb2b4955ba59259617f7c5d19d7a7788e1e509ccbd2a54.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-135">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not attempt to start the engine by pulling or pushing the vehicle. <br /> It could damage your vehicle. <br /> ● Always wear protective eye goggles when working near the battery. </li> <li>Keep the battery out of the reach of children.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/3b701d3a200392b80ac88a43309b3376e81ba2af4b6b3d1e681a06daf5702563.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-379">NOTE</h1> <p>- On vehicles with anti-lock brake system, in the vehicle is put in motion without fully charging the battery, it might cause the loss of smooth engine operation and the antilock brake warning lamp to illuminate. Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on page 6-45.</p> <h1 id="engine-overheating-2">Engine overheating</h1> <p>L00800602777</p> <p>If the water temperature gauge indication remains in the overheating zone for a long time, the engine may be overheating. If this occurs, take the following corrective measures:</p> <ol> <li>Stop the vehicle in a safe place. </li> <li>Check whether steam is coming from the engine compartment.</li> </ol> <p>[If steam does not come from the engine compartment]</p> <p>With the engine still running, raise the bonnet to ventilate the engine compartment.</p> <p>[If steam is coming from the engine compartment]</p> <p>Stop the engine, and when the steam stops, raise the bonnet to ventilate the engine compartment. Restart the engine.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e48afca57729539440687b6cd1850d262f45194c8ee54b35719bcaac88c82c54.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-100">WARNING</h1> <p>- Do not open the bonnet while steam is coming from the engine compartment. It could cause steam or hot water to spurt out, causing burns. Hot water could spurt out even when there is no steam coming out, and some parts will be very hot. Be very careful when opening the bonnet.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/472b4b957a09e114e64f841ba00b324ecf481fed6460714ceac07e7e0cc6c7b5.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-101">WARNING</h1> <p>● Be careful of hot steam, which could be blowing off the reserve tank cap. <br /> - Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is hot.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/1744d8e1328e49b4f7861f1eb7341dead74c8b87bae134ba1d0346293651c005.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 Type 2 TA0067176 </details> <p>*: Front of the vehicle</p> <ol> <li>Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, stop the engine immediately and have it checked.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/6a779250210cbbb69d7919e96ccf74ecfb5e3f7d2e57e3ef6d9421aa8964a806.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B* B C TA0063934 </details> <p>A- Radiator cap <br /> B- Cooling fan <br /> C- Reserve tank <br /> *: if so equipped</p> <ol> <li>After the engine coolant temperature has dropped to the normal temperature, stop the engine.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/5d17e4c3ae67da2ca14569c03769b30ab15b17bbb4b7a65e62338206b58030fb.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> H7 c1 AA0096515 </details> <ol> <li>Check the coolant level in the reserve tank.</li> </ol> <h1 id="warning-102">WARNING</h1> <p>● Be careful not to get your hands or clothes caught in the cooling fan.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d07eeb58482033c8622c6826d4c6b3ef5477f402c08e8e837b8cdcad1246bbc3.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical diagram of a car engine bay with an inset showing internal components (no text or labels) </details> <h1 id="warning-103">WARNING</h1> <p>- If there is none, make sure that the engine has cooled down before removing the radiator cap, because hot steam or boiling water otherwise will gush from the filler port and may scald you.</p> <ol> <li>Add coolant to the radiator and/or reserve tank if necessary (refer to the "Maintenance" section.)</li> </ol> <h1 id="caution-136">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Do not add coolant while the engine is hot. Suddenly adding cold coolant could damage the engine. Wait for the engine to cool down, then add coolant a little at a time.</p> <ol> <li>Examine the radiator hoses for coolant leakage and the drive belt for looseness or damage. If there is anything wrong with the cooling system or drive belt, we recommend you to have it checked and repaired.</li> </ol> <h1 id="bleeding-the-fuel-system">Bleeding the fuel system</h1> <p>E00800700312</p> <p>The fuel system should be bled to remove air as described below if the fuel supply is exhausted during travel.</p> <p>Removal of water from the fuel filter</p> <h1 id="type-1-5">Type 1</h1> <ol> <li>Loosen the air plug (A) at the top of the fuel filter.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/e667e39fc6573ff635239ed422a66b499442f954178b4f87dbc6d4a2da1746f9.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Mechanical component with a hand holding a wrench, showing internal structure and motion direction (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>Pump the hand pump (B) until there are no more bubbles in the fuel coming out of the air plug (A). When doing this, place a cloth around the air plug (A) to prevent the escaping fuel from spraying out.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/4e61edba27b2909e8c01b36cde3569dad69e8dd96c96db0dfd4f91137b92f5c3.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B TA0013391 </details> <ol> <li> <p>Tighten the air plug (A) when there are no more bubbles in the fuel.</p> </li> <li> <p>Continue pumping until the hand pump (B) becomes stiff.</p> </li> <li> <p>Finally, check to be sure that there is no leakage of fuel. If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a specialist for necessary information.</p> </li> </ol> <h1 id="type-2-3-2">Type 2, 3</h1> <p>Pump the hand pump (A) at the top of the fuel filter until the hand pump becomes stiff.</p> <p>Then try again to start the engine. If the engine does not start, repeat the process above.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d23b7ce683198fe4e18fbb62d7906801bc396195ba88e2bf8fe10f518d749206.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Typc 2 Type 3 AA0105453 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/0f8de10e65a8d3f87141073ac4743092836988b426f0d3b01a29cc7e5bde7856.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-137">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Do not smoke or have any other open flame near the vehicle while bleeding the fuel system.</p> <p>- Be sure to carefully clean away any spilt fuel which could ignite and cause a fire.</p> <h1 id="removal-of-water-from-the-fuel-filter">Removal of water from the fuel filter</h1> <p>E0DS00801437</p> <p>If the fuel filter indication lamp in the instrument panel illuminates during driving, it indicates that water has accumulated in the fuel filter. If this occurs, remove the water as described below.</p> <h1 id="type-1-2-2">Type 1, 2</h1> <ol> <li>Loosen the drain plug (A) of the fuel filter.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/1bc1b5ca3671c4385767ae9db76c217c152d693b7181829cce28a1786fa78aaa.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 A Type 2 A AJ4100293 </details> <ol> <li>Operate the hand pump (B) slowly 6 or 7 times in order to force the water out through the drain plug (A).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/6cc71f83292a540d5c0a7cb33d72f1e19e84f6ec5491adbdd9f84d45eac23533.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Illustration of a hand pressing a mechanical component with labeled part B (no text or symbols beyond label) </details> <ol> <li> <p>Tighten the drain plug (A) when water no longer comes out.</p> </li> <li> <p>Bleed the air in the fuel system. (Refer to "Bleeding the fuel system" on page 8-05.)</p> </li> <li> <p>Check to be sure that the fuel filter indication lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to "ON", and that it goes off when the engine is started. If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a specialist for necessary information.</p> </li> </ol> <h1 id="caution-138">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Do not smoke or have any other open flame near the vehicle while bleeding the fuel system.</p> <h1 id="caution-139">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Be sure to carefully clean away any water drained out because any fuel mixed with the water could ignite and cause a fire.</p> <h1 id="type-3">Type 3</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/7685cec87253b49d8652089567aa168567e57b4115a00e085628a48d2b3f29b6.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with hoses and housing (no text or symbols) </details> <p>Take your vehicle to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point to remove the water from the fuel filter.</p> <h1 id="tools-jack-and-jack-handle">Tools, jack and jack handle</h1> <p>E00800900819</p> <h1 id="storage">Storage</h1> <p>The storage location of the tools, jack and jack handle should be remembered in case of an emergency.</p> <p>Tools, jack and jack handle</p> <h1 id="single-cab">Single cab</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/db0c86951a249cb0f238f7d53e0c34c1e01408f10fbf7ac45052118f4d1ba899.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 A B C AA6052515 </details> <p>A- Tool (wheel nut wrench) <br /> B- Jack handle <br /> C- Jack</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f04288b69e07335c8f6c29a29ea9c54c6f43d2b5c54afd0f5e83d9792f45347e.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 A B C TA0020625 </details> <p>A-Tools <br /> B- Jack handle <br /> C-Jack</p> <p>For emergencies</p> <h1 id="club-cab-2">Club cab</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/fb57a07227fd51f56a8e55b41ea2f51a6385e6224a439d4eb3ff9d2f0660ae0a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car's seat and arm, with inset view of a mechanical component labeled A, B, C (no text or symbols beyond labels) </details> <p>A-Tools <br /> B-Jack <br /> C- Jack handle</p> <h1 id="double-cab">Double cab</h1> <p>Except for vehicles with rear retractable power window</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7b9231ef6853f9741d4b87e19abd176c82b2f401cd1d503147fbdc59f5a3ec51.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 A B C TA0013320 </details> <p>A- Tool (wheel nut wrench) <br /> B- Jack handle <br /> C- Jack</p> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d2cb20b18d390ebd91a9e520331cb1b2f79a2b3317ab45182fac0d17fdd95036.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 A B C TA0020638 </details> <p>A-Tools <br /> B- Jack handle <br /> C-Jack</p> <p>Vehicles with rear retractable power window</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6205e29c3665c55a2ddd438bac828f9190531a1b4b7bf95ed490c6e86f401dd8.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 A B C TA0013335 </details> <p>A- Tool (wheel nut wrench) <br /> B-Jack <br /> C- Jack handle</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c7abc2120ab3695918fab60f36c74e8951bb467f571ea3d5180a27cbaea5f7a8.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 A B C D TA0020641 </details> <p>A-Tools <br /> B- Jack <br /> C- Wheel nut wrench <br /> D- Jack handle</p> <h1 id="tools">Tools</h1> <p>E00801900382</p> <h1 id="type-1-6">Type 1</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/4cefc8436264000b4b5eb9da189fa0e8e86699fcda465b1ae0fb2b1585e6668c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Single cab, Double cab Club cab 1 1 2 TA001497 </details> <h1 id="single-cab-double-cab-2">Single cab, Double cab</h1> <p>1- Wheel nut wrench</p> <h1 id="club-cab-3">Club cab</h1> <p>1- Tool bag <br /> 2- Wheel nut wrench</p> <h1 id="type-2-5">Type 2</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/3d9b21666c60b05a6ffb7b31ec755a0ac24b46760d7699f298eb0e9db5867073.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 4 5 AA0052335 </details> <h1 id="single-cab-club-cab-double-cab">Single cab, Club cab, Double cab</h1> <p>1- Tool bag <br /> 2- Wheel nut wrench <br /> 3- Plier<br /> 4- Driver <br /> 5- Spanner</p> <h1 id="removing-and-storing-the-tools-jack-and-jack-handle">Removing and storing the tools, jack and jack handle</h1> <p>E00802300240</p> <h1 id="single-cab-2">Single cab</h1> <p>The tools, jack, and jack handle are located behind the seat.</p> <ol> <li>Tip the seatback forward.</li> </ol> <p>(Refer to "Folding the seatback forward" on page 4-06.)</p> <ol> <li><Type 1></li> </ol> <p>Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from the holder (B), and take out the wrench. <Type 2></p> <p>Remove the securing band (C), and then take out the tools (D).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e02e14e5ba0473dd9d6defd519f658028e5b9e61b13852ecdd8ab67cff270fdf.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B C D AA0051895 </details> <p>Tools, jack and jack handle</p> <ol> <li>Remove the securing nut (E), and then take out the jack (F).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/68ac2eb819e2a1a31e76d78fbd2a56268210371dee35242bc1f0dfd42359031c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts E and F, showing a circular inset view of a component with rotational motion. </details> <ol> <li>Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder (H), and take out the handle.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/fc0304022b45d9f446e876cd2ad540f2fe625a3efe9304378bf5a54bd4a387aa.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> G H TA0020915 </details> <ol> <li>Reverse the removing procedure when storing the tool, jack and jack handle.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/4157fbda459b7b2552dd3416b0b11a13c99ea9cd7d3da97c35fc46687ec82d02.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-380">NOTE</h1> <p>- When stowing the jack handle, align the black-marked part (I) of the jack handle with the holder (J).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/13eeeab1b8f1626732139414199fc1b0cce4ec5364cfabc46554f05e8c8fa524.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and an inset magnified view of a component. </details> <h1 id="club-cab-4">Club cab</h1> <p>The tools, jack, and jack handle are stored under the floor on the left-hand side of the cargo space.</p> <ol> <li>Raise the left side seat cushion. Refer to "Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab)" on page 4-08.</li> </ol> <p>Tip the seatback of the driver seat forward. Slide the driver seat forward.</p> <ol> <li>Open the lid.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/4a014913d3b233421882205d62312becd68ca9a39bf2257001355cac4cc6e53b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Simple line drawing of a door handle with an arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>Remove the securing band (A), and then take out the tools (B).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/22854ef6989b87f98508228b8be5ea339d415e0e8c601afec03ddc9846b95001.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts A and B, including a magnified inset view of a component. </details> <p>Tools, jack and jack handle</p> <ol> <li>Remove the securing nut (C), and then take out the jack (D).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/4176ac179c75b0d544cffcc93b35934f6fdb57a34580dc0648670c697692abdc.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> C D TA6014213 </details> <ol> <li>Remove the jack handle (E) from the holder (F), and then take out the jack handle.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/1e8f61cbcddb889e8e768ce5c006f4c2549c556ee6468712e13702fe28f59e69.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> E F TA0014226 </details> <ol> <li>Reverse the removing procedure when storing the tools, jack and jack handle.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/ba4188c3cc2643cb807ce5210226e79e17be2238d49d9e43be448ef14b02363d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-381">NOTE</h1> <p>- When stowing the jack handle, align the coloured marking on the jack handle with that on the holder, and fit the jack in the holder.</p> <h1 id="double-cab-2">Double cab</h1> <h1 id="except-for-vehicles-with-rear-retractable-power-window">Except for vehicles with rear retractable power window</h1> <p>The tool (wheel nut wrench only), jack, and jack handle are located behind the rear seat.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Tip the seatback of the rear seat forward. (Refer to "Folding the seatback forward" on page 4-08.)</p> </li> <li> <p><Type 1> Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from the holder (B), and take out the wrench. <Type 2></p> </li> </ol> <p>Remove the securing band (C), and then take out the tools (D).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6021bb944dadc9b6ffdcd02b06b5ba38c74d549310014b7a8904c6cb8473fe10.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B C D AA0051989 </details> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <ol> <li>Remove the securing nut (E), and then take out the jack (F).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/99f96754b4f6be418430799faee366d98a9818dc72e146e427664a414fb09649.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> F E TA0026902 </details> <ol> <li>Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder (H), and take out the handle.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/40ad680d7166e1c13c811020de1bee8f9f329389a546cb0897530e07c6bf8658.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> G H TA0020915 </details> <ol> <li>Reverse the removing procedure when storing the tool, jack and jack handle.</li> </ol> <p>For emergencies</p> <p>Tools, jack and jack handle</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/40b7a07fcb630f68e9d20450557bec0ee0d4d6a43bbd3a95b1bd54c3e77d402e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-382">NOTE</h1> <p>- When stowing the jack handle, align the black-marked part (I) of the jack handle with the holder (H).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/9828838bf3fd74fc60cd9eacdec7ffcc810566eb81e40ec5eddde203da899ae5.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> H I TA0020928 </details> <h1 id="vehicles-with-rear-retractable-power-window">Vehicles with rear retractable power window</h1> <p>The tools, jack, and jack handle are located behind the rear seat.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Tip the seatback of the rear seat forward. (Refer to "Folding the seatback forward" on page 4-08.)</p> </li> <li> <p><Type 1></p> </li> </ol> <p>Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from the holder of the back panel (B), and take out the wrench.</p> <p><Type 2></p> <p>Take out the tools (C) from the rear back trim (D).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/9b11a51989abe88179bc753d9a352b757f17fc897a388dab2761d0bca940fc28.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B C D AA0051912 </details> <ol> <li>Remove the securing nut (E), and then take out the jack (F).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/d168ebccb524ccd8aebf652593e8264c6b949c8c76878b7bbc8485286315368f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> F E TA0020602 </details> <ol> <li>Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder of the back panel (H), and take out the handle.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/a629883d53793777802904696d1c3e0361d650af11e51ac000edbba9d75e12d4.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> H G TA0020696 </details> <ol> <li>Reverse the removing procedure when storing the tool, jack and jack handle.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/9abbfa8287dad1e156c23c3963c77b6673929b934adf5a11dc766c53c6f5b9fa.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-383">NOTE</h1> <p>- When stowing the wheel nut wrench, insert it into the holder on the back panel as illustrated.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ebfc166048a1f77b67af66313f03a86edc7bb2ee2433b13b296500e8282e88c1.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols </details> <h1 id="to-use-the-jack-handle-club-cab-double-cab-with-rear-retractable-power-window-only">To use the jack handle (Club cab, Double cab with rear retractable power window only)</h1> <p>L00802400124</p> <ol> <li>While pressing the snap pin (A) on the handle that has a black marking, withdraw and remove the inner handle (B).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/f1a72803ec481998cdb3bc68c07ce79f8dd48d59ac945b6ba4fcf12546f9ab0a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AA0070914 </details> <ol> <li>Reverse the inner handle (B) then, while pressing the snap pin (C), insert it into</li> </ol> <p>the outer handle (D) until it is locked by snap pin as illustrated.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/84e513c694fa188a8176a49b945fc8f627e4155b58c3872af1cf453542e4c62f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A0070F82 C D B C </details> <ol> <li>While pressing the snap pin (F) on the assembled handle (E), insert the white-marked handle (G) until it is locked by snap pin as illustrated.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/3ef2e4c125ff7a005a7e9dfbb025f76475daa181e90a0689b6bb4af29df31fcb.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> E F G F AA8070995 </details> <h1 id="jacking-up-the-vehicle">Jacking up the vehicle</h1> <p>E00801D02606</p> <ol> <li>Park the vehicle on level and stable ground. </li> <li>Set the parking brake firmly. </li> <li>On vehicles with manual transmission, turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position, move the gearshift lever to the "R" (Reverse) position.</li> </ol> <p>On vehicles with automatic transmission, move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position, turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position.</p> <ol> <li>Turn on the hazard warning flashers and set up a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from the vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle. </li> <li>To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally opposite from the tyre (B) you are changing.</li> </ol> <p>Jacking up the vehicle</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5de97848a22e4d915d66b4c710dbf9fcbaf407ca4a2fc3340b30063fae5cb85a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AA00X3885 </details> <h1 id="warning-104">WARNING</h1> <p>- Be sure to apply checks or blocks to the correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position, leading to an accident.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2ba0be812ea8c75d09d604246d7e1411ddbf38e29ce04f5a4e2b592e2f1d93e4.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-384">NOTE</h1> <p>● The chocks shown in the illustration do not come with your vehicle. It is recommended that you keep one in the vehicle for use if needed. <br /> - If chocks are not available, use stones or any other objects that are large enough to hold the wheel in position.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Get the spare wheel, jack and jack handle ready.</p> </li> <li> <p>Place the jack under one of the jacking points shown in the illustration. Use the jacking point closest to the tyre you wish to change.</p> </li> </ol> <p>2WD vehicles with 15 inch wheels <br /> <img alt="" src="images/fb90af0e147fb4c363c44bc8c76e4373491c3a5125e2f72296a36f3f46e3a653.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a lever and guide (no text or symbols) </details> <p>C- Front jacking point (2WD vehicles with 15 inch wheels)</p> <p>2WD vehicles with 16 inch wheels and 4WD vehicles</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/76e1eba4950b52561cea46a504134963fed2de4830672d417093f58ef5159cc0.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a lever and mounting bracket (no text or symbols) </details> <p>D- Front jacking point (2WD vehicles 16 inch wheels and 4WD vehicles)</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a7b99410e5195315c825b4b27c7c38c1b69e76c5db9d8486172b7d92f122ddc0.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> E E AA0046608 </details> <p>E- Rear jacking point</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/cdfb72148bc840211ccd788dfc06f34dcbe5054909b5e70ec356824ed6515144.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-105">WARNING</h1> <ul> <li>Set the jack only at the positions shown here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, it could dent your vehicle or the jack might fall over and cause personal injury. </li> <li>Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, make sure there are no sand or pebbles under the jack base.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/5089f3a844c5194529541334fea7c27d8db1192e334ab3217ad29d2fffe9a0d2.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-385">NOTE</h1> <p>- When jacking up the rear of the vehicle, turn the tip of the jack so that the grooved portion (F) properly meets the designated point.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6a476d0c8f82aec9742a9cfbb4c215ef992cf2cb02b396ffc1d96de7aeb31b1d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> F AIZ101094 </details> <h1 id="to-raise-the-vehicle">To raise the vehicle</h1> <ol> <li>Using the jack handle, turn the release valve (G) clockwise until it stops.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/2570b1bec0681d4c39c56315e867ded6107178bd6acca1b1eaacdb39e77efc25.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram showing a mechanical device with a magnified inset highlighting a component labeled 'G' and a circular annotation. </details> <ol> <li>Insert the jack handle in the bracket of the jack and hook the notch (H) on the jack handle end to the claw (I) of the bracket. </li> <li>Move the jack handle up and down to raise the ram until just before the jack contacts the jacking point of the vehicle. Ensure that the jack will properly contact the vehicle jacking point.</li> </ol> <p>Move the jack handle up and down to raise the vehicle.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ca686cad4d2db395a28efff3bb6d752cf1d050cfeeb036647cfc183abef02d7b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever and clamp mechanism with an inset close-up of the component (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/5aa2601121183d50b1ac9aff7e9bd46cb48832c15f1418308e9245754f6c91be.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-386">NOTE</h1> <p>● This jack is a 2 stage expansion type.</p> <h1 id="to-lower-the-vehicle">To lower the vehicle</h1> <ol> <li>Put the notch (J) provided on the jack handle end on the valve (K) of the jack.</li> </ol> <p>Jacking up the vehicle</p> <ol> <li>Using the jack handle, turn the release valve anticlockwise slowly to lower the ram and remove the jack.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/3bdc5e6131952c9927de95be89951fb8ef0750f426f7417669ee54a89f597cb0.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled components and a magnified inset view of a component detail. </details> <ol> <li>Press the piston down all the way, and turn the release valve clockwise as far as possible. </li> <li>Store jack, jack handle and chocks.</li> </ol> <h1 id="warning-106">WARNING</h1> <p>- Be sure to open the release valve slowly. If it is opened quickly, the vehicle will drop abruptly and the jack may come out of position, causing a serious accident.</p> <h1 id="caution-140">CAUTION</h1> <p>- If the release valve is loosened too much (2 or more turns) in the anticlockwise direction, the jack's oil will leak and the jack cannot be used.</p> <h1 id="caution-141">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Close the release valve slowly when lowering the vehicle, or the valve may be damaged.</p> <h1 id="note-387">NOTE</h1> <p>- Occasionally when the vehicle is jacked up, the grooved portion of the designated point will not come off. When this happens, rock the vehicle to lower the ram. - If the jack is difficult to remove by hand, insert the jack handle (L) into the bracket (M). Then using the handle, remove the jack.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c9163136259ac2db38e8550d993556723e86d7ada4195f4455530a03955c635c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> L M AJZ101108 </details> <h1 id="warning-107">WARNING</h1> <p>- Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the tyre is raised off the ground. It is dangerous to raise the vehicle any higher.</p> <h1 id="warning-108">WARNING</h1> <ul> <li>Do not get under your vehicle while using the jack. </li> <li>Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it sitting on the jack for a long time. Both are very dangerous. </li> <li>Do not use a jack except the one that came with your vehicle. <br /> ● The jack should not be used for any purpose other than to change a tyre. <br /> ● No one should be in your vehicle when using the jack. </li> <li>Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is on the jack. </li> <li>Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres still on the ground could turn and make your vehicle fall off the jack.</li> </ul> <h1 id="spare-wheel">Spare wheel</h1> <p>100801100094</p> <p>The spare wheel is stored under the floor of the cargo bed.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a5a7da57988e09f21e509bde75b59a22f8e5843f7b5a737bc1480fd489d17191.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a pickup truck rear bumper with labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond label) </details> <p>A- Spare wheel</p> <h1 id="caution-142">CAUTION</h1> <p>- When removing the spare wheel, put on gloves. Removing the spare wheel with your bare hands may cause injury to the fingers.</p> <h1 id="caution-143">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Check the air pressure of the spare wheel frequently and make sure it is ready for emergency use at any time.</p> <p>Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure can lead to an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an insufficient tyre pressure, keep your speed down and inflate the tyre to the correct pressure as soon as possible. (Refer to "Tyre inflation pressures" on page 10-12.)</p> <p>Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest specified air pressure will ensure that it can always be used under any conditions (city/high-speed driving, varying load weight, etc.).</p> <h1 id="to-remove-6">To remove</h1> <ol> <li>Set the jack handle. (Club cab, Double cab with rear retractable power window only)</li> </ol> <p>(Refer to "To use the jack handle" on page 8-13.)</p> <ol> <li>Insert the jack handle (A) in the hole (B) below the rear gate.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/4c8a5ba6ad3cc88072428ef6801c2b7b04e6f21fb247b6886b0ab04faabdbbb3.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AA0043825 </details> <ol> <li>Securely insert the pin (C) on the jack handle into the holder (D) of the spare wheel carrier.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/c9d24aab54f9c60db69d1bc29f01ef5fbf0463a696ab46e025fafdeba002b048.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> C D AA0042912 </details> <h1 id="how-to-change-a-tyre">How to change a tyre</h1> <ol> <li>Insert the wheel nut wrench (E) through the end of the jack handle hole (F), and then turn it anticlockwise to lower the spare wheel completely to the ground and to slack the chain.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/59fe4ced7bf971af8ed8cc77cd4ec2de390801bdb1bc7e9ce0e936f766981f14.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> F E AA0041838 </details> <ol> <li>Remove the hanger disc (G) from the spare wheel.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/0bee7af7a3ca64e91db37c4add9b5e474fb34ff97d5c759e8eae7f250e74232e.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> G AA0043232 </details> <h1 id="to-install-4">To install</h1> <ol> <li>Install the hanger disc (A) in the wheel disc hole.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/d04135c07bd42f329d3173abc0b15d641e1ca7ce80150b67f1fa11bf21e6238b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Diagram of a mechanical component with a downward arrow, surrounded by concentric circles (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>Turn the wheel nut wrench (B) clockwise to wind up the chain.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/bac69915c1eac5071ef2bc8440d35eaad1874452e0a7c00f05fca93a621cac27.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> B AM0045861 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/fb8d256269378632d0067ca2c1b5e81ea16950749f6c5832d87078c523c19231.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-388">NOTE</h1> <p>- Confirm that the hanger disc is securely fitted in the wheel disc hole when the wheel is just lifted off the ground.</p> <ol> <li>After winding up the spare wheel sufficiently, make sure it is not loose (the tightening torque should be approximately 40 Nm) then withdraw the jack handle, taking care not to turn it in the reverse direction.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/f98015aa1882f3f29e3080f58205f0957199a94afefca430df985cbfa0712214.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-144">CAUTION</h1> <p>● The spare wheel should always be securely in position. If a flat tyre is changed, put the flat tyre in the spare wheel mounting position with the wheel outer surface upward, and use the wheel nut wrench to secure it firmly.</p> <h1 id="how-to-change-a-tyre-2">How to change a tyre</h1> <p>E00801202653</p> <p>Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in a safe, flat location.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.</p> </li> <li> <p>Set the parking brake firmly.</p> </li> </ol> <p>How to change a tyre</p> <ol> <li>On vehicles with manual transmission, turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position, move the gearshift lever to the "R" (Reverse) position. On vehicles with automatic transmission, move the selector lever to the "(PARK) position, turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position. </li> <li>Turn on the hazard warning flashers and set up a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from the vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle. </li> <li>To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally opposite from the tyre (B) you are changing.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/b9841f9030b7c95c93eb2598021e982e809a7506252b9a44450674981d49415a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AA0083885 </details> <h1 id="warning-109">WARNING</h1> <p>- Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position, leading to an accident.</p> <h1 id="note-389">NOTE</h1> <p>- The chocks shown in the illustration do not come with your vehicle. It is recommended that you keep one in the vehicle for use if needed. - If chocks are not available, use stones or any other objects that are large enough to hold the wheel in position.</p> <ol> <li>Get the spare wheel, jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench ready.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/fa9dae6279011918ca02660a52838d588a68aa816b5255fed414fb58b4e0cf3a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Simple line drawing of a mechanical component with two circular parts connected by a string (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="note-390">NOTE</h1> <p>● Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body near the flat tyre. This makes it safer if the jack slips out of position.</p> <ol> <li>Loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/a1fd70a03503aef33e0898470a2caf9a3f7fbb5f5cd6cd7e0d246e37c6ef7f2e.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Five wheel nuts ① ④ ③ ② ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑦ AA0042570 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/85b556b651c7b8c4ab3551c955352ffa73ae298f37a118b30e2d6fd2cdde76c0.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Six wheel nuts ① ③ ⑥ ⑤ ④ ② ⑦ ⑥ ⑦ ⑭ AA0042583 </details> <h1 id="how-to-change-a-tyre-3">How to change a tyre</h1> <ol> <li>Find the closest jacking point to the flat tyre (refer to "Jacking up the vehicle" on page 8-13). Then position the jack and raise the vehicle until the tyre is slightly off the ground. </li> <li>Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench, then take the wheel off.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/69e7e303671efbd18b8ee0e1e36e98f89ba08de3d1be0d732ca53a611a3de6bf.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-145">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Handle the wheel carefully when changing the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheel surface. <br /> 10. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface (C), hub bolts (D) or in the installation holes (E) in the wheel, and then mount the spare wheel.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5def9b7e401644ed36eaea0260719e5e4cdace0b77c9fd2110772409fb0b56f1.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> C D E AA0050423 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/8d156baf98b3af12cad3d51aa77bc350e8eca2a9088a81dc281822dc6660217d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-110">WARNING</h1> <p>- Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem (F) facing outboard. If you cannot see the valve stem (F), you have installed the wheel backwards. Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel installed backwards can cause vehicle damage and result in an accident.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f073b07dcea827d0936211d43f0e6499a1dbf7b1cd86b67443d730729b472eb8.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram showing hands operating a car tire with labeled components F and R </details> <ol> <li>Finger-tighten the wheel nuts. (Turn them clockwise.)</li> </ol> <h1 id="vehicles-with-steel-wheels">Vehicles with steel wheels</h1> <p>Tighten the wheel nuts (tapered nuts) until the tapered parts of the wheel nuts make light contact with the seats of the wheel holes and the wheel is not loose. With a spare wheel, tighten the wheel nuts in the same way.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/0987ef5039dccb70625fe888c4cf22417715f4e20b78c9c20122f64888ca949b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram showing a car tire assembly with a close-up view of the component being installed, labeled AA0050449. </details> <h1 id="vehicles-with-aluminium-wheels">Vehicles with aluminium wheels</h1> <p>Tighten the wheel nuts (flange nuts) until the flanges of the wheel nuts touch the wheel and the wheel is not loose.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/1cf7bc1a8366ef56ea8bef25bfbb6549c5a7d048121c45eaab909faf32056ed2.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Normal wheels and spare wheel (aluminium wheels) AA0042596 </details> <p>With a spare wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered parts of the wheel nuts make light contact with the seats of the wheel holes and the wheel is not loose.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5bd947b0068c4662f1a22527a8d012d2f229ba38dba5c1c34bf3832801059ec5.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Spare wheel (steel wheels) AA0042600 </details> <h1 id="caution-146">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or the nuts, or they will tighten too much.</p> <h1 id="note-391">NOTE</h1> <p>● Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the spare wheel, but return to the original wheel and tyre as soon as possible. <br /> - If all four aluminium wheels are changed to steel wheels, use tapered nuts.</p> <ol> <li>Lower the vehicle slowly and then tighten the nuts crisscross in 2 or 3 steps until each nut has been tightened securely.</li> </ol> <p>Tightening torque</p> <p>Steel wheel: 137 to 157 Nm</p> <p>Aluminium wheel: 118 to 137 Nm</p> <p>(Achieved by applying a force at the end of the wheel nut wrench supplied with the vehicle.</p> <p>Steel wheel: 510 to 580 N</p> <p>Aluminium wheel: 440 to 500 N)</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/60bd48a63ea8e68a4d82de154e654bfbbc0de44003a5a006299238178e49997b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Five wheel nuts ① ④ ③ ② ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ AA0042626 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/e78de6575490dbbe997bf50818d20e449d3b861c22fab852e86a412609a6c95a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Six wheel nuts ① ③ ⑥ ⑤ ④ ② ⑤ ⑥ ⑤ ④ AA0043258 </details> <h1 id="caution-147">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Never use your foot or a pipe extension for extra force in the wheel nut wrench. If you do so, you will tighten the nut too much.</p> <ol> <li> <p>Lower and remove the jack, then store the jack, jack handle, wheel nut wrench, flat tyre, and chocks. Have your damaged tyre repaired as soon as possible.</p> </li> <li> <p>Check your tyre inflation pressure. The correct pressures are shown on the door label. See the illustration.</p> </li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/5e61935d870eebed97268035f5cf02a38ee951a465193211d0bf0f406f49a21a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Interior view of a car showing the door, seat, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="caution-148">CAUTION</h1> <p>● The tyre pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure while the tyre is stowed. <br /> ● After changing the tyre and driving the vehicle about 1,000 km (620 miles), retighten the wheel nuts to make sure that they have not come loose. <br /> - If the steering wheel vibrates when driving after changing the tyre, we recommend you to have the tyres checked for balance.</p> <p>Towing</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/3c3de396415ea4068cf38ba6cdd45fff75625d1888f11a1b97163e8dabff03eb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-149">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Do not mix one type of tyre with another or use a different size from the one listed. This would cause early wear and poor handling.</p> <h1 id="towing-2">Towing</h1> <p>E00801505107</p> <h1 id="if-your-vehicle-needs-to-be-tow-ed">If your vehicle needs to be tow-ed</h1> <p>If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service.</p> <p>In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a tow truck.</p> <p>- The engine runs but the vehicle does not move or abnormal noise is produced. - Inspection of the vehicle's underside reveals that oil or some other fluid is leaking.</p> <p>If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to tow the vehicle. Please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.</p> <p>Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in "Emergency towing" in this part.</p> <p>The regulations concerning towing may differ from country to country. It is recommended that you obey the regulations of the area where you are driving your vehicle.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5e52483bb4fe7b0ce6aa823e895b142659cd040da03eecd83318cc1f6fc37cee.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B C D E AA2001100 </details> <h1 id="towing-the-vehicle-by-a-tow-truck">Towing the vehicle by a tow truck</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/2d3f160ce6e7dca54ae2760f6cfbe35e10874810dfe75aec79f3bf67c981447f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-150">CAUTION</h1> <p>● This vehicle must not be towed by a tow truck using sling lift type equipment (Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will damage the bumper and front end. <br /> - On 4WD vehicles, be sure to shift the transfer shift lever to "2H" position and transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated. Never try to tow with the transfer shift lever in "4H" or "4L" position (easy select 4WD), "4H", "4HLc" or "4LLc" position (super select 4WD) and with the front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B or C) as illustrated. This could result in driving system damage or the vehicle may jump at the carriage. If you cannot shift the transfer shift lever to the "2H" position or the transmission is malfunctioning or damaged, transport the vehicle with all wheels on a carriage (Type D or E) as illustrated. <br /> - If your vehicle equipped with the Active Stability & Traction Control system (ASTC), if the vehicle is towed with the ignition switch in the "ON" position and only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, the active Traction Control System may operate, resulting in an accident.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a0821936583017662d779d19142f9fea594312793797803c1c8445a83d9c807d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-151">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>On 2WD vehicles, if the transmission is malfunctioning or damaged, transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated. </li> <li>If you tow a vehicle with automatic transmission with the driving wheels on the ground (Type B) as illustrated, make sure that the towing speed and distance given below are never exceeded, causing damage to the transmission.</li> </ul> <p>Towing speed: 50 km/h (30 mph) Towing distance: 50 km (30 miles)</p> <p>For the towing speed and the towing distance, follow the local driving laws and regulations.</p> <h1 id="towing-with-front-wheels-off-the-ground-type-b">Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type B)</h1> <p>Place the gearshift lever in the "N" (Neutral) position (manual transmission) or the selector lever in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmission). Release the parking brake.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/aab2b715f82eadcc6421dedb574445e87239875711c443bde8a786bb60e1b434.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-152">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Never tow an automatic transmission vehicle with the front wheels up (and the rear wheels on the ground) (Type B) when the automatic transmission fluid level is low. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.</p> <h1 id="towing-with-rear-wheels-off-the-ground-type-c">Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type C)</h1> <p>Place the gearshift lever in the "N" (Neutral) position (manual transmission) or the selector lever in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmission). Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or tic-down strap. Never place the ignition switch in the "LOCK" position when towing.</p> <h1 id="emergency-towing">Emergency towing</h1> <p>If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the towing hook.</p> <p>If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle, pay careful attention to the following points.</p> <h1 id="if-your-vehicle-is-to-be-towed-by-another-vehicle">If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle</h1> <ol> <li>The front towing hooks (A) and rear towing hook (B) are located as shown in the illustration. Secure the tow rope to the towing hook.</li> </ol> <p>Front (2WD vehicles with 15 inch wheels)</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/55be098acf505c0d37e621be0120738b94bff32341e8369b2b2cbd0ac8bdf6db.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A A AA0091985 </details> <h1 id="towing-3">Towing</h1> <p>Front (2WD vehicles with 16 inch wheels and 4WD vehicles) <br /> <img alt="" src="images/f4d142b05838bb115140eee1e9b009cdda90ecd012a10744cf8eb5ca6492b46f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a car's front bumper with two labeled points A, showing no text or symbols beyond labels </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/72da0e094572b384a8d45b3f044d10a79504f04756ec3cf36e75f039d48b52da.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Rear* B AA0056382 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/381ca79ac2902f291eb33464281d79a249c02e9742a515b177f43c39c0afa89d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-392">NOTE</h1> <p>● Using any part other than the designated towing hooks could result in damage to the vehicle body.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2c6530d5f0aee2faf41f46425ddb70513758c4812549984fc6c405806e180c9d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-393">NOTE</h1> <p>● Using a wire rope or metal chain can result in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any point where it touches the vehicle body. <br /> ● Take care that the tow rope is kept as horizontal as possible. An angled tow rope can damage the vehicle body. <br /> - Secure the tow rope to the same side towing hook, to keep the tow rope as straight as possible.</p> <ol> <li>Keep the engine running.</li> </ol> <p>If the engine is not running, turn the ignition key to the "ACC" or "ON" position to unlock the steering wheel.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/93be893269ed0f83321f823de0f523de36afaf0fb81fa3427b7bfe68ecf5bf6a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-153">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>When the engine is not running, the brake booster and power steering pump do not operate. This means higher brake depression force and higher steering effort are required. Therefore, vehicle operation is more difficult than usual. </li> <li> <p>Do not leave the key in the "LOCK" position. The steering wheel will lock, causing loss of control.</p> </li> <li> <p>Place the gearshift lever in the "N" (Neutral) position (manual transmission) or the selector lever in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmission). </p> </li> <li>On 4WD vehicles, the transfer shift lever to "2H" position. </li> <li>Turn on the hazard warning lamps if required by law. (Follow the local driving laws and regulations.) </li> <li>During towing make sure that close contact is maintained between the drivers of both vehicles, and that the vehicles travel at low speed.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/4935df19dc30c4f96e86b80380b494bcef185433836d4a44eee6e4df155bc1b2.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-111">WARNING</h1> <p>● To prevent entry of exhaust gas from the towing vehicle, set your air selection lever to the recirculation position.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7b8341e1093a4d3bf8b317b97b214c3fd56118a5c506e07f2e4da9d4416de5c3.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-154">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration and sharp turning; such operation could cause damage to the towing hooks or the tow rope. <br /> People in the vicinity could be injured as a result. <br /> - When towing or being towed down a long slope, the brakes may overheat reducing the effectiveness. In this situation, have your vehicle transported by a tow truck.</p> <p>Operation under adverse driving conditions</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6de0b16e00e1161add219525cf5da7e8024833efb53abc838bba722aaa66ef01.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-155">CAUTION</h1> <p>- When the vehicle with automatic transmission is to be towed by another vehicle with all the wheels on the ground, make sure that the towing speed and distance given below are never exceeded, causing damage to the transmission.</p> <p>Towing speed: 50 km/h (30 mph) Towing distance: 50 km (30 miles)</p> <p>For the towing speed and the towing distance, follow the local driving laws and regulations.</p> <h1 id="if-your-vehicle-tows-another-vehicle-vehicles-with-rear-towing-hook-only">If your vehicle tows another vehicle (vehicles with rear towing hook only)</h1> <p>The rear towing hook is located as shown in the illustration. Secure the tow rope to the rear towing hook.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d00bcdf29be40e99e817d38e5dc25cc863dabaf0c87cdfeca616df7301df06d1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-394">NOTE</h1> <p>● Using any part other than the designated towing hook could result in damage to the vehicle body.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b57c293fffdf74c6d2d5651ed696dc9c50ce718fb59b588d8226d744d12c32d6.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a car seatbelt mechanism with a black arrow indicating the grip (no text or symbols present) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/612a88b1c84711707b7c9bb51b53b9f4cba3ccdda99b88dc53e7adac64e7a5ba.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-156">CAUTION</h1> <p>- On vehicles with super select 4WD, when you are going to tow another vehicle, move the transfer shift lever to "4H" position. Selecting "2H" drive may increase the differential oil temperature, resulting in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious faults.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/822a379bae3f2619f9c94c3ce41af4cb35a1550aec78826c1b4e269d855b633e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-395">NOTE</h1> <p>- Your vehicle should only be used to tow another vehicle if the weight of the other vehicle is less than the weight of your vehicle.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/299b045a1b1b01a29278aff4199b477e8695021e297d84485aff7dd36f9f7e51.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-396">NOTE</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/a559b43cb1ba935c4187ed15762b52f7cfabb9b3fe484b06cfd54567d746073b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> AJZ101124 </details> <h1 id="operation-under-adverse-driving-conditions">Operation under adverse driving conditions</h1> <p>E00801702762</p> <h1 id="if-your-vehicle-becomes-stuck-in-sand-mud-or-snow">If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or snow</h1> <p>If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often be moved with a rocking motion. Move the selector lever alternately between the Sport Mode and "R" (RE-VERSE) position (with manual transmission, between 1 ^st and Reverse), while applying slight pressure to the accelerator pedal.</p> <p>Avoid racing the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transmission failure. Allow the engine to idle for a few minutes to let the transmission cool between rocking attempts.</p> <p>If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, seek other assistance.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/bb0096298e00a93c04293ec9af9527b410ae3db225dbf9cb7902ee657f495cb0.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-112">WARNING</h1> <p>- When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that the area around the vehicle is clear of people and physical objects. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly launch forward or backward, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.</p> <p>On 2WD vehicles, it is recommended to start the vehicle with parking brake partially, but not completely, applied by slightly pulling the parking brake lever.</p> <p>After the vehicle has become free, do not forget to release the parking brake.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/21cc8219092b8f6960e9c9473a72f55970bc0e3353d10122455372a65b9a3767.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-397">NOTE</h1> <p>● Depress the accelerator pedal gradually when starting the vehicle.</p> <h1 id="on-a-flooded-road">On a flooded road</h1> <ul> <li>Avoid flooded roads. Water could enter the brake discs, resulting in temporarily ineffective brakes. In such cases, lightly depress the brake pedal to see if the brakes operate properly. If they do not, lightly depress the pedal several times while driving in order to dry the brake pads. </li> <li>When driving in rain or on a road with many puddles a layer of water may form between the tyres and the road surface. This reduces a tyre's frictional resistance on the road, resulting in loss of steering stability and braking capability.</li> </ul> <p>To cope with this, observe the following items:</p> <p>(a) Drive your vehicle at slow speed. <br /> (b) Do not drive on worn tyres. Always maintain the specified tyre inflation pressures.</p> <h1 id="on-a-snow-covered-or-frozen-road">On a snow-covered or frozen road</h1> <ul> <li>When driving on a snow-covered or frozen road, it is recommended that you use snow tyres or tyre chains. Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Tyre chains” sections. </li> <li>Avoid high-speed operation, sudden acceleration, abrupt brake application and sharp cornering. </li> <li>Depressing the brake pedal during travel on snowy or icy roads may cause tyre slippage and skidding. When traction between the tyres and the road is reduced the wheels may skid and the vehicle cannot readily be brought to a stop by conventional braking techniques. Braking will differ, depending upon whether you have anti-lock brake system (ABS). If you do have ABS, brake by pressing the brake system pedal hard, and keeping it pressed. If you do not have ABS, pump the brake pedal with short rapid jabs, each time fully applying and fully releasing for greatest effect. </li> <li>Allow extra distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sudden braking.</li> </ul> <p>● Accumulation of ice on the braking system can cause the wheels to lock. Pull away from a standstill slowly after confirming safety around the vehicle.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8a62cc593ed8c0283e9d6a6383073bd0ffb0b4db272007f3af570d3611bc8226.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-157">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Do not press the accelerator pedal rapidly. If the wheels break free of the ice, the vehicle could suddenly start moving and possibly cause an accident.</p> <h1 id="on-a-bumpy-or-rutted-road">On a bumpy or rutted road</h1> <p>● Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy or rutted roads.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/966d183a36f0b18c650e1c33b9b34811dae896910fae7db9668a971a1437314f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-158">CAUTION</h1> <p>● The impact on tyres and/or wheels when driving on a bumpy or rutted road can damage the tyre and/or wheel.</p> <h1 id="vehicle-care">Vehicle care</h1> <p>Vehicle care precautions....9-02</p> <p>Cleaning the interior of your vehicle....9-02</p> <p>Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle....9-03</p> <h1 id="vehicle-care-precautions">Vehicle care precautions</h1> <p>100900100870</p> <p>In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is necessary to perform regular maintenance using the proper procedures. Always maintain your vehicle in compliance with environmental pollution control regulations. Carefully select the materials used for washing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain corrosives. If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a specialist for selection of these materials.</p> <h1 id="9">9</h1> <h1 id="caution-159">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some are poisonous. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or drop them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything in a container to clean your vehicle, always follow the instructions and always open your vehicle doors or windows when you're cleaning the inside. Never use the following to clean your vehicle:</p> <ul> <li>Petrol </li> <li>Paint Thinner </li> <li>Benzine </li> <li>Kerosene </li> <li>Turpentine </li> <li>Naphtha </li> <li>Lacquer Thinner</li> </ul> <h1 id="caution-160">CAUTION</h1> <p>• Carbon Tetrachloride <br /> - Nail Polish Remover <br /> - Acetone</p> <p>● These are all dangerous, and can damage your vehicle.</p> <h1 id="cleaning-the-interior-of-your-vehicle">Cleaning the interior of your vehicle</h1> <p>F009002DD288</p> <p>After cleaning the interior of your vehicle with water, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in a shady, well-ventilated area.</p> <h1 id="caution-161">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not use organic substances (solvents, benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. <br /> These chemicals can cause discolouring, staining or cracking of the surface. <br /> If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.</li> </ul> <h1 id="note-398">NOTE</h1> <p>● Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.</p> <h1 id="plastic-vinyl-leather-fabric-and-flocked-parts">Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and flocked parts</h1> <p>E00900300377</p> <ol> <li>Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft cloth soaked with a 3 % aqueous solution of neutral detergent. </li> <li>Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly.</li> </ol> <h1 id="note-399">NOTE</h1> <p>- Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protectants containing silicons or wax. Such products, when applied to the instrument panels or other parts, may cause reflections on the windscreen and obscure vision. Also, if such products get on the switches of the electrical accessories, it may lead to failure of these accessories.</p> <h1 id="upholstery">Upholstery</h1> <p>E00900500018</p> <ol> <li>To maintain the value of your new vehicle, handle the upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean.</li> </ol> <p>Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leather should be cleaned with an appropriate cleaner, and cloth fabrics can be cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a 3 % solution of neutral detergent in lukewarm water.</p> <ol> <li>Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and remove any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dabbing with a clean colourfast cloth and stain remover.</li> </ol> <h1 id="genuine-leather">Genuine leather\*</h1> <p>E00900600817</p> <ol> <li>Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft cloth soaked with a 5 % aqueous solution of neutral detergent. </li> <li>Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly. </li> <li>Apply leather protecting agent to the genuine leather surface.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/ea01a5f5d7f0cf7c20a878eba487cf4b3a1b3e2185d88b2ed0640c26501796c4.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-400">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>If genuine leather is wet with water or is washed in water, wipe off water as quickly as possible with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew may grow. <br /> ● The genuine leather surface may be damaged if a nylon brush or synthetic fibre is rubbed hard against it. </li> <li>Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents may discolour the genuine leather surface. Be sure to use neutral detergents. </li> <li>Remove dirty patches or oil substances quickly as they can stain genuine leather.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/09fb2fb5889b44bbaee2fdf1cabe796f4b4ad22fec09264ab332f7eec04a2ef6.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-401">NOTE</h1> <p>● The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if it is exposed to direct sun for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it in the shade as much as possible. <br /> - When the temperature of the vehicle interior rises in summer, vinyl products left on the genuine leather seat may deteriorate and stick to the seat.</p> <h1 id="cleaning-the-exterior-of-your-vehicle">Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle</h1> <p>E00900700010</p> <p>If the following is left on your vehicle, it may cause corrosion, discolouration and stains, wash the vehicle as soon as possible.</p> <p>● Seawater, anti-freeze for road use. <br /> - Soot and dust, iron powder from factories, chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal-tar, etc.). <br /> - Droppings from birds, carcasses of insects, tree sap, etc.</p> <h1 id="washing">Washing</h1> <p>L00900902016</p> <p>Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up from the road surface can damage the paint coat and body of your vehicle if left in prolonged contact.</p> <p>Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your vehicle from this damage. This will also be effective in protecting it from environmental elements such as rain, snow, salt air, etc.</p> <p>Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to remove dust. Next, using an ample amount of clean water and a car washing brush or sponge, wash the vehicle from top to bottom.</p> <p>Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and flanges of the doors, bonnet, etc., where dirt is likely to remain.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a22d2eec50414ac6d168211a0bfbfb29ab40e6642aa52a3f731804c88e4ed20b.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-162">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>When washing the under side of your vehicle or wheel, be careful not to injure your hands. <br /> ● Refrain from using a car wash as its brushes may scratch the paint surface, causing it to lose its gloss. Scratches will be especially visible on darker coloured vehicles. <br /> ● Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the engine compartment, as this may adversely affect engine starting. Exercise caution also when washing the underbody; be careful not to spray water into the engine compartment.</li> </ul> <h1 id="caution-163">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Some types of hot water washing equipment apply high pressure and heat to the vehicle. They may cause heat distortion and damage to the vehicle resin parts and may result in flooding of the vehicle interior. Therefore; observe the following.</p> <ul> <li>Maintain a distance of approx. 50 cm or more between the vehicle body and the washing nozzle. </li> <li>When washing around the door glass, hold the nozzle at a distance of more than 50 cm and at right angles to the glass surface.</li> </ul> <p>● After washing the vehicle, drive the vehicle slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal several times in order to dry out the brakes.</p> <p>Leaving the brakes wet could result in reduced braking performance. Also, there is a possibility that they could freeze up or become inoperative due to rust, rendering the vehicle unable to move.</p> <p>- When using an automatic car wash, pay attention to the following items, referring to the operation manual or consulting a car wash operator. If the following procedure is not followed, it could result in damage to your vehicle.</p> <ul> <li>The outside mirrors are retracted. </li> <li>If your vehicle is equipped with the pillar antenna, it can be retracted. </li> <li>If your vehicle is equipped with the roof antenna, it can be removed.</li> </ul> <h1 id="during-cold-weather">During cold weather</h1> <p>Salt and other chemicals spread on the roads in some areas in winter can have a harmful effect on the vehicle body. You should therefore wash the vehicle as often as possible in accordance with our care-instructions. It is recommended to have a preservative applied and the underfloor protection checked before and after the cold weather season.</p> <p>After washing your vehicle, wipe off all waterdrops from the rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freezing.</p> <h1 id="note-402">NOTE</h1> <p>● To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be treated with silicone spray.</p> <h1 id="waxing">Waxing</h1> <p>E00901000687</p> <p>Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the adherence of dust and road chemicals to the paintwork. Apply a wax solution after washing the vehicle, or at least once every three months to assist displacing of water.</p> <p>Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You should wax after the surfaces have cooled.</p> <h1 id="caution-164">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should not be used. Such waxes remove rust and stains effectively from the paintwork but they are harmful to the lustre on the painted surface and the plated surface. Further, they are harmful to glossy surfaces such as grille, garnish, mouldings, etc. </li> <li>Do not use petrol or paint thinners to remove road tar or other contamination to the vehicle surface. </li> <li>Do not apply wax on the areas having black mat coating as it can cause uneven discolouration, patches, blurs, etc. If stained with wax, immediately wipe off with a piece of soft cloth and warm water. </li> <li>On vehicles with a sunroof, be careful when waxing the area around the sunroof opening, not to put any wax on the weatherstrip (black rubber). If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot maintain a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.</li> </ul> <h1 id="polishing">Polishing</h1> <p>E00901100011</p> <p>The vehicle should only be polished if the paintwork has become stained or lost its lustre. Matt-finish parts and plastic bumpers must not be polished, polishing these parts will stain them or damage their finish.</p> <h1 id="damaged-paint">Damaged paint</h1> <p>F(090120)15.5</p> <p>Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should be touched up as soon as possible with MITSUBISHI touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.</p> <p>Check body areas facing the road or the tyres carefully for damage to the paint coat caused by flying stones, etc. The paint code number for your vehicle can be found on the vehicle information code plate. (Refer to “Vehicle labeling” on page 11-02.)</p> <h1 id="cleaning-plastic-parts">Cleaning plastic parts</h1> <p>E00901300446</p> <p>Use a sponge or chamois leather.</p> <p>If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough surface of the bumper, moulding or lamps, the surface becomes white. In such a case, wipe it off using lukewarm water and soft cloth or chamois leather.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2f5b5b8ff6ad5dde202506e64e7744cd2d5c48eb2921ed33272ad36ce4f91eb1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-165">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not use a scrubbing brush or other hard tools as they may damage the plastic part surface. </li> <li>Do not use wax containing compound (polishing powder) which may damage the plastic part surface.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/c762d07243d4f7e81329ce8f6d3acbcd2858b345fb53c846b3f49cc19f9ad5d7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-166">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not bring the plastic parts into contact with petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour the plastic parts. <br /> If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with water.</li> </ul> <h1 id="chrome-parts">Chrome parts</h1> <p>E00901400014</p> <p>In order to prevent spots and corrosion of chrome parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a special protective coating. This should be done more frequently in winter.</p> <h1 id="aluminium-wheels">Aluminium wheels\*</h1> <p>E00901500116</p> <ol> <li>Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinkling water on the vehicle. </li> <li>Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannot be removed easily with water. <br /> Rinse off the neutral detergent after washing the vehicle. </li> <li>Dry the vehicle thoroughly using a chamois leather or a soft cloth.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/37b1c4052ea64be766916ce22d1363de65b51bc6bfee38eba58d60bd751d078a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-167">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not use a brush or other hard implement on the wheels. <br /> Doing so could scratch the wheels. </li> <li>Do not use any cleaner that contains an abrasive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could cause the coating on the wheels to peel or become discoloured or stained. </li> <li>Do not directly apply hot water using a steam cleaner or by any other means. </li> <li>Contact with seawater and road deicer can cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as possible.</li> </ul> <h1 id="window-glass">Window glass</h1> <p>E00901600058</p> <p>The window glass can normally be cleaned using only a sponge and water.</p> <p>Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, grease, dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. Never use the same cloth to wipe the window glass as would be used to wipe the paintwork; wax from the painted surfaces could adhere to the glass and reduce its transparency and visibility.</p> <p>Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/626ea5523203380e67964a7bef934d7eaa478aaa90ccb66f060921d47d677148.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-403">NOTE</h1> <p>● To clean the inside of the rear window, always use a soft cloth and wipe the window glass along the demister heater element so as not to cause damage.</p> <h1 id="wiper-blades">Wiper blades</h1> <p>E00901700017</p> <p>Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace the wiper blades when they no longer wipe properly. (Refer to page "Wiper blades" on page 10-17.)</p> <h1 id="cleaning-the-sunroof">Cleaning the sunroof\*</h1> <p>E00901800180</p> <p>Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral detergent solution. Wipe away the solution with a sponge dipped in fresh water.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/1e7db5338bd57575a5a4648e4f075289b15e65ae2c28bccc48c49a4fbdb4478d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-404">NOTE</h1> <p>● The surface treatment on the inside of the glass may be removed if hard cloth or organic solvent (benzine, kerosene, thinner, etc.) is used.</p> <h1 id="engine-compartment">Engine compartment</h1> <p>E00902100265</p> <p>Clean the engine compartment at the beginning and end of winter. Pay particular attention to flanges, crevices and peripheral parts where dust containing road chemicals and other corrosive materials might collect.</p> <p>If salt and other chemicals are used on the roads in your area, clean the engine compartment at least every three months.</p> <p>Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the engine compartment, as this may cause damage.</p> <p>Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts and so on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them.</p> <p>If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.</p> <h1 id="maintenance">Maintenance</h1> <p>Service precautions.... 10-02</p> <p>Catalytic converter.... 10-02</p> <p>Bonnet....10-03</p> <p>Engine oil.... 10-04</p> <p>Engine coolant....10-06</p> <p>Automatic transmission fluid*....10-07</p> <p>Washer fluid....10-08</p> <p>Brake fluid....10-08</p> <p>Clutch fluid* 10-09</p> <p>Power steering fluid.... 10-10</p> <p>Battery....10-10</p> <p>Tyres....10-12</p> <p>Clutch pedal free play* 10-16</p> <p>Brake pedal free play.... 10-17</p> <p>Parking brake lever stroke....10-17</p> <p>Wiper blades.... 10-17</p> <p>General maintenance....10-19</p> <p>For cold and snowy weather.... 10-20</p> <p>Fusible links.... 10-20</p> <p>Fuses....10-20</p> <p>Replacement of lamp bulbs....10-25</p> <h1 id="service-precautions">Service precautions</h1> <p>E01000100706</p> <p>Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervals serves to preserve the value and appearance as long as possible.</p> <p>Maintenance items as described in this owner's manual can be performed by the owner.</p> <p>We recommend you to have the periodic inspection and maintenance performed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another specialist.</p> <p>In the event a malfunction or other problem is discovered, we recommend you to have it checked and repaired. This section contains information on inspection maintenance procedures that you can do yourself. Follow the instructions and cautions for each of the various procedures.</p> <h1 id="warning-113">WARNING</h1> <ul> <li>When checking or servicing the inside of the engine compartment, make sure the engine is switched off and has had a chance to cool down. </li> <li>If it is necessary to do work in the engine compartment with the engine running, be especially careful that your clothing, hair, etc., does not become caught by the fans, drive belts, or other moving parts.</li> </ul> <h1 id="warning-114">WARNING</h1> <ul> <li>For vehicle with air conditioning, the fan may turn on automatically even if the engine is not running; turn the ignition key to "LOCK" position and remove the key to ensure safety while you work in the engine compartment. </li> <li>Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or battery. The fumes are flammable. </li> <li>Be extremely cautious when working around the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulphuric acid. </li> <li>Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands. </li> <li>Improper handling of components and materials used in the vehicle can endanger your personal safety. We recommend you to consult a specialist for necessary information.</li> </ul> <h1 id="catalytic-converter">Catalytic converter</h1> <p>F01000200925</p> <p>For ordinary use, there are no particular precautions.</p> <p>The exhaust gas scavenging devices used with the catalytic converter are extremely efficient for the reduction of noxious gases. The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system.</p> <p>It is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.</p> <h1 id="caution-168">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of an engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. <br /> Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe overheated condition may result in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.</p> <h1 id="warning-115">WARNING</h1> <ul> <li>As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust since a fire could occur. <br /> ● Paint should not be applied to the catalytic converter.</li> </ul> <p>The catalytic converter itself gets hot quickly, and may be damaged if overheated. The following points should be noted in order to prevent the ignition of unburned fuel within the catalytic converter.</p> <ul> <li>Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out of fuel could cause damage to the catalytic converter. </li> <li>Do not switch OFF the ignition switch while driving. </li> <li>Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing the vehicle. If the battery is weak or discharged, use another battery to start the engine. </li> <li>Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. </li> <li>Do not race the engine when turning off the ignition switch. This will cause the catalytic converter to be damaged due to contact with unburnt fuel. </li> <li>Stop driving the vehicle if you think the performance is noticeably low, or if the engine has a malfunction such as with the ignition, etc.</li> </ul> <p>If it is impractical to stop driving immediately, reduce the speed and drive for only a short time. We recommend you to have your vehicle inspected as soon as possible.</p> <p>- In unusual situations involving major engine problems, a burnt smell may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating.</p> <p>If this occurs, the vehicle should be stopped in a safe place, the engine switched off and the vehicle allowed to cool. Once the engine is cool, a service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.</p> <h1 id="bonnet">Bonnet</h1> <p>E01000302281</p> <h1 id="to-open-3">To open</h1> <p>Pull the release lever towards you to unlock the bonnet.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e65334d7a17d770d5237448578250707387bbc81802508229a1674f078e66ecb.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> LHD AA0089281 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/26f62488cb361b699fa3b6e00d6825ffad680ee5452622b0ff8ad6ba44a910a9.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> RHD AAJ089294 </details> <p>Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety lock.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/fc529d11bdb5943fd66f1d6f2f2ff57d8d26fb32e65cc964f7a17eb38970ec0c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Diagram of a car showing engine components with directional arrows and a magnified inset highlighting internal components. </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/5d92a2daad82184f83e4e6d55748c50f901b23d5c20b0e192b8934fb46fd6a37.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-405">NOTE</h1> <p>- Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in the parked position. Failure to do so may cause damage to the bonnet, wiper arms or front windscreen.</p> <h1 id="engine-oil">Engine oil</h1> <p>Support the bonnet by inserting the support bar in its slot.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/9d0169e9a153ef0c9a215cad9c5c0b4fd7aa3b10c7527ae9b31d848876c63faa.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Diagram showing engine compartment with attached plug and cable, including a magnified inset highlighting the cable's internal structure. </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/91e5c799bf82f27266d1d3e4623bd853b8db3ccaccea35a52f221fd6c9e3edf5.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-169">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Note that the support bar may disengage the bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by a strong wind. <br /> ● Always insert the support bar into the hole provided specifically for this purpose. Supporting the bonnet at any other location could result in the support bar slipping out and lead to an accident.</p> <h1 id="to-close-4">To close</h1> <p>Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its holder.</p> <p>Slowly lower the bonnet to a position about 20 cm above the closed position, then let it drop.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/814b6b7f29449452ee5e64a7077ac9510aae837e100982a6a8004cdde91d2cdf.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion mechanism with magnified inset view </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/8aa0efc0592b2ad52365b782dc100ce5a5172b5cd33e43f7fae1c96e37108ed4.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-406">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>If this does not close the bonnet, release from a slightly higher position. </li> <li>Do not press down the bonnet hard with hand as it may damage the bonnet.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/f40691b45de3f083a81532181f395fa55b91fefa3120be3241f086fabe7f0ec0.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-170">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Be careful that hands or fingers are not trapped when closing the bonnet. <br /> ● Before driving, make sure that the bonnet is securely locked. An incompletely locked bonnet can suddenly open while driving. This can be extremely dangerous.</p> <h1 id="engine-oil-2">Engine oil</h1> <p>101000402820</p> <h1 id="to-check-and-refill-engine-oil">To check and refill engine oil</h1> <p>A- Minimum level <br /> B- Maximum level <br /> C- Oil replacement indication mark</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2d9c760e769ed98db3158c1708e647de69c245319b99af965acec89d78dcc3e2.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 Type 2 A B A B C AA0107239 </details> <p>The engine oil used has a significant effect on the engine's performance, service life and startability. Be sure to use oil of the recommended quality and appropriate viscosity. All engines consume a certain amount of oil during normal operation. Therefore, it is important to check the oil level at regular intervals or before starting a long trip.</p> <ol> <li>Park the car on a horizontal surface. </li> <li>Switch off the engine. </li> <li> <p>Wait a few minutes.</p> </li> <li> <p>Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. </p> </li> <li>Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes. </li> <li>Remove the dipstick and read the oil level, which should always be within the range indicated. </li> <li>If the oil level is below the specified limit, remove the cap located on the cylinder head cover and add enough oil to raise the level to within the specified range. Do not overfill to avoid engine damage. Be sure to use the specified engine oil and do not mix various types of oil. </li> <li>After adding oil, close the cap securely. </li> <li>Confirm the oil level by repeating step 4 to 6.</li> </ol> <p>Use only the recommended oils with an ACEA or API classification as specified in this manual.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/3140b568185a08ff4c6df4f9db03c13aa966aa80e7f0b1237a3d0ebb35f6aecb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-407">NOTE</h1> <p>- Check or refill the oil according to the following manner.</p> <p>- When the oil level is checked in step 6 above, check it on a low side of the dipstick because it is different in appearance of oil level in the two sides of the dipstick.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/15003d2f2fb0e441614973df07711cae7156a549c30d5a0ed88f372895a1611f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-408">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>On vehicles without diesel particulate filter (DPF), the oil level should be within the range (A) to (B) on the dipstick. </li> <li>On vehicles with DPF, the oil level should be within the range (A) to (C) (oil replacement indication mark) on the dipstick.</li> </ul> <p>If the oil level is beyond the oil replacement indication mark (C), replace the oil as soon as possible.</p> <p>Then, the oil should be refilled to the maximum level (B).</p> <p>- On vehicles with DPF, the engine oil will increase due to a little fuel getting mixed in the engine oil when the DPF regenerates to burn away the PM (particulate matter). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.</p> <p>● The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the vehicle is subjected to severe conditions, requiring earlier oil replacement. Please refer to the maintenance schedule. <br /> ● For handling of used engine oils, refer to page 2-05.</p> <h1 id="selection-of-engine-oil">Selection of engine oil</h1> <h1 id="vehicles-without-diesel-particulate-filter-dpf">Vehicles without diesel particulate filter (DPF)</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/5a059a3e42f0814d48dc594b94b4f37edd553a856981a41778903785951117c6.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 °C SAE 30 SAE 20W-40 SAE 15W-40 SAE 10W-30 SAE 5W-30 AA8191237 </details> <ul> <li>Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity number according to the atmospheric temperature. </li> <li>Use engine oil conforming to the following classification:</li> </ul> <p>- ACEA classification:</p> <p>"For service A1/ B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, A5/B5"</p> <p>- API classification:</p> <p>"For service CF-4"</p> <p>Engine coolant</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7210df3415e03784ae89000c80bd26ce805914043798c55cb9a81235972de872.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-409">NOTE</h1> <p>- Use of additives is not recommended since they may reduce the effectiveness of additives already included in the engine oil. It may result in failure of the mechanical assembly.</p> <h1 id="vehicles-with-diesel-particulate-filter-dpf">Vehicles with diesel particulate filter (DPF)</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/ee25a79811cdb86ead9d56da0c9e61a2020b3cf2fec1eedf8f90ad9318329e25.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 °C SAE 0W-30, 5W-30 AA0107196 </details> <p>- Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity number according to the atmospheric temperature.</p> <p>- Use engine oil conforming to the following classification:</p> <ul> <li>ACEA classification: "For service C1, C2, C3 or C4" <br /> • JASO classification: "For service DL-1"</li> </ul> <p>If those classifications are not available, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/78df50d5e2ec2fc22cd917efd5a2718db62db272b52c2b4101c3e0a48858a7c7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-410">NOTE</h1> <p>- Use of additives is not recommended since they may reduce the effectiveness of additives already included in the engine oil. It may result in failure of the mechanical assembly.</p> <h1 id="engine-coolant">Engine coolant</h1> <p>E01000502153</p> <h1 id="to-check-the-coolant-level">To check the coolant level</h1> <p>A transparent coolant reserve tank (A) is located in the engine compartment.</p> <p>The coolant level in this tank should be kept between the "LOW" and "FULL" marks when measured while the engine is cold.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/9a3f92fdaa400dd4db1f2b736295b98e9508adbce167c2b11031762ab421b69d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 Type 2 A B TA0067189 </details> <p>*: Front of the vehicle</p> <h1 id="to-add-coolant">To add coolant</h1> <p>The cooling system is a closed system and normally the loss of coolant should be very slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant level could indicate leakage. If this occurs, we recommend you to have the system checked as soon as possible.</p> <p>If the level should drop below the "LOW" level on the reserve tank, open the lid and add coolant.</p> <p>Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, remove the radiator cap (B) and add coolant until the level reaches the filler neck.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/384aeeb5ead3b11341165ad2731917799096477812681b1fcf98e23f31713a1e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-116">WARNING</h1> <p>- Do not open the radiator cap (B) while the engine is hot. The coolant system is under pressure and any hot coolant escaping could cause severe burns.</p> <h1 id="anti-freeze">Anti-freeze</h1> <p>The engine coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti-corrosion agent. The cylinder head and water pump housing are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic changing of the engine coolant is necessary to prevent corrosion of these parts.</p> <p>Use "MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT" or equivalent.</p> <p>MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Coolant has excellent protection against corrosion and rust formation of all metals including aluminium and can avoid blockages in the radiator, heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc. Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion agent, the coolant must not be replaced with plain water even in summer. The required concentration of anti-freeze differs depending on the expected ambient temperature.</p> <table><tr><td>Ambient temperature (minimum) °C</td><td>-15</td><td>-20</td><td>-25</td><td>-30</td><td>-35</td><td>-50</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Anti-freeze concentration %</td><td>30</td><td>35</td><td>40</td><td>45</td><td>50</td><td>60</td><td></td></tr></table> <p><img alt="" src="images/5a6642e580377f63c9078bf0398ed649e6c855bf33043b29d5715d3fd15d08d3.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-171">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol anti-freeze. The use of an improper anti-freeze can cause corrosion of the aluminium components. </li> <li>For effective anti-corrosion and anti-freeze performance, keep the anti-freeze concentration within the range of 30 to 60% . <br /> Concentrations exceeding 60 % will result in a reduction of both the anti-freeze and cooling performance thus adversely affecting the engine.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/bd6ae85645029599994394ea9a9e591c055556f7280c72c69f8f7fae90458d58.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-172">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Do not top up with water only. Water by itself reduces the rust-protective and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it should freeze. Do not use tapwater, as it can cause corrosion and rust formation.</p> <h1 id="during-cold-weather-2">During cold weather</h1> <p>If the temperatures in your area drop below freezing, there is the danger that the coolant in the engine or radiator could freeze and cause severe damage to the engine and/or radiator.</p> <p>Add a sufficient amount of anti-freeze to the coolant to prevent it from freezing.</p> <p>The concentration should be checked before the start of cold weather and anti-freeze added to the system if necessary.</p> <h1 id="automatic-transmission-fluid">Automatic transmission fluid\*</h1> <p>E01000602125</p> <p>The proper amount of automatic transmission fluid is essential to the life and operation of the automatic transmission. Either insufficient fluid or excessive fluid could cause transmission trouble. The transmission fluid filler port cap is equipped with a dipstick. Use the following procedure to check the fluid level.</p> <h1 id="procedure-for-checking-the-fluid-level">Procedure for checking the fluid level</h1> <ol> <li>Check the fluid level after the vehicle has been driven enough to warm up the transmission fluid. </li> <li>Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface and apply the parking brake. </li> <li>With the engine idling and the brake pedal fully depressed, move the transmission selector lever through all the positions from P" (PARK) to "D" (DRIVE), stopping momentarily at each position. </li> <li>Move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position. </li> <li>Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean lint-free cloth. </li> <li>Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes.</li> </ol> <h1 id="washer-fluid">Washer fluid</h1> <ol> <li>Remove dipstick and read the automatic transmission fluid level. The fluid level should always be between the two marks on the dipstick.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/7cfe5cf0d5a5374b68c7d56f82e9786672bb67fcbab2487e917476d2b5fd8e9f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> COLD HOT AA0051185 </details> <p>10</p> <h1 id="warning-117">WARNING</h1> <p>- Do not spill the fluid onto a hot exhaust manifold during topping up or inspection, or a fire may occur.</p> <h1 id="fluid-type">Fluid type</h1> <p>Use only "MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF SP III" transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance.</p> <h1 id="caution-173">CAUTION</h1> <p>- For the automatic transmission fluid, use only the MITSUBISIII MOTORS GENUINE ATF SP III. Use of a different fluid could damage the transmission.</p> <h1 id="washer-fluid-2">Washer fluid</h1> <p>E01000700672</p> <p>The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is in the engine compartment.</p> <p>Check the washer fluid level at regular intervals and add washer fluid to reservoir if necessary.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/48c837295dbf9920c372562955557212e40ff21930c2ab9825668780b13cbb17.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and a magnified view of a valve or pump (no text or symbols visible) </details> <h1 id="note-411">NOTE</h1> <p>● The washer fluid container serves the wind-screen and headlamps (if so equipped).</p> <h1 id="during-cold-weather-3">During cold weather</h1> <p>To ensure proper operation of the washers at low temperatures, use a fluid containing an anti-freezing agent.</p> <h1 id="brake-fluid">Brake fluid</h1> <p>E01000900935</p> <h1 id="to-check-the-fluid-level">To check the fluid level</h1> <p>Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. The brake fluid level must be between the "MAX" and "MIN" marks on the reservoir.</p> <p>Type 1 Type 2</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/686f6ebb4e3f0b19de4d6ca1fcf7910500c8f274cc8b0fa6b2b36617b5cf3d78.jpg" /></p> <p><img alt="" src="images/289aaf90c06db4252f007a9618ad6b589f7cc574bd4beaa3aca6f7f0ef00b9ce.jpg" /></p> <p>TA(0)66980</p> <p>The brake fluid level is monitored by a float. When the brake fluid level falls below the "MIN" mark, the brake fluid warning lamp lights up.</p> <p>The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality.</p> <p>If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a short length of time, it indicates leaks from the brake system.</p> <p>If this occurs, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked.</p> <h1 id="fluid-type-2">Fluid type</h1> <p>Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT4. The brake fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in the brake fluid will adversely affect the brake system, reducing the brake performance.</p> <p>In addition, the brake fluid reservoir is equipped with a special cap to prevent the entrance of air, and this cap should not be removed.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/27f30cd11994ce7a681d0b4da7a7a250ff066547c03bb1e1939836280672477e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-174">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Take care in handling brake fluid as it is harmful to the eyes, may irritate your skin and also damage painted surfaces.</p> <p>- Use only the specified brake fluid. Do not mix or add different brands of brake fluid to prevent chemical reactions. Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This will damage the seals.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/288ef9fbc5ae3c460ccb90f7996b687c882d624472fb394fa5e1fd4b7125b6da.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-175">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to prevent the brake fluid from deteriorating except maintenance. <br /> ● Clean the filler cap before removing and close the cap securely after maintenance.</li> </ul> <h1 id="clutch-fluid">Clutch fluid\*</h1> <p>E01001001435</p> <h1 id="to-check-the-fluid-level-2">To check the fluid level</h1> <p>The clutch fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing other underhood service. In addition, the system should be checked for leakage at the same time.</p> <p>Check to make certain that the clutch fluid level is always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/4de8cbaae0e93666d5c14be6208207987e7336cf014d90bc7180b477018726cd.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> LHD AJA106427 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/810474bb99415acbffdbd14c52e53f22e1d4a5241708541037a056e19094a86a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> RHD MAX MIN </details> <p>A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system which should be inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another specialist and repaired immediately.</p> <h1 id="fluid-type-3">Fluid type</h1> <p>Brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 should be used.</p> <p>The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.</p> <p>DO NOT ALLOW PETROLEUM-BASED FLUID TO CONTACT, MIX WITH, OR OTHERWISE CONTAMINATE THE BRAKE FLUID. SEAL DAMAGE WILL RESULT.</p> <p>Power steering fluid</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6e3f51b0bdc4d4fbd257f4737913c19974a4b53365ebd3b46ce48cd2128340b7.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-118">WARNING</h1> <p>● Take care in handling brake fluid as it is harmful to the eyes and may also cause damage to painted surfaces. Wipe up any spills immediately.</p> <h1 id="power-steering-fluid">Power steering fluid</h1> <p>E01D01101407</p> <h1 id="to-check-the-fluid-level-3">To check the fluid level</h1> <p>Check the fluid level in the reservoir while the engine is idling.</p> <p>Check to make certain that the power steering fluid level is always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir and refill the fluid if necessary.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/47549ac122cce26b5292a6d2f26ea420b7dc86a4b31c9e070f414fd1840eb29b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with a magnified inset highlighting a component labeled 'MAX' and directional arrows. </details> <h1 id="fluid-type-4">Fluid type</h1> <p>Use "MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE PSF (Power Steering Fluid)".</p> <h1 id="battery">Battery</h1> <p>E01001203369</p> <p>The condition of the battery is very important for quick starting of the engine and proper functioning of the vehicle's electrical system. Regular inspection and care are especially important in cold weather.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/06deea4f378ba3b2a574e37af48b76a09192795e4a813d9b85bafc5eadfe2ad5.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-412">NOTE</h1> <p>● On vehicles equipped with 2 batteries, when the batteries are replaced, the 2 batteries should be replaced at the same time. If only a battery is replaced, it will cause shortening the batteries life.</p> <h1 id="checking-battery-electrolyte-level">Checking battery electrolyte level</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/eb33a0457477cd02d9e6e361fa021fe3839b5a17793f07e2c5c7cafc335579bd.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Diagram showing a car battery mounted in a vehicle, with an inset highlighting the battery's internal structure and directional arrows. </details> <p>The electrolyte level must be between the specified limit on the outside of the battery. Replenish with distilled water as necessary.</p> <p>The inside of the battery is divided into several compartments; remove the cap from each compartment and fill to the upper mark. Do not top up beyond the upper mark because spillage during driving could cause damage. Check the electrolyte level at least once every 4 weeks, depending on the operating conditions.</p> <p>If the battery is not used, it will discharge by itself with time. Check it once every 4 weeks and charge with low current as necessary.</p> <h1 id="during-cold-weather-4">During cold weather</h1> <p>The capacity of the battery is reduced at low temperatures. This is an inevitable result of its chemical and physical properties. This is why a very cold battery, particularly one that is not fully charged, will only deliver a fraction of the starter current which is normally available.</p> <p>We recommend you to have the battery checked before the start of cold weather and, if necessary, have it charged or replaced. This does not only ensure reliable starting, but a battery which is kept fully charged also has a longer life.</p> <h1 id="disconnection-and-connection">Disconnection and connection</h1> <p>To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine, first disconnect the negative (-) terminal and then the positive (+) terminal. When connecting the battery, first connect the positive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2565aa5f32c5f6ba936e80a127a726b65c3f6c6909576c5da3fb407db88cf780.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-413">NOTE</h1> <p>- Open the terminal cover (A) before disconnecting or connecting the positive (+) terminal of the battery.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c115411915720b38964d5e15b30e84c81d2d76b7df1c5a7981e6ad625fe3ec55.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-414">NOTE</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/7396ac55f201defb92b29bce02cd88e18753ce9b7921c5cc767b619c2edb7c51.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 A AJZ101137 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/91c20825f14cff986ae5ab6e0e3e32c835d42f8ceadf93fad4eb8e2a48f15f39.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 A AJZ101209 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/2e11c8a1b6753b8bb2e1cba67e00b7c16459a499e4e2974b245d1cefddb433e0.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-119">WARNING</h1> <p>- Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the battery because the battery could explode.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f3cdd4fb4c0eb14c26ccbc0e9d329382b7f42de6915e6ae66f85ca11790dc946.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-120">WARNING</h1> <p>- The battery electrolyte is extremely caustic. Do not allow it to come in contact with your eyes, skin, clothing, or the painted surfaces of the vehicle. Spilt electrolyte should be flushed immediately with ample amounts of water. Irritation to eyes or skin from contact with electrolyte requires immediate medical attention. - Ventilate when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/4cb5ac4b0884a4b7a63fa5c402dbc476ecb773fbcc026fe5510fa1dfaaf79214.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-176">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Never disconnect the battery with the ignition switch in the "ON" position; doing so could damage the vehicle's electrical components. <br /> ● Never short-circuit the battery; doing so could cause it to overheat and be damaged. <br /> ● Always wear protective eye goggles when working near the battery. </li> <li>If the battery is to be quick-charged, first disconnect the battery cables. </li> <li>In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to disconnect the negative (-) terminal first. </li> <li>Keep it out of reach of children.</li> </ul> <h1 id="tyres">Tyres</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/30fdbfd80b3ce21ad0cd2d64d5548cac480aa59bc8e9534fd81d223665364fb8.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-177">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts and so on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them. If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/106c846d8622917ff662d4961da0adfdc52b8d7b18c302953f32a54bee096a40.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-415">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is connected, apply terminal protection grease. To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water. </li> <li>Check to see if the battery is securely installed and cannot be moved during travel. Also check each terminal for tightness. </li> <li>When the vehicle is to be left unused for a long period of time, remove the battery and store it in a place where the battery fluid will not freeze. The battery should be stored only in a fully charged condition.</li> </ul> <h1 id="tyres-2">Tyres</h1> <p>E01001300239</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/0ddbf4e494f73653299600b076af7fff587e276860e6728b4ed6f6c487c25115.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-121">WARNING</h1> <p>- Driving with tyres that are worn, damaged or improperly inflated can lead to a loss of control or blow out of the tyres which can result in a collision with serious or fatal injury.</p> <p>Tyre inflation pressures <br /> E01001402423 </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="2">Tyre size</td><td colspan="2">UP TO 3 PASSENGERS MAX. LOAD</td><td colspan="2">OR TRAILER TOWING</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Front Rear Front Rear</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>195R15C 106/104R 8PR,215/70R15C 109/107R*</td><td>2.2 bar(220 kPa){32 psi}</td><td>2.2 bar(220 kPa){32 psi}</td><td>2.2 bar(220 kPa){32 psi}</td><td>4.5 bar(450 kPa){65 psi}</td></tr><tr><td>205R16C 110/108R 8PR</td><td>2.4 bar(240 kPa){35 psi}</td><td>2.4 bar(240 kPa){35 psi}</td><td>2.4 bar(240 kPa){35 psi}</td><td>4.5 bar(450 kPa){65 psi}</td></tr><tr><td>205/80R16 104S RF</td><td>2.2 bar(220 kPa){32 psi}</td><td>2.2 bar(220 kPa){32 psi}</td><td>2.2 bar(220 kPa){32 psi}</td><td>2.9 bar(290 kPa){42 psi}</td></tr></table> <p>*: On vehicles with 195 size tyres, this size of snow tyres can also be used instead.</p> <p>Tyres </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="2">Tyre size</td><td colspan="2">UP TO 3 PASSENGERS MAX. LOAD</td><td colspan="2">OR TRAILER TOWING</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Front Rear Front Rear</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>245/70R16 111S RF</td><td>2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}</td><td>2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}</td><td>2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}</td><td>2.9 bar(290 kPa){42 psi}</td></tr><tr><td>245/65R17 111S RF</td><td>2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}</td><td>2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}</td><td>2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}</td><td>2.9 bar(290 kPa){42 psi}</td></tr></table> <p>*: On vehicles with 195 size tyres, this size of snow tyres can also be used instead.</p> <p>Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value. After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.</p> <p>Wheel condition</p> <p>E01001800797</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6d17e334bed71cc4dde11731ef0f8a6123982f5de6876870859fcf1b493d8a4a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Diagram illustrating a mechanical or fluid system with labeled components and directional arrows, including a magnified inset showing internal flow or movement. </details> <p>1- Location of the tread wear indicator</p> <p>2- Tread wear indicator</p> <p>Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other damage. Replace the tyres if there are deep cuts or cracks. Also check each tyre for pieces of metal or pebbles.</p> <p>The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous because of the greater chance of skidding or hydroplaning. The tread depth of the tyres must exceed 1.6 mm in order for the tyres to meet the minimum requirement for use.</p> <p>If there are tread wear indicators on the tyres, they will appear in six places on the surface of the tyre as the tyre wears, thereby indicating that the tyre no longer meets the minimum requirement for use. When these wear indicators appear, the tyres must be replaced with new ones.</p> <p>Check that the wheel nuts are tightened correctly. Refer to the section entitled "For emergencies" for information concerning replacement of the tyres.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8d1e3bf843f7cbe82eaee1619334e4a7f39128498b742a9b00c7bf68d07947fb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-416">NOTE</h1> <p>● The mark and the location of the tyre tread wear indicators are different depending on the tyre manufacturer.</p> <p>On 4-wheel drive vehicles, when replacement of any of the tyres is necessary, replace all of them.</p> <h1 id="tyres-3">Tyres</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/824a89c32001abd04e87066bf5e8ee6dba1ddf29253620fe6a1be0ca10b122cf.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-178">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Always use tyres of the same size, same type, and same brand, and which have no wear differences. Using tyres of different size, type, brands or degree of wear, will increase the differential oil temperature, resulting in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will be subjected to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious faults.</p> <h1 id="replacing-tyres-and-wheels">Replacing tyres and wheels</h1> <p>E01007200038</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/609b8fcfbbd8bbc47ee87f2e8b4bd26b15137e89f126a1542893b292be2bc18a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-179">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Avoid using different size tyres from the one listed and the combined use of different types of tyres, as this can affect driving safety. Refer to "Tyres and wheels" on page 11-19. - Even if a wheel has the same rim size a offset as the specified type of wheel, its shape may prevent it from being fitted correctly. We recommend you to consult a specialist before using wheels that you have.</p> <h1 id="tyre-rotation">Tyre rotation</h1> <p>E01001902561</p> <p>Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, road surface conditions and individual driver's driving habits. To equalize the wear and help extend tyre life, it is recommended to rotate the tyres immediately after discovery of abnormal wear, or whenever the wear difference between the front and rear tyres is recognizable.</p> <p>When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper wheel alignment, out of balance wheel, or severe braking. We recommend you to have it checked to determine the cause of irregular tread wear.</p> <p>Spare tyre used* <br /> <img alt="" src="images/4a4fb89d632b412c092cb202531f0e9effa5c497edc561e5b20f03a43e5e3aad.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>flowchart</summary> <pre><code class="language-mermaid">graph TD A["Tot tire"] --> B["Central circular component"] B --> C["Top tire"] C --> D["Bottom tire"] D --> E["Left tire"] E --> F["Right tire"] F --> G["Left tire"] G --> H["Right tire"] H --> I["Left tire"] I --> J["Right tire"] J --> K["Left tire"] K --> L["Right tire"] L --> M["Left tire"] M --> N["Right tire"] N --> O["Left tire"] O --> P["Right tire"] P --> Q["Left tire"] Q --> R["Right tire"] R --> S["Left tire"] S --> T["Right tire"] T --> U["Left tire"] U --> V["Right tire"] V --> W["Left tire"] W --> X["Right tire"] X --> Y["Left tire"] Y --> Z["Right tire"] Z --> AA["Left tire"] AA --> AB["Right tire"] AB --> AC["Left tire"] AC --> AD["Right tire"] AD --> AE["Left tire"] AE --> AF["Right tire"] AF --> AG["Left tire"] AG --> AH["Right tire"] AH --> AI["Left tire"] AI --> AJ["Right tire"] AJ --> AK["Left tire"] AK --> AL["Right tire"] AL --> AM["Left tire"] AM --> AN["Right tire"] AN --> AO["Left tire"] AO --> AP["Right tire"] AP --> AQ["Left tire"] AQ --> AR["Right tire"] AR --> AS["Left tire"] AS --> AT["Right tire"] AT --> AU["Left tire"] AU --> AV["Right tire"] AV --> AW["Left tire"] AW --> AX["Right tire"] AX --> AY["Left tire"] AY --> AZ["Right tire"] AZ --> BA["Left tire"] BA --> BB["Right tire"] BB --> BC["Left tire"] BC --> BD["Right tire"] BD --> BE["Left tire"] BE --> BF["Right tire"] BF --> BG["Left tire"] BG --> BH["Right tire"] BH --> BI["Left tire"] BI --> BJ["Right tire"] BJ --> BK["Left tire"] BK --> BL["Right tire"] BL --> BM["Left tire"] BM --> BN["Right tire"] </code></pre> </details> <p>Spare tyre not used <br /> <img alt="" src="images/84db04371aeed6dfa56c85a2cf02ba7523956915b575b25778397358a582077c.jpg" /></p> <p>Tyres that have arrows showing rotation <br /> <img alt="" src="images/c13695a661b250d17d7580a3c8ced28f6acb8f375468a99890dd3c788c7c2af9.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>flowchart</summary> <pre><code class="language-mermaid">graph TD A["Top Tire"] --> B["Left Tire"] B --> C["Bottom Tire"] C --> D["Right Tire"] D --> E["Bottom Tire"] E --> F["Left Tire"] F --> G["Front"] G --> H["Top Tire"] style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333 style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333 style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333 style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333 style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333 style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333 style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333 </code></pre> </details> <p>Tyres</p> <p>* - If the spare tyre wheel differs from the standard tyre wheel, do not perform tyre rotation using a spare wheel.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/db6ca6102b825d7e0288eb210046b6e0dfbe5eaab2af2f0c3368931ff521b427.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-180">CAUTION</h1> <p>- If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating the correct direction of rotation, swap the front and rear wheels on the left hand side of the vehicle and the front and rear wheels on the right hand side of the vehicle separately. Keep each tyre on its original side of the vehicle. When fitting the tyres, make sure the arrows point in the direction in which the wheels will turn when the vehicle moves forward. Any tyre whose arrow points in the wrong direction will not perform to its full potential.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8111939e0d69c2195a390311e774cbaa1c1c7d464a7c192c6eb4bad946e54ac3.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Front A ROTION AF0001781 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/6b653b66f7c395140a4807fccf7d1cc8ed43ddd5130b8a81ce637da676dd7a13.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-181">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Avoid the combined use of different types of tyres. Using different types of tyres can affect vehicle performance and safety.</p> <h1 id="snow-tyres">Snow tyres</h1> <p>E01002000725</p> <p>The use of snow tyres is recommended for driving on snow and ice. To preserve driving stability, mount snow tyres of the same size and tread pattern on all 4 wheels.</p> <p>Snow tyres worn more than 50% are no longer suitable for use as snow tyres.</p> <p>Snow tyres which do not meet specifications must not be used.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/83153dd1b2e6ec8283e0c1311a68c43c9040224795cc7848901dea0b91481afb.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-182">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Observe permissible maximum speed for your snow tyres and the legal speed limit.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/44ae77e606a84cacfb8f42ce4d07d10b27df145350cdc605a7bfc3f16902426c.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-417">NOTE</h1> <p>● The laws and regulations concerning snow tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.) vary. Find out and follow the laws and regulations in the area you intend to drive. <br /> - If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, change to tapered nuts when steel wheels are used.</p> <h1 id="tyre-chains">Tyre chains</h1> <p>E01002101983</p> <p>It is recommended that snow chains are carried in snow regions and fitted when required to the rear wheels.</p> <p>On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power is distributed preferentially to the rear wheels, ensure that the tyre chains are fitted on the rear.</p> <p>Use only tyre chains which are designed for use with the tyres mounted on the vehicle: use of the incorrect size or type of chain could result in damage to the vehicle body. Before fitting tyre chains, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. The max. chain height is as follows.</p> <table><tr><td>Tyre size</td><td>Wheel size</td><td>Max. chain height [mm]</td></tr><tr><td>195R15C, 215/70R15C*</td><td rowspan="5">15x6 JJ</td><td rowspan="5">22</td></tr><tr><td>205R16C 16x6 JJ</td></tr><tr><td>205/80R16 16x6 JJ</td></tr><tr><td>245/70R16 16x7 J</td></tr><tr><td>245/65R17 17x7 1/2 J</td></tr></table> <p>*: 215/70R15C size should only be used as snow tyres.</p> <h1 id="clutch-pedal-free-play">Clutch pedal free play\*</h1> <p>The speed limit for tyre chain is 50 km/h (30 mph) and remove the tyre chains as soon as possible on snow free roads.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/ffaf30b540041fe5ce16cdde07d118fcd645112c495887d1c08b82e96297d308.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-122">WARNING</h1> <p>● DO NOT use a jack when fitting the chains, as in these conditions, the tyres may slip on the icy road causing the vehicle to slip off the jack.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a3f7651d9a7f9f89c8a3acc0da89aabe1323c8f2af8c0fc6c795241029764fa6.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-183">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>Practice fitting the chains before you need them. Don't expect help from other people in the cold. </li> <li>Choose a clear straight stretch of road where you can pull over and still be seen while you are fitting the chains. </li> <li>Do not fit chains before you need them. This will wear out your tyres and the road surface. <br /> ● After driving around 100-300 metres, stop and retighten the chains. <br /> ● Drive carefully and do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). Remember, fitting chains is not going to stop accidents from happening. </li> <li>When tyre chains are installed, take care that they do not damage the disc wheel or body. <br /> ● An aluminium wheel can be damaged by a tyre chain while driving. When fitting a tyre chain on an aluminium wheel, take care that any part of the chain and fitting cannot be brought into contact with the wheel.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/0da24f97bbfe9d43d703933d9e015b884e8d42224361a3c12b220f146c1830c6.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-184">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li>When installing or removing the tyre chains, take care that hands and other parts of your body are not injured by the sharp edges of the vehicle body. <br /> ● Install the chains only on the rear tyres and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened.</li> </ul> <p><img alt="" src="images/561bdb51333b70a560fd5b11b5bca54a2f7b429a106b473012080796370dbd00.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-418">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>The laws and regulations concerning the use of tyre chains vary. Find out and follow the laws and regulations of the area you're driving in. <br /> In most countries, it is prohibited by law to use tyre chains on roads without snow.</li> </ul> <h1 id="clutch-pedal-free-play-2">Clutch pedal free play\*</h1> <p>E01002200222</p> <p>Press down the clutch pedal with your fingers until initial resistance is felt.</p> <p>This distance should be within the specified range.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e92275bb87dfd4814712a654121c9f88edec692056ae79474e983d63e23101f0.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A AA0023086 </details> <p>A- Free play: 4 to 13 mm</p> <p>If the clutch pedal free play is not within the standard range, we recommend you to have it checked.</p> <h1 id="brake-pedal-free-play">Brake pedal free play</h1> <p>101002300281</p> <p>Stop the engine, depress the brake pedal several times, and press down the pedal with your fingers until initial resistance is felt. This distance should be within the specified range.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/e2ee6276a415752d504f4818abbf8cb0100bc09a8b7a4a376ce0b80a29fd7feb.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A AA0013046 </details> <p>A- Free play: 3 to 8 mm</p> <p>If the brake pedal free play is not within the standard range, we recommend you to have it checked.</p> <h1 id="parking-brake-lever-stroke">Parking brake lever stroke</h1> <p>LD1002400527</p> <p>Pull the parking brake lever up to check the number of "clicks" that the ratchet makes. One click represents a lever movement of one notch. The lever should move the specified number of notches for normal brake application.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/f0634f7d7244212a715801ae4735ba5f0138ce5c4b6485ce06ce182ffa57d11d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 A AA0048514 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/b2a4b7ff23bdeb55155488e215cac8d32d7b9c0b434ed85503529f44016f8950.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 (LHD) A AA0074557 </details> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2ab9e012b0e03c0415214c3fd950bd7681f0b9538ebf885abeb4a7dea6e487c6.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 (RHD) A AA0074560 </details> <p>A- Parking brake lever stroke</p> <p>Type 1 8 to 9 notches</p> <p>Type 2 11 to 13 notches</p> <p>(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with the force of 200 N)</p> <p>If the parking brake lever stroke is out of the standard range, we recommend you to have it checked.</p> <h1 id="warning-123">WARNING</h1> <p>● Continued operation of the vehicle with the parking brake lever out of adjustment may result in the vehicle moving when unattended.</p> <h1 id="wiper-blades-2">Wiper blades</h1> <p>E01002600385</p> <p>When lifting the wiper arms off the wind-screen, first raise the driver's side wiper arm and then the passenger's side wiper arm.</p> <p>Maintenance</p> <p>10-17</p> <h1 id="wiper-blades-3">Wiper blades</h1> <p>When returning them to their original positions, first put the passenger's side wiper arm back in place and then the driver's side wiper arm.</p> <p>If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.</p> <h1 id="wiper-blade-rubber-replacement">Wiper blade rubber replacement</h1> <h1 id="drivers-side">Driver's side</h1> <ol> <li>Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen. </li> <li>Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) disengages from the hook (B). Then, pull the wiper blade further to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/fdf980998a0cf68cfdd529e594509816afc2b185361338704ad52d849314d544.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B C AF0001794 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/9affaad8632b4b1e633a02cef90423ef4924965a635fbd9263f3efa7465a11a1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-419">NOTE</h1> <p>- Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the windscreen; it could damage the glass.</p> <ol> <li>Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade.</li> </ol> <p>For LHD vehicles refer to the illustration to ensure that the retainers are correctly aligned as you attach them.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b5780fae4de557fe4550af91503df83360488fc77dd86972d0d647b6912886ec.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> LHD C AA3002698 </details> <p>RHD <br /> <img alt="" src="images/31b12f274f22883b683614cb1d2aa3537b5e176856c33e47497ccdf06f9f9823.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with labeled component C (no text or symbols present) </details> <p>AF0001808</p> <ol> <li>Insert the wiper blade into the arm, starting with the opposite end of the blade from the stopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted correctly in the grooves in the blade.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/71ffe5e5878de100270c7d5813ec9adb2bb6d0f6fa4f33e25b84172cd8afe197.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-420">NOTE</h1> <p>- If retainers are not supplied with the new wiper blade, use the retainers from the old blade.</p> <ol> <li>Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) engages securely with the stopper (A).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/b727e3ab46e968c1ff22cf46e937a891ee05380d3f81e59100aa7aaad883b3ed.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AP0001811 </details> <h1 id="passengers-side">Passenger's side</h1> <ol> <li>Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.</li> <li>Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) disengages from the hook (B). Then, pull the wiper blade further to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/ac91c7c9a24a9cd9fd4f9de8d85d26548a7ef2ad62b116b6d3baeb2013511b69.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B C AF9001794 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/ae2ecefb9e2225d9a9b7fd7a2803ccba36c98512c664d46022928e0e20bf3d10.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-421">NOTE</h1> <p>- Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the windscreen; it could damage the glass.</p> <ol> <li>Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade. Refer to the illustration to ensure that the retainers are correctly aligned as you attach them.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/bb96272aaa34a9d3bd49a9258e01a8267f3bac244f4ee0d2dd9eb5052bfbbf9b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with curved components and a base mount (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>Insert the wiper blade into the arm, starting with the opposite end of the blade from the stopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted correctly in the grooves in the blade.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/558228180127ff71166ad8664cc7a7f8b344d6c0ec6f582a26d28c99ecaf308b.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-422">NOTE</h1> <p>- If retainers are not supplied with the new wiper blade, use the retainers from the old blade.</p> <ol> <li>Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) engages securely with the stopper (A).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/595121454f3e107c35e742bd597d1de4826b41a760dcd87a893aef5b62f2be16.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AF9001811 </details> <h1 id="general-maintenance">General maintenance</h1> <p>E01002700113</p> <h1 id="fuel-engine-coolant-oil-and-ex-haust-gas-leakage">Fuel, engine coolant, oil and ex- haust gas leakage</h1> <p>Look under the body of your vehicle to check for fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas leaks.</p> <p>For cold and snowy weather</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/0b96c036b0ee3b86f11ec6e3775fc1b309a8bec10d13e2bc462318aa88bb21b6.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="warning-124">WARNING</h1> <p>- If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle; we recommend you to call for assistance.</p> <h1 id="exterior-and-interior-lamp-operation">Exterior and interior lamp operation</h1> <p>Operate the combination lamp switch to check that all lamps are functioning properly. If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable cause is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb. Check the fuses first. If there is no blown fuses, check the lamp bulbs.</p> <p>For information regarding the inspection and replacement of the fuses and the lamp bulbs, refer to “Fuses” on page 10-20 and “Replacement of lamp bulbs” on page 10-25. If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recommend you to have your vehicle checked and repaired.</p> <h1 id="meter-gauge-and-indicatorwarning-lamps-operation">Meter, gauge and indicator/warning lamps operation</h1> <p>Run the engine to check the operation of all meters, gauges, and indicator/warning lamps. If there is anything wrong, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected.</p> <h1 id="hinges-and-latches-lubrication">Hinges and latches lubrication</h1> <p>Check all latches and hinges, and lubricate if necessary by first cleaning and then applying multipurpose grease.</p> <h1 id="for-cold-and-snowy-weather">For cold and snowy weather</h1> <p>E01002800257</p> <h1 id="ventilation-slots">Ventilation slots</h1> <p>The ventilation slots in front of the wind-screen should be kept clear of leaves or brushed clear after heavy snowfall, so that the operation of the heating and ventilation systems will not be impaired.</p> <h1 id="weatherstripping">Weatherstripping</h1> <p>To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be treated with silicone grease or spray.</p> <h1 id="additional-equipment">Additional equipment</h1> <p>It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-handled spade in the vehicle during the winter so that you can clear away snow if you get stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for the windscreen and rear window are also useful.</p> <h1 id="fusible-links">Fusible links</h1> <p>E01002900030</p> <p>The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if a large current attempts to flow through certain electrical systems.</p> <p>In case of a melted fusible link, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected.</p> <h1 id="fuses">Fuses</h1> <p>ED1003000849</p> <h1 id="fuse-block-location">Fuse block location</h1> <p>ED1007600032</p> <p>To prevent damage to the electrical system due to shortcircuiting or overloading, each individual circuit is provided with a fuse.</p> <p>There are fuse blocks in the passenger compartment and in the engine compartment.</p> <h1 id="passenger-compartment">Passenger compartment</h1> <p>The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located in front of the driver's seat at the position shown in the illustration.</p> <h1 id="engine-compartment-2">Engine compartment</h1> <p>In the engine compartment, the fuse block is located as shown in the illustration.</p> <h1 id="passenger-compartment-fuse-location-table">Passenger compartment fuse location table</h1> <p>E01007900501</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/081dd6e780d78e7a89f75eec9c7cf4f837cc9d2faf3d3cf14ba78e3e2fbcbb99.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> LHD AA0052371 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/16ccc868c0315b44c7a1db1a920803953fd1178f0daf792102bbb2f83571a4c3.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered annotations and magnified detail view </details> <p>1- Push the knob. <br /> 2- Remove the cover.</p> <h1 id="fuse-load-capacity">Fuse load capacity</h1> <p>E01007700033</p> <p>The fuse capacity and the name of the electrical systems protected by the fuses are indicated on the inside of the fuse lid located at the driver's leg area and on the inside of the fuse block cover for fuses located in the engine compartment.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b682f30e9d7753c42a173d3334570f9e89149f6dae54aa1b08e17c6b88a6e8d1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-423">NOTE</h1> <p>- Spare fuses are contained in the fuse lid. Always use a fuse of the same capacity for replacement.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/3811da2477d59c29d0d4b2e71d299b0959608bd16bc9056f8528ad2146bce1cf.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Passenger compartment fuse location (LHD) 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 28 27 AA00038 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/0e0a40f775eb84c584fcc64c328ada7eba51b6f844298fffb4306ae45393dc0b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> RHD AA0941896 </details> <p>Fuses <br /> <img alt="" src="images/22d07988bb8bc7084bec8777097f3f2570a843180a8555f98273835061129b0b.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Passenger compartment fuse location (RHD) 16 10 4 23 22 17 11 5 24 18 12 6 1 26 25 19 13 7 2 20 14 8 3 21 15 9 3 AA4000279 </details> <table><tr><td>No.</td><td>Symbol</td><td>Electrical system</td><td>Capacity</td></tr><tr><td>1</td><td colspan="2">Taillamp (left) 7.5 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>2</td><td></td><td>Cigarette lighter 15 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>3</td><td colspan="2">Ignition coil 10 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>4</td><td colspan="2">Starter-motor 7.5 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>5</td><td colspan="2">Sunroof 20 A</td><td></td></tr></table> <table><tr><td>No.</td><td>Symbol</td><td>Electrical system</td><td>Capacity</td></tr><tr><td>6</td><td>Accessory</td><td>socket 15 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>7</td><td>Tail lamp</td><td>(right) 7.5 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>8</td><td colspan="2">Outside rear-view mirrors</td><td>7.5 A</td></tr><tr><td>9</td><td></td><td>Engine control unit 7.5 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>10</td><td colspan="2">Control unit 7.5 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>11</td><td></td><td>Rear fog lamp</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>12</td><td></td><td>Central door lock 15 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>13</td><td></td><td>Room lamp</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>14</td><td></td><td>Rear window wiper</td><td>15 A</td></tr><tr><td>15</td><td></td><td>Gauge</td><td>7.5 A</td></tr><tr><td>16</td><td></td><td>Relay</td><td>7.5 A</td></tr><tr><td>17</td><td></td><td>Heated seat</td><td>20 A</td></tr><tr><td>18</td><td>OPTION</td><td>Option</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>19</td><td></td><td>Heated door mirror</td><td>7.5 A</td></tr><tr><td>20</td><td></td><td>Windscreen wiper</td><td>20 A</td></tr><tr><td>21</td><td></td><td>Reversing lamps 7.5 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>22</td><td></td><td>Demister 30 A</td><td></td></tr></table> <table><tr><td>No.</td><td>Symbol</td><td>Electrical system</td><td>Capacity</td></tr><tr><td>23</td><td></td><td>Heater</td><td>30 A</td></tr><tr><td>24</td><td></td><td>Power seat</td><td>40 A</td></tr><tr><td>25</td><td></td><td>Radio</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>26</td><td></td><td>Electronic controlled unit</td><td>15 A</td></tr><tr><td>27</td><td>—</td><td>Spare fuse</td><td>7.5 A</td></tr><tr><td>28</td><td>—</td><td>Spare fuse</td><td>20 A</td></tr><tr><td>29</td><td>—</td><td>Spare fuse</td><td>30 A</td></tr></table> <p>● Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.</p> <p>● The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse.</p> <p>The fuse block does not contain spare 10 A and 15 A fuses. If a fuse of one of these capacities blows, replace it temporarily by borrowing the one that matches from:</p> <h1 id="10-a-radio">10 A: Radio</h1> <p>15 A: Cigarette lighter</p> <p>Replace the borrowed fuse as soon as possible.</p> <p>Fuses</p> <h1 id="engine-compartment-fuse-location-table">Engine compartment fuse location table</h1> <p>E01008000583</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/c38042ea135dd81b3ba28f9905b1140f43ce36f9cb2b3f7c2be69a709441ac08.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Engine compartment fuse location 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 9 8 3 1 2 5 4 Front AA4000253 </details> <table><tr><td>No.</td><td>Symbol</td><td>Electrical system</td><td>Capacity</td></tr><tr><td>1</td><td>— — —</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>2</td><td></td><td>Electric window system</td><td>40 A</td></tr></table> <table><tr><td>No.</td><td>Symbol</td><td>Electrical system</td><td>Capacity</td></tr><tr><td>3</td><td></td><td>Ignition switch</td><td>40 A</td></tr><tr><td>4</td><td></td><td>Air conditioning compressor</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>5</td><td></td><td>Condenser fan motor</td><td>20 A</td></tr><tr><td>6</td><td></td><td>Headlamp high-beam (left)</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>7</td><td></td><td>Headlamp high-beam (right)</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>8</td><td></td><td>Headlamp low beam (left)</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>9</td><td></td><td>Headlamp low beam (right)</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>10</td><td></td><td>Engine control</td><td>20 A</td></tr><tr><td>11</td><td></td><td>Alternator</td><td>7.5 A</td></tr><tr><td>12</td><td>Stop lamps</td><td>15 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>13</td><td></td><td>Horn</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>14</td><td>A/T</td><td>Automatic transmission</td><td>20 A</td></tr><tr><td>15</td><td></td><td>Hazard warning flash-er</td><td>10 A</td></tr><tr><td>16</td><td></td><td>Fuel pump</td><td>15 A</td></tr></table> <table><tr><td>No.</td><td>Symbol</td><td>Electrical system</td><td>Capacity</td></tr><tr><td>17</td><td>#0</td><td>Front fog lamps</td><td>15 A</td></tr><tr><td>18</td><td>月</td><td>Audio amp</td><td>20 A</td></tr></table> <p>● Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.</p> <p>● The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse.</p> <p>Identification of fuse <br /> E01008100308 </p> <table><tr><td>Capacity</td><td>Colour</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">7.5 A Brown</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">10 A Red</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">15 A Blue</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">20 A Yellow</td></tr><tr><td>30 A</td><td>Green (fuse type)/Pink (fusible link type)</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">40 A Green (fusible link type)</td></tr></table> <h1 id="fuse-replacement">Fuse replacement</h1> <p>F01007800656</p> <ol> <li>Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical circuit concerned and place the ignition switch in the "LOCK" position.</li> </ol> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p>Maintenance</p> <p>10-23</p> <h1 id="fuses-2">Fuses</h1> <ol> <li>Pull the fuse lid (A) to remove it. </li> <li>Remove the fuse puller (B) from the fuse lid (A).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/a33de4fa95de3aeba173e49a4bbaaa417522924535e64ec05a21c87e6f7895e4.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> LHD A B AA0074573 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/63669912a412e1b42209d3d2dfbb4609959ac144f40171458d65c7de377e608c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of two mechanical components labeled C and D, showing internal structures without any text or symbols. </details> <p>C-Fuse is OK <br /> D- Blown fuse</p> <ol> <li>Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by using the fuse puller into the same place at the fuse block.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/d60f2e4d33f4f557d457b0109c446df571d923657e8a64141237cf1a77eae896.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of two hands holding a small object, no text or symbols present </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/219f484c8ca9c0b8dcf837a478b814f8a4c2e3cb8bc469dd98744330cb044641.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> RIID A B AA0052397 </details> <h1 id="note-424">NOTE</h1> <p>- If any system does not function but the fuse corresponding to that system is normal, there may be a fault in the system elsewhere. We recommend you to have your vehicle checked.</p> <h1 id="caution-185">CAUTION</h1> <ul> <li> <p>If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, we recommend you to have the electrical system checked to find the cause and rectify it. <br /> ● Never use a fuse with a capacity larger than that specified or any substitute, such as wire, foil, etc.; doing so will cause the circuit wiring to heat up and could cause a fire.</p> </li> <li> <p>Referring to the fuse load capacity table, check the fuse pertaining to the problem.</p> </li> </ul> <h1 id="replacement-of-lamp-bulbs">Replacement of lamp bulbs</h1> <p>101003100710</p> <p>Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is off. Do not touch the glass part of the new bulb with your bare fingers; the skin oil left on the glass will evaporate when the bulb gets hot and the vapour will condense on the reflector and dim the surface.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b86664bf941364a4ba182dc60ccdd35f85f2375c0a97bbb208827497a368ec30.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-186">CAUTION</h1> <p>- Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being turned off. When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool sufficiently before touching it. You could otherwise be burnt.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b77831153211fc339c2aa2726f73cf389bacf5c7107059467ca7a941a6006ce4.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-425">NOTE</h1> <p>- If you are unsure of how to carry out the work as required, we recommend you to consult a specialist. - Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body when removing a lamp or lens. - When it rains or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a functional problem. When the lamp is switched on, the heat will remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recommend you to have the lamp checked.</p> <h1 id="bulb-capacity">Bulb capacity</h1> <p>ED1003200085</p> <p>When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with the same wattage and colour.</p> <h1 id="outside">Outside</h1> <p>E01003304169</p> <h1 id="front">Front</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/2701f1594b751bf1ab9bac39de0019e8756c5479f56bfc40c8140dba3e84f541.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AJA106238 </details> <p>1- Headlamps, high-beam: 60 W (HB3) 2- Headlamps, low beam: 55 W (H11) 3- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W) 4- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W) 5- Front fog lamps*: 55 W (H11) 6- Side turn-signal lamps (on fender)*: 5 W (WY5W)</p> <p>7- Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear-view mirror)*</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/28d3e8eb3c9f54905e3058c294d684aff8d4d9c5ffdacc15b4f8bf36f84edc36.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 AM113045 </details> <p>1- Headlamps, high/low beam: 60/55 W (H4) <br /> 2- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W) <br /> 3- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W) <br /> 4- Front fog lamps*: 55 W (H11) <br /> 5- Side turn-signal lamps (on fender)*: 5 W (WY5W) <br /> 6- Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear-view mirror)*</p> <p>Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.</p> <h1 id="replacement-of-lamp-bulbs-2">Replacement of lamp bulbs</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/464b5c0540ec78c0fcc74751407e483e2ac4bf8e3681acccc282e97132d9d525.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-426">NOTE</h1> <p>● The side turn-signal lamp (on outside rear view mirror) uses an LED instead of a bulb. For repair and replacement, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</p> <h1 id="rear">Rear</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/0daefdb46c098c30f1cb598733727b50da5d86ec59c21e6a43259bcdd7fe7d2e.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 Type 2 AA3008786 </details> <p>1- High-mounted stop lamp: 5 W (W5W) <br /> 2- Rear turn-signal lamps: 16 W (W16W) <br /> 3- Tail and stop lamps: 21/5 W (P21/5W) <br /> 4- Reversing lamps: 16 W (W16W) <br /> 5- Rear fog lamp (Type 1, Driver's side only): 21 W (P21W) <br /> 6- Rear fog lamp (Type 2, Driver's side only): 21 W (W21W)</p> <p>10-26</p> <p>Maintenance</p> <p>7- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)</p> <p>Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.</p> <h1 id="inside">Inside</h1> <p>E01003401518</p> <h1 id="single-cab-3">Single cab</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/e4c905fe75588dbdfd46332a6b4d3ac10d1e335d22ff195eef9e0b3a1dc3599c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 1 2 3 4 AA0092591 </details> <p>1- Door courtesy lamps*: 3.4 W <br /> 2- Room lamp: 8 W <br /> 3- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W <br /> 4- Centre console downlight: 1.4 W</p> <h1 id="club-cab-5">Club cab</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/5474248604dc148f3dcc6781b51010e58fa0cab6c6d57a235bb782013ca54f0c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Diagram of car interior components with numbered parts and labeled parts, likely for automotive or diagnostic reference. </details> <p>1- Door courtesy lamps*: 3.4 W <br /> 2- Front room lamp and personal lamps*: 7.5 W <br /> 3- Rear room lamp: 8 W <br /> 4- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W <br /> 5- Centre console downlight: 1.4 W</p> <h1 id="double-cab-3">Double cab</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/46adbb38f7a5525a7ab9a5ffcd37339cf7615bb0792da654479aa96137c76763.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Technical diagram of a car interior with numbered components and labeled parts </details> <p>1- Door courtesy lamps*: 3.4 W <br /> 2- Front room lamp and personal lamps: 7.5 W <br /> 3- Rear room lamp*: 8 W <br /> 4- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W <br /> 5- Centre console downlight: 1.4 W</p> <h1 id="headlamps-2">Headlamps</h1> <p>ED1003501375</p> <h1 id="type-1-7">Type 1</h1> <ol> <li>Remove the bulb and connector assembly (A) by turning it anticlockwise.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/9a7d948afd063c9702141cdf0d1375b6f095bc3b30cf1398713ac73276f99974.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> High beam AA0097437 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/1f42f549ffeb17503f7aad0faf4df9fd8d61afcdf0f3c0e319e72727891e20d9.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Low beam A AA0097440 </details> <ol> <li>Depress the tab (B) on the harness connector and pull the harness connector (C) to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/d6ba326ea289a23145a3ebe3045d16bda1874cd5c7de5afd58e7fd01a5a3f864.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> High beam Low beam C B C B AA0097453 </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="caution-187">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care. The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause it to shatter. <br /> ● Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc. <br /> The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. <br /> If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying it thoroughly.</p> <h1 id="replacement-of-lamp-bulbs-3">Replacement of lamp bulbs</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/6c4c92dcf38e1a21538ebe2779efa3eea080cd42324b1664cc62fd80124360a2.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Diagram showing two hands holding a tool with a screw and a switch, alongside a prohibition symbol. </details> <p>Type 2</p> <ol> <li>Disconnect the connector (A). <br /> <img alt="" src="images/defbec58bec3b6a7d7be4c79eb8c25a8d1478b3ea77426c1099e6160f44252ef.jpg" /></li> </ol> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical diagram of a mechanical component with an inset showing a close-up view of a bolt and nut (no text or symbols present) </details> <ol> <li>Remove the sealing cover (B). <br /> <img alt="" src="images/705753771ea246b14c564df444704f7497ece67829eca76f4546bfb8e7951eba.jpg" /></li> </ol> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> B AA0042772 </details> <ol> <li>Unhook the spring (C) which secures the bulb, and then remove the headlamp bulb. <br /> <img alt="" src="images/c3b9984cd99e2cd614febbf36451222a796091f565efd61c042a5399ade5e971.jpg" /></li> </ol> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/8a6ed805b8a7c39801d9a76d5a6e30e49a7bb8a14d14a5e51a0450b1895df37f.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-188">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care. The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause it to shatter. <br /> ● Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc.</p> <p>The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.</p> <p>If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying it thoroughly.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/5636376e6a6943935533760565d6efc9d971fc130fc3cb6286e322cbe4a55d84.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> AA0027612 </details> <h1 id="position-lamps">Position lamps</h1> <p>F0100370X833</p> <h1 id="type-1-8">Type 1</h1> <ol> <li>Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/da4c2cec757112024f60ae2199110ae12950cb7b6bff8d4bf6c441aa6795e847.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component being inserted into a housing (no text or symbols visible) </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="type-2-6">Type 2</h1> <ol> <li>Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/52098f4cd9e17ca57ef629664404d643337080b1b1c21d4477a998cc77a777e6.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with an inset showing a component being inserted (no text or symbols present) </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="front-turn-signal-lamps">Front turn-signal lamps</h1> <p>E01003800818</p> <h1 id="type-1-9">Type 1</h1> <ol> <li>Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the</li> </ol> <p>socket by turning it anticlockwise while pressing in.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a96f82c2665d35798d61c7cf5dee0edc2b3323db96cb09b625d172645d3bbaa5.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a car interior with a magnified inset showing a person inside the vehicle (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="type-2-7">Type 2</h1> <ol> <li>Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the socket by turning it anticlockwise while pressing in.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/609d4e7d295d18c31fc9dd3dde867846c65c50cebcdf2be1757422c919afcaa4.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an inset magnified view (no text or symbols) </details> <p>OKTE15E3</p> <p>Maintenance</p> <p>10-29</p> <h1 id="replacement-of-lamp-bulbs-4">Replacement of lamp bulbs</h1> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="side-turn-signal-lamps-on-fender">Side turn-signal lamps (on fender)\*</h1> <p>E01003901702</p> <ol> <li>To remove a side turn-signal lamp, insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver at the end of the lamp nearer the front of the body and use it to gently lever the lamp out of the body.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/0ac3d66cd9290797535f6e46754385abb0f7c17aa173a8310f7d91a9a050d3ae.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Front AA0642756 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/e2fc81f7ce939b332fab240b17b6943b6409d0abad1fb9892577a519bdd505d4.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-427">NOTE</h1> <p>● Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens and the body.</p> <ol> <li>Remove the socket and bulb assembly together by turning it anticlockwise, and then remove the bulb by pulling it out.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/ca7896511fcd37c4eff02315a6898ae8bbaeac1c36b2dc10c58de2b876a7cdf6.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a mechanical device with a curved handle and base plate (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/1384fff7f43a9398d7b392b44951940490bc3fd915e0cf13ebe630d2b6b8279a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-428">NOTE</h1> <p>- When replacing the lamp assembly, push in the end facing the rear of the vehicle first.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8dfc153d1baeb863f8f03adb49526e95ff505c887d828b87eae52a5145fed96d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-429">NOTE</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/095972bd52aa0916f6f4df8aa219e215d80456e91b594d444c88c769ec021539.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Front AJZ101153 </details> <h1 id="side-turn-signal-lamps-on-outside-rear-view-mirrors">Side turn-signal lamps (on outside rear-view mirrors)\*</h1> <p>E01003900646</p> <p>The side turn-signal lamp (on outside rear-view mirror) uses an LED instead of a bulb. For repair and replacement, contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.</p> <h1 id="front-fog-lamps">Front fog lamps\*</h1> <p>E01004002882</p> <h1 id="type-1-10">Type 1</h1> <ol> <li>Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-driver with a cloth over its tip at the edge</li> </ol> <p>of the cover and pry gently to remove the cover.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/437c4051171c97b85291ae0eb893578fab3576af57d12ac0447ff95d356ea472.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Diagram of a tool inside a vehicle's door, showing motion and rotation (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>Turn the 3 bolts (A) anticlockwise to remove them. And then remove the lamp assembly.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/ba7c54cdf8bda637d9ccbe8aaee56507e27b4adc4010d473cb75b5aea884b8ce.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols </details> <ol> <li>Depress the tab (B) on the harness connector and pull the harness connector (C) to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/2940c5dd0562ac95b5f02bc7a039b0e0d5c2f0f7a2e98f4ab08c0514be30423f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> C B AA009616 </details> <ol> <li>Turn the entire socket and bulb assembly (D) anticlockwise to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/47c2dcb737d45f754f093ab752df55a6cfdea8259bd2b4de03cc21196f2cc894.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled part D (no text or symbols beyond label) </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="caution-189">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care. The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause it to shatter. <br /> ● Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc.</p> <p>The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the fog lamps are operated.</p> <p>If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying thoroughly.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/833393c22de7dde2718057c0e9678955edfb2f10ef087eb8cf9dfa31aa6bf348.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> AA0005407 </details> <p>Replacement of lamp bulbs</p> <h1 id="type-2-8">Type 2</h1> <ol> <li>Push up the tab (A) of the clip to unfix it, and then pull the cover towards you to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/c2ef883cf4f18f71ff8087fae77c7f67349af3565c36c876c3b5197a346b0dde.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A 1/61 AJA106241 </details> <ol> <li>Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the lamp unit.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/32805417c6b563bbf2db028ca33fbf7a43a2e7a80bf2d38a32576aace57b8f41.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts A and B, no readable text or symbols beyond labels </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/f5221214b025b1c0b5d4d36a1565381008a78081ce35face3534234cd21d0b66.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-430">NOTE</h1> <p>- When unfastening the screws, be careful not to move the beam position adjustment screw (C).</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d7e6193750fd467dc3af7cc21c7687acb4d95c85bbf07e276f83574f473f490d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled part C and reference number AJZ101010 (no readable text or symbols beyond label) </details> <ol> <li>Depress the tab (D) on the harness connector and pull the harness connector (E) to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/cf5d7b15a7b00cfcd83ad804b21e3a46fc53665a62af9715db280f092a346f33.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> E D AJA106267 </details> <ol> <li>Turn the bulb (F) anticlockwise to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/2bd3d5adebbb720d18c256c6b1b20c5f600d362412a90e485706a7a3b018b2db.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> F AJA106270 </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/c3bb773a25c82754482939d4ace26a627a8af67553ec204926d836706483e611.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="caution-190">CAUTION</h1> <p>● Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care. The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause it to shatter. <br /> ● Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc.</p> <p>The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the fog lamps are operated.</p> <p>If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying thoroughly.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/b9f24c5724b291f9e32fd50ce66204eed4de05928d99d235e455b1ba54c872bf.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> AA0005407 </details> <p>Rear fog lamp</p> <p>E01004100384</p> <h1 id="type-1-drivers-side-only">Type 1 (Driver's side only)</h1> <ol> <li>Remove the screws (A) from the rear fog lamp lens, and then remove the lens (B).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/9a1b2f57a41c2e2a9d816353b2d4cae614e255a6c59d7451cfeaab7996dec8b1.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B AA003472 </details> <ol> <li>Remove the bulb (C) by turning it anti-clockwise while pressing it inward.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/9baeabe9119cd50fea1a364b210f8672dbed1b6811e837bb6cc6446e32572e22.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> AA0052485 C </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="type-2-drivers-side-only">Type 2 (Driver's side only)</h1> <ol> <li>Remove the socket and bulb assemblies by turning it anticlockwise, and then remove the bulb by pulling out.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/aeb1b36b60abe9cb2b31b0a69de5669977cca3273345e37c4b8eef0addb13c7d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a magnified inset showing internal components (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="rear-combination-lamps">Rear combination lamps</h1> <p>E01004200763</p> <ol> <li>Open the rear gate. (Refer to "Rear gate" on page 3-14.)</li> <li>Remove the screws (A) that hold the lamp unit.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/00c0df3af452e7f52fff6006ec65baa145ae6c20ba90cb932b8c87932b12fa6d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A AA055213 </details> <h1 id="replacement-of-lamp-bulbs-5">Replacement of lamp bulbs</h1> <ol> <li> <p>Move the lamp unit towards the rear of the vehicle and remove the clips (B).</p> </li> <li> <p>Remove each socket and bulb assembly by turning it anticlockwise.</p> </li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/99913f203fb4d8397bd93ccd9e5e31ce18df161452f91b6b6d8928c6aef0929d.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> B AA00E354R </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/fa4e19227cdc9307df487d581184bf0ac512bfa38776178dfaa6bc5e02a44394.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> C D E AA0042727 </details> <p>C- Rear turn-signal lamp Remove the bulb by pulling it out. <br /> D- Tail and stop lamp Remove the bulb from the socket by turning it anticlockwise while pressing in. <br /> E- Reversing lamp Remove the bulb by pulling it out. <br /> 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/0e67be232dbe2a751f86577620f3fbcc2a8c7ece2f2229c1cec52ab0339f978e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-431">NOTE</h1> <p>- When mounting the lamp unit, align the pins (F) and clip (G) on the lamp unit with the holes (H) in the body.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a1f756305cda520d8b48325231a52957822e35696ac12c86f1e2f299da740328.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> F G H AA064351 </details> <h1 id="high-mounted-stop-lamp">High-mounted stop lamp</h1> <p>E01004500577</p> <ol> <li>Open the rear gate. <br /> (Refer to "Rear gate" on page 3-14.) </li> <li>Remove the 8 screws (A) from the inner surface of the rear gate. Remove the rear gate cover (B).</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/f93238fe8bd3b67c6bfccfe4daaff350687da5bc5bfb02f0e7975481c634db30.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A B A AA0096632 </details> <ol> <li>Remove the socket and bulb assembly together by turning it anticlockwise, and then remove the bulb by pulling it out.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/9389c984628da43db0d4c414b8b1e6ab1ba5ddc9ad42bd5c3c20962a6e993136.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Cross-sectional diagram of a device showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="licence-plate-lamps">Licence plate lamps</h1> <p>ED1004602123</p> <ol> <li>Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-driver into the lamp assembly and pry gently to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/e666f536920f34bb2322f66af1b02e55b92841e85cb3aa741818ef5b91246201.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Diagram showing a car door handle with a magnified inset illustrating the mechanism of lifting a seatbelt. </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/a881754e97a895acade33121ffc9b244fe58e68086ba8608ab8dabf1bec7f40a.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-432">NOTE</h1> <p>- Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens and the body.</p> <ol> <li>Remove the socket and bulb assembly together by turning it anticlockwise, and then remove the bulb by pulling it out.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/b22bc5a82255a76b9a200e1cadf77ab57e08ca4fa548600451ff31790f857c51.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/6e6eef28b7492d529b3d563e0bda0b79d593d588efeb358e3a37087d7bc316f1.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-433">NOTE</h1> <p>- When mounting the lamp unit, put the hook (A) on the right side of the lamp unit into the body first.</p> <p>Replacement of lamp bulbs</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2978bf211388b846c9405dce8ebfe2c19c6125097aed0e51d2784ba55bd50fcc.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> NOTE A AJZ101166 </details> <h1 id="front-room-lamp-and-personal-lamps">Front room lamp and personal lamps\*</h1> <p>E01004700364</p> <ol> <li>Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-driver into the notch of the lens and pry gently to remove it. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/c2f9945b70d5787f25664c28e924db6cd7fe653b2790deb23a69f04dbb5ec81f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a tool interacting with a device (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/c80bb0e09240f4fd4ed628cc826ce00b4738e86292cf4d1b9a657e8061c6f95a.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> NOTE ● Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of t screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens. 2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. NOTE ● When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on the lens with the holes on the vehicle side. </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/23dc7c73e028b4b0f450fb117a63e9fd1c9d49c0763da943e07dc77a77b4f3a2.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Diagram of a car interior layout with no visible text or symbols </details> <h1 id="rear-room-lamp">Rear room lamp\*</h1> <p>E01004901392</p> <h1 id="type-1-11">Type 1</h1> <ol> <li>Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-driver into the notch of the lens and pry</li> </ol> <p>gently to remove it. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/2c2fd8f042d18f756aa2e4460b9437630f8ecd408ea08dfc7c341dd148fdb5aa.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Diagram of a car seatbelt switch with an arrow indicating the direction (no text or symbols present) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/071288d8df29f53eed78179dd6c17921831fa6e4a9ed453866772e6e0dfe4bcd.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> NOTE ● Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of t screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens. </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/568bd0d6a3ddaa9064cbd3039ac4da5685ac46342f68db7a6e93720065d3f8e5.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> NOTE ● When installing the lens, fit the two tabs on one side of the lens into the holes on the vehicle side before fitting the two tabs on the opposite side of the lens into the holes on the vehicle side. </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/6707ad5eb03eac616b8a94a3caf76ef6bc708a0b7666a320c0c11e3fd7db5750.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> NOTE AJZ101179 </details> <h1 id="type-2-9">Type 2</h1> <ol> <li>Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-driver into the notch of the lens and pry gently to remove it. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/3497eb1adefb23bbb9c7effa049821bc9dfea1f37238f356911fd77cd40b0dd7.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Illustration of a hand gripping a device with a dashed line indicating motion (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/f3f4fc79318517f4f981219e35aa9a8a9eb69996bbfd4d3853d37cf6b41347ac.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> NOTE ● Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of t screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens. 2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse. NOTE ● When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on the lens with the holes on the vehicle side. </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/f32c4ca7a1fd7441e1c87390fd482a8c5ab6330345e2a71b1edbb66244e8d093.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a car interior showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="door-courtesy-lamps-2">Door courtesy lamps\*</h1> <ol> <li>Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-driver into the lens and pry gently to re-</li> </ol> <p>move it. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/dfa7d0bc0788e403569b6851ff8b0d10f7266c123af9bc73278c07994044916f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Medical illustration showing a surgical instrument interacting with a joint, with no visible text or symbols </details> <table><tr><td>NOTE</td></tr><tr><td>● Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of t screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens.</td></tr></table> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="replacement-of-lamp-bulbs-6">Replacement of lamp bulbs</h1> <p><img alt="" src="images/01f3745b7fb7cf7e9587ad637526691082f3c460023c1a1b434ae95a544d9411.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-434">NOTE</h1> <p>- When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on the lens with the holes on the vehicle side.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/dfbb832f83b9eda30a4404c7289d1c5dd603a88d239dfa0eab67dcb4b9206785.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Diagram of a mechanical component with two upward arrows indicating motion or force, mounted on a curved surface (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="glove-box-lamp">Glove box lamp</h1> <p>ED1006100069</p> <p>We recommend you to have the glove box lamp replaced by a specialist.</p> <h1 id="centre-console-downlight-2">Centre console downlight</h1> <p>E01008700144</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/bae94e4727471927a78e0418efd78664f0bd2fed73159216afeb68db10018cce.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> Type 1 Type 2 AA0096582 </details> <h1 id="type-1-12">Type 1</h1> <p>We recommend you to have the centre console downlight replaced by a specialist.</p> <h1 id="type-2-10">Type 2</h1> <ol> <li>Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-driver with a cloth over its tip at edge of the garnish (A) and pry gently to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/7a000b5be09de98494ab48e65be4bc02e20bc402c444ad420afc902f557add33.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A AA0096850 </details> <ol> <li>Turn the bulb socket (B) anticlockwise to remove it.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/91f72aaa4a70d06cae2258badb73e81330ae0ed4158213a5822cbf6110c0d3d5.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> B AA0096863 </details> <ol> <li>Remove the bulb by pulling out.</li> </ol> <p><img alt="" src="images/ab8ec6d640c1a2f98cbff732aff392e504f6a6cdcf621ac06bd5a62c35f71e4f.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Simple line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols) </details> <ol> <li>To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.</li> </ol> <h1 id="specifications">Specifications</h1> <p>Vehicle labeling....11-02</p> <p>Vehicle dimensions....11-04</p> <p>Vehicle performance.... 11-10</p> <p>Vehicle weight.... 11-11</p> <p>Engine specifications.... 11-16</p> <p>Transmission specifications.... 11-17</p> <p>Electrical system.... 11-18</p> <p>Tyres and wheels....11-19</p> <p>Other specifications....11-19</p> <p>Fuel consumption....11-20</p> <p>Refill capacities....11-22</p> <p>Vehicle labeling</p> <h1 id="vehicle-labeling">Vehicle labeling</h1> <p>E01100101791</p> <h1 id="vehicle-identification-number">Vehicle identification number</h1> <p>The vehicle identification number is stamped as shown in the illustration.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/8a1a6cc334491804aa88f1c10102d3363708f016679119fa3b746daeef8575fd.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a car wheel with a black arrow pointing to the wheel rim (no text or symbols present) </details> <h1 id="vehicle-information-code-plate">Vehicle information code plate</h1> <p>The vehicle information code plate is located as shown in the illustration.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d8dba361f68c8942f31065387faec17d070095da4b3e27e18ff5d1045d02ccaf.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a car interior with a highlighted component (no text or symbols) </details> <p>The plate shows model code and engine model, transmission model and body colour code, etc.</p> <p>Please use this number when ordering replacement parts.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7af1b097fbdc11e2f638f34419a3dfed749a37f94180f9b842ae8d7775a999b5.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> MITSUBISHI MOTORS (THAILAND)CO.LTD. MODEL 1 2 ENGINE TRANS AXLE COLOR TRIM OPT 3 4 5 6 AA0049128 </details> <p>1- Model code <br /> 2- Engine model code <br /> 3- Transmission model code <br /> 4- Body colour code <br /> 5- Interior code <br /> 6- Option code</p> <h1 id="vehicle-identification-number-plate-rhd-vehicles-only">Vehicle identification number plate (RHD vehicles only)</h1> <p>The vehicle identification number is stamped on the plate riveted to the left front corner of the instrument panel pad. It is visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind-screen.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/4893292a56652ef6b4070c76f055655916487b044168d89e21cad93ac31587d9.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and steering wheel (no text or symbols) </details> <h1 id="engine-number">Engine number</h1> <p>The engine number is stamped on the engine cylinder block as shown in the illustration.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/555bbb27043d6ce9c186b600df7947ed4cb41b6f8784ded844271cb6bbfc2856.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols </details> <h1 id="vehicle-dimensions">Vehicle dimensions</h1> <p>101100204070</p> <p>Single Cab <br /> <img alt="" src="images/ff6fa9790caedf975f035242b23635b7e64f5457f63402dbfeaf86a3dcf7d086.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Front view line drawing of a car showing rear wheel, side seats, and front bumper (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/e30be79a823dc96b9b03934876c65698915e415ab3a50a1fb2de522800fbddf2.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Top-down line drawing of a car showing front and side views with dimension label (11) — no text or symbols present. </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/ee3412f158debb540d8cbb6b6d5247371910f9bc55361257324ba5d5a7916d08.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 2 8 1 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/c3eec156a5cd9f38876a01d91de6834d152e918f16cb9c7f530fea25cb2e4184.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 10 12 3 4 5 6 </details> <p>Single cab </p> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Item 2WD 4WD</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">1 Front track 1,505 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">2 Overall width 1,750 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">3 Front overhang 830 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">4 Wheel base 3,000 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">5 Rear overhang 1,210 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">6 Overall length 5,040 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">8 Overall height (unladen) 1,655 mm 1,775 mm</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">9 Rear track 1,500 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">10 Cargo bed length 2,220 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">11 Cargo bed width 1,470 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">12 Cargo bed height 715 mm 845 mm</td><td></td><td></td></tr></table> <h1 id="vehicle-dimensions-2">Vehicle dimensions</h1> <p>Club cab <br /> <img alt="" src="images/197ada6f9a24122cd14faee693377269545c6fc18dcc91937e3c2ba773696f41.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Top-down line drawing of a car front view with dimension annotations (7 and 9) — no text or symbols present. </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/9ef02d167b1715793662002ad0b77a59389642ea37754e8464071f15fd7257f1.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Top-down line drawing of a car showing front and side views with dimension标注 (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/7e45dafb01afb46c093d337e7437f4cc7f3108c37f94d95832ab8523058c0cad.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 2 8 1 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/30983d81a9971a53f3e684bf806b7b0535611e8f2a5a8b060778af50cd109251.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 10 12 3 4 5 6 </details> <p>AA5010194</p> <p>Vehicle dimensions</p> <p>Club cab </p> <table><tr><td colspan="3">Item Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">1 Front track 1,505 mm 1,520 mm</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">2 Overall width 1,750 mm 1,815 mm</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">3 Front overhang 795 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">4 Wheel base 3,000 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">5 Rear overhang</td><td colspan="2">Without rear bumper 1,325 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">With rear bumper 1,400 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">6 Overall length</td><td colspan="2">Without rear bumper 5,120 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">With rear bumper 5,195 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm 205 mm</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">8 Overall height (unladen)</td><td> 1,775 mm, 1,790 mm^*1 </td><td>1,780 mm</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">9 Rear track 1,500 mm 1,515 mm</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">10 Cargo bed length 1,805 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">11 Cargo bed width</td><td colspan="2">1,470 mm</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">12 Cargo bed height</td><td>855 mm 860 mm</td><td></td></tr></table> <p>*1: Vehicles with rear guard frame</p> <h1 id="vehicle-dimensions-3">Vehicle dimensions</h1> <p>Double cab <br /> <img alt="" src="images/a94cd57433f3215c72d0992778aeb78646e0279f4c03a5055ebfe6294f9444f6.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Top-down line drawing of a car showing rear wheel, front wheel, and side-mounted chassis (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/21c8bf5ed9966bd045f889b31f61c2686c2a8ac285924465e7c2e12cf764fc14.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>natural_image</summary> Top-down line drawing of a car showing front and side views with dimension标注 (no text or symbols) </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/7b1224e11919f677852fe440b5e39f7652251c87ad8da5e0b7ad5fead418aac9.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 2 8 1 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/91d9df4229ad297155c4b1f50d6bc3e16a19c5ddafc77c6da887a1413a4160eb.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> 10 12 3 4 5 6 </details> <p>AA5010165</p> <p>Double cab </p> <table><tr><td colspan="4">Item 2WD and Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">1 Front track</td><td>1,505 mm, 1,520 mm^*1 , *2</td><td>1,520 mm</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">2 Overall width</td><td>1,750 mm, 1,815 mm^*1 , *2</td><td>1,815 mm</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">3 Front overhang</td><td colspan="2">795 mm, 830 mm^*3 , *4</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">4 Wheel base 3,000 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">5 Rear overhang</td><td colspan="2">Without rear bumper</td><td colspan="2">1,210 mm, 1,390 mm^*5 </td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">With rear bumper</td><td colspan="2">1,285 mm, 1,465 mm^*5 </td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">6 Overall length</td><td colspan="2">Without rear bumper</td><td colspan="2">5,005 mm, 5,185 mm^*5 , 5,040 mm^*3 , *4, 5,220 mm^*6 , *7</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">With rear bumper</td><td colspan="2">5,080 mm, 5,260 mm^*5 , 5,115 mm^*3 , 5,295 mm^*6 </td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">7 Ground clearance (unladen)</td><td>200 mm, 205 mm^*1 , *2</td><td>205 mm</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">8 Overall height (unladen)</td><td>1,775 mm, 1,655 mm^*4 , 1,780 mm^*1 , *2</td><td>1,780 mm</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">9 Rear track</td><td>1,500 mm, 1,515 mm^*1 , *2</td><td>1,515 mm</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">10 Cargo bed length</td><td colspan="2">1,325 mm, 1,505 mm^*5 </td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">11 Cargo bed width 1,470 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr></table> <p>^*1 : 2WD vehicles with 16 inch tyres <br /> *2: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine with wide fender <br /> *3: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine without wide fender <br /> *4: 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres <br /> *5: Vehicles with long bed <br /> *6: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine with long bed and without wide fender <br /> *7: 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres and long bed</p> <p>Vehicle performance </p> <table><tr><td>12 Cargo bed height</td><td>845 mm, 715 mm^*4 , 850 mm^*1 , *2</td><td>850 mm</td></tr></table> <p>*1: 2WD vehicles with 16 inch tyres</p> <p>*2: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine with wide fender</p> <p>*3: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine without wide fender</p> <p>*4: 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres</p> <p>*5: Vehicles with long bed</p> <p>*6: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine with long bed and without wide fender</p> <p>*7: 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres and long bed</p> <p>Vehicle performance <br /> E01100302442 </p> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Item M/T A/T</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Maximum speed</td><td>Vehicles with standard power engine</td><td>167 km/h (104 mph), 164 km/h (102 mph)* ^1 </td><td>166 km/h (102 mph), 165 km/h (102 mph)* ^2 </td></tr><tr><td>Vehicles with high power engine</td><td>179 km/h (111 mph) 175 km/h (109 mph)</td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Minimum turning radius</td><td>Body</td><td colspan="2">6.3 m, 6.1 m* ^1 </td></tr><tr><td>Wheel</td><td colspan="2">5.9 m, 5.7 m* ^1 </td></tr></table> <p>^*1 : 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres</p> <p>*2: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine</p> <h1 id="vehicle-weight">Vehicle weight</h1> <p>E01100406917</p> <p>Single cab </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">Item 2WD</td><td rowspan="2"></td><td colspan="2">4WD</td></tr><tr><td>LHD RHD</td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Kerb weight</td><td colspan="2">Without optional parts 1,560 kg 1,745 kg</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">With full optional parts 1,580 kg 1,810 kg 1,795 kg</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,630 kg 2,850 kg 2,890 kg</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Maximum axle weight</td><td>Front 1,030 kg 1,260 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td>Rear 1,700 kg 1,800 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Maximum towable weight</td><td>With brake 1,800 kg 2,700 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td>Without brake 750 kg</td><td colspan="3"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum trailer-nose weight 77 kg 115 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum gross combination weight 4,400 kg 5,500 kg 5,540 kg</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum permissible weight of the coupling device 45 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2">45 kg*1</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Seating capacity (including a driver)</td><td colspan="3">2 persons, 3 persons*2</td></tr></table> <p>*1: Crossmember (weight = 10 kg) must be dismounted <br /> *2: Vehicles equipped with bench seat</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/7d47c864570fd7b30406e5d5015e2af773561f9a89f8baa63d9571a2bb0a6392.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-435">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer's recommendation. </li> <li>When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time.</li> </ul> <p>Vehicle weight</p> <p>Club cab </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">Item</td><td colspan="2">Easy select 4WD</td><td rowspan="2">Super select 4WD</td></tr><tr><td>LHD RHD</td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Kerb weight</td><td colspan="3">Without optional parts 1,800 kg 1,815 kg</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">With full optional parts 1,905 kg 1,885 kg 1,910 kg</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,850 kg</td><td colspan="3"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Maximum axle weight</td><td>Front 1,260 kg</td><td colspan="3"></td></tr><tr><td>Rear 1,800 kg</td><td colspan="3"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Maximum towable weight</td><td>With brake 2,700 kg</td><td colspan="2"></td><td>2,700 kg, 3,000 kg*1</td></tr><tr><td>Without brake 750 kg</td><td colspan="3"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum trailer-nose weight 115 kg</td><td colspan="2"></td><td>115 kg, 128 kg*1</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum gross combination weight 5,500 kg</td><td colspan="2"></td><td>5,500 kg, 5,700 kg*1</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum permissible weight of the coupling device</td><td colspan="3">45 kg*2</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Seating capacity (including a driver) 4 persons</td><td colspan="3"></td></tr></table> <p>^<em>1 : Vehicles equipped with the towing capacity up option <br /> ^</em>2 : Crossmember (weight = 10 kg) must be dismounted</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/d32589e92ea24d5ec7d2fbabc34be93105ecef361e3e7c97c999b0acd116a53e.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-436">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer's recommendation. </li> <li>When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time.</li> </ul> <p>Double cab </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="3" colspan="3">Item</td><td colspan="3">2WD</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">M/T</td><td rowspan="2">A/T</td></tr><tr><td>Vehicles with 15 inch tyres</td><td>Vehicles with 16 inch tyres</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Kerb weight</td><td colspan="2">Without optional parts 1,650 kg 1,730 kg 1,745 kg</td><td>kg</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">With full optional parts 1,710 kg 1,840 kg 1,855 kg</td><td>kg</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,630 kg 2,800 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">Maximum axle weight</td><td>Front 1,030 kg 1,260 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td>Rear 1,700 kg 1,800 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">Maximum towable weight</td><td>With brake 1,800 kg 2,700 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td>Without brake 750 kg</td><td colspan="3"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Maximum trailer-nose weight 75 kg 112 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Maximum gross combination weight 4,400 kg 5,465 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Maximum permissible weight of the coupling device 45 kg</td><td></td><td colspan="2">45 kg*</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Seating capacity (including a driver) 5 persons</td><td colspan="3"></td></tr></table> <p>*: Crossmember (weight = 10 kg) must be dismounted</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/93b6ae8c84c7b58519df00555b92a5e0f183d3abcc2b11079fa2c9b801406d21.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-437">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer's recommendation. </li> <li>When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time.</li> </ul> <p>Vehicle weight </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="4" colspan="3">Item</td><td colspan="7">4WD</td></tr><tr><td colspan="7">Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">M/T</td><td rowspan="2">A/TLHD RHD</td><td colspan="2">M/T A/T</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td>LHD RHD</td><td>LHD RHD</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Kerb weight</td><td colspan="2">Without optional parts 1,870</td><td>kg,1,835 kg*1</td><td>1,830 kg 1,</td><td>860 kg 1,880 kg</td><td>g,1,890 kg*2,1,875 kg*1</td><td>1,875 kg 1,</td><td>905 kg,1,895 kg*1,1,910 kg*2*1</td><td>1,885 kg,1,890 kg*3</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">With full optional parts 2,005 kg,1,955 kg*1</td><td>kg,1,955 kg*1</td><td>1,965 kg 1,</td><td>995 kg 2,030 kg</td><td>g,2,000 kg*1</td><td>2,020 kg 2,</td><td>035 kg,2,010 kg*1</td><td>2,030 kg,2,020 kg*3</td></tr><tr><td colspan="7">Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,850 kg 2,900 kg 2,850 kg 2,930 kg 2,850 kg 2,945 kg</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">Maximum axle weight</td><td>Front 1,260 kg</td><td colspan="7"></td></tr><tr><td>Rear 1,800 kg</td><td colspan="7"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">Maximum towable weight</td><td colspan="4">With brake 2,700 kg</td><td colspan="4">2,700 kg, 3,000 kg*4</td></tr><tr><td>Withoutbrake</td><td colspan="7">750 kg</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Maximum trailer-nose weight 115 kg</td><td colspan="3"></td><td colspan="4">115 kg, 128 kg*4</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Maximum gross combination weight 5,500</td><td colspan="2">kg 5,550 kg 5,500 kg</td><td></td><td>5,500 kg,5,700 kg*4</td><td>5,580 kg,5,700 kg*4</td><td>5,500 kg,5,700 kg*4</td><td>5,595 kg,5,700 kg*4</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Maximum permissible weight of the coupling device</td><td colspan="7">45 kg*5</td></tr></table> <p>*1: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine</p> <p>*2: Vehicles with high power engine</p> <p>*3: Vehicles for Singapore</p> <p>*4: Vehicles equipped with the towing capacity up option</p> <p>*5: Crossmember (weight = 10 kg) must be dismounted</p> <p>Vehicle weight </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="4">Item</td><td colspan="7">4WD</td></tr><tr><td colspan="7">Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">M/T</td><td rowspan="2">A/TLHD RHD</td><td colspan="2">M/T A/T</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td>LHD RHD</td><td>LHD RHD</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="8">Seating capacity (including a driver) 5 persons</td></tr></table> <p>*1: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine</p> <p>*2: Vehicles with high power engine</p> <p>^*3 : Vehicles for Singapore</p> <p>*4: Vehicles equipped with the towing capacity up option</p> <p>*5: Crossmember (weight = 10 kg) must be dismounted</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/6c52d69acc2c4d322002ebd2f004c6b19d3b8b4683a9d8754bc217f52b58ef8d.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-438">NOTE</h1> <ul> <li>Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer's recommendation. </li> <li>When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time.</li> </ul> <p>Engine specifications</p> <p>Engine specifications <br /> 101100604045 </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">Item</td><td colspan="4">Standard power engine High power engine</td></tr><tr><td>2WD with 15 inch tyres</td><td>2WD with 16 inch tyres, 4WD</td><td>M/T A/T</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Engine type Four-cylinder, in line,</td><td>water cooled four-cycle, double overhead camshaft with small-sized intercooler and turbocharger</td><td colspan="3">Four-cylinder, in line, water cooled four-cycle, double overhead camshaft with intercooler and turbocharger</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Engine models 4D56Total displacement 2,477 ccBore 91.1 mmStroke 95.0 mm</td><td colspan="4"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Compression ratio</td><td colspan="2">16.5:1, 17.0:1*1</td><td colspan="2">16.5:1</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Valve clearance</td><td>Intake 0.09 mm (cold)</td><td colspan="4"></td></tr><tr><td>Exhaust 0.14 mm (cold)</td><td colspan="4"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum output (EEC net) 94 kW/4,000 r/min</td><td>100 kW/4,000 r/min,</td><td>100 kW/3,500 r/min*2</td><td colspan="2">131 kW/3,750 r/min, 131 kW/4,000 r/min*2</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Maximum torque (EEC net) 240 Nm/1,250 to</td><td>3,750 r/min</td><td>314 Nm/1,500 to 2,680 r/min, 314 Nm/2,000 r/min*2</td><td>400 Nm/2,000 to 2,850 r/min</td><td>350 Nm/1,800 to 3,500 r/min</td></tr></table> <p>*1: Vehicles to comply with the Euro 3 or Euro 4 regulation <br /> *2: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine</p> <p>Transmission specifications <br /> E01100702693 </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="4" colspan="2">Item</td><td colspan="5">M/T A/T</td><td colspan="4"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">2WD 4WD</td><td colspan="3"></td><td rowspan="3">2WD</td><td colspan="3">4WD</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Vehicles with 15 inch tyres</td><td rowspan="2">Vehicles with 16 inch tyres</td><td rowspan="2">Easy select 4WD</td><td colspan="2">Super select 4WD</td><td rowspan="2">Easy select 4WD</td><td colspan="2">Super select 4WD</td></tr><tr><td>High power engine</td><td>Standard power engine</td><td colspan="2">4A/T 5A/T</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="6">Transmission</td><td> 1^st gear ratio</td><td colspan="5">4.313 2.842 3.789</td><td colspan="3"></td><td></td></tr><tr><td> 2^nd gear ratio</td><td colspan="5">2.330 1.495 2.057</td><td colspan="3"></td><td></td></tr><tr><td> 3^rd gear ratio</td><td colspan="5">1.436 1.000 1.421</td><td colspan="3"></td><td></td></tr><tr><td> 4^th gear ratio</td><td colspan="5">1.000 0.731 1.000</td><td colspan="3"></td><td></td></tr><tr><td> 5^th gear ratio</td><td colspan="5">0.788 — 0.731</td><td colspan="3"></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Reverse gear ratio</td><td colspan="5">4.220 2.720 3.865</td><td colspan="3"></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Transfer</td><td>High gear ratio</td><td colspan="5">— 1.000 — 1.000</td><td></td><td colspan="3"></td></tr><tr><td>Low gear ratio</td><td colspan="5">— 1.900 — 1.900</td><td></td><td colspan="3"></td></tr></table> <p>*: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine</p> <p>Electrical system </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="4">Item</td><td colspan="5">M/T A/T</td><td colspan="4"></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">2WD 4WD</td><td colspan="3"></td><td rowspan="3">2WD</td><td colspan="3">4WD</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Vehicles with 15 inch tyres</td><td rowspan="2">Vehicles with 16 inch tyres</td><td rowspan="2">Easy select 4WD</td><td colspan="2">Super select 4WD</td><td rowspan="2">Easy select 4WD</td><td colspan="2">Super select 4WD</td></tr><tr><td>High power engine</td><td>Standard power engine</td><td colspan="2">4A/T 5A/T</td></tr><tr><td>Final gear ratio 3.909 3.9</td><td>7 3.917,</td><td colspan="3"></td><td> 4.100^a </td><td>4.100 3.9</td><td>17, 4.100^a </td><td>4.100 3.9</td><td>17</td></tr></table> <p>*: Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan and Ukraine</p> <p>Electrical system <br /> E01100803835 </p> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Voltage 12 V</td><td colspan="2"></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Battery</td><td>Type (JIS) 95D31L 80D26L</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Capacity (5HR) 64 Ah 55 Ah</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Alternator capacity</td><td>Vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, Ukraine, Morocco and Turkey</td><td>90 A 120 A</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Except for vehicles for Russia, Kazakhstan, Ukraine, Morocco and Turkey</td><td>95 A 130 A</td><td></td></tr></table> <p>Tyres and wheels <br /> E01100902204 </p> <table><tr><td colspan="2">Tyre 195R15C 106/104R</td><td>8PR,215/70R15C 109/107R*</td><td>205/80R16 104S RF, 205R16C 110/108R 8PR</td><td>245/70R16 111S RF</td><td>245/65R17 111S RF</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Wheel</td><td>Size 15x6JJ 16x6JJ 16x</td><td>7J 17x7 1/2J</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Offset 46 mm 38 mm</td><td colspan="2"></td><td colspan="2"></td></tr></table> <p>*: On vehicles with 195 size tyres, this size of snow tyres can also be used instead.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/baf34fa8adeebde91473a95be8e55be9f5a1478138925e42f3791952c6f81eab.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-439">NOTE</h1> <p>- Contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point for details on the combination used on your vehicle.</p> <p>Other specifications <br /> E01101000862 </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="2">Fuel system</td><td colspan="2">Fuel control Direct injection common rail system</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Fuel pump Electronic controlled rotary type</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Clutch Dry single disc clutch with diaphragm spring, hydraulic action</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Steering system Rack & pinion type, power assisted</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Suspension</td><td colspan="2">Front Independent type, wishbone, coil spring</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Rear Rigid type, leaf spring</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Service brakes</td><td rowspan="2">Type</td><td>Vehicles without ABS Hydraulic, front and rear split double circuit system with power assistance</td></tr><tr><td>Vehicles with ABS Hydraulic, diagonal split double circuit system with power assistance</td></tr></table> <p>Fuel consumption </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="2"></td><td>Front Ventilated disc brakes</td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Rear Drum brakes</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">Parking brakes Parking brake acts mechanically on rear wheels</td><td></td></tr></table> <p>Fuel consumption <br /> E0110110082 </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="4">Item</td><td colspan="2">Combined</td><td>Urban conditions</td><td>Extra-urban conditions</td></tr><tr><td> CO_2(g/km) </td><td>Fuel consumption (L/100 km)</td><td>Fuel consumption (L/100 km)</td><td>Fuel consumption (L/100 km)</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="3">Single cab</td><td colspan="3">2WD 190 7.2 9.1 6.1</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">4WD</td><td>Standard 195 7.4</td><td>8.7 6.7</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Full option 199 7.5</td><td>8.9 6.8</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="3">Club cab</td><td>Standard 199 7.5</td><td>8.9 6.8</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Full option 204 7.7</td><td>9.1 7.0</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="7">Double cab 2WD</td><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">with 15 inch tyres</td><td>Standard 190 7.2</td><td>9.1 6.1</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Full option 194 7.4</td><td>9.2 6.3</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="4">2WD with 16 inch tyres</td><td rowspan="2">M/T</td><td>Standard 195 7.4</td><td>8.7 6.7</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Full option 204 7.7</td><td>9.1 7.0</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">A/T</td><td>Standard 222 8.4</td><td>10.2 7.4</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Full option 227 8.6</td><td>10.5 7.6</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>4WD M/T</td><td></td><td>Standard</td><td>199, 204*</td><td>7.5, 7.7*</td><td>8.9, 9.1*</td><td>6.8, 7.0*</td></tr></table> <p>*: Vehicles with wide fender</p> <p>Fuel consumption </p> <table><tr><td rowspan="2" colspan="4">Item</td><td colspan="2">Combined</td><td>Urban conditions</td><td>Extra-urban conditions</td></tr><tr><td> CO_2 (g/km)</td><td>Fuel consumption (L/100 km)</td><td>Fuel consumption (L/100 km)</td><td>Fuel consumption (L/100 km)</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="3"></td><td rowspan="3"></td><td></td><td>Full option 208 7</td><td>9.9.2 7.2</td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">A/T</td><td>Standard</td><td>222, 225*</td><td>8.4, 8.5*</td><td>10.2</td><td>7.4, 7.6*</td></tr><tr><td>Full option</td><td>234, 233*</td><td>8.9, 8.8*</td><td>10.8, 10.6*</td><td>7.8, 7.9*</td></tr></table> <p>*: Vehicles with wide fender</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/4082ab270e437d551081595e3471bea9500caf9ef77a3d84d76bf2c8129740e6.jpg" /></p> <h1 id="note-440">NOTE</h1> <p>● The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the fuel consumption of the particular vehicle.</p> <p>The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In addition, this vehicle may incorporate particular modifications. Furthermore, the driver's style and road and traffic conditions, as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven and the standard of maintenance, will all affect its fuel consumption.</p> <h1 id="refill-capacities">Refill capacities</h1> <p>101101305785</p> <p>LHD <br /> <img alt="" src="images/3e1583b47e05f529cf944b7caf00e6e29c2aefce347df17deef43662eb977c11.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> M/T 1 3 4 5 6 1 7 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/3c187909f3314ec61844cd6309e66122b7ced8f9ed1eef0cda9565996c19e179.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A/T 1 2 3 5 6 1 7 </details> <p>RHD <br /> <img alt="" src="images/5ea714cc5415f1b3474530d29e68a5399f9643f09cee4616336390a188a1f67c.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> M/T 1 3 4 5 6 1 7 </details> <p><img alt="" src="images/4f7349644d47adf540953333ccc1cdecde03c90718e532607f3d8aa50d5a6fee.jpg" /></p> <details> <summary>text_image</summary> A/T 1 2 3 5 6 1 7 </details> <p>AA5004072</p> <p>Refill capacities </p> <table><tr><td>No.Item</td><td colspan="3">mQuantityLubricants</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">1 Engine coolant</td><td>8.2 litres [includes 0.65 litre in the reserve tank]</td><td>MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENU-INE SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT or equivalent</td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">2 Automatic transmission fluid 9.7 litres Refer to page 10-07.</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">3 Brake fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">4 Clutch fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">5 Power steering fluid As required</td><td></td><td>MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENU-INE PSF (Power Steering Fluid)</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="4">6 Engine oil</td><td rowspan="2" colspan="2">Oil pan</td><td>2WD with 15 inch tyres 6.5 litres</td><td></td><td rowspan="4">Refer to page 10-04.</td></tr><tr><td>2WD with 16 inch tyres, 4WD 5.5 litres</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Oil filter 0.8 litre</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Oil cooler 0.1 litre</td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">7 Washer fluid</td><td>4.8 litres, 4.5 litres*1</td><td>—</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">8</td><td rowspan="2">Manual transmis-sion oil</td><td colspan="2">2WD 2.3 litres</td><td></td><td rowspan="2">MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENU-INE MTF API classification GL-3 SAE 75W-85</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">4WD 3.4 litres</td><td></td></tr></table> <p>*1: Vehicles with "front (Type 1)" (Refer to "Outside" on page 10-25) <br /> ^*2 : 4WD vehicles only <br /> *3: Double cab with capacity up air conditioning</p> <p>Refill capacities </p> <table><tr><td colspan="5">No.ItemQuantityLubricants</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td colspan="5">9 Transfer oil 2.5 litres</td><td></td><td>MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENU-INE MTF API classification GL-3 SAE 75W-85 orMITSUBISHI MOTORS GENU-INE Multi Gear Oil API classifi-cation GL-4 SAE 75W-85</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="4">10 Differential oil</td><td colspan="4">Front*2</td><td rowspan="4">1.2 litres</td><td rowspan="4">MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENU-INE Super Hypoid Gear Oil API classification GL-5 SAE 80</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="3">Rear</td><td rowspan="2">Standard power en-gine</td><td>2WD with 15 inch tyres 1.5</td><td>litres</td></tr><tr><td>2WD with 16 inch tyres, 4WD</td><td rowspan="2">2.1 litres</td></tr><tr><td colspan="2">High power engine</td></tr><tr><td colspan="5">11 Refrigerant (air conditioning)</td><td>480-520 g, 535-575 g*3</td><td>HFC-134a</td></tr></table> <p>*1: Vehicles with "front (Type 1)" (Refer to "Outside" on page 10-25) <br /> ^<em>2 : 4WD vehicles only <br /> ^</em>3 : Double cab with capacity up air conditioning</p> <h1 id="alphabetical-index">Alphabetical index</h1> <h1 id="4-3">4</h1> <p>4-wheel drive operation....6-38</p> <h1 id="a">A</h1> <p>Accessory (Installation)....2-03</p> <p>Accessory socket.... 7-109</p> <p>Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)....6-48</p> <p>Additional equipment....10-20</p> <p>Air conditioning</p> <p>Automatic air conditioning.... 7-09</p> <p>Important operation tips for the air conditioning....7-14</p> <p>Manual air conditioning....7-04</p> <p>Air purifier....7-14</p> <p>Airbag....4-28</p> <p>Antenna....7-83</p> <p>Anti-lock brake system (ABS).... 6-45</p> <p>Warning lamp....6-46</p> <p>Armrest (Double cab)....4-08</p> <p>Ashtray....7-107</p> <p>Audio</p> <p>Audio system anti-theft feature....7-49</p> <p>CD player....7-51</p> <p>Error codes.... 7-47</p> <p>Handling of compact discs....7-49</p> <p>LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player.... 7-15</p> <p>LW/MW/FM radio....7-51</p> <p>Steering wheel remote control switch...7-44,7-63 Troubleshooting.... 7-80</p> <p>Automatic air conditioning....7-09</p> <p>Automatic transmission Sports Mode</p> <p>4A/T, 5A/T....6-19</p> <p>Fluid....10-07,11-22</p> <p>Selector lever operation.... 6-19</p> <p>Selector lever position indicator.... 6-20</p> <p>Selector lever positions.... 6-20</p> <p>Sports mode.... 6-21</p> <p>Sports mode indicator.... 6-22</p> <h1 id="b">B</h1> <p>Battery.... 10-10</p> <p>Discharged battery (Emergency starting)..... 8-02</p> <p>Specification.... 11-18</p> <p>Bleeding the fuel system.... 8-05</p> <p>Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.... 7-84</p> <p>Bonnet.... 10-03</p> <p>Bottle holder....7-115</p> <p>Brake</p> <p>Anti-lock brake.... 6-45</p> <p>Brake assist system.... 6-44</p> <p>Braking....6-43</p> <p>Fluid....10-08,11-22</p> <p>Parking brake.... 6-07</p> <p>Parking brake lever stroke.... 10-17</p> <p>Pedal free play....10-17</p> <p>Warning lamp....5-08</p> <h1 id="c">C</h1> <p>Cargo loads....6-55</p> <p>Catalytic converter.... 10-02</p> <p>Cautions on handling of 4-wheel</p> <p>drive vehicles.... 6-41</p> <p>Central door locks.... 3-07</p> <p>Centre console downlight....7-111</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-38</p> <p>Centre information display....5-10</p> <p>Changing a fuse....10-23</p> <p>Changing gears....6-16</p> <p>Check engine warning lamp....5-08</p> <p>Child restraint....4-14</p> <p>Child-protection rear doors.... 3-08</p> <p>Cigarette lighter....7-108</p> <p>Cleaning</p> <p>Exterior of your vehicle.... 9-03</p> <p>Genuine leather....9-03</p> <p>Interior of your vehicle.... 9-02</p> <p>Plastic, vinyl leather, etc.... 9-02</p> <p>Sunroof....9-06</p> <p>Waxing....9-04</p> <p>Clock.... 5-20,7-109</p> <p>Clutch</p> <p>Fluid....10-09,11-22</p> <p>Pedal free play....10-16</p> <p>Coat hook....7-116</p> <p>Combination headlamps and dipper switch..... 5-32</p> <p>Convenient hook....7-116</p> <p>Coolant (engine)....10-06,11-22</p> <p>Cruise control....6-50</p> <p>Switch....6-51</p> <p>Cup holder....7-115</p> <p>Curtain airbag system....4-37</p> <h1 id="d">D</h1> <p>Demister (rear window).... 5-43</p> <h1 id="alphabetical-index-2">Alphabetical index</h1> <p>Diesel particulate filter (DPF).... 6-15</p> <p>Differential oil.... 11-22</p> <p>Digital clock....5-20,7-109</p> <p>Time Setting....7-78</p> <p>Dimensions....11-04</p> <p>Dipper (High/Low beam change)....5-34</p> <p>Door courtesy lamps....7-111</p> <p>Replacement....10-37</p> <p>Doors</p> <p>Central door locks.... 3-07</p> <p>Child-protection.... 3-08</p> <p>Lock and unlock....3-06</p> <p>Driving, alcohol and drugs.... 6-02</p> <h1 id="e">E</h1> <p>Easy select 4WD....6-25</p> <p>Economical driving....6-02</p> <p>Electric window control.... 3-08</p> <p>Switch.... 3-08</p> <p>Electrical system.... 11-18</p> <p>Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft</p> <p>starting system).... 3-02</p> <p>Emergency starting....8-02</p> <p>Engine specifications....11-16</p> <p>Engine</p> <p>Coolant....10-06,11-22</p> <p>Number.... 11-03</p> <p>Oil....10-04,11-22</p> <p>Overheating....8-04</p> <p>Specifications....11-16</p> <p>Used engine oils safety instructions</p> <p>and disposal information.... 2-05</p> <p>Water temperature gauge.... 5-05</p> <p>Error codes.... 7-47</p> <p>Exterior and interior lamp operation.... 10-20</p> <h1 id="f">F</h1> <p>First-aid kit and warning triangle</p> <p>and for securing.... 7-117</p> <p>Floor console box.... 7-113</p> <p>Fluid</p> <p>Automatic transmission fluid......10-07,11-22</p> <p>Brake fluid.... 10-08.11-22</p> <p>Clutch fluid.... 10-09,11-22</p> <p>Engine coolant.... 10-06,11-22</p> <p>Power steering fluid....10-10,11-22</p> <p>Washer fluid.... 10-08,11-22</p> <p>For cold and snowy weather....10-20</p> <p>Front console box.... 7-113</p> <p>Front fog lamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-25</p> <p>Indication lamp.... 5-07</p> <p>Replacement....10-30</p> <p>Switch....5-37</p> <p>Front room lamp</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-36</p> <p>Front seat.... 4-04</p> <p>Front turn-signal lamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-25</p> <p>Replacement....10-29</p> <p>Frozen road warning....5-16</p> <p>Fuel consumption.... 11-20</p> <p>Fuel</p> <p>Filling the fuel tank....2-02</p> <p>Fuel filter indication lamp....5-08</p> <p>Fuel gauge....5-04</p> <p>Fuel selection.... 2-02</p> <p>Low fuel warning lamp....5-05</p> <p>Modification/alterations to the</p> <p>electrical or fuel systems.... 2-04</p> <p>Tank capacity.... 2-02</p> <p>Fuses....10-20</p> <p>Fusible links.... 10-20</p> <h1 id="g">G</h1> <p>Gauges....5-02</p> <p>General maintenance.... 10-19</p> <p>General vehicle data.... 11-04</p> <p>Genuine parts....2-04</p> <p>Glove box....7-112</p> <p>Glove box lamp</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-38</p> <h1 id="h">H</h1> <p>Handling of compact discs.... 7-49</p> <p>Hazard warning flasher switch....5-37</p> <p>Hazard warning indication lamps....5-07</p> <p>Head restraints....4-08</p> <p>Headlamp levelling switch.... 5-35</p> <p>Headlamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-25</p> <p>Headlamp flasher.... 5-35</p> <p>Replacement....10-27</p> <p>Switch.... 5-32</p> <p>Washer switch....5-42</p> <p>Heated mirror.... 6-11</p> <p>Heated seats....4-07</p> <p>Heater....7-04</p> <p>High-mounted stop lamp</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-34</p> <p>Hinges and latches lubrication.... 10-20</p> <p>Hooks</p> <p>Coat hook....7-116</p> <p>Convenient hook.... 7-116</p> <p>Horn switch.... 5-44</p> <h1 id="i">I</h1> <p>If the vehicle breaks down.... 8-02</p> <p>Ignition switch....6-12</p> <p>Indication and warning lamps.... 5-06</p> <p>Indication lamps.... 5-07</p> <p>Inside rear-view mirror....6-09</p> <p>Inspection and maintenance following</p> <p>rough road operation....6-41</p> <p>Installation of accessories....2-03</p> <p>Instruments.... 5-02</p> <p>Interior lamps.... 7-110</p> <h1 id="j">J</h1> <p>Jack handle.... 8-13</p> <p>Storage....8-07</p> <p>Jacking up the vehicle.... 8-13</p> <p>Jack</p> <p>Storage....8-07</p> <p>Jump starting (Emergency starting).... 8-02</p> <h1 id="k">K</h1> <p>Keyless entry system....3-04</p> <p>Keys....3-02</p> <h1 id="l">L</h1> <p>Labeling....11-02</p> <p>Lamp monitor buzzer.... 5-34</p> <p>Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) auto-cutout function....5-34</p> <p>Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas)....10-19</p> <p>Licence plate lamps Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-35</p> <p>Limited-slip differential (LSD).... 6-43</p> <p>Link System....7-84</p> <p>Low fuel warning lamp.... 5-05</p> <p>Lubricants....11-22</p> <p>LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player....7-15</p> <h1 id="m">M</h1> <p>Manual transmission.... 6-16</p> <p>Oil....11-22</p> <p>Manual window control.... 3-08</p> <p>Mirror</p> <p>Inside rear-view mirror.... 6-09</p> <p>Outside rear-view mirrors.... 6-10</p> <p>Vanity mirror.... 7-107</p> <p>Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems....2-04</p> <h1 id="0">0</h1> <p>Odometer....5-03</p> <p>Oil</p> <p>Differential oil....11-22</p> <p>Engine oil....10-04,11-22</p> <p>Manual transmission fluid....11-22</p> <p>Transfer oil....11-22</p> <p>Operation under adverse driving conditions..... 8-25</p> <p>Other specifications....11-19</p> <p>Outside rear-view mirrors.... 6-10</p> <p>Overheating.... 8-04</p> <h1 id="p">P</h1> <p>Parking....6-08</p> <p>Parking brake.... 6-07</p> <p>Parking brake lever stroke.... 10-17</p> <p>Personal lamps....7-111</p> <p>Replacement....10-36</p> <p>Position lamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-25</p> <p>Replacement....10-29</p> <p>Power steering</p> <p>Fluid....10-10,11-22</p> <p>System....6-48</p> <p>Precautions to observe when using</p> <p>vipers and washers.... 5-43</p> <p>Pregnant women restraint....4-13</p> <p>Puncture (Tyre changing)....8-18</p> <h1 id="alphabetical-index-3">Alphabetical index</h1> <h1 id="r">R</h1> <p>Radio</p> <p>LW/MW/FM electronic tuning ra-</p> <p>dio with CD player.... 7-15</p> <p>LW/MW/FM radio/CD player....7-51</p> <p>Rear combination lamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-33</p> <p>Rear differential lock....6-34</p> <p>Rear fog lamp</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Indication lamp....5-07</p> <p>Replacement....10-33</p> <p>Switch....5-38</p> <p>Rear room lamp....7-110</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-36</p> <p>Rear seat....4-07</p> <p>Rear side/quarter window....3-13</p> <p>Rear turn-signal lamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-33</p> <p>Rear window demister switch.... 5-43</p> <p>Rear-view mirror</p> <p>Inside....6-09</p> <p>Outside 6-10</p> <p>Refill capacities.... 11-22</p> <p>Removal of water from the fuel filter....8-06</p> <p>Replacement of lamp bulbs.... 10-25</p> <p>Reversing lamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-33</p> <p>Room lamp....7-110</p> <p>Running-in recommendations.... 6-04</p> <h1 id="s">S</h1> <p>Safe driving techniques.... 6-03</p> <p>Seat belt 4-10</p> <p>Adjustable seat belt anchor.... 4-12</p> <p>Child restraint....4-14</p> <p>Inspection....4-27</p> <p>Pregnant women restraint.... 4-13</p> <p>Pretensioner....4-13</p> <p>Seat belt reminder/warning lamp.... 4-11</p> <p>Seat</p> <p>Adjustment....4-03</p> <p>Armrest (Double cab) 4-08</p> <p>Front seat....4-04</p> <p>Head restraints.... 4-08</p> <p>Heated seats.... 4-07</p> <p>Rear seat....4-07</p> <p>Secret box....7-114</p> <p>Service precaution.... 10-02</p> <p>Side airbag system....4-37</p> <p>Side turn-signal lamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-25</p> <p>Replacement....10-30</p> <p>Snow tyres.... 10-15</p> <p>Spare wheel....8-17</p> <p>Spark plug.... 11-18</p> <p>Specifications.... 11-02</p> <p>Speedometer 5-03</p> <p>Starting....6-13</p> <p>Steering</p> <p>Power steering fluid....10-10,11-22</p> <p>Power steering system....6-48</p> <p>Steering wheel height adjustment.... 6-09</p> <p>Steering wheel lock....6-13</p> <p>Steering wheel remote control switch...7-44,7-63</p> <p>Stop lamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-25</p> <p>Replacement....10-33</p> <p>Storage spaces....7-112</p> <p>Sun visors.... 7-106</p> <p>Sunglasses holder.... 7-114</p> <p>Sunroof 3-14</p> <p>Safety mechanism.... 3-15</p> <p>Sunshade....3-15</p> <p>Switch.... 3-14</p> <p>Super select 4WD....6-29</p> <p>Supplemental restraint system....4-28</p> <p>How the Supplemental Restraint</p> <p>System works....4-30</p> <p>Servicing....4-41</p> <p>Warning lamp....4-40</p> <h1 id="t">T</h1> <p>Tachometer....5-03</p> <p>Tail lamps</p> <p>Bulb capacity.... 10-26</p> <p>Replacement....10-33</p> <p>Tank capacity 2-02</p> <p>Ticket holder....7-106</p> <p>Time Setting 7-78</p> <p>Tools....8-09</p> <p>Storage....8-07</p> <p>Towing 8-22</p> <p>Trailer towing....6-55</p> <p>Transfer oil.... 11-22</p> <p>Transmission</p> <p>Automatic transmission Sports</p> <p>Mode 4A/T, 5A/T....6-19</p> <p>Fluid....10-07,11-22</p> <p>Manual transmission.... 6-16</p> <p>Specifications....11-17</p> <p>Tripmeter....5-03</p> <p>Turn-signal indication lamps....5-07</p> <p>Turn-signals lever....5-36</p> <p>Tyres....10-12</p> <p>How to change a tyre.... 8-18</p> <p>Inflation pressures....10-12</p> <p>Rotation....10-14</p> <p>Size (tyre and wheel).... 11-19</p> <p>Snow tyres....10-15</p> <p>Tyre chains....10-15</p> <p>Wheel condition.... 10-13</p> <h1 id="u">U</h1> <p>USB input terminal....7-103</p> <p>How to connect an iPod.... 7-104</p> <p>USB input terminal</p> <p>How to connect a USB memory device.....7-103</p> <p>Used engine oils safety instructions</p> <p>and disposal information....2-05</p> <p>Utility box.... 7-114</p> <h1 id="v">V</h1> <p>Vanity mirror....7-107</p> <p>Vehicle care precautions.... 9-02</p> <p>Vehicle dimensions.... 11-04</p> <p>Vehicle identification number....11-02</p> <p>Vehicle identification number plate.... 11-03</p> <p>Vehicle information code plate.... 11-02</p> <p>Vehicle labeling....11-02</p> <p>Vehicle performance.... 11-10</p> <p>Vehicle weight....11-11</p> <p>Ventilators....7-02</p> <h1 id="w">W</h1> <p>Warning lamps.... 5-08</p> <p>Washer</p> <p>Fluid....10-08,11-22</p> <p>Switch 5-38.5-42</p> <p>Washing....9-03</p> <p>Water temperature gauge.... 5-05</p> <p>Waxing....9-04</p> <p>Weatherstripping.... 10-20</p> <p>Weight....11-11</p> <p>Wheel condition.... 10-13</p> <p>Wheel</p> <p>Specification.... 11-19</p> <p>Wiper</p> <p>Switch....5-38</p> <p>Wiper blade rubber replacement....10-18</p> <p>Wiper blades.... 10-17</p> <p>EC-Declaration of Conformity </p> <table><tr><td>Manufacturer / responsible person</td><td colspan="3">Johnson Controls Interior Experience</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">Address:</td><td colspan="3">915 E. 32nd Street</td></tr><tr><td colspan="3">Holland Michigan USA 49423</td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">Declares that the product:</td></tr><tr><td>type:</td><td colspan="3">BlueTooth Hands Free for Automotive</td></tr><tr><td>model:</td><td colspan="3">1872669. 1872721</td></tr><tr><td>Intended use/:</td><td colspan="3">Hands Free cellphone interface to vehicle audio system</td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">complies with the essential requirements of Article 3 of the R&TTE 1999/5/EC Directive, if used asintended and that the following standards has been applied:</td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">1 Safety (Article 3.1.a of the R&TTE Directive)</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="3">applied standard(s)</td><td>EN 60 950-1</td><td>issue</td><td>2001</td></tr><tr><td>+A 11</td><td>issue</td><td>2004</td></tr><tr><td>EN 50371</td><td>issue</td><td>2008</td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">2 Electromagnetic compatibility (Article 3.1.b of the R&TTE Directive)</td></tr><tr><td rowspan="2">applied standard(s)</td><td>ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1</td><td>issue</td><td>2005-09</td></tr><tr><td>ETSI EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1</td><td>issue</td><td>2002-08</td></tr><tr><td colspan="4">3 Efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum (Article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive)</td></tr><tr><td>applied standard(s)</td><td>ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1</td><td>issue</td><td>2006-10</td></tr></table> <p><img alt="" src="images/4948d6bad2e78fabd229b1dc7bbac8cefa73c9a5e2b8253e2fb64d6473e7f22c.jpg" /></p> <table><tr><td>Česky [Czech]:</td><td>Toto zařízení je v souladu se základními požadavky a ostatními odpovídajícimi ustanoveními Směrnice 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Dansk [Danish]:</td><td>Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EF.</td></tr><tr><td>Deutsch [German]:</td><td>Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU.</td></tr><tr><td>Eesti [Estonian]:</td><td>See seade vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ olulistele nõuetele ja teistele asjakohastele sätetele.</td></tr><tr><td>English:</td><td>This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Español [Spanish]:</td><td>Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.</td></tr><tr><td>Ελληνική [Greek]:</td><td>Autóç o εξπλισμός είναι σε συμμόρφωση με τις ουσιώδεις απαιτήσεις και άλλες σχετικές διατάξεις της Οδηγίας 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Français [French]:</td><td>Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>İslenska [Icelandic]:</td><td>Petta tæki er samkvæmt grunnkröfum og õðrum viðeigandi ákvæðum Tilskipunar 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Italiano [Italian]:</td><td>Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE.</td></tr><tr><td>Latviski [Latvian]:</td><td>Šī iekärta atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK bütiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem.</td></tr><tr><td>Lietuvių [Lithuanian]:</td><td>Šis įrenginys tenkina 1999/5/EB Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas šios direktyvos nuostatas.</td></tr><tr><td>Nederlands [Dutch]:</td><td>Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Malti [Maltese]:</td><td>Dan l-apparat huwa konformi mal-ħtiġiet essenzjali u l-provedimenti l-ohra rilevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Magyar [Hungarian]:</td><td>Ez a készülék teljesiti az alapvető követelményeket és más 1999/5/EK irányelvben meghatározott vonatkozó rendelkezéseket.</td></tr><tr><td>Norsk [Norwegian]:</td><td>Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF.</td></tr><tr><td>Polski [Polish]:</td><td>Urządzenie jest zgodne z ogólnymi wymaganiami oraz szeczególnymi warunkami określonymi Dyrektywą UE: 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Português [Portuguese]:</td><td>Este equipamento está em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras provisões relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Slovensko [Slovenian]:</td><td>Ta naprava je skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi pogoji Direktive 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Slovensky [Slovak]:</td><td>Toto zariadenie je v zhode so základnými požiadavkami a inými prislušnými nariadeniami direktív: 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>Suomi [Finnish]:</td><td>Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 1999/5/EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen ruiden laitetta koskevien mäläräysten mukainen.</td></tr><tr><td>Svenska [Swedish]:</td><td>Denna utrustning är i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestämmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC.</td></tr></table> <h1 id="omron">OMRON</h1> <p>OMRON Automotive Electronics Co. Ltd.</p> <p>6368 NENO-ZAKA, OKUSA, KOMAKI-CITY,</p> <p>AICHI 483-0802 JAPAN</p> <p>PHONE:+81-568-78-6159 FAX :+81-568-78-7659</p> <h1 id="declaration-of-conformity">DECLARATION of CONFORMITY</h1> <p>We, OMRON Automotive Electronics Co. Ltd. hereby declare, at our sole responsibility, that the following product conforms to the Essential Requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC in accordance with the tests conducted to the appropriate requirements of the relevant standards, as listed therewith.</p> <p>Receiver and immobilizer / Transmitter / FOB / KOS</p> <p>Receiver and immobilizer : G8C-937M, G8C-930M, G8C-931M, G8C-932M</p> <p>KOS : GGM-M002</p> <p>Transmitter</p> <p>: FOB</p> <table><tr><td>Model</td><td colspan="2">Standard used for comply</td></tr><tr><td>G8C-937M</td><td>R&TTE Directive(Article 3.1(a) Safety)R&TTE Directive(Article 3.1(b) EMC)R&TTE Directive(Article 3.2 Spectrum)</td><td>EN 60065: 2002 + Amd.1: 2006 + Amd.11: 2008 +Amd.2:2010 + Amd.12:2011EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2:2011-09EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1:2002-08EN 300 220-1 V2.3.1:2010-02EN 300 220-2 V2.3.1:2010-02EN 300 330-1 V1.7.1:2010-02EN 300 330-2 V1.5.1:2010-02</td></tr><tr><td>G8C-930MG8C-931MG8C-932M GGM-M002</td><td>R&TTE Directive(Article 3.1(a) Safety)R&TTE Directive(Article 3.1(b) EMC)R&TTE Directive(Article 3.2 Spectrum)</td><td>EN 60065: 2002 + Amd.1: 2006 + Amd.11: 2008 +Amd.2:2010 + Amd.12:2011 EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2:2011-09EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1:2002-08EN 300 220-1 V2.4.1:2012-05EN 300 220-2 V2.4.1:2012-05EN 300 330-1 V1.7.1:2010-02 *EN 300 330-2 V1.5.1:2010-02 * except G8C-931M</td></tr><tr><td>G8D-571MA8D-635M-A</td><td>R&TTE Directive(Article 3.1(a) Safety)R&TTE Directive(Article 3.1(b) EMC)R&TTE Directive(Article 3.2 Spectrum)</td><td>EN 60065: 2002 + Amd.1: 2006 + Amd.11: 2008 +Amd.2:2010 + Amd.12:2011En 301 489-1 V1.9.2:2011-09EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1:2002-08EN 300 220-1 V2.4.1:2012-05EN 300 220-2 V2.4.1:2012-05</td></tr><tr><td>G8D-644M-KEY-E</td><td>R&TTE Directive(Article 3.1(a) Safety)R&TTE Directive(Article 3.1(b) EMC)R&TTE Directive(Article 3.2 Spectrum)</td><td>EN60065:2002+Amd.1:2006+Amd.11:2008+Amd.2:2010+Amd.12:2011EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2:2011-09EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1:2002-08EN 300 330-1 V1.7.1:2010-02EN 300 330-2 V1.5.1:2010-02EN 300 220-1 V2.4.1:2012-05EN 300 220-2 V2.4.1:2012-05</td></tr></table> <p>Receiver Category of this radio equipment is Category 3, which is referred to EN 300 220-1.</p> <p><img alt="" src="images/a1bf5c7f292a3a37ae559995caef4ee67cec66b154456e14355eb6d5d8059a1f.jpg" /></p> <p>Name: Shiro Taksorashi</p> <p>Name : Shinya Ta Title and position : Manager</p> <p>Development & Design Division</p> <p>Date : July 10, 2013</p> <h1 id="c-1731">C€ 1731</h1> <h1 id="ce-0891">CE 0891</h1> <table><tr><td>[Czech]</td><td>OMRON Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že tento [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*,G8C-931M*,G8C-932M*] je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.</td></tr><tr><td>[Danish]</td><td>Undertegnede OMRON Corporation erklærer herved, at folgende udstyr [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*,G8C-930M*,G8C-931M*,G8C-932M*] overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.</td></tr><tr><td>[German]</td><td>Hiermit erklärt OMRON Corporation, dass sich das Gerät [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.</td></tr><tr><td>[Estonian]</td><td>Käesolevaga kinnitab OMRON Corporation seadme [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,S8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.</td></tr><tr><td>[English]</td><td>Hereby, OMRON Corporation, declares that this [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, S8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>[Spanish]</td><td>Por medio de la presente OMRON Corporation declara que el [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, 8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.</td></tr><tr><td>[Greek]</td><td>ME THN ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ OMRON Corporation ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/EK.</td></tr><tr><td>[French]</td><td>Par la présente OMRON Corporation déclare que l'appareil [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,6D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] est conforme aux exigences essentie'les et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.</td></tr><tr><td>[Italian]</td><td>Con la presente OMRON Corporation dichiara che questo [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, \( {G8D} - {621}\mathrm{M} - \mathrm{A} * ,{G8C} - {519}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {518}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {518}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {518}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {518}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {518}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {518}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {930}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {931}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {932}\mathrm{M} * ] è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.</td></tr><tr><td>[Latvian]</td><td>Ar so OMRON Corporation deklarē, ka [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,\( {G8D} - {621}\mathrm{M} - \mathrm{A} * ,{G8C} - {519}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {518}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {527}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {546}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {930}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {931}\mathrm{M} * ,{G8C} - {932}\mathrm{M} * ] atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saisītajiem noteikumiem.</td></tr><tr><td>[Lithuanian]</td><td>Šiuo OMRON Corporation deklaruojka, kad šis [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,08D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.</td></tr><tr><td>[Dutch]</td><td>Hierbij verklaart OMRON Corporation dat het toestel [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,18D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.</td></tr></table> <table><tr><td>[Maltese]</td><td>Hawnhekk, OMRON Corporation, jiddikjara li dan [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M* G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*], jikkonforma mal-htigijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>[Hungarian]</td><td>Alulirott, OMRON Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M* G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] megfelel a vonatkozó alapvető követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelyt egyéb előírásainak.</td></tr><tr><td>[Polish]</td><td>[OMRON Corporation ] niniejszym oświadcza, że [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, 68D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M* G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] spełnia zasadnicze wymogi oraz inne istotne postanowienia dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>[Portuguese]</td><td>OMRON Corporation declara que este [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,68D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M* G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.</td></tr><tr><td>[Slovenian]</td><td>OMRON Corporation izjavlja, da je ta [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,88D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M* G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.</td></tr><tr><td>[Slovak]</td><td>OMRON Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, że [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541 M*,G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] splňa základné požiadavky a všetky prislušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.</td></tr><tr><td>[Finnish]</td><td>OMRON Corporation vakuuttaa täten että [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,,G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*, G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.</td></tr><tr><td>[Swedish]</td><td>Härmed intygar OMRON Corporation att denna [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, ,G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.</td></tr><tr><td>[Icelandic]</td><td>Hér með lýsir OMRON Corporation yfir því að [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,08D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] er í samraemi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>[Norwegian]</td><td>OMRON Corporation erklærer herved at utstyret [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*,;G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] er í samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og ovrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.</td></tr><tr><td>[Turkish]</td><td>Ísbu belge ile OMRON Corporation, bu [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, ;G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*,G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] in 1995/EC Yönetmeligi ésas gereksinimlerine ve diğer şartlarına uygun olduğunu beyan eder.</td></tr><tr><td>[Romania]</td><td>„Noi OMRON Corporation declarám cā aparatul [G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, :G8D-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*, G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] este in conformitate cu cerințele esențiale și cu alte prevederi relevante ale Hotărării Guvernului nr.88/2003 și Directivei 1999/5/EC.</td></tr><tr><td>[Bulgarian]</td><td>С настоящия документOMRON Corporation декларира, че[G8D-407M-A*,G8D-410M-B*, G8D-520M-A*,G8C-500M*,G8D-581M-B*,G8D-571M-A*,G8D-518M-A*,G8C-507M*,G8C-223M-3C,G8C-541M*, G8B-621M-A*,G8C-519M*,G8C-518M*, G8C-527M*,G8C-546M*, G8C-930M*, G8C-931M*, G8C-932M*] εν съгласие с основните изисквания и съответните постановления на Директива 1999/5/EC.</td></tr></table>
Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : MITSUBISHI

Model : L200 (2015)

Category : Automotive